Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
SPECS
COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 Part II of Specifications COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS BRW PROJECT NO. 210119.00 APRIL 11, 20-1 -I COLLEGE STATION 1 101 TEXAS AVENUE COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 77842 BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS, INC. 2700 FARI_ RUDDER FWAY SOUTH SUITE 4000 COLLEGE STATION, TEXAS 77845 (979) 694-1791; FAX (979) 694-8293 ROBERTSON CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2700 EARL RUDDER FWAY SOUTI I SUTIE 2900 COLLEGE 5l A I ION, I EXAS 77845 JORDAN & SKALA ENGINEERS, INC. 14240 MIDWAY ROAD, SUITE 350 DALLAS, TEXAS 75244 O'MALLEY ENGINEERS, L.L.P. 203 SOUTH JACKSON STREET BRENHAM, TEXAS 77833 OWNER ARCHITE T E W4 nsrn/n STRUCTURAL EN,GI EER MECHAN ICAL/ELECTRICAL/ PLUMBING ENOIR P<i OF �ti4 6 /CENeE� CIVIL ENGIlgrR M MMW T. ADDOM / 9` "a, Z22 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, AND WINDOW FRAMES PA HT 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Standard hollow metal window frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry." 2. Division 04 Section "Stone Masonry." 3. Division 06 Section "Wood Framirig." 4. Division 08 Section 'Brick Masonry." 5. Division 08 Section "Glazing." 6. Division 08 Section "Hardware." 7. Division 09 Sections "Painting." 8. Division 09 Section "Nun -Structural Metal Framing." 9. Division 09 Section "Gypsuni Board." 10. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSIISDI A250.8. C. Custom Hollow Metal Wuik: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Pruduct Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, ma- terial descriptions, core descriptions, fire -resistance rating, temperature -rise ratings, COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 081113 - 1 APRIL 11 2011.HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES and finishes shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to fabrication of material. C. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches. 2. For the following items, prepared on Samples about 12 by 12 inches to dem- onstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construc- tion: a. Doors: Show vertical -edge, top, and bottom construction; core construc- tion; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include sepa- rate section showing glazing if applicable. b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silenc- ers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable. E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and open- ings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. F. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. H. Shop drawings shall indicate all hardware mounting heights, reinforcement, open- ing sizes, etc. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081113 - 2 APRIL 112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified toting agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at according to NFPA 252. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection dur- ing transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jamhs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4- inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air cir- culation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordination 1. The Contractor shall provide door and frame manufacturer with an approved hardware schedule, templates and hand for all doors. Contractor shall advise door and frame manufacturer of any changes after information has been for- warded 2. Contractor will be completely responsible for coordination of information be- tween hardware, door and frame manufacturers. Any materials not properly coordinated shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 081113 - 3 APRIL 112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Firedoor Corporation. 3. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 4. Mesker Door Inc. 5. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 (ZF120), G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coat- ing. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coat- ing designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized ac- cording to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for appli- cation indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured ac- cording to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 2.03 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabri- cated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane core. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081113 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES 1) Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire -protection ratings in- dicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Square edge. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSUSDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSIISDI A250.4 for physical perfor- mance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B Heavy Duty Model 2 (Seamless). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet unless metallic - coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated be- low by referencing ANSIISDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSUSDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B Heavy Duty, Model 2 (Seamless). D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSUSDI A250.6 with reinforc- ing plates from same material as door face sheets. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. F. Lite Door: 16 Gauge, 1-3/4" x 5" tubular top and side stiles and 10" bottom rail with mitered, face -welded corners. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped to receive mortise hardware. Door shall be similar to Amweld 300 series, Ceco "Imperial", or an approved equal. Provide insulated metal panel or 1/4" tem- pered glass as shown on drawings. G. Provide Louver and fire rating as required. 2.04 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSIISDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from 16 gauge quality metallic -coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded. 3. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for I.,evel 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Level 4 Steel Dours: 0.067-inch thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from 16 gauge cold -rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate fraines with mitered corners. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081113 - 5 APRIL 112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSUSDI A250.6 with rein- forcement plates from same material as frames.. E. Provide UL rating as required. 2.05 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fas- teners. C. Provide UL anchors as required. 2.06 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inch- es above finish floor with a 90-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded -steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. 1. Provide terminated stops where indicated. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081113 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES 2.07 LOUVERS A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch thick, cold -rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch thick steel frame. 1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid me- chanical anchors. B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch wide steel. C. ' ' Grout Guards: Formed from same matenal as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accu- rately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To en- sure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanent- ly factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 and ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water pe- netration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire -performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickrncss metal as fames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. No putty or filler permitted at joints. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or uval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. G 081113 - 7 APRIL 112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide minimum of six wall anchors and two adjustable base anchors, manufacturers' standard design. Provide all anchors as required. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door si- lencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door si- lencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from ei- ther cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSUSDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface - mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSUSDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indi- cated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of in- terior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glaz- ing and type of installation indicated. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pre -treating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSUSDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field - applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081113 - 8 APRIL 11 2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES B. Galvanized Finish: Hot -Dipped galvanized at exterior doors and frames. 2.11 COLOR AND GLOSS A. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfor- mance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions de- trimental to performance of the Work. D. Pruceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line ,parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface - mounted door hardware. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 081113 - 9 APRIL 11 2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove tem- porary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1) At fire -protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint con- tinuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are con- structed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreeze agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post installed expansion anchors. 1) Floor anchors may be set with powder -actuated fasteners instead of post installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls and Exterior Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anc- hored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Pro- vide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 1) Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clear- ances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: 1) Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081113 - 10 APRIL 11 2011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Dour and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke -Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced un- iformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately be- fore final inspection. Leavc work in complete and proper operating condition. Re- move and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately af- ter installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive pri- mer D. MctalliC-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 COLLEGE STA11VN FIRESTATION NO.6 08111.3 - 11 APRIL 112011 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND WINDOW FRAMES SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with and plastic -laminate faces. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Tnterinr Architectural Woodwork" 2. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing." 4. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 5. Division 08 Section "Hardware." 6. Division 09 Section "Non -Structural Metal Framing." 7. Division 09 Section "Painting." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory -finishing specifica- tions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware, hlnr-king; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2: Indicate. dinic11si��ns and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire -protection. ratings for fire -rated doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1.. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified COLLEGE STATION FIRE, STATION NO.6 081416 - 1 APRIL 112011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. E. Submit 2 samples 12" x 12" in size of door corner typical of veneer and reinforce- ment construction. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body, with a minimum of 5 years expe- rience in building and installing custom wood doors. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and la- beled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on NFPA 252. D. Standards: The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply by reference are hereby made a part of this specification. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written in- structions. B. Deliver doors to building after wet trades have been completed and building is with- in normal occupancy humidity conditions. C. Doors shall be delivered in manufacturer's name and identifying symbol on cover- ing. D. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. E. Doors shall be stored flat with protective coverings provided to protect surfaces. F. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Draw- ings. G. Doors shall not be dragged over one another. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081416 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.06 PROTECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are en- closed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC sys- tem is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are en- closed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC sys- tem is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Coordination: 1. The Contractor shall provide door manufacturer with approved hardware schedules, templates and hand for all doors. Contractor shall advise door manufacturer of any changes after information has been forwarded. Contrac- tor will be completely responsible for coordination between hardware, door and frame manufacturers. Any materials not properly coordinated shall be re- placed by the Contractor at his own expense. 2. Door manufacturer shall be responsible for properly coordinating information received by him so that doors are properly finished, machined and ready to hang. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Submit written agreement on manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or work- manship within specified. warranty period. 1. failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch sec- tion. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall alsu include reinstallation and refinishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURJKRS A. Manufacturras. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Tnr_ . 2. Haley Brothers, Inc. 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 081416 - 3 APRIL 11 2011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2.02 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low -Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. Provide Solid Wood Block Core, 1-3/4" thick solid core wood doors with hardwood edges conforming to AWI Section 1300-G-3 for Type SLC-5 standards, bonded with exterior water-resistant, Type H resin glue. C. Particleboard -Core Doors: Not Allowed. D. Structural -Composite -Lumber -Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf . E. Fire -Protection -Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire -protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals con- cealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.03 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid -Core Doors 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Plastic -Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS or Grade HSH. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated. 4. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces. 5. Core: Structural composite lumber either glued wood stave or structural com- posite lumber. 2.04 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Metal Louvers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following; a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company. C. Hiawatha Incorporated. d. L & L Louvers, Inc. e. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a Mestek company. f. McGill Architectural Products. 2. Blade Type: Vision -proof, inverted V. 3. Metal and Finish: Hot -dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish as indicated on drawings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081416 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2.05 MATERIALS A. Solid Core Wood Doors: 1. Provide Solid Wood Block Core, 1-3/4" thick solid core wood doors with hardwood edges conforming to AWI Section 1300-G-3 for Type SLC-5 stan- dards, bonded with exterior water-resistant, Type II resin glue, manufactured by Weyerhaeuser, Graham, Haley, Curtis Corp., Algoma, Eggers Hardwood Products Corp., or products having equivalent characteristics may be consi- dered provided deviations are minor from original specifications. 2. Door faces and strike edge shall receive .050" thick plastic laminate by Wil- sonart. Architect shall select colors for use on doors. Plastic laminate applied using manufacturer's recommended adhesives, applied under bonding pres- sures and at atmospheric conditions recommended by manufacturer. Doors surfaced from one continuous sheet of laminated plastic without intermediate joints. 3. Where louvers are indicated, provide door manufacturer's standard flush metal louvers. 4. View Lite:Where indicated provide manufacturer's standard flush frame. Glazing as indicated on the drawings. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance re- quirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated, doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A 115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed -steel edges for hard- ware for pairs of fire -rated doors. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indi- cated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. PART .4 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. COLLFGE STATION HIRE STATION NO. 6 081416 - 5 APRIL 112011 MUSH WOOD DUORS 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written in- structions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufactur- er or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or cov- ering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise in- dicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with re- quirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with require- ments and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 081416 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL, 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Floor access doors and frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete". 2. Division 04 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry". 3. Division 08 Section "Hardware". 4. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings". 5. Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping". 6. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated." B. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construc- tion details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish. E. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame sche- dule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source froin a single manufacturer. COLLEGE STATTON FIRE STATION NO.6 083113- 1 APRIL 112011 ACCESS DOOR AND FRAMES B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard -size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not li- mited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. FT -8040 (aluminum only). C. Floor Doors, General: Equip each door with adjustable counterbalancing springs, heavy-duty hold -open arm that automatically locks door open at 90 degrees, release handle with red vinyl grip that allows for one -handed closure, and recessed lift han- dle. D. Aluminum Floor Door: Single -leaf opening. Extruded -aluminum angle frame with 1/4-inch- thick, aluminum tread plate door; nonwatertight; loading capacity to sup- port 150-lbf/sq. ft. pedestrian live load. E. Hardware: Provide the following: 1. Hinges: Heavy-duty, stainless -steel butt hinges with stainless -steel pins. 2. Latch: Stainless -steel slam latch. 3. Hardware Material: Stainless steel, including latch and lifting mechanism as- semblies, hold -open arms, and all brackets, hinges, pins, and fasteners. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, pro- vide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 083113- 2 APRIL 112011 ACCESS DOOR AND FRAMES C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. F. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that, will, come in contact with concrctc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish materi- al. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise dam- aged. END OF SECTION 083113 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 083113- 3 APRIL 11 2011 ACCESS DOOR AND FRAMES SECTION 083613 — UPWARD -ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 ,Specification. Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually and electrically operated sectional doors. B. Related Sections: Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. R. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analy- sis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design cri- teria indicated. C. Structural Performance: Exterior secuunal duuis sliall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph. b. ANSI/DASMA 102 standards as required by code. 2. Deflection Liinit:s: Design seclional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Def- lection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. D. Air Infiltratiun: Maximurn rate nut more than indicated when, tested acwrdi,lg to ASTM E 283. E. Operatiun Cycles: Pruvide sectional dour components and upeiaturs capable of operat- ing for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. G 083613.1 APRIL 112011 UPWARD -ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated." B. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the fol- lowing: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. C. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and ap- proved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufactur- er. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica- tion. D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 083613 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 UPWARD -ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS d. Dclamination of exterior or interior facing materials. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01, ACCEPTABLE MANUFAc,ruRKR A. Overhead Door Corporation; Dallas, Texas, 800-887-3667. B. Substitution requests shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 Section "Snhsiitution Procedlnres„ 2.01 ALUMINUM SECTIONAL DOORS A. Trade Reference: 521 Series Aluminum Doors by Overhead Door Corporation. 1. Finish: Powder Coat: Quaker Bronze. B. Sectional Door Assembly: Stile and rail assembly secured with 1/4" diameter through reds. Units shall havc the following characterislirs. 1. Panel Thickness: 1-3/4". 2. Aluminum Panels: 0.050" thick, alloy 6063-T6. Fabricate of aluminum sleet, complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper standard with manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, set in continuous vinyl channel retained with rigid, siial,-iri, exert -used -vinyl nnuldings or with n.ibber or .neoprene. glazing gasket with aluminum stop. 3. Counterbalance Mechanism: a. Torsion Spring: CounteibabillCe r:ueclnanisln n;uusisling OF adjustable-tensiim torsion springs fabricated from steel -spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated Rated for 100,000 cycles of use. b. Weight Counterbalance: Counterbalance -,mechanism consisting of filled pipe weights that move vertically in a galvanized -steel weight pipe. Connect pipe weights with liable to weight -cable diums.innuunnted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. ' l,. Cable Drums and Shaft fur Duuns: Cast -aluminum or gray-irunn casting ca- ble drurrrs nnruurnted on toisiunn shaft and grooved to receive door -lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance nieclnanisin with iinainufac- turei's Stan laid bull -bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional nrridpuint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two addi- tional brackets at one-third points to support shafts inure than 16 feet lung unless closer spacing is rec.uminnernded by door manufactumi. d. Cables: Galvanized -steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. V. Cable Safety Device. Includr. a spring -loaded steel or sluing -.loaded bronze. earn nioun5ted to bottuin door roller assembly oiri each side and designed Io automatically stop door if either lifting cable Breaks. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 083613 - 3 APRIL 11 2011 TIPWARD-ACTING S'ECTIONAt. nOORS f. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. g. Provide a pusher spring at each horizontal track. 4. Glazed Full -Vision Sections: Manufacturer's standard, tubular, aluminum -framed section fully glazed with 1/4" tinted, tempered glass, equal to Glass Type 4 with Low-E coating, set in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel and with remov- able extruded -vinyl or aluminum stops. C. Finish and Color: Anodized Aluminum. D. Hardware: 1. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion -resistant hardware, with hot -dip galva- nized, stainless -steel, or other corrosion -resistant fasteners, to suit door type. 2. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized -steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sec- tions through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self -tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double -end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. 3. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball -bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch diameter roller tires for 3-inch wide track and 2-inch diameter roller tires for 2-inch wide track. 4. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency -operated doors, provide galva- nized -steel lifting handles on each side of door. E. Weatherstripping 1. Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible PVC on bottom section, jamb seals and header seal. F. Tracks, Supports and Accessories: 1. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, 3" galvanized -steel track system of configura- tion indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 (Z180) zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball -bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Where manufacturer requires slot vertical sections for door -drop arresting safety device, slot vertical sections of track shall be spaced 2 inches apart. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to en- sure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. a. Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available. b. Attach to opening per manufacturer's standard recommendations 2. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized -steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 083613 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 UPWARD -ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS a. Vertical Track Assembly: Track with wall jamb brackets attached to track and attached to wall. b. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle at- tached to track and suppurted at points from utu ve in track to end of track by .laterally braced attachments to overhead structural memhers. Reinforce adequately to prevent deflection. G. Manual Operation: Chain -Hoist Operator consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain - pocket wheel and guard. and gear -reduction unit with a maximum 35-1.bf force for donr operation. Provide alloy -steel hand chain with chain holder secured to upeiatur guide. H. Electric Mutur Operation. 1. General: Provide UL listed electric operator, size and type as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear -reduction unit, solenoid-uperated brake, clutch, reroute-cuntrol sta- tions, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. a. Comply with NFPA 70. b. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24- V ac or dc. 2. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. 3. Door -Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. a. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall on right or left side of door and connected to torsion shaft with an ad- justable coupling or drive chain. 4. Electric Mutuv,. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified herein unless other- wise indicated. a. Electrical Characteristics: 1) Phase: Single phase. 2) Volts: 115 V. 3) Hertz:60. b. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. C. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate dour in either diiectiuu fruiu ally position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceed- ing nameplate ratings or service factor. d. Couidinatc wiring requirements and electrical clim-acteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. e. Use adjustable motor -mounting bases for belt -driven operators. COLLEGE STATION FTRE STATION NO. 61 083613 5 APRIL 112011 UPWARD -ACTING SEC11ONAL UUU1tS 5. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. 6. Entrapment Protection: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of de- vice immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. a. Electric sensing edge. b. Photoelectric sensors. Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. 7. Operator Controls: Momentary -contact, three -button control station with push- button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." a. Interior units, full -guarded, surface -mounted, heavy-duty type, with gener- al-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. b. Exterior units, full -guarded, standard -duty, surface -mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated. C. Special Operation: Provide 2 wireless remote controls with control devices per door, each capable of operating a minimum of 2 separate doors. Provide all equipment connections and wiring to fully install wireless remote sys- tems. 8. Special Operation: Strobe light. a. Manufacturer's standard system programmed for continuous operation while door is in motion in the up or down direction. b. Install wall -mounted strobe light unit to the left of each door and wire for individual operation with respective door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Take field dimensions and examine substrates, supports, areas and conditions, with In- staller present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance. B. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. Sectional door shall be mounted to inside face of wall with tracks braced to ceiling in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a track COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 083613 - 6 APRIL 112011 UPWARD -ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS installation. Door, when installed, shall fit flush, tight and level to floor construction with side jambs plupelly plumbed and supported to meet design criteria. C. Tracks: 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and training, spaced not more than 24 inches apart. 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door -operating equipment. 3. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. D. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in culripliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.03 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written in- Structlons. 2. `T'est and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning con- trols and equipment. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer's materials or products being cleaned. F. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed sur- faces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of ma- terial or product being cleaned. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance per- sonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. G 081613 - 7 APRIL 112011 UPWARD -ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS END OF SECTION 083613 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 083613 - 8 APRIL 11 2011 UPWARD -ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior Interior Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for punched openings. 3. Extcrior Interiur Exterior and interior manual -swing entrance doors and door- frame units. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 3. Division 07 Section "Plastic Film Air Barrier." 4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 6. Division 08 Section "Glazing." 7. Division 08 Section "Hardware." 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ADVABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Bar- riers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.04 S UBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: Fui each type of product indicated. Include construction details, ma- terial descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum -framed systems. C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum -framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sec- tions, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084113 - 1 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT 2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hard- ware types, functions, quantities, and locations. D. Submit three samples of each required aluminum finish on 12" long extrusions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes re- quirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of com- ponents and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verifi- cation by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the Texas Accessibili- ty Standards. D. Source Limitations for Aluminum -Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum - framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measure- ments on Shop Drawings. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty pe- riod. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond nor- mal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. 2. All Hardware shall be installed at manufacturer and be covered by warranty. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084113 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Kawneer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Exth'm1m] Sirur+ural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4 Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308A3 NORM. 5. Wclding hods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.1.0/A5.10M. 2.03 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Mcmbcrs: Manufacturer's standard extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Exterior/Interior: TriFab 400 2. Exterior Curtain Wall: 1600 Wall System I. B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, non- staining, non -bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from stainless steel. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, non -staining, non blccding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.04 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084113 - 3 APRIL 112011 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. 2.05 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate con- cealed tie rods. a. Manufacturer: Kawneer "190" Door. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-3/4" nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: 10" bottom rail. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Hardware". 2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum -framed systems, as speci- fied in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied, asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC- Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thick- ness per coat. C. Perimeter Sealant: 2 part polyurethane sealant as made by Pecora, Inc., Sonneborn, or Tremco Mfg. Co. Color to match aluminum framing. D. Weather-stripping: Manufacturer's standard replacement stripping of molded Neo- prene gaskets complying with ASTM D-200. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Framing members and aluminum custom fabrications shall be completely fabricated at the factory for assembly and installation at the job site with provision for thermal movement for an ambient temperature range of 105°F and in accordance with man- ufacturer's recommended procedures. B. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. C. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed sur- faces by descaling or grinding. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084113 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT D. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door op- eration and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single -door frames and two silencers on hcud of frames for pairs of doors. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. Miscellaneous Steel Bracing (Concealed): 1 shop coat of red oxide primer. 1. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project ac- cording to Shop Drawings. 2.08 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodized Finish. B. Clear Protective Coating: Complying with AAMA 602.2 for protecting finish dur- ing Construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with require- ments forinstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 084113 - 5 APRIL 112011 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic ac- tion by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Anchors and Bracing: Properly locate and fasten anchoring devices and structural framing into structure. D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. Connect- ing joints shall be even, hairline joints. Securely fasten anchoring devices and structural steel bracing. Exposed fasteners are prohibited. E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Divi- sion 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weather tight installation. F. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. G. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weather tight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field -Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface -mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written in- structions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weather tight installation. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum -framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084113 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Aligninellt: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 . . inch. B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to pro- vide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect aluminum framing and/or doors during construction by masking members with approved cardboard and paper as recommended by manufacturer. Take par- ticular care in protecting openings and doors from damage during construction. 3.06 CLEANING A. Upon completion, remove trimmings and other debris. Replace broken, scratched, chipped or other damaged glazing. Remove excessive sealant, mastic and other marks from adjacent surfaces, and wash with clean water. Cleaning of glazing must be done in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 084113 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 084113 - 7 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RET.,ATih I) OCUMENI'S A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Curtain Wall System Performance Requirements: 1. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 1/s • m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf (300 Pa). 2. Water Resistance, (static): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. 'There shall be no leakage at a static air pressure differen- tial of 12 pst (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 3. Water Resistance, (dynamic): The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1. 'There shall be no leakage at an air pressure differential of 12 psf (575 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 40 psf (1915 Pa) shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member at design load. At structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall not be more than: 0.43 (low- e). 6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than 71frame and 71giass (low-e). 1.03 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Kawneer 1600 Wall System I / System H. B. Related Sections: " 1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts." 2. Division 08 Section "Hardware." 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing." COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 084413 - 1 APRIL 112011 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit specified submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and Submittals Sections. Product data, shop drawings, samples, and similar submittals are defined in "Conditions of the Con- tract." B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Maintenance Data: To include maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work simi- lar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing structural calcu- lations, applicable independent product test reports, installation instructions, a re- view of the application method, customer approval and periodic field service re- presentation during construction. B. Pre -Installation Meetings: Conduct pre -installation meeting to verify project require- ments, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufactur- er's warranty requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time require- ments to avoid construction delays. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect curtain wall material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after curtain wall installation. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084413 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 1.07 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provi- sions. B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's warranty for curtain wall system as follows: C. Warranty Period: One (1) year from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by Old Castle Glass. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS (ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc. Technology park, Atlanta 555 Guthridge Court Norcross, GA. 30092 B. Proprietary Product(s)/System(s): 1. Kawneer 1600 Wall System I / System H. a. Finish/C.'nlnr: Clear Anodized Aluminum. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum (Curtain Wall and Componcnts): 1. Material Standard: Extruded Aluminum, ASTM B 221, 6063-T6 alloy and temper. 2. Member Wall Thickness: Each framing member shall have a wall thickness sufficient to meet the specified structural requirements. 3. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross - sectional dimensions of curtain wall members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Where exposcd, shall be 5ta.iol.ess Sicel, B. Gaskets: Glazing gaskcts shall comply with ASTM C 864 and be extruded of a sili- cone compatible EPDM rubber that provides for silicone adhesion. C. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation be- tween steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 084413 - 3 APRIL 112011 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS D. Related Materials Thermal Barrier: Thermal separator shall be extruded of a sili- cone compatible elastomer that provides for silicone adhesion. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate components per manufacturer's installation instructions and with mini- mum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling in- stallation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. 2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline and wea- therproof. 3. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. 2.05 FINISHING: A. Kawneer, Clear Anodized: a. Conforming to AA-M 12C22A31 and AAMA 607.1. b. Architectural Class 1, Clear Anodic Coating, 0.7 mil minimum thick- ness. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Source Quality: Provide aluminum curtain walls specified herein from a single source. 1. Building Enclosure System: When aluminum curtain wall are part of a build- ing enclosure system, including entrances, entrance hardware, windows, store- front framing and related products, provide building enclosure system prod- ucts from a single source manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been pre- viously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in ac- cordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify openings are sized to receive cur- tain wall system and sill plate is level in accordance with manufacturer's acceptable tolerances. 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measure- ments before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 3.02 INSTALLATION COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084413 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS A. General: Install curtain wall systems plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames with manufacturer's prescribed tolerances and installation instruc- tions. Provide support and anchor in place. 1. Dissimilar Materials: Provide separation of aluminum materials from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points. 2. Glazing: Glass shall be outside glazed and held in place with extruded alumi- num pressure plates anchored to the mullion using stainless steel fasteners spaced no greater than 9" on center. 3. Water Drainage: Each light of glass shall be compartmentalized using joint plugs and silicone sealant to divert water to the horizontal weep locations. Weep holes shall be located in the horizontal pressure plates and covers to di- vert water to the exterior of the building. B. Related Products Installation Requirtmcnts: 1. Sealants (Perimeter): Refer to Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. 2. Glass: Refer to Glass and Glazing Section. a. Reference: ANSI Z97.1, CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and GANA Glazing Ma- 11tia1 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Architect shall select curtain wall units to be tested as soon as a repre- sentative portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer's representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount. 1. Testing: Testing shall be performed per AAMA 503 by a qualified indepen- dent testing agency. Refer to Testing Section for payment of testing and test- ing requirements. a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable air infiltration shall not exceed 1.5 times the amount indicated in the performance requirements or 0.09 cfm/ft2, which ever is greater. b. Water Infiltration Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with ASTM E 1105. No uncontrolled water leakage is permitted when tested at a static test pressure of two-thirds the specified water penetration pressure but not less than 8 psf (383 Pa). 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protection: Protect installed product's finish surfaces from damage during construc- tion. Protect aluminum curtain wall system from damage from grinding and polish- ing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful contaminants. B. Cleaning: Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. END OF SECTION 084413 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 084413 - 5 APRIL 11 2011 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOC UMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02- SUMMARY A. This Section includes operable aluminum -framed windows for exterior locations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Stone Masonry." 2. Division 04 Section 'Brick Masonry." 3. Divis on 04 Section "Concrete Masonry Units." 4. Division 06 Section "Wood Blocking." 5. Division 08 Section "Glazing." 6. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 1.03 PRODTTC:T DELIVERY, STORAC:E ANT, IIANDLING A. Deliver windows to project site in undamaged condition. B. Store windows out of contact with ground. C. Keep windows under weather tight covering and protect against damage. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Handle to avoid injury to persons and to avoid damage to materials or to work in place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otheiwise indicated." B. Product Data. Include construction details, material descriptions, and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, op- erating instructions, and sealant products for each type of aluminum window indi- cated. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 085113 - 1 APRIL 112011 ALUMINUM WINDOWS C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attach- ments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details. D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for glass and sealant prod- ucts. E. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification and test reports that materials and systems meet specification requirements and design criteria. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes re- quirements for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteris- tics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Divi- sion 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional re- quirements. a. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. General: Aluminum windows single hung sizes shown in the plans or as called for in this specification shall conform with all requirements of the ANSI/AAMA, 101- 85 and specification DH-A2-C35. E. Air Infiltration Test: The window shall be subjected to an air infiltration test in ac- cordance with ASTM E283. At a test pressure of 1.56 pounds per square foot (psf) there shall be less than .10 cfm/ft. infiltration. F. Water Resistant Test: The window shall be subject to a water resistance test in ac- cordance with ASTM E331-70. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test me- thod at a static pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot (psf). G. Uniform Load Structural Test: The unit shall be subjected to a minimum load pres- sure of 30 pounds per square foot (both interior and exterior loads) for a period of 10 seconds, in accordance with ASTM E 330-70. H. All windows shall meet or exceed A.A.M.A. standards and A.N.S.I. standards. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 085113 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM WINDOWS I. All glazing and glass shall be in accordance with the local building code or the fed- eral blazing standards set fuith in "Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Mate- rials" (16 CFG 1201) whichever is most stringent. J. Reference Standards: 1. ANSI A134.1 -Specifications for Aluminum Windows 2. FS L-S-125B - Screening, Insect, Non Metalic. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replaue aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Failure to meet performance requirements. C. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air in- filtration, or condensation. d. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardwarm e. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond nor- mal weathering. f. Failure of insulating glass. g. Warranty Period: 1) Window: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2) Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3) Metal Finish: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer with 1-inch glazing and muntins as indicated 2. IEFCO Corporation. Series 3410 with 1" glazing and muntins as indicated. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Window Frames and Sash Members shall be of commercial quality 6063-T5 ex- truded aluminum in accordance with AAMA specifications, with commercial toler- ances and shall have a minimum nominal wall thickness of .062" except frame sill which shall be .094" nominal thickness and fixed meeting rail shall be minimum COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 085113 -.3 APRIL 112011 ALUMINUM WINDOWS .078". The perimeter of sash shall be completely weather-stripped. Balances shall allow full removal of sash from interior for cleaning and sash replacement. Bal- ances shall be replaceable. Integral lift rail shall be the length of sash sill. Sizes of openings and existing conditions will vary. All windows shall be true 1 over 1 lite. Provide extension system for complete installation. The Contractor shall field veri- fy all conditions and sizes prior to fabrication. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other mate- rials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc - coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service condi- tions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome- plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc -coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Compression -Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping de- signed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for com- plete concealment when aluminum window is closed. a. Weather -Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C 509. 2. Weather -Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Weather -Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. F. Sliding -Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven -pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin -impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. G. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. H. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manu- facturer's standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type rec- ommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. 1. Two part polyurethane equivalent to Dynatrol H by Pecora or Dymeric by Tremco. I. Panning System: Extruded aluminum casing of thickness not less than .078" to full cover sills. Panning system shall be of same finish as windows fabricated by win- dow manufacturer. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6, 085113 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM WINDOWS J. Back Bedding,Maierials: Bonding -type back bedding compounds shall meet ANSI- A-134.1 and ANSI-A-134.2. Back bedding compounds or glazing tapes meeting these specifications may be used singularly or in combination. is K. Glazing Beads: Glazing beads or retainers of any compatible material may be used. Beads shall be of sufficient strength and fixation to retain the glass. 2.03 WINDOW A. Window 'Type: 1. Casement. 2.04 GLAZING A. Glazing Material: Adequate provision shall be made for use of glazing compound. The glazing material shall be suited for use with the applicable material. Windows shall be factory glazed. Window units shall provide for reglazing from the interior with special tool with -out removal or dismantling of any portion of the window frame or sash B Glass and Glazing Matcrials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. 2.05 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion -resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other met- als. 2.06 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight -fitting, , removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabri- cate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy comply- ing with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extru- sions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.. 1. finish matching window frame. C. Glass -Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 mesh of PVC -coated, glass -fiber threads; wo- ven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, im- COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 085113 - 5 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM WINDOWS pact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. a. Mesh Color: Silver gray. 2.07 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class H, Clear Anodized Finish: Clear and free from surface blemishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight window installation. a. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and oth- er construction debris. 2. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and weld- ing slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. 3.02 ASSEMBLY A. All window units shall be furnished completely assembled with glazed panels, weather-stripping and hardware in place. B. All joints of frame and sash members shall be neatly fitted, mechanically joined, and secured. Frame parts and joints shall be made watertight with a trade -accepted non -hardening compound. C. All members shall be assembled in workman -like manner to utilize the strength of the sections and perform according to AAMA and ANSI specifications to assure neat weather -tight construction. Sash corners shall be keyed and mechanically screw jointed for squareness and rigidity. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 085113 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 ALUMINUM WINDOWS B. Erection shall, be by skilled mechanics. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. Material and labor for caulking, sealing and cleaning after erection shall be this contractor. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or elec- trolytic action at points of contact with other materials. F. Apply protective material where aluminum windows contact dissimilar metals, con- crete or mortar. G. Caulking: Windows shall be caulked and sealed by installer to accomplish weather tight installation around perimeter of window frame and wall opening. Color shall match window frame color. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjnct operating sashes aiul ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory -glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Re- move nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or dam- aged during construction period. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and be- low exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manu- facturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 085113 COLLEUE STATION FIRE STA11ON NO.6 085113 - 7 APRIL 112011 ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 087100 - HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include the furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified, or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification. All conduit, wire and junction boxes except where specifically listed shall be supplied by General Contractor. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Finish Hardware. Iiaidware used in building construction but particularly that used on or in connection with doors, frames, cabinets and other movable members. It also has a finished appearance as well as functional purpose and may be considered as a part of the decorative treatment of a room or building. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware has been specified herein by manufacturer's name, brand and catalog numbers for the purpose of establishing a basis for quality, finish, design and operation function. R. Rcquests for substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures." C. Listed Hardware - Hardware which is to be installed in or on fire labeled doors and frames, class A or lesser, single or pairs, shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and/or Warnock Hersey Fire Laboratories Division. Exit devices which are to be used as panic hardware shall be tested and listed in Underwriters Laboratories "Accident Equipment List -Panic Hardware". All listed hardware shall be in compliance COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 087100- 1 HARDWARE with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80 and be properly stamped or labeled for easy identification. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The finish hardware supplier shall after award of a formal contract, submit to the Architect, six (6) complete copies of the proposed finish hardware schedule for approval. When electronic hardware has been scheduled elevations and wiring diagrams shall be submitted for approval. The hardware supplier shall not order material until an approved schedule has been received. B. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: 1. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. 2. Name and manufacturer of each item. 3. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule C. When submitting schedules for approval, include two manufacturers' cut sheets on each hardware item proposed. Index it with the use of numbers or letters or a combination of both, with the hardware schedule. D. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. Include the following: a. Point-to-point wiring diagram. b. Riser diagram. E. Include a separate keying schedule, which is the result of a key meeting, attended by the Architect, Owner and hardware supplier. F. Samples - As part of this contract, provide to the Architect one sample of each type of finish hardware that is to be furnished for this project. These samples will be held by the Architect until completion of the project and will then be turned over to the Owner. They will serve as product samples for the building maintenance department. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All items of hardware to be delivered to the job site shall be completely packaged with all necessary screws, bolts, miscellaneous parts, and instructions and where necessary, installation templates for manufacturers suggested installation. They are to be clearly labeled for convenient identification and location in the building. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 087100- 2 HARDWARE 1.07 WARRANTY A. The finish hardware shall carry a limited warranty against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one year from date of acceptance. Locks shall have ten (10) year, Exit Devices ten (10) year and door closers a twenty five (25) year manufactures warranty. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Usr ball bearing hinges on heavy doors, doors where high frequency service is expected and doors equipped with door doscrs. B. All hinges used on exterior doors or doors subject to special atmospheric conditions, (pool areas, chemical laboratories, sewage disposal plants, etc.,) shall be of non-ferrous material, brass bronze or stainless steel. C. Exterior and out -swing corridor doors shall have non -removable pins (NRP) or security Studs. D. Hinges, Pivots: PBB, Zero, Select, Dorma. E. Size of hinges shall be as follows: 1. Door thickness and width a. 1 3/4 to 36" b. 1 3/4 over 36" Hinge Height Width 4.5 x 4.5 .130 4.5 x 4.5 .180 F. Number of hinges per door, provide quantities as follows: 1. For doors 5 feet to 7 feet 6 inches high: 3ea and one additional hinge for each additional 2 1/2 feet or fraction thereof. 2. Where projection of door trim is such as to prevent desired degree of opening, the proper hinge width shall be provided to allow the door to clear the trim. 2.02 KEYING A. A i I cylinders shall be 7 pin Interchang-.;ible Core. B. Provide temporary corvaruction cores. C. ,All cylinders shall be Grand Master and Master Keyed as directed by owner. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 087100- 3 HARDWARE D. All cylinder key blanks shall be patented and each individual key blank shall be stamped with a unique serial number. E. Each key blank shall be traceable and a key management program with historical formation shall be made available to the owner via a secure web sit on the internet. F. The following keys shall be supplied: 6 Construction Master Keys. 2 Control Keys 2 Grand Master keys 2 Master keys per master key 2 Change keys per Lock G. All master keys shall be delivered to the Owner and/or Owners representative via registered mail. H. Provide a key control system HPC KEKAB-KK65 equipped with a heavy-duty lock assembly, and are designed to use standard 1" mortise cylinders with an Adams Rite cam. Key cabinet to keyed the building master key system. 2.03 MORTISE LOCKS A. Locks shall be certified to the requirements of ANSI A156.13 series 1000 Grade 1.All lock functions available in one size case, manufactured from heavy gauge steel. Locks shall have a 2-3/4" backset, a full 3/4" throw stainless steel mechanical anti -friction latch bolt. B. Acceptable and approved as follows: DORMA ML9000 Series 2.04 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit devices shall be Certified ANSI 156.3 Grade 1. All devices will have shall have true architectural metal finishes with cast bronze center cases. B. Acceptable and approved as follows: Dorma 9000 series 2.05 CLOSERS A. Closers shall be certified ANSI 156.4 Grade 1 non -sized with adjustable spring power sizes 1-6 to accommodate all door sizes and comply with the barrier free codes. Closers shall have a back check -positioning valve accessible when closer is installed. Closers shall be supplied with necessary mounting brackets as required by mounting or frame conditions. B. Closer shall not be mounted on exterior or corridor side of doors. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 087100- 4 HARDWARE C. All closers shall be installed in compliance with Architectural Barriers Act Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes. A force gage shall be supplied to the hardware installer so he can verify the opening force of the doors and are installed in compliance with Texas Accessibility Standards. At completion of the project the force gage shall be turned over to the owner. Upon completion of the installation of the door closers a representative of the door closer manufacturer shall inspect the installation and provide a report to the owner as to his findings. D. Acceptable and approved: DORMA 9916/8616 Series. 2.06 TRIM AND STOPS HOLDERS, FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS A. Acceptable and Approved: Trimco, Rockwood. B. Stops shall be supplied for all doors not equipped with a holder. C. Provide three mutes per strike jamb for single doors and two for pairs of doors at the head. Furnish one installation tool per fifty mutes or fraction thereof. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" for (Standard Steel Doors and Frames), (Custom Steel Doors and Frames), (Wood Doors and Frames) by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), except if otherwise specifically indicated or to comply with requirements of governing regulations, requirements for the handicapped, or if otherwise directed by the Architect. B. Contractor shall conduct a pre installation meeting with the installers of the finished hardware. At these meeting representatives of the lock, exit device and door closer manufacturers being supplied shall be present. The representatives of the manufacturers shall review the installation instructions for their products and provide information which will aid in the installation of the finished hardware. The hardware representatives shall provide documentation that he has conducted this program along with the names of the participants. This documentation shall be forwarded to the owner or his agent in a timely manner. Upon completion of the hardware installation the same representatives shall certified the hardware has been properly installed and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. C. Install each hart ww-e item in compliamce with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. D. Securely fasten all parts to be attached. E. µAfter installation, representative templates, instruction sheets and installation details t shall be placed in a file folder to be turned over to the Owner when the building is COLLEGE FiTATTON FIRE .S N110N NO.6 087100- 5 HARDWARE accepted. Included shall be at least five each of any special adjusting and/or installation tools furnished with the hardware by the manufacturers. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to ensure correct operation and function. Units which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended for the application made shall be replaced. B. Final adjustment; Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to building acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, the installer shall return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items. Hardware shall be cleaned as necessary to restore correct operation, function and finish. Door control devices shall be adjusted to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. The following is a general listing of hardware requirements and is not intended for use as a final hardware schedule. Any items of hardware required by established standards or practices, or to meet state and local codes shall be furnished whether or not specifically called out in the following listed group. HARDWARE SET 1 2 Hinge SL24 628 Select 2 Pulls 1196-2 630 Trimco 2 Exit Devices ES MS 9600 CD PB 630 Dorms 1 Cylinder 87 626 Dorma 2 Power Transfer ES 105 Dorma 1 Power Supply PS501 Dorma 2 Closer 8916AF89J BP89 689 Dorma 2 Stops 1209 Trimco 1 Threshold 65A 628 Zero Access control by others. HARDWARE SET 2 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB 1 Privacy Lock ML9940 x76012951 LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1211 630 Trimco HARDWARE SET 3 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 087100- 6 HARDWARE I Lock ML9070 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8616S-DST 6R9 Dorma Kick date K0038 8"x34" 630 'Trimco 1 Stop 1211 626 Trimco HARDWARE SET 4 3 Hinge BB51 4.5x4.5 NRP 626 PBB 1 Exit Device 9300YR08 630 Dorma 1 Closel 8916S-DS 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8" x 34" 630 Trimco 1 Drip Cap 142A 628 Zero 1 Seal (jambs) 485A 628 Zero 1 Door Bottom 365AA 628 Zero 1 'Threshold 547A 628 Zero HARDWARE SET 5 3 Hingc PB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBR 1 Lock MT.9080 T LRA 626 Dornr:r 1 Stop 1.211 626 Triiuc o HARDWARE SET 6 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 111313 1 T nr .k MT .9070 T LRA 646 Donna 1 Electric Strike ES95-B 630 Dorma 1 Power Supply 502RF Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1211 626 Trimco Access control by others. HARDWARE SET 7 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB 1 Lock MT.9070 T T .RA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1211 626 Trimco HARDWARE SET 8 3 Hinge PB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB 1 Lock ML9050 T LRA 626 Dorma` 1 Stop 1211 626 Trimco COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 087100- 7 HARDWARE HARDWARE SET 9 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB 1 Lock ML9070 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Electric Strike ES95-B 630 Dorma 1 Power Supply 502RF Dorma 1 Closer 8616AFP 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1211 626 Trimco Access control by others. HARDWARE SET 10 1 Hinge SL24 628 Select 1 Exit Device 9700 ZP03 630 Dorma 1 Electric Str. El 114 630 Dorma 1 Power Supply 502RF Dorma 1 Closer 8616S-DS 689 Dorma 1 Stop 1209 626 Trimco Access Control by others. HARDWARE SET 11 1 Hinge Cont. SL24HD 628 Select 1 Exit Device F9300 YR08 630 Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Stop 1209 Trimco 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco HARDWARE SET 12 1 Hinge Cont. SL24HD 628 Select 1 Exit Device F9700 630 Dorma 1 Closer 8916S-ISJ BP89 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Threshold 65A 628 Zero HARDWARE SET 13 1 Hinge Cont. SL24HD 628 Select 1 Latch ML9010 LRA 626' Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1209 Trimco 1 Seal 485A 628 Zero 2 Door Bottom 365AA 628 Zero 1 Threshold 546A 628 Zero COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 087100- 8 HARDWARE HARDWARE SET 14 1 Hinge Cvut. SL24HD 628 Select 1 Latch ML9070 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Stop 1209 Trimco 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Seal 485A 628 Zero 2Door Bottom 365AA 628 Zero 1 Threshold 546A 628 Zero HARDWARE. SET 15 2 Hinge , SP814.5x4.5 ; . 626 PBB 1 Latch ML9010 LLB LRA 626 ' . Dorma HARDWARE SET 16 6 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 FBB 1 Latch ML9070 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Flush Bolt 3810 X 3850 626 Trimco 1 Closer TS93 GSR EMF 2 689 Dorma 2 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 2 Stop 1209 Trinicu HARDWARE SET 17 3 Hinge BB514.5x4.5 NRP 630 PBB 1 Luck ML9070 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Electric Str. ES95-B 630 Dorma 1 Power Supply 502RF Dorma 1 Closer 8916S-DS 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Drip Cap 142A 628 Zero 1 Seal (head) 429 628 Zero 1 Seal (jambs) 485A 628 Zero 1 Door Bottom 365AA 628 Zero l Threshold .5.68A 628 'Zero Access control by others. HARDWARE SET 18 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB 1 Latch ML9940 LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1211 Trimco COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 087100- 9 HARDWARE HARDWARE SET 19 1 Hinge Cont. SL24HD 628 Select 1 Lock ML9070 T LRA 630 Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Stop 1209 Trimco 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco HARDWARE SET 20 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB 1 Latch ML9010 LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8616AF 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1211 Trimco HARDWARE SET 21 3 Hinge BB51 4.5x4.5 NRP 630 PBB 1 Lock ML9080 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8916S-DS 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1Drip Cap 142 628 Zero 1 Seal (head) 429 628 Zero 1 Seal (jambs) 485A 628 Zero 1 Door Bottom 365AA 628 Zero 1 Threshold 568A 628 Zero HARDWARE SET 22 1 Hinge SL24 628 Select 1 Lock ML9080 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8916S-DS 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1Drip Cap 142 628 Zero 1 Seal (head) 429 628 Zero 1 Seal (jambs) 485A 628 Zero 1 Door Bottom 365AA 628 Zero 1 Threshold 568A 628 Zero HARDWARE SET 23 3 Hinge BB81 4.5x4.5 626 PBB 1 Lock ML9070 T LRA 626 Dorma 1 Closer 8616PH 689 Dorma 1 Kick Plate K0038 8"x34" 630 Trimco 1 Stop 1211 626 Trimco COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 087100- 10 HARDWARE THE FOLLOWING ARE A LTST OF STANDARD FINISHES. METAL OR PLATED FINISHES BMHA# 313AN DURANODIC DARK BRONZE, ANODIZED 605 US3 BRIGHT BRASS CLEAR COATED 606 US4 SATIN BRASS CLEAR COATED 612 US 10 SATIN BRONZE CLEAR COATED 613 US 1 OB OIL RUBBED BRONZED OXIDIZED 619 US 15 SATIN NICKEL PLATED CLEAR COATED 625 US26 BRIGHT CHROMIUM PLATED NO COATING 626 US26D SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED NO COATING 628 T TS2$ ALUMINUM, ANODIZED 629 US32 BRIGHT STAINLESS STEEL 610 US32D STAINLESS .STEEL 652 US26D SATTN CHROMIUM PLATED (STEEL BASE) PAINTED FINISHES (DOOR CLOSERS) 600 USP PRIME COAT 689 AL ALUMINUM 690 STATUARY 691 BRONZE LACQUER 696 SATIN BRASS 693 BLACK 695 DURANODIC COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 087100- I 1 HARDWARE SECTION 087200 — WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS FART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section briudes: I. Section Includes: Brush Weatherstrip. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section "Steel Coiling Dorpns." 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM F90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 2. ASTM E1408 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems. 3. ASTM E2074 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side -Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies. B. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.18: Materials and Finishes. 2. ANSIIBHMA A156.22: Door Gasketing Systems. C. American National Standards Institute/Steel Door Institute (ANSI/SDI): 1. ANSI A2.50.8/SDI-100 Rcconmiended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. American National Standards Institute/Window and Door Manufacturers Association (ANSI/WDMA): 1. ANSI/WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL IOR Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 087200 - 1 APRIL 112011 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS 2. UL 1 OC Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. UL 1784 Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. F. International Code Council (ICC): 1. UBC 7-2 Fire Test of Door Assemblies (Positive Pressure). 2. International Building Code (IBC) Code 2000 (Positive Pressure). G. British Standards (BS): 1. BS 476 Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures. H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 105 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke -Control Door Assemblies. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Provide brush weatherstrip which have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to meet the following design criteria: 1. Acoustical Performance ASTM E90, ASTM E1408. 2. Provide performance obtained from test procedures UBC 7-2. 3. Smoke, Air Leakage: Comply with NFPA 105. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated." B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating required component locations, interface with adjacent materials, installation, anchorage, fastening and similar information. D. Samples: Submit one each of manufacturer's standard selection samples. E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit Durability test reports from recognized testing laboratory. 2. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty documents specified herein. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 087200 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualificatiuns: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. B. Mock -Ups: 1. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finish work. 2. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE R HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Project Waiianty: Reter to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. 1. Warranty Period: 3 years against defects in materials or workmanship, beginning with Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERIMETER GASKETING AND BRUSH WEATHERSTRIP A. ManUfaCturcr: Petnko Manufacturing Company. 1. Contact: PO Box 3780, 4226 Transport Street, Ventura, CA 93003; Telephone: (800) 283-9988, (805) 642-2600; Fax: (805) 642-4109; E-mail: pemkosales@pemko.com; website: www.pemko.com. B. Proprietary Products/Systems: Brush weatherstrip, including the following: 1. 180 Degree Aluminum Retainer Brush Weatherstrip: a. Material; Extruded tempered aluminum 6063-T6. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 087200 - 3 APRIL 11 2011 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS b. Finish (ANSI/BHMA A 156.18): Clear anodized aluminum. c. Brush Construction: Densely compressed nylon filaments encased in galvanized retainer. d. Color: Aluminum color, gray nylon. e. Manufacturer Model Number: 18400CNB. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the brush weatherstrip manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of brush weatherstrip. a. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for door and frame manufacturer's installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction and other conditions affecting performance. 2. Do not proceed with installation of brush weatherstrip until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Wood Door Preparation: 1. Comply with ANSI/WDMA I.S.1-A. 2. Comply with door manufacturer's positive pressure installation instructions. B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: 1. Drill and tap doors and frames for hardware per manufacturer's positive pressure installation instructions. 2. Ensure doors and frames are properly sized, plumb and square. 3. Comply with ANSI A250.8/SDI-100. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Location: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Comply with manufacturer's positive pressure installation instructions. b. Comply with ANSI A250.8/SDI-100. 2. Wood Doors: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 087200 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS a. Comply with manufacturer's positive pressure installation instructions. b. Comply with ANSI/WDMA I.S.1-A. B. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Drill' and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 3.05 AM USTING A. Perform adjustments required to ensure that brush weatherstrip function in compliance with manufacturer's performance criteria prior to acceptance by Owner. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove any protective films and clean components as necessary following manufacturer's recommended procedures. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent- construction activity can the site. END OF SECTION 087200 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 APRIL 112011 087200 - 5 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS 4 SECTION 088000 — GLAZING PART 1- GENFRAL 1.01 RE, LATI!J) DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing fui the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by refer- ence to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Stoic fiaming. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Windows." 2. Division 03 Sm liun "Aluminum .Framed Entrances and Storefront." 3. Division 03 Section "Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Window Frames." 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. hiterspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated." B. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. C. Glass Samples: For each typr. of glass; 6 inches square. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, di- rect exposure to sun, or other causes. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 088000- 1 APRIL 11 2011 GLAZING B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and sub- strate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manu- facturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensa- tion, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature condi- tions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Glass shall conform to Fed. Spec. DD-G-001403. B. Installation Criteria: FGJA "Glazing Manual". C. Security Glazing: Applicable standards 1. Consumer Product Safety Standard 16 CFR 1201, Category II 2. ANSI Z97.1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings 3. ASTM C1036, Flat Glass 4. ASTM C 1048, Heat -Treated Flat Glass 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating -glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, mois- ture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATING GLASS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Viricon, Inc. 2. AFG Industries, Inc. 3. PPG Industries, Inc. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 088000- 2 I'h APRIL 11 2011 GLAZING B. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. C. Glass: 1 inch tinted Low-E. 2.02 FIRE -PROTECTION -RATED GLAZING A. Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency ac- ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. B Fire Protcctioti-Rated Tempered Glass: 1/4-inch thick and 1 inch insulated, fire - protection -rated tempered glass, 90 minute rating. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fol- lowing: a. MtcrEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; PyroEdge-20. b. Safti First; SuperLite.20. C. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SSG Pyxuswiss. d. Firelite Plus. 2.03 GLAZING GASKETS A. Gaskets: As recommended by the manufacturer of the window system. 2.04 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of ser- vice and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on test- ing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for condi- tions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufac- turer's full range. 2.05 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufac- turers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 088000- 3 APRIL 112011 GLAZING 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to conti- nuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing mate- rials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with sur- faces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufac- turer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral move- ment (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire -protection rating indicated. 2.07 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.08 MONOLITHIC -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 088000- 4 APRIL 11 2011 GLAZING 1. '/a" clear plate glass 2. 1/a" clear tempered glass. 3. 1" insulated tinted Low-E glass. 4. 1" insulated tinted Low-E-Low, both lites tempered. 5. 3/16" fire rated and impact safety rated. 6. 1" insulated fire rated and impact safety glass. B. Glass Type: Tinted: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers standard col- ors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer pliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installations tolerances, including those ness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep sysivins. 3. Minimum regni.red face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. present, for com- for size, square- B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately be- fore glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indi- cated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during instal- lation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove dam- aged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 088000- 5 A PRIL• 11 2011 GLAZING D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. G. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characte- ristics. H. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sea- lant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recom- mended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.04 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufac- turer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is in- stalled. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by in- serting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against fac- es of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 088000- 6 APRIL 11 2011 GLAZING H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.05 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to pre- vent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sea- lants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to con- trol depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant per- formance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wet- ting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. - Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact I with contaminating substances resulting from construc- tion operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Com- pletion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO F 088000 7 APR I I. 112011 GLAZING SECTION 088300 — MIRRORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 3. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division Of Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated." B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality -control provisions. C. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and at- tachments to other work. D. Samples: For each type of the following products: 1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. 3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Product Certificates: For each type of uurror, from manufacturer. G. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 088300 - 1 APRIL 11 2011 MIRRORS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass In- staller Program. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not other- wise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." C. Safety Glazing Products: For laminated mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deteri- oration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not at- tributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to man- ufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 088300 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 MIRRORS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufac- turers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. b_ Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc. C. Donisi Mirror Company. d. Guardian Industries. e. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. f. Lenoir Mirror Company. g. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. B. Clear CTlass: Mirror Quality; ultraclear (low -iron) float glass with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission. 1. Nominal "Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manu- facturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. 2.03 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work in- clude, but are not limited to, the. following: 1) CA Laurence, Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel. 2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.062 inch. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work in- clude, but are not limited to, the, following: 1) C.R. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel. 3. Finish: Clear bright anodized. D. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead -shield expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 088300 - 3 APRIL 112011 MIRRORS Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished. 1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemi- cal or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other condi- tions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. Wall -Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mirror hardware. Attach mirror hard- ware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anc- hors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, be- tween setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel. 2. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to pre- vent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 APRIL 11 2011 088300 - 4 MIRRORS 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from con- struction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recom- mended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088300 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 088300 - 5 APRIL 11 2011 MIRRORS SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS & VENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extent of louvers is indicated on drawing, including sizes and locations. Coordinate the size and locations with architectural and mechanical drawings and specifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements- Where louvers we indicated to comply with specific performance requirements, provide units whose performance ratings have been determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500. B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendation for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. C. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication, wherever possible. D. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of units. Pre -assemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordination. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated." COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 089000- 1 APRIL 11 2011 LOUVER AND VENTS B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for required products, including finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements. Submit complete line of premium and standard color samples (12 colors minimum) for selection by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Horizontal Blade Louvers: Equal to Greenheck # ESJ-401, 45 degree slope. Thickness not less than 0.081" for frames and extruded aluminum blades (ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T53). Finish shall be factory applied, high performance, 2-Coat 70% Kynar 550® / Hynar® AAMA 2605. Color as selected by architect from manufacturer's full line of standard and preminum colors. B. Louver Screens: Provide frames consisting of U-shaped metal for permanently securing insect screen mesh and bird screen. Locate screens on inside face of louvers. Secure screens to louver frames with machine screws, spaced at each corner and at 12" o.c. between. C. Foundation Vents: Galvanized, stationary nominal 4"deep by 8" high by 16" long, 45 degrees slope and overlapping blades. Vent construction with insect screen and water stop. Rear cover shall be closeable with wrench from the outside. D. Fastenings: Fasteners for exterior applications may be hot -dip galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum. E. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Provide louvers and accessories of design, materials, sizes, depth, arrangement, and metal thicknesses indicated, or if not indicated, as required for optimum performance with respect to airflow; water penetration; air leakage, where applicable (for adjustable units, if any); strength; durability; and uniform appearance. B. Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation including application of sealants in joints between louvers and adjoining work. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 089000- 2 APRIL 11 2011 LOUVER AND VENTS C. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly. D. Provide. vertical mullions of type and at spacing recommended by manufacturer or 72" o.c., whichever is less. No intermediate. E. Join Frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by spline screws, except where indicated otherwise or where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. Maintain equal blade spacing including separation between blades and frames at head and sill to produce uniform appearance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage which arc to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use rnncealed anchnragr wherevcr possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form tight joints with exposcd cunnections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units, at Contractor's option. END OF SECTION 089000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 089000- 3 APRIL 112011 LOUVER AND VENTS Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 09 03 12 CONDUCTIVE TRACE WIRE FOR WATER PIPE INSTALLATION (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Install electrically continuous trace wire with access points as described herein to be used for ocating nine with an electronic pipe locator after installation. L2 MEASUREMENT A. There is no separate payment for the supply and installation of tracer wire on any construction or installation of water main by the Contractor. The Contractor shall consider the supply and installation of the tracer wire incidental to all construction of water main. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on materials furnished that indicate compliance with the specifications regarding materials. use B. Indicate on plans location of each trace wire test station PARY 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Trace wire to be fourteen (14) gauge minimum solid copper with thermoplastic insulation recommended for direct burial. Wire connectors to be 3M DBR, or approved equal, and shall be watertight to provide electrical continuity. Each trace wire access point to be composed of one Copperhead® SnakePit® Magnetized Tracer Box. Test and Monitoring station or agnro _ed equal n�talle�i in eachP osed 24"x24"x " conch" y_e box collar. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall perform a continuity test on all trace wire in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineers' representative. If the trace wire is found to be not continuous after testing, Contractor shall repair or replace the failed segment of the wire. PART 3 — EXECUTION A. Trace wire shall be installed on all water mains. The wire shall be installed in such a manner as to be able to properly trace all water mains without loss or deterioration of signal or without the transmitted signal migrating off the tracer wirc. Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications B. Trace wire shall be installed in the same trench and inside bored holes and casing with nine during pipe installation. It shall be secured to the pipe as required to insure that the wire remains adjacent to the pipe. The trace wire shall be securely bonded together at all wire joints with an approved watertight connector to provide electrical continuity, and it shall be accessible at all trace wire access points. C. Trace wire access points shall in general be no more than five -hundred (500) feet and at every proposed 24" x 24" x 6" concrete valve box collar. Concentrations of multiple proposed valves near pipe intersections, i.e. tees or crosses, may require more than one access point assembly in each concrete valve box collar. Trace wire access points shall be within public right-of-way or public utility easements. D. At the point of connection between cast or ductile iron water mains, with any non iron water main, the tracer wire shall be properly connected to the iron pipe with a cad weld or approved equivalent. Tracer wire welds shall be completely sealed with the use of an approved mastic type sealer specifically manufactured for underground use. Mastic shall be applied in a thick coat a minimum of 2 inches thick and shall be protected from contamination by the backfill material with the use of a plastic membrane. E. Tracer wire shall be laid flat and securely affixed to the pipe at 10 foot intervals. The wire shall be protected from damage during the execution of the works. No breaks or cuts in the tracer wire or tracer wire insulation shall be permitted. At water service saddles, the tracer wire shall not be allowed to be placed between the saddle and the water main. F. Except for approved spliced -in connections, tracer wire shall be continuous and without splices from each trace wire access point. Where any approved_ spliced -in connections occur, 3M DBR water tight connectors,or approved equal shall be used to provide electrical continuity. G. At all water main end caps, a minimum of 6 feet of tracer wire shall be extended beyond the end of the pipe, coiled and secured for future connections. The end of the tracer wire shall be spliced to the wire of a six pound zinc anode and is to be buried at the same elevations as the water main. H. For directional drilling, auguring or boring installations, four #14 tracer wires shall be installed with the pipe and connected to the tracer wire at both ends, or cad welded to the existing iron pipe at both ends. I. Spliced connections between the main line tracer wire and branch connection tracer wire shall only be allowed at water main tees, crosses or at iron or copper water services where a portion of the branch connection water main or water service is replaced with a non iron or non copper material. The branch connection tracer wire shall be a single tracer wire properly spliced to the main line tracer wire. Where the existing branch connection is neither iron nor copper, then the new branch connection tracer wire shall be properly spliced to the existing tracer wire on the branch connection. At all repair locations where there is existing tracer wire, the tracer wire shall be properly reconnected and spliced as outlined above. END OF SECTION 2 SECTION 092200 - METAT, SUPPOkf SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011000- Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Ciypsum lBoard." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. All suspended ceiling/soffit suspension systems installed so that deflection of finished surface does not exceed 1/360 of span. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original containers with brand or manufacturer's label attached. Protect metal materials from dampness or wetting. Store metallic materials and accessories indoors off floor. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch 16 ga. galvanized steel channels with minimum weight of 4751bs. per 1,000 lineal feet. 13. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch 16 ga. galvanized steel cold -rolled channels with minimum weight of 300 lbs. Per 1,000 .linen! feet. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 092200 - I APRIL 112011 METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS C. Hat Channels at Gypsum Board Ceilings: 7/8 inch 25 ga. galvanized roll formed furring channels. D. Tie Wire: 16 Ga. galvanized steel wire for tying channel iron to framing members. E. Hangers: 8 Ga. galvanized annealed steel wire. F. Furring Channels: 7/8" Roll -formed hat -shaped section of minimum 25 gauge galvanized steel for use at gypsum panel ceiling. G. Fasteners: 1" Type S screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Wire -tying: 1. Splicing: Double wrap tie. 2. Horizontal stiffeners to channel brackets: Figure eight tie. 3. Framing members perpendicular to each other: Saddle tie. B. Workmanship: Work erected in perfect condition, level plumb, true and rigid with all requisite bracing and stiffening members provided as required. 3.02 FURRING & SUSPENDED CEILINGS & SOFFITS A. Attach hangers to structure at maximum 48" o.c. in direction of carrying channels and 36" o.c. in direction of cross furring and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Hanger design and spacing as required to meet design criteria. Hangers also installed within 6" of perimeter walls and ends of main runner channels. B. Maximum allowable spacing of main runners, 48" O.C.; cross furring 12" O.C.. C. Furring securely wire tied and of ample strength to support required load without deflections exceeding design criteria. Do not continue furring continuous across control or expansion joints. Position and level carrying channel and saddle -tie securely with hanger wire. D. Position 3/4" cross furring across carrying channels and saddle tie to carrying channels with three strands of 18 ga. tie wire. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 092200 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS 3.03 METAL ACCESSORIES A. All upenings, edges or where gypsum board edges terminate against dissimilar materials provide metal edges. Cornerites used at all junctions, corners, etc., unless otherwise noted. All exposed vertical and horizontal corners protected with corner beads. END OF SECTION 092200 C�01 X.EGF. STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 092200 - 3 AFRIL 112011 METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 4. Division 09 Section "Tiling." 5. Division 09 Sections "Painting." 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivcr materials with manufacturer's label attached. Protect materials from damp- ness or wetting. Remove any damaged materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Certificate: Fnrnish certificate evidencing that material meets or exceeds specifica- tion and fire rating requirement. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim. Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch long length for each trim ac- cessory indicated. 2. Trx lured Finishes: Piuvidc texture tnish for all walls. Finish being orange peel. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.. Gypsum Board Standard: GA 216 by Gypsum Associatiun. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 092900 - 1 APRIL 112011 GYPSUM BOARD B. Tolerances: 1/8" Offsets between planes of board faces and 1/4" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not li- mited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELS, GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Materials on project must be supplied by one manufacturer throughout. 2.02 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as ap- plicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company. b. USG Corporation. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 092900 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 GYPSUM BOARD . B. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long .ledges: Tapered. 3. Hi Trnpact Gypsum to be used where noted in drawings. 2.03 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1196M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company. b. USG Corporation B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the follow- ing: a. USG Coipuration; DUROC;K Cement Board 2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.04 TRIM AC A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized creel sheet or culled zin4'. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Furring channels 7/8" x 1-1/4" galvanized steel hat shaped sections, depth as indicated on drawings. C. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint com- pound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Z-Furring Channels. 2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. USG Perf-A-Tape Finish System, 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 APRIL 11 2011 092900 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Joint Treatment. USG Durabond 90 Joint Compound for pre -filling; USG Du- rabond Joint Compound Taping; USG Reddy Mix Joint Topping. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting -type, sandable topping compound. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.06 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation stan- dards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly ad- hering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated ac- cording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel mem- bers from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recom- mended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Division 09 Section "Acoustical Insu- lation." 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies of assembly. Comply with mineral -fiber requirements E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 2.07 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fol- lowing: a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Toughrock Regency Ceiling Tex- tures/Polystyrene. b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray. C. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT. 2. Texture: Orange Peel. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 092900 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 GYPSUM BOARD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow - metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 .APPL-VIN( ANn UilNISHING PA I`L5, (GENVRAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side uut: Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. _ D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where in- termediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on op- posite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by struc- tural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 092900 - 5 APRIL 11 2011 GYPSUM BOARD G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load -bearing partitions at struc- tural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these loca- tions, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. J. Joint Treatment Application: 1. Joint treatment compounds and products, as specified under Materials, shall be mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's direction to com- pletely conceal all joints and screw depressions and provide a smooth surface to receive finishes as scheduled. 3.03 FINISH A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instruc- tions and GA-214 Finish Levels. 1. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint com- pound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. 2. Prepared surface shall be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of finish paint. Refer to specification Division 09: Section "Painting". a. Application: For use where gloss semi -gloss, enamel, or nontextured flat paints are specified or where severe lighting conditions occur. Gen- erally in all areas except where noted otherwise. 3.04 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings in all wet areas. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indi- cated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally, unless otherwise indi- cated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alter- nate courses of panels. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 092900 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 GYPSUM BOARD b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face -layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 4. Rated partitions shall have wall board continuous both sides above ceiling to deck and fire taped. 3.05 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indi- cated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetra- tions. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, where indicated on drawings. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. D. Seal ends, cut edges and penetrations of each piece with water resistant compound before installation. E. Tape & mortar over all joints prior to the installation. 3.06 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions I. Control Joints: Install where detailed, at changes in backup material and in partitions 30'-0" O.C. nnless otherwise noted. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Re:arl: Use at exposed panel edges; install on external corners with suita- ble fasteners spaced 9" O.C. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 092900 7 APRIL 11 2011 GYPSUM BOARD 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated; install on external corners with suitable fasten- ers spaced 9" O.C. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges where indicated; install on external cor- ners with suitable fasteners spaced 9" O.C. 5. Metal Trim: Install over face layer with fasteners spaced 9" O.C. where shown and where gypsum surfaces meet dissimilar materials. 3.07 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, pene- trations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gyp- sum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and accord- ing to ASTM C 840: E. Gypsum board finish levels are minimum requirements established by ASTM C 840: 1. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3.08 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin applica- tion or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to re- ceive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to tex- ture -finish manufacturer's written recommendations. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 092900 - 8 APRIL 11 2011 GYPSUM BOARD 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect, installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not li- mited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 3.10 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate installation of firestopping at penetrations through fire -resistive rated gypsum hoard partitions. 2. Coordinate installation of joint sealers specified in Division 7: Section Sea- lants at penetrations of non fire -restive rated partitions. 3.11 PATCHING A. Contractor shall repair and patch around penetrations in walls where piping, duct- work, conduit, cables, etc. are required 3.12 CLEANING A. Contractor shall completely clean all areas affected by this work and shall leave no excess or scrap materials or bedding compound on the job site. END OF SECTION 092900 COLLEGE 'STATION 1HRE STATION NO.6 092900 - 9 APRIL 112011 GYPSLM BOARD SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Shine thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 3. Waterproof membrane for tile installations. 4. Cementitious backer units installed as part of tile installations. 5. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Planr. Ccinciete." 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499). C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A 137.1. 1.04 PERFORNM .NCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 102R: 1. Levcl Surfaces. Minimum 0.6. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 093000 1 APRIL 112011 TILING 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. E. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. G. Qualification Data: For Installer. H. Material Test Reports: For each tile -setting and -grouting product and special- purpose tile. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: For cutting, installing and grouting of ceramic tile, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeyman tile setters who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work, and the recommendations contained in the referenced standards. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the following: 1. Grout and mortar setting shall comply with, ANSI A 108.4 and ANSI A 108.5. 2. Manufacture all ceramic tile in accordance with Standard Grade Requirements of ANSI 137.1. C. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 093000 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 TILING 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. D. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. E. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproofing. 3. .Vint sealants. 4. Cementitious backer units. S. Metal edge strips. F. Mocknps: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious Materials uu elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. .1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. F 093000 - 3 APRIL 112011 TILING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturer specified. 4. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an approved comparable product by another manufacturer. 2.02 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the specified product. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 093000 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 TILING 2.03 TILE PRODUCTS A. Wall Porcelain/Ceramic Tile: Glazed porcelain ceramic tile. Size and type as indicated on drawings. B. r111 W Tile: Poroelain/Ccramic tile. Size and type as indicated on drawings. C. 'Prim & Special Tile: Provide necessary caps, stops, coves, returns, trimmers, and other shapes as required for a complete installation. Items to be supplied by the same manufacturer supplying the tile. D. Cove Base: Porcelain/Ceramic tile. Base to match tile color to be selected for the floor. Size and type as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. B. Stone Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. 7/8" Granite: ' Jniform, medium grained stone. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.05 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN -SET TILE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A 118.10, selected from the following; B. Fabric -Reinforced, Fluid -Applied Product: System consisting of liquid -latex rubber and fabric reinforcement. 1. Waterproofing Membrane (at showers and floor drains): Available Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. b. Custom Building Products; Custom 9240 Waterproofing and Anti - Fracture Membrane. 2.06 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Available .Manufac:l urers: 1. LATICRETE International Inc. B. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 093000 - 5 APRIL 112011 TILING 1. Prepackaged dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A 118.4. b. Laticrete 211 Crete Filler powder additives gauged with Laticrete 4237 to achieve high strength adhesive latex mortar. Portland Cement mix and latex additive shall be as manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc. C. Polymer -Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A 118.7, color selected by architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 1. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid -latex form for addition to prepackaged dry -grout mix. a. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider. D. Setting Beds: Latex Portland Cement Mortar. E. Grout: Portland Cement grout with latex additive by Latricrete, Custom Products, L&M, or products having equivalent characteristics may be considered provided deviations are minor from original specifications. Allow for two colors to be selected by Architect. 2.07 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. One -Part, Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. C. Pecora Corporation; 898 Sanitary Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White. D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Available Products: a. Bostik; Chem -Calk 550. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 093000 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 TILING b. Pecora Corporation; NIA-200 Urexpan C. Trcmco, Tilt:.; VulkPm 245. d. Tremco, Inc.; Exterior Product; THC-900. E. Waterproofing Membrane: Flexible load=beku°ing, self -curing liquid rubber polymer with an integral reinforcing fabric to form a seamless, heavy-duty waterproof membrane below a protective surface shall be Laticrete 9235 2.08 CEMENTITIOTT,S BACKER UNITS A. Provide 5/8" cementitious backer units and all walls in wet areas complying with ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints re: Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips. Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting -bed thickness, clear anodized aluminum by Ceramic Tool Co. or Schluter. 1. Ceramic Tile / Concrete: CTC ramp or Schluter Reno-V. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. D. Grout Sealei: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Available Products: a. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. b. Custom Building Products; Grout and Tile Sealer. C. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. E. Top Sealer: "Aqua Mix Seal and Finish Low Sheen" or products having equivalent characteristics may be considered provided deviations are minor from original specifications. 2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 093000 - 7 APRIL 112011 TILING C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Contractor shall apply leveing coat or dry -set mortar over wall and floor surfaces which may vary more than 1-inch in 10 feet. Installation constitutes acceptance of the substrate. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile -setting materials. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin -set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile -setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 3. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 093000 - 8 APRIL 11 2011 TILING 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern- Lay the in grid pa[Lern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area, unless otherwise indicated, adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Groin Tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry -set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. H. Where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.04 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 093000 - 9 APRIL 11 2011 TILING A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. B. Install water proofing membrane in toilet rooms at shower and at floor drain, over tile backer board and moisture resilient board at wall base, and over concrete floor substrate as shown on drawings. C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.05 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A 108 Series of tile installation standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Tile: 1/8 inch. C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. D. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, vinyl composition tile, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. E. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout - sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.06 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Tile: 1/8 inch. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 093000 - 10 APRIL 11 2011 TILING 1. Rcmuve epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, rcilauve,, protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.08 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Tile Installation as indicated: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-ses mortar over concrete slab: TCA, F125 and ANSI A108.1). 1. 'file Type: As indicated on drawings. 2. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer modified sanded cement grout. END OF SECTION 093000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 093000. 11 APRIL 112011 TILING SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical tiles for ceilings and the following: 1. Exposed suspension systcnrh. B. Related Sections inchide the following. 1. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Framing." 3. Division 09 Section "Non Structural Metal Framing." C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale; on which the fol- lowing items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from in- stallers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling susperisiun ,4ystem members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling -mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Tile: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and tex- ture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members: 12-inch long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 12-inch long Samples of each type and color. D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 095123 - 1 APRIL 112011 ACOUSTIAL TILE CEILINGS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. B. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single man- ufacturer. C. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread, Class A (less than 25) as tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 and per Fed. Spec. SS-S-118a. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, tem- perature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a sta- bilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are main- tained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical tiles and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 095123 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 ACOUSTIAL TILE CEILINGS 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity in- stalled. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and ex- posed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearanLC characteristics indicated for edcli product type. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Dune Beveled Tegular. 2. Color: White 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch 4. Modular Sizc: 24 by 24 inches 2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspen- sion systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designat- ing finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of sys- tem indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. O. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following re- quirements: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 095123 - 3 APRIL 112011 ACOUSTIAL TILE CEILINGS 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coat- ing, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. 2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Beveled Tegular, 24 by 24 inch, white, 9/16" exposed "T" system. 2.05 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Shadow molding # 7862. 2.06 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and sub- strates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical tile ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Testing Substrates: Before installing adhesively applied tiles on wet -placed sub- strates such as cast -in -place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 095123 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 ACOUSTIAL TILE CEILINGS B. Comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans, however, if not specifically shown, ceilings laid out from the center of the room in both directions so that cut tiles are equal at all edges. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acous- tical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders. 3.03 INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Fire -Rated Assembly: Install fire -rated ceiling systems according to tested fire -rated design. Use fire rated ceiling tile and protected light fixtures in areas as noted on plans. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting hori- zontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective means. Do not splay wires more than five inches in a four foot drop. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interfere with location of hangers at spacing required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to struc- tures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corro- sion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including interme- diate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are at- tached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated tempera- tures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, post installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing re- quired, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to stecl deck tabs. 9. Do nut attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural mem- bers. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 095123 - 5 APRIL 112011 ACOUSTIAL TILE CEILINGS 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported di- rectly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publica- tions. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a mini- mum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as re- quired for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in -place or post installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceil- ing area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect se- curely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. G. The plumbing and heating contractors shall not utilize hangers or framing of sus- pension system. The electrical contractor may utilize suspension system for lay -in fixture installation but shall furnish two supplementary hangers per fixture for maintaining maximum load deflection. Electrical contractor shall not utilize tile as sole support for any ceiling -mounted electrical device. All ceiling -mounted elec- trical devices shall be supported with brackets attached to tees. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge mold- ings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095123 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 095123 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 ACOUSTIAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Tncludes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 2. Division 09 Section "Tiling." 3. Division 09 Section "Sheet Carpeting." 4. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring " 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisiuns of Division 01 "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verificatiun: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard -size Samples, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 096513- 1 APRTT. 112011 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recom- mended by manufacturer, but not less than 60 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rubber Base: Base 4" high x 1/8" thick complying with FS SS-W-40a, Type I with preformed external and internal corners and stops equal to 100 Series manufactured by Roppe. Cove base at all flooring. Color as shown on drawings. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by material manufacturer for each specific product and for its area of use. Leveling material as specifically recommended by material manufacturer. C. All materials best grade, with no second grade, off goods or remnants allowed. 2.02 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the follow- ing: a. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Description: Transition strips. C. Material: Rubber. D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings. 2.03 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 096513- 2 APRIL 11 2011 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): B. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. a. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substratcs comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhe- sion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patch- ing compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth sub- strate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuuin clean substratcs to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.03 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spac- es, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 096513- 3 APRIL 112011 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job -Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.04 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet that would otherwise be exposed. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resi- lient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product in- stallation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 096513- 4 APRIL 11 2011 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 096560 —ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated Rubber Sports Flooring Tiles: lm (39.2 in) x 1 m (39.2 in,) with a thickness of 9.5mm. B. Related Specifications 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." a. The concrete contractor shall furnish and install a slab that is smooth troweled, level to within 1/8" in any 10' radius. High spots shall be ground and low spots filled with an approved leveling compound. b. No curing compounds, agents, or sealers shall be used. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough ('�rpcntiy." 3. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable manufacturer. 1. The manufacturer to be a firm experienced in the manufacturing of prefabricated rubber surfacing. B. Acceptable Installer 1. Installer must submit a list of similar projects completed within the past three years. C. Installer to be recognized and approved by the athletic rubber flooring manufacturer. D. Provide mock-up of 6' x 6' to he evaluated by Architect prior to proceeding. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of the actual sport surface in the standard colors. B. Submit three copies of each of the following: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 096560 - 1 APRIL 112011 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING 1. Manufacturer's requirements for correct preparation, finishing and testing of substrate base material to receive premanufactured rubber sport surface. 2. Interior or exterior adhesive product data sheets and manufacturers certificates indicating approval for the proposed application. 3. Interior and exterior line paint data sheets and manufacturers certificates indicating approval for the proposed application. 4. Manufacturer's standard warranty. 5. Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store material in the original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact, in a maintained environment of minimum of 55' and under 5% relative humidity. Flooring if in squares, not to be stacked more than two pallets high. Protect work until accepted by owner. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Maintain a stable room and sub floor temperature for a period of 48 hours prior, during and 48 hours after installation. Recommended range: 65°F to 80°F (18°C to 27°C). B. Installation to be carried -out no sooner than the specified curing time of concrete sub floor. C. Substrate Flatness must not vary more than 1/8" in 10' radius. D. Moisture vapor emission content of the concrete slab must not exceed 3lbs/1000ft2 per 24 hrs when using the Calcium Chloride test as per ASTM F 1869. 1.07 WARRANITY A. Provide manufacturer's standard ten (10) year limited warranty. 1.08 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Complete, whole tiles equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. B. Repair material must be from the same dye lot as material supplied for initial installation. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 096560 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING C. Maintain surface as per mamifacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Roppe Tuflex recycled Rubber Tile, Roppe Corporation , Fostoria, OH. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Flooring and Rubber Tile shall be 3/8" in nominal thickness. Each shall be smooth and contain no asbestos fiber. Tuflex Titan Recycled Rubber Tile shall be 27" x 27". B. Adhesive: Provide VOC compliant adhesive certified by the manufacturer or distributor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Concrete substrate to he in place a minimum of thirty days prior to the installation of the rubber athletic flooring. Maximum of 3% moisture content in the substrate (CM Test.) Preparation of substrate to provide a smooth, dense finish highly compacted with a tolerance of 1/8" in a 10' radius. B. Alkalinity test: PH level should be in the range of 7 to 8.5. C. All inserts, penetrations and other construction items which affect the installation of the prefabricated rubber sport surface to be in place. D. Rubber sports surface installer to approve field conditions. E. Deficiencies in substrate to be corrected prior to installation per manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. histall prefabricated rubber sports surface in accordance with the latest manufacturer's recommendations. Installation by a certified contractor. B. Mix and apply adhesive in accordance with manwfacturer's instructions. C. Hold all seams in place with suitable weights for a minimum of 12 hours. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 096560 - 3 APRIL 112011 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING D. Remove all excess adhesive and other surface blemishes per manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 096560 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 096560 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING SUCTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Direct glue carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast in Place Concrete." 2. Division 09 Section "Resilicnt Base and Accessories." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division Of Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. I.Z. Product Data: Foi the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on phys- ical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture re- quired. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch long Sam- ples. 3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample. D. Product Schedulc: Foi carpet use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Qualification Data: Fir Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the fol- lowing: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain -removal prod- ucts and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 096813 - 1 APRIL 11 2011 TILE CARPETING G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Cov- ering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is com- plete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Complete whole squares equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 096813 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 TILE CARPETING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET A. Products: Tandus Carpet Tilc. 2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement - based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. R. Fleur Primer. Shaw 9050 or products having equivalent characteristics may be considered provided deviations are minor from original specifications. C. Edge Strips: See Division 09 Section "Resilient Flooring" and "Resilient Base and Accessories." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation to- lerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recom- mended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing sub- strates. IJ3. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's writ- ten instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 096813 - 3 APRIL 112011 TILE CARPETING or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are in- compatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufactur- er. D. Follow recommendation of complete coverage of substrates with manufacturer's recommended floor primer. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Direct Glue -Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Cut edges to be addressed as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for fu- ture cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonperma- nent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommen- dations. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet man- ufacturer. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 096813 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 TILE CARPETING 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096816 COT.>;..EGE STATION FIRE STATION NO: 6 096813 - 5 AP.RIL 112011 TILE CARPETING SECTION 098100 — ACOUSTIC INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATUV ll( CLIMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide all building insulation as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 3. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceiling." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria- 1. Sound Tiansmission Class: 5 to 10 decibels. 2. Fire Resistance: Material shall have a Class B fire rating less than 75 as tested by ASTM E-84. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packages, clearly marked with brand name, type and R-Value. B. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture and damage, remove any damaged materials from the site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 098100 - 1 APRIL 112011 ACOUSTIC INSULATION B. Samples of materials and complete product and technical description submitted for approval to the Architect prior to ordering materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sound Batt Insulation in wood Stud Walls: Nominal 2" thick unfaced batt insulation complying with ASTM C665, Type 1. Material equivalent to Owens- Corning, "Quietzone Acoustic Batts." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas receiving insulation work to ensure work of preceding trades is completed. Check surfaces to see that they are uniform in place, free from mortar droppings, grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper insulation. Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with current printed recommendations of insulation manufacturer. B. Where insulation is installed in wall cavities exceeding 8' in height, the mat shall be overlapped at least one inch. END OF SECTION 098100 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 098100 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 ACOUSTIC INSULATION SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Scctiuii inehides surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 3 Stcel. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board. 7. Fiber cement board and trim. B. Relatcd Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with Primers speci- fied in this Section. 2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 3. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. 4. Division 09 Section 'Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 099100 - 1 APRIL 11 2011 PAINTING D. The contractor shall furnish the Owner with a booklet of actual samples used on the project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and ex- ecution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for ap- plication of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no add- ed cost to Owner. B. Materials shall be manufacturer's best grade of respective. C. Gloss levels for painting required are as per the National Paint Coatings Associa- tion. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. B. Deliver materials, including coatings, sealers, paints, enamels and paste fillers in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. C. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of building. Job site tinting, mixing, and thinning required shall be done in this area. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. Store rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located in the designated area. Use adequate means and precautions to prevent fire, explosions, and other damage caused by paint materials. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air tem- peratures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 099100 - 2 APRIL 11 2011 PAINTING B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85% or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed in- structions. D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by material manufacturer during application and drying periods. E. Provide adequate ventilation of spaces while applying primer and finish coats. F. All application of coatings shall be done under adequate illumination. 1.07 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Protect completed finish and painting work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures dur- ing progress of work. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with la- bels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each ma- terial and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Miff►ufaciurers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not li- mited to, the following: B. Mannfactuners: Subject to cumpliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2. Benjamin Moore Paints. 3. Pittsburg Paints. 2.02 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material C;umpatibility: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 099100 - 3 APRIL 112011 PAINTING I . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As indicated on drawings. 2.03 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex PrepRite Block Filler (8 mils) 2.04 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer by Sherwin Williams. 2.05 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Systems Gloss Finish 1. S- W Kem Kromik Universal Alkyd Metal Primer. 2.06 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Eggshell): Promar 200 by Sherwin Williams. B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): Promar 200 by Sherwin Williams. 2.07 QUICK -DRYING ENAMELS A. Quick -Drying Enamel (Semigloss): Promar 200 by Sherwin Williams. 2.08 EPDXY PAINT A. Water based epoxy: Catalyzed epoxy meeting ASTM 03730 requirement, Sherwin Williams Hi-Bild Water -based Catalyzed Epoxy. 2.09 FLOOR COATINGS A. Interior Concrete Floor Sealer: 1. Sonneborne IS "Lapidolith". COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 099100 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 PAINTING 2.10 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex -Based Wood Primer: PrepRite Classic Latex Primer by Sherwin Williams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting perfor- mance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. When measured with an electronic C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of sub- strates and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades in- volved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protec- tion if any. 2. Do nisi paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NU. 6 099100 - 5 APRIL 112011 PAINTING; D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint sur- faces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permit- ted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recom- mended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. I. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar ex- posed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if mul- tiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 099100 - 6 APRIL 11 2011 PAINTING E. Primers shall be applied in as many coats as necessary to completely cover the sub- strate to a uniform appearance. F. Rand primer over wood and gypsum_ board with 120 grit sandpaper prior to applica- tion of paint or coating. G. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appear- ance. H. ".Paint shall be evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without runs, sags, curtains, or other evidences of poor application. 1. ' Previous coats shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. J. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. K. Each coat of paint shall be applied uniformly to dry film thickness specified in Schedule below. L. For painting of partial rooms, paint color shall match adjacent surfaces. Patched or repaired areas shall not be visible through paint coating. M. Painting of repaired, altered or renovated area shall be floor to ceiling and minimal- ly 2' either side of patched area, unless defined break -off is identifiable within 5', and then painting shall be to that vertical line. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTE CTTON A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded ma- terials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct dam- age to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as ap- proved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore dam- aged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.05 PAINTING SCHEDULE COLORS AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT A. Exteriot Mctals. (first coat not required on shup-primed items) I 1st coat — S-W Kern Kromik Universal Alkyd Metal Primer, B50Z Series 2. 2nd coat — S-W Industrial Enamel, B54Z. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 099100 - 7 APRTT . 112011 PAINTINU 3. 3rd coat - Same as above a. (4 mils wet, 2 mils dry per coat) B. Exterior Galvanized Metals Alkyd Systems Gloss Finish: 1. 1st coat — S-W Galvite HS, Solvent Based Acrylic Coating. Color to be se- lected by Architect. 2. 2nd coat — S-W Industrial Enamel, B54Z. 3. 3rd coat - Same as above a. Gutter, Scuppers, Counterflashing: b. (4 mils wet, 2 mils dry per coat) C. Interior Metals: Touch up shop primer. 1. 1st coat - Alkyd Metal Primer (3.0 mils. DFT) 2. 2nd coat - Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel (3.0 mils. DFT) 3. 3rd coat - Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel (3.0 mils. DFT) a. Hollow Metal Door & Frame: D. Interior Masonry & Concrete: 1. 1st coat - Latex Block Filler (8.0 mils DFT) 2. 2nd coat - Polyamide Epoxy (4.0 mils. DFT) 3. 3rd coat - Same as above a. CMU Walls: b. Interior painted concrete and block: Color as selected by Architect. E.Interior Concrete Floors: 1. Ist coat - Sealer (200-300 S.F./gal.) diluted 4:1 water: Lapidolith 2. 2nd coat - Sealer (200-300 S.F./gal.) diluted 3:1 a. Exposed Concrete Finished Floors: b. 3`d Coat - Sealer (200-300 S.F./gal.) diluted 2:1 F. Gypsum Board: 1. 1 st coat - Vinyl Latex Wall Primer (1.4 mils DFT) 2. 2nd coat - Latex Eggshell Enamel (1.5 mils DFT) 3. 3rd coat - Latex Eggshell Enamel (1.5 mils DFT) a. Painted Gypsum Board & Plaster: 3 colors selected by Architect. G. Mechanical and Electrical Items: 1. All conduit, wiremold, electrical panels, piping, piping supports, exhaust fans, roof vents, clean -outs, access panels, pipe insulation, grilles, registers, and all other similar mechanical or electrical materials exposed to view in all occu- pied and/or finished areas shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces. 2. Surfaces inside mechanical openings to view painted flat black. 3. Factory finished shall have abrasions touched with matching finish coat. 4. Nameplates on equipment not painted, suitably protected during painting op- erations. 5. Finish in accordance with specification schedule for galvanized iron and met- als. Provide high temperature enamel as required for specific equipment in- structions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 099100 - 8 APRIL 11 2011 PAINTING H. Fiber Ccmcnt Board: 1. Finish primed siding with minimum one coat high quality; alkali -resistant primer and one coat of either 100% acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade topcoat or two coats high quality, alkali -resistant, 100% acrylic or latex, exte- rior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. a. Color as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 099100 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 099100 - 9 APRIL 112011 PAINTING SECTION t01400 _ SIGNAGE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plaques. 2. Dimensional illuminated characters. 3. Panel signs. 4. Photoluminescent signs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs. 2. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 4. Division 26 Sections for electrical sci vice and connections for illuminated signs. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guide- lines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be pro- vided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. Ci n .i 'GE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 101400 - 1. APRIL 11, 2011 SIGNAGE 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Plaque Casting: 6 inches square including border. 2. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional cha- racter (letter, number, and graphic element). 3. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch long sections of extru- sions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches. 4. Acrylic Sheet: Full size for each color required. 5. Photoluminescent Signs: Full-size sign. E. Sign Schedule: Location Key Plan for all signage. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials properly protected and packaged so that no damage occurs during transit. Materials when delivered, protected by the Contractor against damage or theft. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Ac- cessibility Guidelines. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic- tion, and marked for intended use. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrica- tion and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 101400 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 SIGNAGE 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metal finishes beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01. MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper rec- ommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. C. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze). 2.02 PLAQUES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Gemini Incorporated. B. Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects, as follows: 1. Plaque Material: Cast metal with Bronze finish. 2. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard leatherette texture. 3. Border Style: Square, polished. 4. Mounting: Concealed studs for substrates encountered. C. Plaque Schedule: 1. Plaque Type as per drawings. a. Plaque Size: As indicated in drawings. b. Character Size: As indicated in drawings. C. Character Finish/Color: Satin Finished Polished Metal. d. Text/Message: Wording of plaque to be submitted and approved by arc- hitect prior to manufacturing of plaque. e. Location: As indicated in drawings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 101400 - 3 APRTT, 11, 2011 SIGNAGE f. Quantity: One (1). 2.03 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Gemini Incorporated. B. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and pre- cisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the following requirements. 1. Character Material: Aluminum. 2. Thickness: 1 inch minimum. 3. Color(s): Black. 4. Mounting: Concealed studs, non -corroding for substrates encountered, and projected 1" from wall. 5. Character Font: Optima. C. Aluminum Sheet: 3/8 inch thick. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Letter number "6" and letters shall be per drawings with a backlit channel. E. Street address: Flat cut aluminum numbers, Optima type style as indicated on drawings, equal to Gemini architectural letters. Numbers shall be primed and painted with two coats of enamel, color to be selected by architect from standard colors. Numbers shall be 8 inches. Numbers shall be mounted as per method #P-8 with masonry anchors and project 1-inch from wall. 2.04 PANEL SIGNS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Best Sign Systems Inc. 2. Gemini Incorporated. 3. InPro Corporation 4. Fusion. B. Interior Room Signage 1. Sign Type: Kroy non -glare "Contemporary ADA Tactile Sign Series", or ap- proved equal by Best. Allow one sign per interior door unless otherwise noted. 2. Sign Size: As per drawings minimum size to accommodate requirements. 3. Letters: a. Letter Style: Optima; w/letter width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and between 1:5 and 1:10. b. Size of Letters and Numbers: 3/4" High and raised. C. Letter Type: ALL CAPITALS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 101400 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 SIGNAGE d. Letters and Numbers: Accompanied with Grade H Braille. e. Braille Dimensions: .059" dot diameter, .09" interdot spacing, horizon- tal separation between cells of .241" and vertical separation between cells shall be .395". f. Pictograms: Integrate verbal and Braille description below each raised pictogram. g. Message Placement: Center justified. h. Margin Distance: Equal on all sidcs 1. Interline Spacing for multiple lines of copy: 1/4" minimum. j. Letter Color: Color to be selected y Architect with matte or non finish. k. Background Color: Color to be selected by Architect with matte or non - glare finish. 1. Mounting: Double back adhesive tape. 4. Messages: Listing of signage messages shall be provided by Architect. Al- low for room name on each sign. C. Exterior Parkin Signage: 1. Sign Type: 16" Gauge galvanized stecl with 1" radius corners, shop painted and screw attached to 2" galvanized pipe post set in concrete footing. Allow for 1 sign including van accessible. D. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket -mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Facto- ry paint brackets in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. E. Handicap Signage: Refer to site plan and handicap signage detail on drawings. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Fur- nish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.06 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. I. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended prac- tices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distor- tion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of weld- ing flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude wa- ter penetration. 3. Preassemble signs in the shup to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final as- sembly. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 101400 - 5 APRIL 11, 2011 SIGNAGE 4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.07 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a stripp- able, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appear- ance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.08 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked -Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid -chromate -fluoride -phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified -acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thick- ness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfor- mance of work. B. Verify that items including anchor inserts and electrical power are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types de- scribed and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 101400 - 6 APRIL 11, 2011 SIGNAGE 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. Coordinate exact location with Architect. B. Wall -Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two -Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl -covered or rough surfaces. 2. Silicone.-Adhcsive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl - covered surfaces. 3. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufac- turer. C. Bracket -Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mount- ing, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance 1-inch from wall surface indicated. E. Cast -Metal Plaques: Mouiit plaques using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for type of wall surface indicated. 1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick -setting ce- ment. F. Exterior aluminum letters applied to clean, sound substrate. Letters installed se- curely, level, plumb, and true in spacinn. G. Interior signage applied to clean, srnind substrate. This signage contractor respon- sible to properly clean substrates so that letters may be properly applied. Materials installed level, plumb, and true in spacing. Coordinate exact location with Archi- tect. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 101400 - 7 APRIL 11, 2011 SIGNAGE H. Install building plaque 5'6" A.F.F. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written in- structions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101400 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 101400 - 8 APRIL 11, 2011 SIGNAGE SECTION 102600 - WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION PART 1- GENERAL. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Division 08 Section "Hardware." 3. Division 09 Section "Painting." 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Tii( Jude construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact - resistant wall protection unit. B. Shop Drawings: For each impact -resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Include Samples of accent strips to verify color selected. 1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps, and field splices. D. Material. Certificates: For. each impact -resistant plastic material, from manufactur- er. E. Maintenance Data: For each impact -resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use condi- tions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance. COi.I RGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 102600 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufac- turer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact -resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store impact -resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, ex- treme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C). a. Store corner -guard covers in a vertical position. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact -resistant wall protec- tion units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact -resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Corner -Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 8-foot long units. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 102600 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run as installed units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface -Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap - on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. In Pro Corporation. 2. Cover: Extruded .rigid plastic, niiiiimum 0.075-inch wall thickness. a. Profile: Nominal 2 'h -inch long leg and 1/4-inch corner radius, bull - nose.. b. Height: Floor to ceiling full height. C. Color and Texture: Clear. 3. Fire Rating: Same .rating as wall in which corner guard is installed; UL listed and labeled according to T TL 2079. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examiriv substialcs and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with re- quirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine walls to which impact -resistant wall protection will be attached for block- ing, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations re- quired for secure attachment of support fasteners. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Wall guards shall be cleaned prior to installation, so to remove all fingerprints and soil from mounted side of corner guard. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact -resistant wall protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, dcbris, and loose particles. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 102600 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install impact -resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 3.04 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia -based, household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 102600 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 102600 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, ANT) LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public -use washroom accessories. 2. Private -use bathroom accessories. 3. Underlavatory guards. 4. Custodial accessories. 5. Shower Surround. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 3. Division 09 Section "Tiling." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimcnsions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Matcrial and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accesbuiies to include in maintenance ma- nuals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, pro- vide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 102800 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clear- ances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, ad- justment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forg- ings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot -dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized af- ter fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate ser- vice). H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. J. Surround: Gelcoat/ Fiberglass. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 102800 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 2.02 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Bobrick Washroom Egnipment, Inc. B. Toilet 'Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Description: No. B-686 Double -roll dispenser 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. C. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser./Waste Receptacle: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick No. B-369. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3 Mounting: Recessed. a. Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, with Satin Finish. 5. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste -receptacle. liner. 6. Lockset: 'Tumbler type for towel -dispenser compartment. D. Liquid -Soap Dispenser: 1. Basis -of -Design Prod»ct: Bubrick No. B-4112 in Public Restrooms and Bo - brick No. B-8226 in Private Restrooms. 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Capacity: No. B-4112 - 40 oz., No. B-8226 - 34 oz. 4. Refill Indicator: Window type. E. Grab Bar: 1. Basis-ul-Design Product: Bobrick Series B-6806 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Stainless Steel with Satin Finish. 3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings and shall comply with all State and Local handicapped code requirements. F. Mirror Unit: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick No. B 165-2436: 2.03 SHOWER ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick No. B 6047 x 36. 2. Description: 1 1/4 -inch OD; Type 304, 18-gauge stainless steel. B. Shower Curtain: 1. Basis-uf-Design Product: Bobrick No. 204-2 2. Size: Minimum 6 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. 3. Material: Vinyl, minimum0.008-inch thick, opaque, matte. 4. Color: White. 5. Grominets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 102800 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome -plated or stainless -steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Pro- vide one hook per curtain grommet. C. Shower Module: one piece shower module constructed of gelcoat/fiberglass. 1. Basis -of -design Product: Best Bath Systems, Model No. LCS 4838 B2B, unit height 80", threshold height; 2" maximum. 2.04 PRIVATE -USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Robe Hook: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Danze NO. D446 137. 2. Description: Double -prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Chrome finish. C. Towel Bar: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Danze NO. D446 132. 2. Description: 1-inch diameter. 3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 4. Length: 24 inches. 5. Material and Finish: Chrome finish. 2.05 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: TRUEBRO "Trap Wrap" 500TW. 2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping, and allows service access without removing coverings. 3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded -plastic, white. 2.06 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indi- cated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Commercial Restroom Accessories. B. Mop and Broom Holder: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick No. B-224 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 102800 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES a. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, mop/broom holders, and rod sus- pended beneath shelf. b. Length: 36 inches. C. Hooks: Three. d. Mop/Broom Holders: Four spring -loaded rubber hat, cam type. e. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 1) Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch thick stainless steel. 2) Drying Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All handicapped bathroom fixtures and toilet accessories shall comply with all fed- eral, state and local Handicapped code requirements and comply with TAS (Texas Accessibility Standards) mounting locations and heights. B. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 2501bf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect blocking and plate inserts in framing to determine if material is in proper position for installation of accessories prior to wallboard surfacing being applied. Units securely attached to framing. Grab bars installed to withstand a 900 lb. load- ing condition; provide necessary concealed anchorage devices to meet load re- quirements. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING EANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or de- fective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposul surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommen- dations. END OF SECTION 102800 COLT STATION FIRE STA'11ON NO. 6 102800 - 5 APRIL 11, 2011 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemen- tary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 4. Division 09 Section "Non -Structural Metal Framing." 5. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, ma- terial descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. C. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, de- tails, and attachments to other work. D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabi- net schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. E. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Rated, Fire, Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with require- ments in ASTM E 814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 104413 - 1 APRIL 11 2011 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products in this section from one manufactur- er. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire ex- tinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Clear Acrylic: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. 2.02 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; 8115, 8117, or 2017. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. D. Semi -recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semi -recessed cabinet installa- tion. 1. Rolled -Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. 1) Door Material: Steel sheet. F. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. G. Door Glazing: Acrylic. H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. I. Accessories: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 APRIL 11 2011 104413 - 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire ex- tinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish. 2. Door Lock: None. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER". 1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened. 3) Lettering Color: White. 4) Orientation: Vertical. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked -enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinct, dour, quid trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Baked enamel or powder coat. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from mate- rials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.04 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Prod- ucts" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets sifter assembly. CO .T FOE STATION FIRE S fA ION NO.6 104413 - 3 APRIL 112011 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not accepta- ble. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.05 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning". Retain pa- ragraph below for factory -applied, baked -enamel or powder -coat finish for steel sheet. B. Powder -Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufactur- er's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semire- cessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semi -recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indi- cated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of go- verning authorities as directed by local Fire Marshall. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. I. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi -recessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 104413 - 4 APRIL 11 2011 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protec- tion cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written in- stallation instructions. B. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior sur- faces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. D. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 104413 COLLEGE srxrION FIRE STATION NO. F 104413 - 5 APRIL 112011 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cah uels:" 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and fi- nishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher sche- dule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an in- dependent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. C. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indi- cated. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 104416 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within spe- cified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. "Cosmic" Series Model 5E with nozzle. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix Band bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher loca- tion, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type: UL-rated 5 lb. nominal capacity, with mo- noammonium phosphate powder in manufacturer's standard heavy duty steel cy- linder with powder coat finish. Model: Galaxy 10. C. Wet Chemical: J.L. Industries, Inc. Saturn Series for class `K' series. Model: Sa- turn 15. 2.02 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Brackets: Equal to J. L. Industries Mark Brackets, Model No. MB 818 complete with required anchors, of required size for Cosmic 5X fire extinguishers. B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's Standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure. Brackets are to be used in Apparatus Bay on- ly. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 104416 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets: Maximum 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extin- guisher, to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities as directed by local Fire Marshall. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at lo- cations indicated. ID. Coordinatc all fire extinguisher types and mounting locations with Fire Marshall. END OF SECTION 104416 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 104416 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 105140 — BUNKER GEAR STORArF PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Provide and install gear storage units as shown on the drawings and as herein Specified. 1.03 RELATED WORK. SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 04 Section "Concrete Masonry Units" 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all prnrlucts to job site in manutacturer's original, standard containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for all products specified. PART y - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide GearGrid sturage units manufactured by Mid -Minnesota Wire, 670 SW 151h Street, Forest Lake, MN, 55025, 888-643-6694. Fax 651-464-4780 website: www.geargrid.com 2.02 MATERIALS A. Provide storage units equal to GearGrid wall mount single sided system. 1. 2 adjustable shelves per unit. 2. 3 adjustable apparel hooks per unit. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 105140 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 BUNKER GEAR STORAGE 3. 1 nameplate holder per unit. 4. 20" wide x 20" deep x 74 1/2" tall 5. Accessories (1 per unit): a. Gearglove drying hanger b. Geardryer coat drying hanger C. Helmet Holder 2.03 FINISH A. Durable powder coat finish, color: red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces receiving gear storage units for any defects that would impair installation and if any are found, make such corrections. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units using manufacturer's standard recommended methods. Use manufacturer's standard hardware where recommended to secure units to the wall. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces. B. Protection: Installer shall advise contractor of final protection and maintenance conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 105140 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 105140 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 BUNKER GEAR STORAGE SECTION 105613 — METAL STORAGE SHELVING PART' 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATE 11)OCUNIFNTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide and install mechanically -assisted storage shelving, including shelving, carriages, deck and track assembly as shown on drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Wallboard." 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver storage shelving in factory cartuns with labels intact, legibly marked. B. Storage: Sturc equipment in such a manner to protect equipment from the weather. C. Protection: Wrapping and protcctive covering shall remain on items until components are ready for installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Entire system shall be manufactured by a single company regularly engaged (at least five years) in the manufacture of steel movable storage systems. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufachirer's technical data, installation instructions, and color finish range of laminates and paints. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 105613 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 METAL STORAGE SHELVING 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide Owner a written warranty from manufacturer which shall warrant the shelving system to be free of defects in material and workmanship for five years from date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Furnish and install in layout shown on drawings: 1. Adjustable post bracket system manufactured by Tarrison Products, Ltd. System shall include (4) Post Kits, 54" long, chrome finish, model no. P54; (4) Wire Shelves, 18" W x 42" L, stainless steel finish, model no. S 1842S; (8) Post Shelf Brackets, 18", model no. APB 18CS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect flooring, walls, and related adjacent construction that would prevent quality installation of unit. B. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 3.02 FABRICATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install shelving plumb and level in accordance with final, approved layout configurations and in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove crating and packing materials from premises. B. Clean surfaces free of fingerprints, markings and dust. END OF SECTION 105613 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 105613 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 METAL STORAGE SHELVING SECTION 107100 — SUN CONTROL DEVICES . PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. Scction I.ucludes: 1. Sun Shade devices B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Structui4l Steel Praining." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANC A. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendation for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. B. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of sun shade unites prior to fabrication, wherever possible. C. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments Pre -assemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordination. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures, unless otherwise indicated." B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for required products, including finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of sun shade units and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and COLLEGE STATION FIRE. STATION NO.6 107100- 1 APRIL 11, 201.1 SUN CONTROL DEVICES other information to determine compliance with specified requirements. Submit complete line of premium and standard color samples for selection by Architect. D. Submit theoretical calculations prepared by a professional engineer specializing in the application of welding technology demonstration that each fillet weld jointing infill elements and frame members will withstand a minimum of 526 pounds of shear force. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Airolite — P.O. Box 410, 525 Western Road, Schofield, WI 54476-0410 715.841.8757, www.airolite.com or products having equivalent characteristics may be considered provided deviations are minor from original specifications. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Blade Material: Extruded Alumnim, Alloy 6063-T5 B. Blade Thickness: 0.081 in (2.06mm) C. Blade Width: 6 inch (152.4 mm) Other widths considered with Architect approval. D. Outrigger Material: Aluminum Plate, Alloy 5052-H32 or 6061-T6 E. Outrigger Material Thickness: 0.250 uib (6.35 mm) minimum F. Standard Facia: 4 inch (101.6 mm) G. Mounting: Plate H. Construction: Mechanically fastened and Welded where necessary. 2.03 FABRICATION A. All aluminum and frame componenst shall be assembled with fillet welds concealed from view unless the size of the grill makes bolted connections between grille sections necessary. Each weld shall be produced with the Pulsed Gas Metal Arc Welding Process. Intermediate connections shall be joined with a 1-inch long fillet weld with a minimum 1/8" leg. Frames shall be joined at each corner with full length GMAW fillet weld with a minimum 1/8 inch throat. B. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 107100- 2 APRIL 11, 2011 SUN CONTROL DEVICES F.I C. Manufacturer shall design and furnish all supports required to withstand a wind force of not less than 25 lbs per square foot. Sun Control members, blades, outriggers, fascia and anchorages shall be demonstrated to withstand the specified wind design loads. D. finish: 2-goat Fluroplymer: Louvers shall be cleaned, pretreated, and finished after assembly with an inhimbitive primer and oven curred Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 resin coating with minimum 1.2 mils dry -film coating thickness that meets or exceeds the performance requirments of AAMA 2605, "Voluntary Specification Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Cuordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage which are to be mounted on concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place sun control devices units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorage wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units, at Contractor's option. END OF SECTION 107100 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 APRIL 11, 2011 107100- 3 SUN CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 107500 — FLAGPOLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes wall -mounted flagpoles made from aluminum. B. Owner-Purnished Material: Flags. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Masonry." 2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel." 3. Division 07 Senrion "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for counter flashing at roof -mounted flagpoles. 4. Division 26 Scctirni "Extcriui Lighting" for site lighting fixtures. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to the following design crite- na: 1. Wind Loads: 130 mph according to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specifica- tions for Design of Metal Flagpoles." SEUASCE 7. 2. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, ma- terial descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 1. Include details of wall -mounted connections and mountings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 107500- 1 APRIL 11, 2011 FLAGPOLES C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and main- tenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each flagpole as complete unit, including fittings, ac- cessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufac- turer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: 1. Concord Industries, Inc. 2.02 FLAGPOLES A. Equal to the following specifications for Concord, standards: 1. Commercial ground set, one piece, cone tapered aluminum (C30060156) flag- pole with 30'-0" exposed height. 2. Shaft diameter: Base = 6", Top = 3.5". 3. Maximum wall thickness: 0.188". 4. Maximum unflagged windspeed: 222 mph. 5. Maximum flagged windspeed: 120+ mph. 6. Base: FC-11 spun aluminum flash collar. 7. Flagpole finish: deep luster, highly polished. 8. Cleats: Two 9" aluminum. Tamperproof stainless head bolts. 9. Halyards: Two sets of #10 white water -proof polypropylene, each equipped with 2 chrome swivel snaps. 10. Foundation sleeve: #16 gauge galvanized steel, with steel base plate and as detailed on the drawings. 11. Ball: #14 gauge aluminum with a flush seam and gold anodized finish. 12. Truck: Cast aluminum with stainless steel ball bearings and 2 sheaves. 13. Flag: American Flag 6'-0" x 10'-0" rip stop nylon with embroidered stars and sewn stripes furnished with two non -corrosive grommets. Texas flag 6-0 x 9'0". 14. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush seam ball in size to match pole butt diameter. 15. Flash Collars: Spun aluminum Concord #FC-11. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 107500- 2 APRIL 11, 2011 FLAGPOLES 2.03 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush -seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole -butt diameter. B. External Halyard: Ball -bearing, nonfouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 5/16-inch diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inch cast - metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Provide two halyards and two cleats at each flagpole. 2. Provide cast -metal cleat covers, finished to match flagpole, secured with cy- linder locks. 3. Halvard Flag ,Snaps: Piuvidc two stainless -steel swivel snap hooks per ha- lyard. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Gront: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, non- gaseous grout complying with A.STM C 1107. 2.05 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finisheb Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not accept- able. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.06 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Natural Satin Finish: AA-M32, fine, directional, medium satin polish; buff comply- ing with AA-M20; seal aluminum surfaces with clear, bard -coat wax. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including foundation; accurate place- ment, pattern, orientation of anchor bolts, and other conditions affecting perfor- mance of the Work. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 107500- 3 APRIL 11, 2011 FLAGPOLES B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and man- ufacturer's written instructions. B. Mounting Brackets: Anchor brackets securely through to structural support with fasteners as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 107500 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 107500- 4 APRIL 11, 2011 FLAGPOLES SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1- f rNERAT, 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment including: a. Gas range. 2. Refrigerator/freezers. 3. Icemakers. 4. Cleaning appliances: a. Dishwashers. b. Clothes washers. c. Clothes dryers. d. Extractor. e. Microwave. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section " iteri.or Architectural Woodwork" for custom-made cab- inets and plastic -laminate tops that receive residential appliances. 2. Division .22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water distribution piping connections to residential appliances. 3. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping connections to residential appliances. 4. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks, waste disposers, and instant hot-water dispensers. 5. Divisiun 23 Sections "Facility Natural -Gas Piping" and "Facility Liquefied - Petroleum Gas Piping" for gas pipe connections to residential appliances. 6. Division 23 Section "Power Ventilation" Kitchen exhaust fan. 7. Division 26 Section 'Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteris- tics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance. COLLEGE STATION F1RE STATION NO.6 113100 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES B. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comp- ly with requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufac- turer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1. Provide products from, same manufacturer for each type of appliance required. 2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes re- quirements for product's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthet- ic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to ad- joining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certi- fications: 1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having Ju- risdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. 3. ANSI: Provide gas -burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards. 4. NAECA: Provide residential appliances that comply with NAECA standards. D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Texas Accessibility Stan- dards. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 113100 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 1. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-ycar litnited warranty foi. iii-home service on the scaled refrigeration system. 2. Dishwashei: 10-year warranty for in -home service against deterioration of tub and door liner. 3. Clothes Washer: 10 • year limited warranty for the inner wash basket and outer tub, and five-year limited warranty for the balance suspension system and drive transmission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below intiuduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the prod- ucts specified. 2.02 COOKING APPLIANCES A. Range RG: 1. Products: a. Wolf Range Co., Affiliate of Sub -Zero Frcczer Co., Inc. b. Gas Range Model No. R606(:(T- 60", 6-Burner w/ Griddle. 2. Features: a. Ignition System: Electronic b. Insulated Side Panels c. Finish: Stainless Steel with red knobs. d. Range Splash: 22-gauge, stainless steel splash with satin finish at ramp location to completely cover wall area between hood and extend from 2 inches below range top to the underside of hood. B. Microwave: (?) 1. Products: a. LG Studio Series with Trim Kit. b. Model LSRMZ 05 ST, MK 2030 F. 2. Features: a. 2.0 Cubic Ft. Capacity h. 1200 Watts C. Outdoor Gas Grill 1. Products: a. Wolf 42" gas grill b. Model OG 42 with accessory doors COLLECTE NTATION FIRE STATIUN NO.6 113100 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 2.03 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES A. Refrigerator/Freezer RF: (3) 1. Products: a. LG French 3-door. b. Model: LFC 25776 ST 2. Features: a. Capacity (CU. FT.): 25.0 b. Glass shelves. c. Shelf Area: Adjustable. d. Door storage: Adjustable. B. Icemaker (1) 1. KitchenAid a. Model KUIC 18 PNXS 2.04 CLEANING APPLIANCES A. Dishwasher DW: (3) 1. Products: KitchenAid a. Model: KUDE 40 FXSS b. 24" built-in dishwasher 2. Features: a. Stainless Steel Interior and Exterior b. Energy Star qualified c. Upper and Lower racks B. Clothes Washer/Dryer: 1. Product: Washer a. LG. b. Model: WM 2501 HVA 2. Features: Washer a. Front Loader b. 9 Wash Program c. Color: Steel d. Stainless Basket e. Spin speeds 500, 650, 1200 RPM 3. Product: Dryer a. LG. b. Model: DLEX 2501 V/W 4. Features: Dryer a. 9 Drying Program. b. Galvanized Steel c. Color: Steel d. Interin Cylinder 5. Extractor: a. Speed Queen b. SC 30 — 301b. capacity. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 113100 - 4 APRIL 1 l , 2011 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connec- tions before equipment installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B: Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper function- ing and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Division,. 22 and `'b fui plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean con- dition, ready for operation. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. Refer to Divi- sion 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 113100 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 113100 - 5 APRIL 11, 2011 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide projection screens as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections includc the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Draper, Inc. 2. Da-Lite Project Screens 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings, manufacturer's standard brochures and details based on the contract documents submitted to the architect for review and approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEMS A. Ceiling Recessed Projection Screen shall be electric motor operated by Draper, "Signature/Series E", 9' x 9', matte white projection surface with 2' drop or products having equivalent characteristics may be considered provided deviations are minor from original specifications COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 115213 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor to examine case, screen, and operation prior to installation. Field measurements must be verified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Materials installed level, plumb, straight and true to line. Corner and edges properly closed without any gaps. Operable mechanisms properly adjusted. Securely attach case to bottom side of structure. END OF SECTION 115213 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 115213 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 PROJECTION SCREENS SECTION 115270 - TELEVISION ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARV A. Section Includes: 1. Television accessories as shown on the drawings and as herein specified shall be installed in each classroom and as indicated on drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Peerless Industries. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures", unless otherwise indicated. B. Shop drawings, manufacturer's standard brochures and details based on the contract documents submitted to the architect for review and approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEMS A. Television Mounting Bracket: Smartmount: Universal Tilt Wall Mount for 32" to 56" flat mount screens, ST 650 P. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 1.15270 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 TELEVISION ACCESSORIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor to examine mounting and operation prior to installation. Verify site conditions prior to installation. Field measurements must be verified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Materials installed level, plumb, straight and true to line. Operable mechanisms properly adjusted. B. Contractor shall install and coordinate locations for mounting brackets with Architect. C. Center of screen (CS) mounting height shall be 9'-1 1/2". , D. Provide appropriate wall blocking. E. Install bracket in center of wall hortizontal. END OF SECTION 115270 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 115270 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 TELEVISION ACCESSORIES SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following,: 1. IIotizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Sloop Drawings: Show fahrication and installation details for horizontal louver r> blinds.:. C. a Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indi- cated. 1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches long. D. Window Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Provide for all win- dows. E. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind, signed by product manufacturer. F. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a sin- gle manufacturer. B. Product Standard: Provide horizuntal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 1221 l3 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construc- tion and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indi- cated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construc- tion progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Hunter Douglas Contract. 2. Levolor Contract, a Newell Rubbermaid Company C. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners. 1. Width: 1 inch. a. Spacing: Not less than 7.2 slats/inch. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Provide slats designed and spaced to achieve maximum overlap and closure and optimum light exclusion. Notch rear of blade at ladders and offset route holes at left cords to enable blades to touch one another when closed. 4. Finish: One color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. D. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following: 1. Capacity: As indicated on shop drawings. 2. Integrated HeadrailNalance: Curved face. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 122113 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS E. Bottom Rail: Formed -steel or extruded -aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends top contoured to match crowned shape of slat bottom contoured for minimizing light gaps; with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill. F. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 2 Inch or Less: Braided string. a. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard H. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm -gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand pre- venting over rotation, and linkage rod, and the following: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand. 2. Length of Tilt Control: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Tilt: Full. I. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. J. Valance: Manufacturer's standard. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of slats. K. Mounting: End mounting, permitting easy removal and replacement without da- maging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufactur- er's full range as indicated in a window treatment schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate loca- tions of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only aftcr unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units ac- cording to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Install intermediate COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 122113 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between ad- jacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of bind- ing or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manu- facturer and Installer that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner ap- proved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 122113 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 122113 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 123661- QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz countertops. 2. Setting materials and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Division 06 Section "Wood Framing." 3. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Millwork." 4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic `file with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 2. A118.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. B. ASTM Tnternational (ASTM: 1. C97 - Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. 2. C99 - Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. 3. C170 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone. 4. C241 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic. 5. C482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 6. C484 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile. 7. C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 123661 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 8. C648 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile. 9. C650 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical Substances. 10. C672/C672M - Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals. 11. C880 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone. 12. C 1026 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze -Thaw Cycling. 13. C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull -Meter Method. 14. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Minimum [2] years [documented] experience in work of this Section. B. Warranty 1. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include countertop layout, dimensions, materials, finishes, cutouts, and attachments. B. Samples: 1. 6" x 6" quartz samples in specified color. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Contract Documents are based on products by Cambria. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Quartz Sheet: 1. Product: Cambria. 2. Composition: Quartz aggregate, resin, and color pigments formed into flat slabs. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 123661 -2 APRIL 11, 2011 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS 3. Anti -microbial protection: Microban° by Microbano International, Inc., integral to sheet. 7. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 8. Thickness:3/4" 9. Physical characteristics: a. Static coefficient of friction: 1.02 dry, 0.51 wet, tested to ASTM C 1028. b. Water absorption: Maximum 0.03 percent, tested to ASTM C97. C. Compressive strength: Minimum 29,000 psi, tested to ASTM C 170. d. Bond strength: Minimum 210 psi, tested to ASTM C482. e. Modulus of rupture: Minimum 6300 psi, tested to ASTM C99. f. Flexural strength: Minimum 5800 psi, tested to ASTM C880. g. Breaking strength: Minimum 480 lbf, tested to ASTM C648. h. Stain resistance: Not affected by 10 percent hydrochloric acid or 10 percent KOH, tested to ASTM C650. i. Thermal shock resistance: Pass 5 cycles, tested to ASTM C484. j. Abrasive index: 65-Ha = 2.5, tested to ASTM C241. k. Thermal expansion: 1.670 x 10"5 in/in/deg F, tested to ASTM C531. 1. Deicing resistance: Rating of 0, tested to ASTM C672/C672M. m. Freeze/thaw resistance: 0 tiles at 15 cycles, tested to ASTM C 1026. n. Flame spread rating: Class 1, tested to ASTM E84. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by quartz manufacturer. B. Joint Sealer: 1. Latisil Tile and Stone Sealant by Laticrete° International, Inc. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Cut quartz panels accurately to required shapes and dimensions. B. Radius exposed edges. C. Fabricate with hairline joints. D. Cut holes for sink faucets. E. Edge Style: Bullnose. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 123661 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive countertops; remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with adhesion. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Adhere countertops to supports with continuous beads of adhesive. C. Set plumb and level. Align adjacent pieces in same plane. D. Install with hairline joints. E. Fill joints between countertops and adjacent construction with joint sealer; finish smooth and flush. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from level and plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non -cumulative. B. Maximum variation in plane between adjacent pieces at joint: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed countertops with non -staining sheet coverings. END OF SECTION 123661 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 123661 - 4 APRIL 1 l , 2011 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS SECTION 129000 - FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SIJM.MARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bicycle Racks. B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011000 - Sunituary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Major components of bicycle racks are specified to be by Dero Bike Rack Company. Equipment models, components and type are specified to define overall quality. Equipment manufacturer substitution request shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to bidding. B. Supply equipment that conforms to all applicable standards, meets Consumer Product Safety Commission Guidelines, and complies with ADA criteria. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Complete shop drawings equipment list, installation instructions and manufacturer's standard brochures based on contract documents submitted to the Architect for review and approval. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacnirer shall warranty any equipment failure due to defects in workmanship or materials within three years from substantial completion of the project. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 129000 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BIKE RACK A. Manufacturer: Dero Bike Rack Company. B. Model: Hoop Rack, Heavy Duty with 2 bike capacity. C. Bike rack shall be constructed of 2" schedule 40 pipe (2.375 OD) D. Installation: In ground mount E. Dimensions: As indicated in drawings. Field measurements must be verified. F. Finish: Powdercoat finish: Color to be selected by architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor to examine equipment prior to installation. Field measurements must be verified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall install all equipment according to manufacturer's instructions. Equipment installed level, plumb, straight and true to line. Operable mechanisms properly adjusted. END OF SECTION 129000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 APRIL 11, 2011 129000 - 2 FURNISHINGS AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 131000 — WATER FEATURE PART 1- GENERAL L01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Weeping Water Accessory Items. 2. Water spill edge. 3. Variable speed pump. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing." 2. Division 32 Section "Exterior Improvements." 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The installer/contractor must have related experience in the installation of water feature. B. Coordination between electrical and plumbing utilities critical. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 "Submittal Procedures". PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Scalloped Edge Cascade — Waterfall Edge. B. Variable Speed Pump - 1.5 HP with stealth pump. C. Ultraviolet Spectra Light - SPA UV System. D. Auto Water Fill Sensor. COT d.EGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 131000 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 WATER FEATURE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions for installation., Coordinate supply of water and power to water feature site prior to finish site work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate electrical stub up during laying of utilities. Size and locate water supply to water feature site. B. Conceal all accessories in site wall cavities providing access panels/points for future maintenance. END OF SECTION 131000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 131000 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 WATER FEATURE eCOMcheck Software Version 3.8.1 �(, Mechanical Compliance Certificate 2009 IECC Suction 1: Project Information Project Type: New Construction Project Title : College Station Fire Station # 6 Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: College Station, TX City of College Station Jordan & Skala Engineers, Inc. 1101 '1 exas Ave. 14240 Midway Rd. College Station, TX 77840 Dallas, TX 75244 469-385-1616 Section 2: General Information Building Location (for weather data): College Station, Texas Climate Zone: 2a Section 3: Mechanical Systems List �iaaatfty SY�tgRtlYRt�ti&rlRti4n 1 GF-1/CU-1 (Single Zone) Heating: 1 each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 88 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 72 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 11.40 EER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-1A/CU-1 (Single Zone) : Heating: 1 each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 88 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 72 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 11.40 EER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-2/CU-2 (Single Zone) : Heatii ry: I each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 44 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92,10% Ft Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity - 24 WWII,, Efficiency = 14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser I Ulf-3/CU-3 (Single Zone) : Heating. 1 each Cent, dl Furnace, Vas, Capacity = 44 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 24 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-4/CU-4 (Single Zone) : Heating: 1 each - Contral Fw mace, Cas, Capacity = 44 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity - 1 R kbtu/h, ktfiriPri y = 14.00 .^,EER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-5/CU b (Multiple -Zone): Heating: 1 each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 66 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 29 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-6/CU-6 (Single Zone) : Heating: 1 each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 66 kRtu/h, Efficiency - 92.10`IS, Et Cooling, 1 each Split ;y,Iom, Capacity - 34 Kbtu/h, Efficiency = 14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-7/CU-7 (Single Zone) : Heating: 1 eat.li - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 88 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 49 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-8/CU-8 (Multiple -Zone) : Heating: 1 each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 44 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 33 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 GF-9/CU-9 (Multiple -Zone) : Heating: 1 each - Central Frirnace, Cas, Capacity = 66 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 29 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 14.00 SFFR, Air-Coolcd Cundenser 1 GF-10/CU-10 (Sin01a Zono) : Heating: 1 each - Centrai furnace, Gas, Capacity = 110 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity 59 kBtu/h, Efficiency -14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser 1 rF.11/Cl.l 11 (3inyle Zbiie) : Heating: 1 raarh - Central I umace, Uas, Capacity = 66 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 92.10% Et Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 34 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 14.00 SEER, Air -Cooled Condenser Project Title: College Station Fire Station # 6 Report date: 04/04/11 Data filename: CIVroject201011030348-College Station Fire Station No.6lReferencelComChecklColllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 1 of 8 4 GH-1 thru GH-4 (Unknown) : Heating: 4 each - Unit Heater, Gas, Capacity = 45 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 83.00% Ec 1 GH-5 (Unknown) : Heating: 1 each - Unit Heater, Gas, Capacity = 30 kBtu/h, Efficiency = 82.00% Ec 4 EH-1 thru EH-4 (Unknown) : Heating: 4 each - Unit Heater, Electric, Capacity = 10 kBtu/h 2 WH-1, WH-2: Gas Storage Water Heater, Capacity: 93 gallons, Input Rating: 75 Btu/h w/ Circulation Pump, Efficiency: 96.00 EF Section 4: Requirements Checklist Requirements Specific To: GF-1/CU-1 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) n 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 11.0 EER Requirements Specific To: GF-1A/CU-1 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 11.0 EER Requirements Specific To: GF-2/CU-2 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-3/CU-3 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-4/CU-4 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-5/CU-5 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER ❑ 3. Minimum one temperature control device per zone ❑ 4. Systems serving more than one zone must be VAV systems ❑ 5. Controls capable of resetting supply air temp (SAT) by 25% of SAT -room temp difference ❑ Exception: Systems that prevent reheating, recooling or mixing of heated and cooled supply air ❑ Exception: Seventy five percent of the energy for reheating is from site -recovered or site solar energy sources. ❑ Exception: Zones with peak supply air quantities of 300 cfm (142 Us) or less. Requirements Specific To: GF-6/CU-6 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-7/CU-7 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-8/CU-8 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER ❑ 3. Minimum one temperature control device per zone ❑ 4. Systems serving more than one zone must be VAV systems ❑ 5. Controls capable of resetting supply air temp (SAT) by 25% of SAT -room temp difference ❑ Exception: Systems that prevent reheating, recooling or mixing of heated and cooled supply air ❑ Exception: Seventy five percent of the energy for reheating is from site -recovered or site solar energy sources. ❑ Exception: Zones with peak supply air quantities of 300 cfm (142 Us) or less. Requirements Specific To: GF-9/CU-9 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) Project Title: College Station Fire Station # 6 Report date: 04/04/11 Data filename: Q:\Project2010\1030348-College Station Fire Station No.6\Reference\ComCheck\Colllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 2 of 8 ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER ❑ 3. 'Minimum one temperature control device per zone ❑ 4. Systems serving more than one zone must be VAV systems ❑ 5. 'Controls capable of rpsPtting supply air ►emp (SAY) by 25% of SAT -room temp difference 0 : Exception: Systems that prevent reheating, reconling or ►nixie rg of heated and cooled supply air ❑ Exception: Seventy five percent of the energy for reheating is from site-rer:nvered or site solar energy sources. ❑ Exception: Zones with peak supply air quantities of 300 cfm (142 Us) or less. Requirements Specific To: GF-10/101.1-10 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-11/CU-11 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) ❑ 2. Equipment minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GH-1 thru GH-4 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimurn Pfficiency: Unit Heater (Gas): An n % Er. Requirements Specific To: GH-5 : ❑ 1. Equipment minimum efficiency: Unit Heater (Gas): 80.0 % Ec Requirements Specific To: EH-1 thru EH-4: None Requirements Specific To: WH-1, WH-2 : ❑ 1. Gas Storage Water Heater efficiency: 0.5 EF ❑ 2. All piping in circulating system insulated ❑ 3. Hot water storage temperature adjustable down to 120°F or lower ❑ 4. Automatic time control of heat tapes and recirculating systems present ❑ 5. Controls will shut off operation of circulating pump between water heaterlboiler and storage tanks within 5 minutes after end of heating cycle Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is applicable: ❑ 1. Plant equipment and system capacity no greater than needed to meet loads ❑ Exception: Standby equipment automatically off when primary system is operating ❑ Exception: Multiple units controlled to sequence operation as a function of load ❑ 2. Minimum one temperature control device per system ❑ 3. Minimum one humidity control device per installed humidification/dphrrmidifrcotioii ,,yyrem ❑ 4. Load calf ulations ppr ASHRAC/AC►:.A 5t3ndard 183 ❑ L. Automatic Controls: Setback to 55°F (heat) and 85°F (rool); 7 day duck, 2-hour occupant override, 10-hour backup ❑ E,ccepdon: Continuously operating zoiies i] Exupplim, 7 kW dommid ur less, submit calculations 6. Outside -air smirce for verdildllon; system capable of reducing OSA to required minimum 07. R-5 supply and return air duct Insulation in unconditiui red spaces R-8 supply grid return air duct insulation outside the building R-8 insulation between ducts and the building exterior when ducts are part of a building assembly ❑ Exception: Ducts located within equipment Cl Exception: Ducts with interior and exterior temperature difference not exr.Peding 15"f'. ❑ 8. Mechanical fasteners and spalantc u3ed to connect ducts and air distribution equipment ❑ K Ducts sealed - longitudinal seams on ri0id duuis; tray rsverse seams nn all ductb, UL 7131A or 181 B tapes and mastics Lj lu.l lul water pipe insulation: 1.5 iii. for pipes <=1.5 in. and 2 in. for pipes >1.5 in. Chilled water/refrigeranUbrine pipe insulation: 1.5 in. for pipes <=1.5 in. and 1.5 in. for pipes �1.5 in. Steam pipe insulation: 1.5 in. for pipes <=1.5 in. and 3 in. for pipes %1.5 in El Exception- Piping withiii HVAU equipment. ❑ Exception: Fluid temperatures between 55 and 105"17. ❑ Exception: Fluid not heated or cooled with renewable energy. ❑ Exception: Pipiiiy within room fan -coil (with AHR1440 rating) and unit ventilators (with AHRI840 rating). ❑ Exception: Runouts <4 ft in length. r'rujecl IItle: College Station Fire Station # 6 r Report date: 04/04/11 Data filename: Q:1Prcject201011030348-College Station Fire Station No.6lReferencelComChecklColllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 3 of 8 ❑ 11.Operation and maintenance manual provided to building owner ❑ 12.Piping, insulated to 1/2 in. if nominal diameter of pipe is <1.5 in.; Larger pipe insulated to 1 in. thickness ❑ 13. Lavatory faucet outlet temperatures in public restrooms limited to 110°F (43°C) ❑ 14.Thermostatic controls have 5°F deadband ❑ Exception: Thermostats requiring manual changeover between heating and cooling ❑ Exception: Special occupancy or special applications where wide temperature ranges are not acceptable and are approved by the authority having jurisdiction. ❑ 15.Balancing devices provided in accordance with IMC (2006) 603.17 ❑ 16.Demand control ventilation (DCV) present for high design occupancy areas (>40 person/1000 ft2 in spaces >500 ft2) and served by systems with any one of 1) an air -side economizer, 2) automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or 3) a design outdoor airflow, greater than 3000 cfm. ❑ Exception: Systems with heat recovery. ❑ Exception: Multiple -zone systems without DDC of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. ❑ Exception: Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. ❑ Exception: Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 cfm. ❑ 17.Motorized, automatic shutoff dampers required on exhaust and outdoor air supply openings ❑ Exception: Gravity dampers acceptable in buildings <3 stories ❑ Exception: Gravity dampers acceptable in systems with outside or exhaust air flow rates less than 300 cfm where dampers are interlocked with fan ❑ 18.Automatic controls for freeze protection systems present ❑ 19. Exhaust air heat recovery included for systems 5,000 cfm or greater with more than 70% outside air fraction or specifically exempted ❑ Exception: Hazardous exhaust systems, commercial kitchen and clothes dryer exhaust systems that the International Mechanical Code prohibits the use of energy recovery systems. ❑ Exception: Systems serving spaces that are heated and not cooled to less than 60°F. ❑ Exception: Where more than 60 percent of the outdoor heating energy is provided from site -recovered or site solar energy. ❑ Exception: Heating systems in climates with less than 3600 HDD. ❑ Exception: Cooling systems in climates with a 1 percent cooling design wet -bulb temperature less than 64°F. ❑ Exception: Systems requiring dehumidification that employ energy recovery in series with the cooling coil. ❑ Exception: Laboratory fume hood exhaust systems that have either a variable air volume system capable of reducing exhaust and makeup air volume to 50 percent or less of design values or, a separate make up air supply meeting the following makeup air requirements: a) at least 75 percent of exhaust flow rate, b) heated to no more than 2'F below room setpoint temperature, c) cooled to no lower than 3'F above room setpoint temperature, d) no humidification added, e) no simultaneous heating and cooling. Section 5: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed mechanical design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed mechanical systems have been designed to meet the 2009 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.8.1 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist. -NED (Ober - Name - Title Signature Date Project Notes: 1) Mechanical Systems GF-5/CU-5, GF-8/CU-8, and GF-9/CU-9: By pass dampers are provided to By -Pass the air from supply air duct back to return air duct when the zone dampers are not calling for cooling and heating. 2) Manual Volume Dampers for Outdoor/Exhaust Ducts: Building contains two stories of occupied spaces. The third floor is use only as Mechanical room. So the Manual/Gravity Dampers are provided for outdoor/Exhaust air. Project Title: College Station Fire Station # 6 Report date: 04/04/11 Data filename: Q:\Project2010\1030348-College Station Fire Station No.6\Reference\ComCheck\Colllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 4 of 8 COMcheck Software Version 3.8.1 Mechanical Requirements Description 2009 IECC The following list provides more detailed descriptions of the requirements in Section 4 of the Mechanical Compliance Certificate. Requirements Specific To: GF-1/CU-1 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficielu,y Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/nr rnoling oquipnvirnt is covered by the ASHRAE 9u.1 Code and must meet the following minimum cffiuenry Split System: 11.0 ELK Split System: 11.0 EER Requirements Specific To: GF-1A/CU-1 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency - Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/nr cooling equipnieuit Is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 11.0 EER Split System: 11.0 EER Requirements Specific To: GF-2/CU-2 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 18% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minirnum Pffiriency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-3/CU-3 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following mininiurn eff uiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUF) 9 The specified hooting and/or cooling egnipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-4/CU-4 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum effiUbticy: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-5/CU-5 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficie, icy: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified hooting and/ur cooling Pquipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER 3. Each zone of a multiple -zone system must have its own temperature control device. 4. Systems serving multiple thermostatic control zones must be variable -flow systems. Zone terminal controls must reduce the flow of primary supply air before reheating, recooling, or mixing air streams. 5. Automatic controls capable of resetting supply -air temperature (within a range of 25 percent of the difference between supply -air and design air temperature) in response to building loads or outdoor air temperature exist on systems serving multiple zones. Exception: Systems that prevent reheating, recooling or mixing of heated and cooled supply air Exception: Seventy five percent nt the energy for reheating is frnm cite -recovered ui site solar energy sources. Exception. Zones with peek ai apply air gpanlilies of son cfm (142 Us) or less. Requirements Specific To: GF-6/CU-6 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER Project Title: College Station Fire Station # 6 Report date: 04/04/11 Data filename: OAProject2010\1030348-College Station Fire Station No.6lReference\ComChecklColllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 5 of 8 Requirements Specific To: GF-7/CU-7 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-8/CU-8 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER 3. Each zone of a multiple -zone system must have its own temperature control device. 4. Systems serving multiple thermostatic control zones must be variable -flow systems. Zone terminal controls must reduce the flow of primary supply air before reheating, recooling, or mixing air streams. 5. Automatic controls capable of resetting supply -air temperature (within a range of 25 percent of the difference between supply -air and design air temperature) in response to building loads or outdoor air temperature exist on systems serving multiple zones. Exception: Systems that prevent reheating, retooling or mixing of heated and cooled supply air Exception: Seventy five percent of the energy for reheating is from site -recovered or site solar energy sources. Exception: Zones with peak supply air quantities of 300 cfm (142 Us) or less. Requirements Specific To: GF-9/CU-9 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER 3. Each zone of a multiple -zone system must have its own temperature control device. 4. Systems serving multiple thermostatic control zones must be variable -flow systems. Zone terminal controls must reduce the flow of primary supply air before reheating, recooling, or mixing air streams. 5. Automatic controls capable of resetting supply -air temperature (within a range of 25 percent of the difference between supply -air and design air temperature) in response to building loads or outdoor air temperature exist on systems serving multiple zones. - Exception: Systems that prevent reheating, recooling or mixing of heated and cooled supply air - Exception: Seventy five percent of the energy for reheating is from site -recovered or site solar energy sources. - Exception: Zones with peak supply air quantities of 300 cfm (142 Us) or less. Requirements Specific To: GF-10/CU-10 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GF-11/CU-11 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Central Furnace (Gas): 80.0 % Et (or 78% AFUE) 2. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Split System: 13.0 SEER Split System: 13.0 SEER Requirements Specific To: GH-1 thru GH-4 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Unit Heater (Gas): 80.0 % Ec Requirements Specific To: GH-5 : 1. The specified heating and/or cooling equipment is covered by the ASHRAE 90.1 Code and must meet the following minimum efficiency: Unit Heater (Gas): 80.0 % Ec Requirements Specific To: EH-1 thru EH-4: None Requirements Specific To: WH-1, WH-2 1. Service water heating equipment used solely for heating potable water, pool heaters, and hot water storage tanks must meet the following miniumum efficiency: Gas Storage Water Heater efficiency: 0.5 EF 2. Insulation must be provided for recirculating system piping, including the supply and return piping of a circulating tank type water heater. 3. Temperature controls must be provided that allow for storage temperature adjustment from 120°F or lower to a maximum temperature compatible with the intended use except when the manufacturer's installation instructions specify a higher minimum thermostat setting Project Title: College Station Fire Station # 6 Report date: 04/04/11 Data filename: Q:\Project2010\1030348-College Station Fire Station No.6\Reference\ComCheck\Colllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 6 of 8 to minimize condensation and resulting cnrrnsion. flocumentatrur r of the installation instructions must be provided to be exempted from this, reyuirument. 4. Systems designed to rnaintam usage temperatures in hot water pipes, such as recirculating hot water systems or heat trace, must be equipped with automatic time switches or other controls that can be set to switch off the temperature maintenance system during extended periods when hot water is not required. 5. When used to maintain storage tank water temperature, recirculating pumps must be equipped with controls limiting operation to the start of the heating cycle to a maximum of 5 minutes after the end of the heating cycle. Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is applicable: 1. All equipment and systems must be sized to be no greater than needed to meet calculated loads. A single piece of equipment providing both heating and cooling must satisfy this provision for one function with the capacity for the other function as small as possible, within available equipment options. - Exception: The equipment and/or system capacity may be greater than calculated loads for standby purposes. Standby equipment must be automatically controlled to be off when the primary equipment and/or system is operating. - Exception: Multiple units of the same equipment type whose combined capacities exceed the calculated load are allowed if they are provided with controls to sequence operation of the units as the load increases or decreases. 2. Each heating or cooling system serving a single zone must have its own temperature control device. 3. Each humidification system must have its own humidity control device. 4. Design heating and cooling loads for the building must be determined using procedures in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals or an approved equivalent calculation procedure. 5. The system or zone control must be a programmable thermostat or other automatic control meeting the following criteria: a) capable of setting back temperature to 55°F during heating and setting up to 85'F during cooling, b) capable of automatically setting back or shutting down systems during unoccupied hours using 7 different day schedules, c) have an accessible 2-hour occupant override, d) have a battery back-up capable of maintaining programmed settings for at least 10 hours without power. - Exception: A setback or shutoff control is not required on thermostats that control systems serving areas that operate continuously: - Exception: A setback or shutoff control is not required on systems with total energy demand of 2 kW (6,826 Btu/h) or less. 6. The system must supply outside ventilation air as required by Chapter 4 of the International Mechanical Code. If the ventilation system is designed to supply outdoor -air quantities exceeding minimum required levels, the system must be capable of reducing outdoor -air flow to the minimum required levels. 7. Air ducts must be insulated to the following levels: a) Supply ai id return air ducts for conditioned air lowled In unconditioned spaces (spaces neither heated nor cooled) must be insulated with a minimum of R-5. Unconditioned spaces include attics, crawl spaces, unheated basements, and unheated garages. b) Supply and return air ducts and plenums must be insulated to a minimum of R-8 when located outside the building. c) When ducts are located within exterior components (e.g., floors or roofs), minimum R-8 insulation is required only between the duct and the building exterior. - Exception: Duct insulation is not required on ducts located within equipment. - Exception: Duct insulation is not required when the design temperature difference between the interior and exterior of the duct or plenum does not exceed 15°F. 8. Mechanical fasteners and seals, mastics, or gaskets must be used when connecting ducts to fans and other air distribution equipment, including multiple -zone terminal units. 9. All joints, longitudinal and transverse seams, and connections in ductwork must be securely sealed using weldments; mechanical fasteners with seals, gaskets, or mastics; mesh and mastic sealing systems; or tapes. Tapes and mastics must be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A and shall be marked '181A-P'for pressure sensitive tape, '181A-M' for mastic or'181A-H' for heat -sensitive tape. Tapes and mastics used to seal flexible air ducts and flexible air connectors shall comply with UL 181 B and shall be marked '181 B-FX for pressure -sensitive tape or'181 B-M' for mastic. Unlisted duct tape is not permitted as a sealant on any metal ducts. 10. All pipes serving space -conditioning systems must be insulated as follows: Hot water piping for heating systems: 1 1/2 in. for pipes 1 1/2-in. nominal diameter, 2 in. for pipes >1 1/7-in nominal dimneler. Chilled water, refrigerant, and brine piping systems: 1 1/2 in. insulation for pipes 1 1/2-in. nominal diameter, 1 1/2 in. insulation for pipes >1 1/2-in. nominal diameter. Steam piping: 1 112 in. insulation for pipes 1 1/2-in. nominal diameter, 3 in. insulation for pipes >1 1/2-in. nominal diameter. - Exception: Pipe insulation is not required for factory -installed piping within HVAC eqr rtpment. - Exception: Pipe insulation is not required for piping that conveys fluids having a design operating temperature range between 55°F and 105'F. - Exception: Pipe insulation is not required for piping that conveys fluids that have not been heated or cooled through the use of fossil fuels or electric power. - Exception: Piping within room fan -coil (with AHRI440 rating) and unit ventilators (witty AHRI840 rating). Project Title: College Station Fire Station # 6 Report date: 04/04/11 Data filename: Q %Project2010\1030348-College Station Fire Station No.6\Reference\ComCheck\Colllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 7 of 8 - Exception: Pipe insulation is not required for runout piping not exceeding 4 ft in length and 1 in. in diameter between the control valve and HVAC coil. 11. Operation and maintenance documentation must be provided to the owner that includes at least the following information: a) equipment capacity (input and output) and required maintenance actions b) equipment operation and maintenance manuals c) HVAC system control maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams, schematics, and control sequence descriptions; desired or field -determined set points must be permanently recorded on control drawings, at control devices, or, for digital control systems, in programming comments d) complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate. 12. Service hot water piping, where required, must be insulated to 1/2 in. if pipe less than 1.5 in. nominal diameter. Larger pipe must be insulated to 1 in.. Pipe insulation will have a conductivity of less than 0.28 Btu.in/(h-ft2-°F). 13. Temperature controlling means must be provided to limit the maximum temperature of water delivered from lavatory faucets in public facility restrooms to 110°F. 14. Thermostats controlling both heating and cooling must be capable of maintaining a 5°F deadband (a range of temperature where no heating or cooling is provided). Exception: Deadband capability is not required if the thermostat does not have automatic changeover capability between heating and cooling. Exception: Special occupancy or special applications where wide temperature ranges are not acceptable and are approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 15. Balancing devices provided in accordance with IMC (2006) 603.17. 16. Demand control ventilation (DCV) required for high design occupancy areas (>40 person/1000 ft2 in spaces >500 ft2) and served by systems with any one of 1) an air -side economizer, 2) automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or 3) a design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. Exception: Systems with heat recovery. Exception: Multiple -zone systems without DDC of individual zones communicating with a central control panel. Exception: Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. - Exception: Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement is less than 1200 cfm. 17. Outdoor air supply and exhaust systems must have motorized dampers that automatically shut when the systems or spaces served are not in use. Dampers must be capable of automatically shutting off during preoccupancy building warm-up, cool -down, and setback, except when ventilation reduces energy costs (e.g., night purge) or when ventilation must be supplied to meet code requirements. Both outdoor air supply and exhaust air dampers must have a maximum leakage rate of 3 cfm/ft2 at 1.0 in w.g. when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Exception: Gravity (non -motorized) dampers are acceptable in buildings less than three stories in height. Exception: Systems with a design outside air intake or exhaust capacity of 300 cfm (140 Us) or less that are equipped with motor operated dampers that open and close when the unit is energized and de -energized, respectively. 18. All freeze protection systems, including self-regulating heat tracing, must include automatic controls capable of shutting off the systems when outside air temperatures are above 40'F or when the conditions of the protected fluid will prevent freezing. Snow- and ice -melting systems must include automatic controls capable of shutting off the systems when the pavement temperature is above 50°F and no precipitation is falling, and an automatic or manual control that will allow shutoff when the outdoor temperature is above 40°F. 19. Individual fan systems with a design supply air capacity of 5000 cfm or greater and minimum outside air supply of 70 percent or greater of the supply air capacity must have an energy recovery system with at least a 50 percent effectiveness. Where cooling with outdoor air is required there is a means to bypass or control the energy recovery system to permit cooling with outdoor air. - Exception: Hazardous exhaust systems, commercial kitchen and clothes dryer exhaust systems that the International Mechanical Code prohibits the use of energy recovery systems. - Exception: Systems serving spaces that are heated and not cooled to less than 60°F. - Exception: Where more than 60 percent of the outdoor heating energy is provided from site -recovered or site solar energy. - Exception: Heating systems in climates with less than 3600 HDD. - Exception: Cooling systems in climates with a 1 percent cooling design wet -bulb temperature less than 64°F. - Exception: Systems requiring dehumidification that employ energy recovery in series with the cooling coil. - Exception: Laboratory fume hood exhaust systems that have either a variable air volume system capable of reducing exhaust and makeup air volume to 50 percent or less of design values or, a separate make up air supply meeting the following makeup air requirements: a) at least 75 percent of exhaust flow rate, b) heated to no more than 2°F below room setpoint temperature, c) cooled to no lower than 3°F above room setpoint temperature, d) no humidification added, e) no simultaneous heating and cooling. Project Title: College Station Fire Station # 6 Report date: 04/04111 Data filename: Q:\Prcject2010\1030348-College Station Fire Station No.6\Reference\ComCheck\Colllege Station-Lighting.cck Page 8 of 8 �( COMcheck Software Version 3.7.1 Envelope Compliance Certificate 2004 IECC Section 1: Project Information Project Type: New Constnrstion Project Title: Collage Statinn Fire Department, No. 6 Construction Site: 610 Univeisily Drive Fast College Station, TX 77840 Owner/Agent: Donald Harmon, NF City of College Station 1101 Texas Ave. College Station, TX 77842 979-764-3500 Section 2: General Information Building Location (for weather data): College Station, Texas Climate Zone: 2a Vertical Glazing / Wall Area Pct.: 29% Building Tvoe Floor Area Police/Fire Station 18860 Designer/Contraetnr- BRW Architects College Station, TX 77845 979-694-1791 Section 3: Requirements Checklist Envelope PASSES: Design 9% better than code. Climate -Specific Requirements: Component Name/Description Gross Area Cavity Cont. Proposed Budget or Perimeter R-Value R-Value U-Factor U-Factor(a) Roof 1: Insulation Entirely Above Deck 24749 -- 30.0 0.032 0.063 Exterior Wall 1: Wood -Framed, 16" o.c. 16016 19.0 0.0 0.067 0.089 Window 1: Metal Frame with Thermal Break:Double Pane with 2636 -- -- 0.280 0.750 Low-E, Tinted, Factory Assembled, SHGC 0.32 Door 1: Glass (> 50% glazing), Clear, SHGC 0.67 2024 -- — 0.550 0.700 Door 2: Insulated Metal, Swinging 389 -- — 0.400 0.700 Floor 1: Slab-On-GradP•I Inheated, Horizontal with vertical 7 ft 672 -- 4.0 -- -- (a) Budget U-factors are used for software baseline calculations ONLY, and are not code requirements Air Leakage, Component Certlfication, and Vapor Retarder Requirements: 1. All joints and penetrations are caulked, gasketed or covered with a moisture vapor -permeable wrapping material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Windows, doors, and skylights certified as meeting leakage requirements. 3. Component R-values & U-factors labeled as certified. O 4. Insulation installed according to manufacturer's instructions, in substantial contact with the surface being insulated, and in a manner that achieves the rated R-value without compressing the insulation. 0 5. Stair, elevator shaft vents, and other outdoor air intake and exhaust openings in the building envelope are equipped with motorized dampers. 6. Cargo doors and loadb ig dork doors are weather sealed. 7. Recessed lighting fixtures are: (I) Type IC rated and sealod or gilsketed, ur (11) instdlled Inside an appropriate air -tight assembly with a 0.5 inch clearance from combustible materials and with 3 inches clearance from insulation material. Note: Vapor retarder not required in this location. Project Title: College Station Fire Department, No. 6 u ' Report date: 04/01/11 Data filename: 0:%2010%210119.00 College Station Fire Station #6102 Governing Authorities\Envelope-Compliance.cck Page 1 of 2 Section 4: Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed envelope design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed envelope system has been designed to meet the 2004 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 3.7.1 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist. .>�1,t PvoN, t PROSECT CooRD+ua .,_('� a- CK _ Name - Title Signature Date Project Title: College Station Fire Department, No. 6 !� �y Report date: 04/01/11 Data filename: 0:\2010\210119.00 College Station Fire Station #6\02 Governing Authorities\Envelope-Compliance.cck Page 2 of 2 SECTION 210000 - FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Refer to the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions and the Special Conditions, all provisions of which apply to work under this section as if written in full herein. B. The scope of work described in these Specifications and/or indicated on the Drawings shall include (except where otherwise noted) the furnishing of all materials, equipment, appurtenances, accessories, connections, labor, etc. required and/or necessary to completely install, clean, inspect, adjust, test, balance and leave in safe and proper operating condition all systems. All work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the various trades involved. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing and Specifications, the higher cost shall be included, and the Architect shall be notified of the discrepancy. D. All work performed under this specification shall be accomplished in accordance with the requirements and provisions of Section 23 00 00 - Mechanical General. 1.02 SYSTEMS A. Systems to be provided under the Fire Protection design section shall be as listed below. The connection point to the site utility service for the fire protection system shall be at 5'-0" from the exterior of the building unless specifically otherwise noted. I . .automatic Sprinkler Systems iri livable areas only. 2. Dry sprinkler systems. 3. Antifreeze glycol treated systems. 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS A. The Contractor for the fire protection installation shall be a certified fire protection contractor, licensed for the installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems and other fire protection equipment. 1.04 DESIGN STANDARDS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 1 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL A. Fire Protection systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of the following codes, standards and design guides: 1. The International Fire Prevention Code, 2006 Edition, with local Amendments. 2. The International Building Code, 2006 Edition, with local Amendments. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: a. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems, latest Edition. b. NFPA 13R — Installation of Residential Sprinkler Systems, latest Edition. 4. Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Guide. 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 6. Owner's Insurance Underwriter Requirements. B. Design Criteria 1. Upon award of the Contract, a new flow test from the two (2) hydrants nearest the site service entry is to be performed by the Contractor to confirm the flow and pressure characteristics of the existing water service. The completed flow test data along with a utility service map of the area is to be forwarded to the Engineer for confirmation of the existing water service. 2. The entire facility (excluding the Apparatus Bays) will be protected by an automatic sprinkler system supplied by fireriser located within the building as shown on the drawings and required by authority having jurisdiction. 3. Automatic sprinkler systems shall be designed to the available domestic water pressure available and shall be hydraulically calculated per the latest NFPA design standards and local requirements. 4. The fire protection systems shall not be designed to operate if the residual pressure of the existing water service falls to 20 psi or lower at design flow requirements. 5. The fire protection system design shall include a minimum of 10 psi safety factor to allow for future losses in the water service pressure characteristics. 6. The maximum allowable system velocities shall not exceed 20 fps unless alternate criteria are required by the Owner's Insurance Underwriter. 7. The automatic sprinkler design criteria may be hydraulically calculated for the largest remote room method as outlined in NFPA 13 if acceptable to the local governing authorities and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter. 8. Sprinkler piping systems located in unheated attic and other spaces shall be dry pipe or glycol treated systems. C. Fire Protection System Alarms COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 2 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL 1. All valves in the fire protection system shall be provided with tamper switches wired for annunciation at the main FACP. 2. Automatic sprinkler system connections shall be provided with flow switches adjacent to the zone control valve wired for annunciation at the main FACP. 3. Upright automatic sprinklers will be provided in all areas with exposed structure. 1.05 ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND DRAWING APPROVALS A. The Contractor shall file all requisite plans relating to this section of the specifications with the proper authorities, secure all permits and approvals and pay all resultant fees for work done under this section. B. All fire protection work shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and standards of the City, County, State and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter; all applicable sections of the National Fire Codes and the Codes and Standards of the National Fire Protection Association. C. If code or other requirements cxc ccd the provisions shown on the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be notified in writing. Where requirements of the Contract Documents exceed Code requirements, work shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any work done contrary to these requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.06 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, BID BASIS A. Manufacturers' names, model numbers, etc. as specified on the Drawings and herein are for the purpose of describing type, capacity, function and quality of equipment and materials required. B. Unless "approved equal" is specifically stated, bids shall be based on equipment named in the Specifications or on the Drawings as "base" products. C. "Equal product" and "approved equal" items listed shall conform to specified base items and shall be substantially equal in size, weight, construction quality and capacities. The alternate equipment and materials shall be submitted as full equivalent to the equipment and materials specified, with sufficient supportive documentation and technical literature to demonstrate quality, performance, and workmanship without doubt or question. D. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all fire protection equipment proposed for use in this project with all building trades (architectural, structural and electrical). Coordination shall be accomplished prior to, and shall be reflected in, the submittal of shop drawings for approval. Any modifications or revisions required by COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 3 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL other trades as a result of the use of equipment other than the basis of design shall be made at no additional cost. 1.07 PAINTING A. All piping exposed to public sight such as standpipe and drain piping, or exposed to exterior or moisture conditions, shall be primed and painted with two coats of an enamel -based paint. The color shall be as directed by the Architect. B. Contractor shall touch-up to match original finish any equipment scratched in shipment or installation. 1.08 TRANSPORTATION, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all transportation, delivery, and storage required for all equipment and materials. Upon receipt of all equipment and materials, they shall be properly stored in their original shipping container to protect them from vandalism, theft, the elements, and other harm or damage. Any equipment or materials received in a damaged condition, or damaged after receipt, shall not be installed. Only new undamaged equipment in first-class operating condition shall be installed. B. All equipment and piping shall be protected to prevent entrance of foreign matter and debris by covering exposed openings during construction. C. The Contractor shall closely coordinate the ordering and delivery of all mechanical equipment with other trades to assure that equipment will be delivered in time to be installed in the building without requiring special or temporary access or building modifications. Certain equipment may have to be installed prior to the erection of the building walls or roofs. 1.09 GUARANTY A. All fire protection work described in the Contract Documents shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. This guaranty shall apply to all equipment, materials and workmanship. During the guaranty period, all defects shall be corrected in an acceptable manner, consistent with the quality of materials and workmanship of original construction, at no expense to the Owner. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the design with the work of all other disciplines so as to avoid conflicts. Where necessary piping shall be offset around ducts, structural members or other obstructions, while maintaining effective coverage, drains shall be provided per NFPA requirements. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 4 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL B. Review of the Drawings and hydraulic calculations by Jordan & Skala Engineers, Inc. (JSE) is for coordination with the design concept for the project, and for assurance that they have been prepared in a timely manner. JSE is entitled to rely on the technical sufficiency and timely delivery of these documents, as well as on the computations performed by the subcontractor. JSE shall not be required to review or verify those computations or designs for compliance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. C. All required submittal data other than fire protection shop drawings shall be transmitted simultaneously in hard ring binders with the associated specification section and the item submitted clearly identified. Partial submittals will be returned without review unless previously agreed to by the Engineer. D. All lire protection, drawing submuttals shall be at 1/8" scale as a minimum. All submittals shall be in multiple sets for review by Architect, Owner, Contractor and Engineer. E. The Contractor shall provide an itemized listing which indicates the horsepower and voltage of each piece of equipment that requires electrical service. The itemized list is to be located at the front of the bound submittal and is to be signed by the project managers of the Contractor, Electrical Contractor and General Contractor to ensure coordination of the electrical requirements for the project. Review of the equipment submittal will not begin until the electrical coordination document is provided. F. Fire Protection shop drawings shall include all data required by NFPA Section 13. Shop drawing plans shall indicate all lights, grilles, soffits, alarms, speakers and other ceiling components, as well as hydraulic node points, to ensure coordination. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to and secure approval of the Owner's Underwriter, local authority and/or state authorities prior to submission to the Engineer. The Contractor shall not commence work, purchase, or provide any materials to the job site without obtaining shop drawing approval. Shop drawings shall include copies of all hydraulic calculations providing design densities, where applicable. In addition, shop drawings submittals shall include printed catalog specifications and data sheets for all of the following as applicable: 1. Firc department fill valves. 2. Sprinkler heads and accessories. 3. Siamese Fire Department connection. 4. Backflow preventor. G. A letter signed by an officer of the Contractor's company shall be included in the submittal book that states the following items meet or exceed the requirements of the specifications: 1. Pipe and fittiugs. 2. Valves. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 5 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL 3. Pipe supports. 4. Pipe accessories. 5. Pipe labels and valve tags. 6. Flow switches. 7. Tamper switches. H. All design drawings and calculations prepared by the Contractor shall bear the seal of a registered professional or fire protection engineer or NICET Level IV certification licensed in the state of the project or equivalent fire sprinkler contractor's certificate seal. I. Included with submittals of plumbing equipment requiring electrical connections shall be a written statement confirming coordination of voltage requirements, bearing the names and signatures of the plumbing and electrical contractors. A photocopied reproduction of the below statement is acceptable. VOLTAGE COORDINATION STATEMENT This statement is to confirm that the voltages of the equipment provided under this specification have been coordinated with the electrical drawings, as well as with the electrical contractor. Fire Protection Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: Electrical Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all changes in the work from that shown in the Contract Documents. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner is completed, the Contractor shall prepare a set of record reproducible drawings of similar type and quality as the Contract Drawings that reflect all changes and that accurately show actual final construction, and transmit these Drawings to the Architect. All concealed piping shall be dimensionally located from at least two (2) column lines or major building structure. Drawings shall be a minimum of 1/8" scale. 1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of an Operations and Maintenance Manual, Bound, indexed, and titled in three-ring, loose-leaf binders. These manuals shall each contain the following: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 6 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL 1. Clear and concise instructions for operation, maintenance, adjustment, lubrication, wiring diagrams and trouble -shooting data for all mechanical equipment. This information shall be prepared by the manufacturer for particular size and model of equipment furnished. 2. Parts list of all parts for equipment, with catalog numbers and other data necessary for ordering of replacement parts. 3. Provide a competent manufacturer's service engineer for a minimum of two (2) days to instruct the operating personnel including the interpretation of all equipment diagrams. A diary of the training sessions shall be made by the instructing manufacturer's service engineer and witnessed by the Owner's representative and shall be included in the record submittal. 4. Copies of all approved equipment shop drawings, sprinkler layout drawings, hydraulic calculations and record plans shall be submitted with the Operation and Maintenance manual. 5. Index shall include type of equipment, manufacturer, and local representative with address and phone number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. All materials, pipe, valves and equipment furnished under this section shall be new and approved by NNPA, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Factory Mutual (FM) and American Water Works Association (AWWA) where applicable. B. The proposal submitted shall include all materials and equipment as specified or shown on the Drawings. Proposed substitutions with difference in price, if any, shall be listed separately on the bid form at the time of submittal. C. Required materials not covered by the detailed specifications shall be of a suitable class, grade and type and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where two or more units of the same class or type of equipment are required, these units shall be the products of a single manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS A. Underground Piping 1. Class 50 and 51 ductile iron pipe, bituminous coated outside, cement lined interior, ANSI A21.51 and A21.4 a. Push -on or mechanical joints with neoprene gasket, 250 psi rating, ANSI A21.11 b. Ductile iron nniechanical joint fittings with neoprene gasket, bituminous coated outside, cement lined interior, 250 psi rating, ANSI A21.10 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 7 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL C. Ductile iron flanged joints for all piping in vaults, red rubber gaskets, 250 psi rating, ANSI A21.15. Cadmium plated heavy hex machine bolts and nuts with bituminous coating field applied. 2. Class 150 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) DR 18 pressure pipe, NSF and Factory Mutual approved, AWWA C900 a. Push -on or mechanical joints with neoprene gasket, ASTM D3139 and ANSI A21.11 b. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings with neoprene gasket, bituminous coated outside, cement lined interior, 250 psi rating, ANSI A21.10 C. Ductile iron flanged joints for all piping in vaults, red rubber gaskets, 250 psi rating, ANSI A21.15. Cadmium plated heavy hex machine bolts and nuts with bituminous coating field applied. 3. Underground piping and installation shall be in accordance with the Insurance Underwriter's requirements and NFPA-24 and shall be installed with a minimum of 2'-6" of cover. a. Trenching conditions for ductile iron pipe shall be Type 1 laying condition, ANSI A21.50. b. Trenching conditions for PVC pipe shall be Class C bedding, ASCE Manual #37, and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Aboveground Piping Schedule 40 welded or seamless steel pipe, ASTM A53 and A135 a. Class 125 and 250 cast iron threaded fittings, ANSI B 16.4 b. Class 150 and 300 malleable iron threaded fittings, ANSI B 16.3 C. Class 125 and 250 cast iron flanged fittings, ANSI B 16.1 d. Schedule 40, 150 psi, forged steel buttweld fittings, ANSI B 16.9 e. Grooved mechanical couplings and fittings with EPDM gasket, malleable iron or ductile iron, 800 psi minimum rating ASTM A47 and A536, UL Listed, FM Approved 2. Schedule 10 minimum lightwall welded or seamless steel pipe with corrosion resistant coating, CRR Value of 1 minimum, ASTM A53 and A135 a. Grooved mechanical couplings and fittings with EPDM gasket, malleable iron or ductile iron, 800 psi minimum rating ASTM A47 and A536, UL Listed, FM Approved b. Lightwall, 150 psi, buttweld fittings, ANSI B 16.9 C. All interior sprinkler piping shall meet the requirements of applicable sections of NFPA, and the Owner's Underwriter. All pipe, fittings, valves, and sprinkler system components shall be rated for working pressures as required by system design. D. All pipe, supports and hanger assemblies shall be in accordance with NFPA-13 and shall be UL Listed or FM Approved. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 21000.0 - 8 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL E. All sprinkler hangers and support iods- installed m areas exposed to exterior conditions, are to be fully galvanized or painted with two coats of Adsil Microguard corrosion prohibitor. 2.03 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES A. Valves shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as required by codes or standards. All valves shall be UL Listed or FM Approved for fire protection service. All valves shall be provided with remote alarm tamper switches compatible with the Owner's central alarm system to monitor valve tampering. All switches and systems shall be Class B supervised. Provide 250 and 300 psi rated components at all locations as required by system pressure. 1. Gate Valves n• 2-1/2" and larger, Class 175 or 300, iron body, bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, flanged ends, Stockham G-634 or F- 670, listed for fire service. b. 2" and smaller, Class 175, bronze body and trim, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, threaded ends, Stockham B-133. 2. Butterfly Valves a. 4" and larger, Class 175, iron body, aluminum bronze disc, wafer or lug style, EPDM gasket, Stockham LG-52U. b. 2" and smaller, Class 175, bronze body, stainless steel disc threaded ends, Milwaukee BB -FP. 3. Check Valves a. 2 1/2" and huger, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, flanged ends, Milwaukee 1800 series, flanged, UL Listed for fire service. b. 4" and larger, Mission fig. U-12 HMP, wafer body, UL Listed for fire service. 4. Backflow Preventors a. Double check assembly shall be a complete assembly with two (2) independently operating check valves mounted in a common body, two (2) gate valves and four (4) test cocks, designed for horizontal installation. All valves shall be provided with tamper switches. The complete assembly shall be UL Listed, FM Approved, designed to specifications and/or requirements of USC, CCCL, AWWA and ASSE and shall be sized for the full fire flow demand at a maximum of 6 psi pressure drop. 1) Double check backflow preventor shall be Ames Maxim 200 Series, Watts No. 709., Hersey No. 2 or approved equal. 2) Double detector check backflow preventors shall be provided where required by local authorities; assembly shall be Ames Maxim 300 Series, Watts No. 770, Hersey Model DDC II or approved equal. 5. Siamese Fire Department Comicutiun COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATTON NO.6 210000 - 9 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL a. Fire department connection shall be 2-way exposed Siamese type, 2- 1/2" x 2-1/2" x 4" size, cast brass body, polished chrome finish for all exposed surfaces, cast brass escutcheon, and brass female hose inlets having individual clapper valves, plugs, and chains. Assembly shall be located with the center line of the hose inlets at 2'-6" above adjacent grade. Inlet threading shall be National Standard or same as municipal fire department, as required. Assembly shall be UL Listed, FM Approved. Wall Mounted: Potter Roemer 5710 series or approved equal. b. Free Standing: Potter Roemer 5760 series or approved equal. 2.04 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM MATERIALS A. The underground fire protection service shall be provided with thrust blocks and rods and clamps at the service entry. B. Automatic sprinklers shall be provided as follows: 1. Public Spaces with Ceilings a. Fully concealed type sprinklers, glass element, or fusible link style, quick response sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with gypsum ceilings unless otherwise noted. Temperature rating of sprinklers shall be 155 — 165 degrees. Ceiling coverplate shall be factory painted to match the adjacent ceiling color, submit painted sample to the Architect for approval. Sprinkler to be Viking Horizon Mirage concealed sprinkler or approved equal. b. Small frame glass element, semi -recessed, quick response pendent sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with lay -in ceilings unless otherwise noted. Temperature rating of sprinklers shall be 155 — 165 degrees. Sprinkler and escutcheon to have a white painted finish. Sprinkler to be Viking Microfast Model M series with Model E-1 escutcheon or approved equal. 2. Unfinished Spaces with no Ceiling a. Quick response upright pendent sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with no ceiling. Temperature rating is to be 165 degrees unless conditions require higher temperature. Finish of sprinkler to be white painted finish. Sprinkler to be Viking Microfast Model M or approved equal. 3. Areas Exposed to Exterior Conditions a. Standard response upright sprinklers shall be provided in the exposed areas supplied from the dry pipe system. All sprinklers shall have UL Listed polyester or Teflon corrosion protection. Temperature rating is to be 165 degrees unless conditions require higher temperature. Sprinkler to be Viking Micromatic Model M or approved equal. 4. Exterior Overhangs COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 10 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL a. Standard response chrome plated dry horizontal sidewall or upright sprinklers are to be provided. Barrel length shall be a minimum of 12". Sprinkler and escutcheon shall be polished chrome finish. Sprinkler shall be Viking Model M or approved equal. 5. Alternate acceptable manufacturers with equivalent sprinklers are Automatic, Central, Grinnell, Gem and Reliable. 6. Sprinkler guards shall be installed on all sprinklers T-0" or less above floor. 7. The Contractor shall furnish and install a cabinet located in the fire service entry room with the number of each type of sprinklers and wrenches as required by NFPA 13. 8. The Contractor shall provide and place suitable signs indicating the purpose of each control valve, test connection, main and auxiliary drain, etc., as required. 2.05 HEAT CABLE FOR FREEZE PROTECTION OF PIPING A: Provide elerh is heat cable on all wet fire protection piping exposed to exterior conditions. B. Provide a complete UL Listed or FM Approved system of heating cables, components, and controls to prevent exposed fire protection piping from freezing. C. Electric heat cable shall be installed linearly along the bottom of the pipe and allowance shall be made for all fittings, valves, pipe supports, etc. Cable shall be installed prior to insulation of the piping system. D. Electric cable shall be capable of maintaining a minimum water temperature of 40 degrees F at an ambient air temperature of 0 degrees F. E. The electric cable shall be the self-regulating type that responds to varying localized temperature conditions by varying the heat output along its length. This shall be accomplished by a self-regulating core, which varies its resistance continuously with changes in temperature. A constant wattage heater is unacceptable. F. Provide a thermostat control, which de -energizes the heating cable when the ambient air temperature is above 40 degrees F (adjustable). While energized, the heat cable shall be entirely self-regulating. G. Provide all power connection hardware, splices, end seals, etc., to accomplish installation. All hardware shall be by the same manufacturer as the cable. H. Electric hesting cable and accessories shall be UL Listed. Electric heating cable shall conform to all requirements of Division 16. 1. lwlectric hv ating cable shall be Raychem XL or Engineer approved equal. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 11 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL J. All piping shall be insulated with 1" thick fiberglass insulation with factory applied all - service jacket. Piping exposed to exterior conditions shall be provided with 0.016" minimum corrugated aluminum metal jacketing with bands on 3'-0" centers. K. Heating -cable circuit shall be protected by a ground -fault device for equipment protection. This requirement is in accordance with section 427-22 of the NEC-2005. L. All heating cable components shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved for use as part of the system to provide pipe freeze protection. Component enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall not require the installing contractor to cut into the heating -cable core to expose the bus wires. Connection systems that require the installing contractor to strip the bus wires or that use crimps or terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. 2.06 TESTS AND DRAINS A. The Contractor shall provide test connections as required and as indicated on the Drawings. Inspector's test connections shall be fitted with sight glasses and the discharge of the drain riser shall be terminated above an adjacent hub drain with an air gap fitting. All tests shall have approved sight test assemblies as required by NFPA. 2.07 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND RELAYS A. Design, type and ratings of electric motors shall comply with the National Electrical Code, NEMA and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. B. Unless otherwise noted, or required for special applications, motors shall be equipped with sealed ball bearings. C. All motors to be mounted on equipment supplied under this section shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse, or Louis Allis. 2.08 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. A marker showing the service and an arrow indicating the direction of flow shall be applied on the following equipment installed under this section of the Specifications: 1. All above ground fire protection standpipe and sprinkler piping 2. All above ground sprinkler drainage piping B. Piping identification shall be applied in areas of exposed construction and in areas with accessible or lay -in ceilings. The piping shall be labeled at each valve, wall and floor penetrations (both sides) and at connections to equipment. In addition, straight runs of piping shall be labeled at intervals not greater than 25 feet. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 12 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL C. Equipment and component parts thereof shall bear manufacturer's nameplate, giving manufacturer's name, size, type model number or serial number, and electrical characteristics, to facilitate maintenance and replacements. Nameplates of distributors or subcontractors are not acceptable. Electrical equipment shall be UL Listed as applicable. D. The letter size and background color shall conform to the Identification of Pipe System ANSI A-13-1. The vinyl plastic markers shall be as manufactured by Seton Name - Plate Company, W.H. Brady Company, or Westhne Products. E. All valves shall have a 1-1/2" diameter laminate plastic tag, engraved, black and white marking and a brass hook for attaching to valve stem. Tags shall have letters as large as practical, the number of the valve and the service such as indicated on the "Legend." The numbers of service shall be consecutive. Tags shall be similar to Seton 2961. .--------s PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and the final arrangement of the work shall suit field conditions, the characteristics of the materials used and coordination with all other disciplines and the building components and finishes. Verify all dimensions in the field. Access and clearances must be provided and maintained for the proper operation, maintenance service and repair of the work. B. No sprinklers are to be installed prior to the building being completely sealed in from external moisture and conditions. C. All standpipe, sprinkler and drain piping exposed to sight is to be painted with two coats of an epoxy based paint, color to be selected by the Architect. D. All equipment and materials shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and shall meet the requirements of NFPA and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter. E. All sprinklers in spaces visible to public view shall be located symmetrically in relation to ceiling design elements, lighting fixtures, speakers, diffusers, etc. All ceiling components are to be indicated on the submittal drawings as noted previously to ensure coordination with all ceiling elements and devices. Piping to sprinklers in these areas is to be provided with arm-overs or flexible sprinkler drops to allow for exact placement of sprinklers. F. Sprinklers shall be installed at the centerpoint of all 2' x 2' lay -in ceiling tiles, and at the centerpoint or I'from. the ends of 4' x 2' ceiling tiles. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 13 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL G. Where pipe is installed above suspended ceilings, it shall be located in the clear space above the suspended ceiling and the pendent sprinklers shall be located to clear the ceiling supporting grid system, the ceiling mounted fixtures, and air conditioning ducts and outlets. H. The Contractor shall install additional pendent sprinkler heads under all ductwork or other obstructions which are over 48" wide in accordance with NFPA-13 in areas of exposed construction. I. All sprinklers located in areas that are to be painted shall be protected prior to painting. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Arrangements shall be made to have the openings, inserts, sleeves, blockouts, and such other incidentals set in place ahead of the construction work, where practical, to eliminate the need of cutting and patching. If coring becomes necessary for installation of the work, it shall be done under this section. All holes shall be neatly patched and finished to match the adjoining work in a manner approved by the Architect. All coring shall be performed in a manner not to weaken the structural parts and the manner and method shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer for approval. 3.03 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Contractor shall furnish and set pipe sleeves and inserts for all work under this section and shall be responsible for their proper and permanent location. In the event that failure to do so requires cutting and patching, the remedial work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. All pipes passing through floors, walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter 1-1/2" (3/4" annular space) larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation on covered lines, except as otherwise specified herein. C. Sleeves for all pipes through walls, beams and partitions shall finish flush with the finish line of the walls, beams and partitions. D. Sleeves for all piping shall extend 1/2" above finish floor, (except where under partitions, the sleeves shall be flush with the bottom of the partition) and after the installation of pipe shall be packed and made watertight with fire stopping sealant to maintain separations and fire ratings. E. Where pipes pass under footings and through exterior walls, sleeves shall be of galvanized steel pipe and shall be not less than 4" larger than the pipe being sleeved. Sleeves shall be made watertight where passing through waterproofed surfaces, COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 14 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL exterior wall, and floor slabs on grade. Waterproofing shall be done by means of a steel slip on welding flange, continuously welded at the center of the sleeve and shall be painted with one coat of bitumastic paint inside and outside. The space between sleeve and pipe shall be packed with oakum to within 2" of each face of the wall; (to within 2" of the top of sleeve at floors). The remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with a waterproof mastic. Mechanical expansion type rubber seals such as manufactured by Calpico Ind. and Thunderline Corporation are acceptable as alternate method of water proofing piping penetrations. F. Sleeves through floors or interior masonry walls shall be of galvanized steel pipe or wrought iron pipe size except where located in concealed pipe spaces where they may be of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel if fire rating is maintained. G. Slcevcs thri ►tig►h interior nuummy partitions shall be of 22-gauge galvanized sheet steel. H. Sleeves For piping to rcceive insulation shall be large enough to allow continuous insulation through sleeves. I. Spacing between or location of pipe sleeves in floor slabs, structural beams or structural walls shall be subject to the Structural Engineer's approval. J. Where pipes pass under load bearing footings they shall pass through a coated steel pipe sleeve as described above and extend past a 45 degree line out from the bottom of the load bearing structure. Concrete shall be used as backfill in the portions of trench within the 45 degree pressure line. K. Escutcheons shall be provided around all exposed pipe passing through walls, partitions, ceilings and floors in finished spaces. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover the sleeve opening and shall fit snugly around the insulated or bare pipe and to the wall, partition, floor or ceiling. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be coordinated with the work to be performed or installed under other sections of these Specifications. B. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner by workmen skilled in this type of work and shall present a neat appearance when completed. C. Offsets shall be provided as required to avoid interference and conflicts with other work, to maximize headroom, or to improve the appearance of pipe runs. All pipe supports, structural members, hangers and other apparatus necessary to support firmly and substantially the various components of the systems shall be provided under this section. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 15 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL D. Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identifications shall be securely attached to equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted. E. The subcontractor shall be responsible for the protection of the work from injury and shall protect all apparatus with suitable enclosures. 3.05 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION A. Installation and workmanship requirements are specified hereinafter. B. This subcontractor shall be responsible for the fiirnishing and installing of all support steel, hangers, rods, clamps, etc., to provide adequate support of all Fire Protection equipment specified herein. All support assemblies shall be UL Listed or FM Approved. 3.06 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS AND PREMISES A. At all times, keep the premises clear of undue accumulation of rubbish. B. On completion of the work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from this Contract, and dispose of same. C. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left in a satisfactory condition for proper operation at project completion. All equipment shall be partially or fully re -painted as required to provide an appearance of new equipment. 3.07 TESTS A. Tests of all fire protection systems and equipment, underground and inside piping including alarm and detection devices shall be scheduled with one (1) week prior notification to a local representative of the Underwriter and the Architect. All tests and test procedures shall be in accordance with the applicable NFPA standards. After completion of all tests, the "Contractor's Materials and Test Certificate" shall be submitted to the Architect. B. The Contractor shall supply all materials, labor, utilities and power required for testing. Preliminary tests shall be performed to prove work is satisfactory prior to requesting a test inspection. Sectional tests shall be made before insulation or concealing any piping. C. Repair all defects disclosed by tests or, if required by the Architect, replace defective work with new systems and materials at no additional cost to the Owner. Repairs to piping systems shall be made with new material. No caulking of screwed joints, cracks or holes will be accepted. Make tests in stages to facilitate work of others. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 16 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL D. The Contractor shall berespuusiblc fai the repair and/or replacement cost installed and finishes damaged by leaks, tests and/or repair and replacement of his work at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, submit the "Contractor's Material and Test Certificates" indicating system compliance with all applicable sections of NFPA. 3.08 SUBCONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant all equipment and the installation to function properly for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the work. B. Defects becoming apparent within the warranty pei iud shall be repaired by the Contractor. In addition, all damages to installed work and finishes resulting from such defects shall be the responsibility of this Contractor either to repair or replace to equal the existing installation. C. '1 his warranty shall in no way obligate the Contractor to repair any and all damages resulting from accident or improper operation or care on the part of the Owner. END OF SECTION 210000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 210000 - 17 MARCH 15, 2010 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING GENERAL PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Refer to the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions and the Special Conditions, all provisions of which apply to work under this section as if written in full herein. B. The scope of work described iii these Specifications and/or indicated on the drawings shall include (except where otherwise noted) the furnishing of all materials, equipment, appurtenances, accessories, connections, labor, etc. required and/or necessary to completely install, clean, inspect; adjust, test, balance and leave in safe and proper operating condition all systems. All work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the various trades involved. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing and Specifications, the higher cost shall be included, and the Engineer shall be notified of the discrepancy. D. All work performed under this specitioatiun shall be accomplished in accordance with the requirements and provisions of Section 23 00 00 — Mechanical General. 1.02 STANDARDS A. All Plumbing systems shall conform to all ordinances and regulations of the City, County, State and/or other authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with the requirements of the following codes, standards and design guides. 1. The International Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition, with local Amendments. 2. The International Building Code, 2006 Edition, with local Amendments. 3. The International Gas Code, 2003 Edition, with local Amendments. 4. International Energy Conservation Code, 2003 Edition, with local Amendments. 5. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 6. American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE) Data Books. 7. Plumbing Drainage Institute (PDI). 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 9. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)_ 10. Local and State Fire Marshal requirements. 11. Local Building and Inspection Department requirements. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL 12. Local Health Department requirements. B. If code or other requirements exceed the provisions shown on the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be notified in writing. Where requirements of the Contract Documents exceed code requirements, work shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any work done contrary to these requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.03 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections required for the installation of this work and pay all charges incident thereto. He shall deliver to the Architect all certificates of said inspection. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED A. SYSTEMS: 1. The Plumbing Systems installed and work performed under this Division of the Specifications shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following as noted below. The connection point for all systems from the site utilities shall be at T-0" from the exterior of the building unless specifically otherwise noted. a. Domestic cold and hot water systems. b. Sanitary, drainage, waste and vent systems. 1.05 DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily depict exact conditions. The indicated locations of equipment, ductwork, piping, etc. are approximate only. The drawings are schematic in nature and are not to be scaled. Scales are shown for reference and approximation only. Refer to the architectural drawings for dimensional data of building components. B. The locations, arrangement and extent of equipment, devices, and other appurtenances related to the installation of work shown on drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall not scale drawings, but shall refer to the architectural drawings for exact dimensions of building components. Should a conflict exist between the architectural and engineering drawings regarding dimensions and scale, the Contractor shall notify the Architect of the discrepancy for resolution. C. Materials, equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material, equipment, or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare a minimum of two (2) instruction manuals, one of which shall be submitted to the Architect for the Engineer's review, describing installation, operation and maintenance of all Plumbing equipment. Manuals shall include copies of control schematics, sequences of operations, indicate the function and operations of all components, as well as the Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. Manuals shall also contain one copy of all manufacturers' drawings, pamphlets, data, parts lists and instructions manual for each piece of equipment. Upon approval, one copy shall be delivered to the Owner; one copy shall be kept by the Contractor. The pamphlets and drawings are to be neatly bound in a 3-ring binder(s). B. The Contractor shall give detailed instructions for a period of not less than 2 (two) days to the responsible personnel designated by the Owner in the operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished under this Contract. A letter containing the name of the person or persons to whom the instructions were given and the dates of instruction period shall be submitted to the Engineer in the record submittal. C. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit a complete record drawing submittal for the Engineer's review, three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals, spare parts lists, drawings, wiring diagrams, trouble shooting data, manufacturer's bulletins, and other pertinent data on all equipment furnished under this Contract. Each set shall be enclosed in a suitable hard cover binder. D. A complete set of reproducible record drawings shall be provided indicating the location of all piping dimensionally located from a minimum of two column lines or major building structures. Drawings shall be a minimum of 1/8" scale. E. Provide name, address and telephone numbers of the manufacturer's representative and service company for each piece of equipment installed in the record submittal package. F. Provide all loose keys for supply valves, wall hydrants and hose bibbs installed. 1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all changes in the work from that shown in the Contract Documents. After all work is completed, the Contractor shall prepare a set of `record" reproducible drawings of similar type and quality as the Contract Drawings that reflect all changes and that accurately show actual final construction, and deliver these drawings to the Architect. 1.08 EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL BID BASIS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 3 MARCH 1 S, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL A. Manufacturers' names, model numbers, etc. as specified on the drawings and herein are for the purpose of describing type, capacity, function and quality of equipment and materials required. B. Alternate "approved equal" items shall conform to specified base items and shall be substantially equal in quality, size, weight, construction, capacities and performance. The alternate equipment and materials shall be submitted as full equivalent to the equipment and materials specified, with sufficient supportive documentation and technical literature to demonstrate quality, performance, and workmanship without doubt or question. The Engineer shall consider the use of the alternate equipment based on the supportive documentation and other information available to him, and shall approve or disapprove any alternates. The decision of the Engineer shall in all cases be final. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all plumbing equipment proposed for use in this project with all building trades (architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical). Coordination shall be accomplished prior to, and shall be reflected in, the submittal of shop drawings for approval. Any modifications or revisions required by other trades as a result of the use of equipment other than the basis of design shall be made at no additional cost. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall prepare, submit, and obtain Engineer's review of manufacturers' submittals on the following equipment and systems prior to ordering, purchasing, or installation of any equipment or materials. All required submittals shall be transmitted simultaneously in hard ring binders with the associated specification section and the item submitted clearly identified. Partial submittals will be returned without review. 1. Plumbing fixtures, faucets and trim. 2. Water heaters. 3. Insulation. 4. Floor drains and drainage accessories. 5. Hydrants and hose bibbs. 6. Submersible pumps. 7. Backflow preventers. 8. Pipe and fittings. 9. Valves. 10. Pipe supports. 11. Piping accessories. 12. Pipe labels and valve tags. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL B. All approvals required by any code or enforcement authority, insurance underwriter, etc. shall be obtained prior to equipment being submitted to the Engineer. C. Review of submittals by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for complying with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Furthermore, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the requirements of all approved equipment with other trades and disciplines such as roof openings, wall openings, electrical characteristics, etc. D. All submittals shall be identified by the equipment mark or tag identification numbers shown on the Contract Drawings. Each individual submittal item shall be marked to show which specification section pertains to the itcm. E. Submittals shall clearly indicate selection of modcl numbers, sizes, dimensions, electrical characteristics, etc. of the proposed equipment. Any proposed deviations from specified equipment shall be clearly indicated on the submittal. P. Included with submittals of plumbing equipment requiring electrical connections shall be a written statement confirming coordination of voltage requirements, bearing the names and signatures of the plumbing and electrical contractors. A photocopied reproduction of the below statement is acceptable. VOLTAGE COORDINATION STATEMENT This statement is to confirm that the voltages of the equipment provided under this specification have been coordinated with the electrical drawings, as well as with the electrical contractor. PlumbuYg Contractor: Project Manager Name: P.rnject Manager Signature/Date: Electrical Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signattire/Date: 1.10 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall give full cuuperation to other trades, and shall furnish all information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. B. Piping and other plumbing equipment shall not be installed without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 720000 - 5 MARCH 15, 7nI I PLUMBING GENERAL relocate all uncoordinated piping and other plumbing equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical, HVAC equipment, ceilings and other architectural or structural finishes. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment above ceilings and in exposed areas with the work of all other disciplines prior to installation. D. In areas where more than one trade is required to use common openings in beams, joists, chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, the Contractor must coordinate the positions of all piping and equipment to be furnished under this section so that all items including the materials and equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. E. The Contractor shall confirm that work installed under this section does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions, walls or other architectural or structural elements as shown on the Contract Documents. F. Work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure, shall be removed and relocated as required at no additional cost to the Contract. G. All offsets, fittings, valves, devices and accessories which may be required are to be provided under this Contract. The Contractor shall examine the entire set of Contract Documents and carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly for the complete satisfactory operation of all systems, providing such fittings, traps, valves, devices and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. 1.11 WARRANTY A. All equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard warranty unless otherwise noted. B. The Contractor shall make good all defects in material, equipment, or workmanship disclosed within a period of one (1) year from date of building acceptance by the Owner. The phrase "make good" shall mean to furnish promptly, without charge, all work necessary to remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL A. All equipment, materials, accessories, etc. used shall be new and of current production unless specified otherwise. Equipment not specified in the Contract Documents shall be suitable for the intended use and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. B. All equipment, products and materials shall be free of defects and shall be constructed to operate in a safe manner without excessive noise, vibration, leakage, or wear. C. All equipment shall bear the inspection label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. D. All equipment and material for similar applications or systems shall be provided from the same manufacturer unless noted otherwisc. 2.02 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Except as otherwise specified or noted, electrical equipment shall be as specified herein. B. Motor controls, system controls, starters, pilot lights, push buttons, etc. shall be furnished by the Contractor complete as a part of the motor or apparatus, which it operates. Electrical equipment shall be wired for the voltage, as shown on the Electrical Drawings. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and furnishing equipment of voltage shown on the electrical documents. D. Electric motors shall be high efficiency, open drip -proof type unless otherwise specified. Motors shall be standard NEMA continuous duty type and shall bear the UL label. Motors shall be selected with a minimum of 15% safety factory greater than the fan brake/horsepower (e.g. 4.75BHP would require a nominal 7-1/2 HP motor). The motor service factor shall not be used as part of the safety factor. All motors shall have thermal overload protection. Motors shall meet Table MG- 1-12C of EPACT 1992. E. Motors controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty rated and fully compatible with the VFD provided. F. Starters for motors 1/3 HP and smaller shall be manual type, and for 1/2 HP and larger, shall be magnetic type. Starters shall be minimum size 0, combination type (with disconnect and lockable handle) with molded case circuit breaker. Starters for motors with remote or automatic control shall be magnetic. Relays, interlocks and auxiliary contacts shall be provided as specified and required. G. Magnetic motor starters shall be across -the -line, full voltage, non -reversing type unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 7 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL H. Motor controls shall be either "Hand -Off -Auto" switches or "On -Off' push buttons with one indicating light. "Hand -Off -Auto" switches shall be provided for automatically controlled apparatus. I. Motor starters that are not an integral part of equipment shall be installed in conformance with Division 16 - Electrical Requirements. J. Electrical power wiring to disconnects, starters, motors and similar devices shall be provided under the Electrical Section. All equipment requiring electrical power shall be installed with disconnect switches at each piece of equipment. Coordinate switch type (fused or non -fused) with equipment characteristics, manufacturer's recommendations and electrical drawings. K. The Contractor shall provide all system controls, control and interlock wiring 120 volts and less in conduits in accordance with materials and installation requirements of Electrical Section. All starters shall be labeled on face of starter. L. All starters for 3-phase equipment shall have overload devices in all three (3) phases. M. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor. N. Acceptable manufacturers shall be General Electric, Square D, Cutler -Hammer, Siemens and Allen Bradley. 2.03 PIPING SYSTEMS A. General 1. The various piping systems are classified as follows, and materials of construction shall be as specified unless otherwise noted on drawings. 2. Piping, valves and equipment used in similar applications shall be provided from the same manufacturer unless noted otherwise. B. Domestic Cold Water System, underground, 3 inches and larger, suitable for working pressure of 125 psig to 5'-0" outside building. 1. Pipe a. Ductile iron thickness Class 51 for 3 inch and 4 inch size thickness, Class 50 for 6 inches and larger, ANSI A21.51, ASTM A746 with bituminous coating outside and cement mortar lining inside. Ductile iron mechanical or push -on joints and fittings ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. b. Mains where pressure is no greater than 100 psi: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), 160 psi water piping, ASTM D2241, SDR26 with mechanical or push -on joints with neoprene "O" rings, ASTM D3139. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 8 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL C. Mains whore pressure is greater than 100 psi: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 200 psi water piping, AWWA C900, 200 psi, with mechanical or push -on joints with neoprene "O" rings, ASTM D3139. d. Polypropylene piping, SDR 7.4 minimum, ASTM F2389, electro- fusion welded joints and fittings, ASTM F2389, NSF certified. 2. Fittings: All valves, fittings, and changes in direction or elevation shall have joints restrained in accordance with NFPA-24. a. Grey iron or ductile iron mechanical or push -on joint, Class 50 or 51, cement mortar lining with bituminous coated exterior, ANSI A21.10 and A21.11. 3. Joints: All joints shall be mechanical or push -on per ANSI A21.11. 4. Trenching Conditions: Class B 1 bedding with 4" minimum thickness of clean granular fill. Recesses shall be provided at all pipe barrels to ensure no loads are transmitted at the joint connections. f . Domestic water system, brwich piping, underground, 2 inches and smaller, suitable for a working pressure of 125 psig. 1. Pipe a. Copper Type K, soft annealed, conforming to Federal Specification WWT-799. 2. Fittings a. Fittings are not permitted below floor slabs with copper Type K soft annealed pipe. 3. Joints a. Joints are not permitted below floor slabs with copper Type K, soft annealed pipe. D. Domestic cold water and hot water systems above ground, 4 inches and smaller, suitable for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig at 200 degrees F. 1. Pipe a. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing per ASTM B-88 and Federal Specification WWT-799. 2. Fittings a. Solder or brazed joint copper fittings per B 16.18 or 16.22. b. Grooved copper fittings with full flow radius elbows, ASTM B-75, ASTM B-584, Victaulic CTS system, or Engineer approved equal. C. Copper pressed fittings with radius elbows, crimped connections and EPDM 0-rings, ASTM B-88, 200 psi rating, Ridgid Viega ProPress and ProPress XL systems. 3. Joints a. Soldered with lead-free solder, J. W. Harris `Bridgit" or equal. b. Brazed joints with lead-free brazing filler materials and compatible alloys. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 9 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL C. Ductile iron mechanical couplings with bolted connection for grooved piping, ASTM A-536, with EPDM copper tube size gaskets, rated working pressure 300 psi. E. Sanitary, waste and vent and storm drain systems, below ground to 5'-0" outside building. 1. Pipe a. Service weight hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe per ASTM A-74, coated on outside. b. Schedule 40 DWV PVC pipe, ASTM 1785. Install per ASTM D 2321. C. PVC piping is not acceptable for waste piping receiving waste discharge higher than 130 degrees F, such as from laundry and kitchen equipment. 2. Fittings a. Service weight hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe fittings per ASTM-A- 74, coated on outside. b. Schedule 40 DWV PVC, socket type fittings, ASTM 2665. 3. Joints a. Neoprene gasketed joints per ASTM C564. b. Cast iron mechanical couplings with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel nuts and bolts, ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM Standard C-1540. Heavy duty type 304 stainless steel shielded couplings. Acceptable manufacturers: Husky SD 4000 or Clamp -All 125. C. Solvent joints for PVC, ASTM D-2564. F. Sanitary waste and vent system above ground. 1. Pipe a. No -hub cast iron soil pipe per CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. b. Type DWV copper tube per ASTM B-306 and ANSI H-23.6. C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), schedule 40 DWV PVC pipe, ASTM 1785. d. PVC piping is not acceptable in plenum ceilings or for waste piping receiving waste discharge higher than 130 degrees F, such as from laundry and kitchen equipment. 2. Fittings a. No -hub cast iron fittings per CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. b. DWV solder joint fittings per ANSI B 16.29 or 1316.23. C. Schedule 40 DWV PVC, socket type fittings, ASTM 2665. d. Urinal connections shall be iron pipe size brass with brass screwed fittings. 3. Joints a. Joints for no -hub pipe and fittings shall be per CISPI 310, with stainless steel clamps and neoprene sleeve conforming to ASTM D 564. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 10 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL b. Heavy duty joints for no -hub pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-1540 and shall be heavy duty type 304 stainless steel shielded couplings. Acceptable manufacturers: Husky SD 4000 or Clamp -All 125. C. Heavy duty, shielded, cast iron couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two- piece, cast iron housing, stainless steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve,. MG coupling. d. All solder joints shall be made with a solder consisting of 95% tin and 5% antimony. e. Solvent joints for PVC, ASTM D-2564. G. High Pressure Compressed Air Piping 1. All above ground air piping. a. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53, with screwed joints and 150 pound threaded malleable iron fittings, ASTM A47, for connections to threaded equipment. 2. Joints a. `Threaded joints shall be made with a pipe compound. specifically listed for high pressure applications and shall be applied to male threads only. After cutting and prior to threading, pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. b. Flanged joints shall be faced true, provided with ring type gasket, and made square and tight. Flanges shall have raised or flat faces to mate with adjacent flanges of valves. C. Air compressor, dryer, gages, relief valves, regulators, zone valves, moisture traps air inlet filter, exhaust outlet and any other specialty items related to the compressed air system will be supplied by the owner and installed by the contractor. 3. UNIONS a. Unions in steel piping shall be class 150 malleable iron threaded fittings conforming to ASME B.16.3. H. Pumped discharge piping 1. Pipe a. Schedule 40 seamless or welded galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A-53. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 11 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL b. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing per ASTM B-88 and Federal Specification WWT-799. 2. Fittings a. Class 125 and 250, cast iron threaded fittings, ASTM A-126, ANSI B 16.4. b. Solder or brazed joint copper fittings per B 16.18 or 16.22. 2.04 VALVES, FLANGES AND UNIONS A. General 1. All systems under this section shall be provided with valves to permit complete and sectional control of the system. They shall be located to permit easy operation, replacement and repair. They shall be installed where shown on the drawings, or as herein specified. Valves shall be as manufactured by one of the following companies: American, Kennedy, Kitz, Milwaukee, Nibco, Powell, Stockham, Watts, or approved equal, and shall conform to description listed below. 2. All individual guestroom riser shut-off valves shall be located in the chase space adjacent to the vanity with access panels located tight to the underside of the countertop concealed from view unless specifically noted otherwise. No access panels will be allowed in the public spaces with gypsum ceilings. B. Valve Description 1. Gate Valves a. 2-1/2" and larger, Stockham G-634, 175 lb. flanged OS&Y. b. 2-1/2" and larger: Milwaukee Fig. F-2885, 125 lb., flanged or Milwaukee CW 223 Butterfly valve with 10 pos. lever handle. C. 8" and larger: Milwaukee CW 323 Butterfly valve with gear operator. d. 2-1/2" and smaller, Milwaukee No. BB-SC100, screwed. 2. Check Valves a. 2" and smaller, Milwaukee Fig. 509, 125 lb., screwed. b. 2-1/2" and larger, Milwaukee Fig. F-2974, 125 lb. flanged. C. 2-1/2" and larger, Stockham G-939, 175 lb. flange. 3. Ball Valves a. 2" and smaller, Milwaukee BA 100. 4. Backflow Preventers a. Backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations required by code and local authorities, at all connections to mechanical equipment, and else where as shown on the drawings. Backflow preventers shall be reduced pressure principle type and shall be a complete assembly including tight -closing shutoff valves before and after the device. The design shall include test cocks and a pressure -differential relief seating check valves. The device shall meet the requirements of and be COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 12 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL certified by ASSE Standard 1013, AWWA Standard C-506, and USC Foundation for Cross -Connection Control. A strainer shall be located upstream of the device. Route relief outlet from cone receptor to an air gap fitting for discharge to sanitary sewer. b. Acceptable manufacturers are Ames Company, Apollo Valves, Hersey Products, Watts Regulator, and Zum-Wikins. 5. Class II turbine type water meters shall be installed downstream of the backflow preventer, on the domestic water supply to HVAC equipment make- up, irrigation supply, and pool/fountain supply to allow for a reduction in sewer rate charges. 6. Pressure Reducing Valves a. A duplex pressure reducing valve station shall be provided on all domestic water services greater than 80 psi. 7. Flanges a. All flanges shall be faced and drilled for not less than 125 pounds steam working pressure complete with necessary adapter, and shall be of size and material of adjacent piping. All flanges shall be faced (raised or flat) to be compatible with connecting valves, equipment, etc. The connection of one raised face flange to a flat face flange shall not be permitted. 8. Unions_ and Joints it. Unions on drainage pipes on fixture side of traps may be slip or flanged joints with soft rubber washers or gaskets. Unions 2" and smaller on copper pipe shall be all brass with ground joint and shall be 250# copper to copper. Unions above 2" shall be flanged with gaskets. Provide union at water and gas connection to all equipment, except plumbing fixtures. b. Bathtub waste and overflow joints shall be soldered if required by local authorities to eliminate the requirement for an access panel to bathtub drain connection. 2.05 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on drawings and elsewhere as required by code. 1. Cleanouts in pipelines shall consist of cast iron ferrule and heavy duty cleanout plug with square head as scheduled on the drawings. Where piping is concealed in floors or walls ceanouts shall be installed in or near surface of floor or walls and have countersunk plugs with covers. 13. Cleanouts shall be provided at the base of the stack on all sanitary, waste and drainage stacks. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 13 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL C. Where such conditions occur in walls or partitions the cleanout cover shall be accessible through an opening left in the wall and covered with a flush chromium plated brass or stainless steel plate securely fastened in place. D. Where test tees are installed at the base of the stack, or on the stack, they may be used as a cleanout. E. Brass cleanouts shall be solid nut construction. F. Provide Owner with three (3) wrenches for removing flush cleanout plugs. 2.06 FLOOR DRAINS A. Setting Grades 1. Before setting any drains, the plumbing contractor shall obtain exact elevation of finished grade at the top of the drains. Drains in excess of 1/4" below the adjacent finished floor shall be removed and reset to the correct elevation. B. Drain Types 1. All floor drain outlets shall be of size noted on drawings. All drains shall be equal to the figure number scheduled as manufactured by Josam Co., Zurn Co., J.R. Smith Co., Wade, or approved equal. Drains shall be acid -resisting where indicated. C. Trap Primers 1. Drains not receiving a continuous discharge are to be provided with an automatic or lavatory waste type trap primer. 2.07 ACCESS PANELS A. Group valves together above suspended ceilings, walls, furred spaces to minimize the number of access panels, but with all valves freely accessible for maintenance. Locate all valves within V-0" of access point. B. Furnish access panels of proper size to service concealed valves and cleanouts. Panels shall be of the proper type for material in which they occur and are to be furnished by the Contractor, but installed by the particular trade for the material within which the access panel is installed. C. Panels shall have flush doors with No.14 USCG steel door and trim No. 16 USCG steel frame, metal wings for keying into construction, concealed hinges, and screwdriver operated stainless steel cam lock. Panels shall be shop coated with one COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 14 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL coat of zinc chromate primer. Valves above removable ceilings shall have tile clips by the Contractor for identification. D. Access panels are not allowed in gypsum ceilings in public spaces. 2.08 INSULATION A. The following shall be insulated: 1. All domestic cold water piping above grade. 2. All hot water and hot water rehirn piping. B. Domestic hot, cold, and drainage piping shall be insulated with 4 lb. density sectional fiberglass insulation with a thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.24 with white all service jacket and vapor barrier. All joints and seams shall be sealed vapor tight. All seams and staples shall then be covered with "All Service Jacket" three-inch wide tape. C. All interior limizontal storm drainage piping systems and roof drain bodies are to be insulated with blanket type glass fiber bonded with thermosetting resin with white vinyl vapor retarding facing, 2" wide stapling/taping tab. D. Materials a, specified in this section shall be manufactured by Armstrong, CertainTeed, Knauf, Owens Corning or equal. Insulation thicknesses shall be as shown in the following table: Minimum Pi a Insulation Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes Fluid 1 in. Temperature and 1-1/4 to 2-1/2 to 5 and 6 8 in. Piping System Types Range Less 2 in. 4 in. in. and Larger °C F In. In. In. In. In. PLUMBING Domestic Water Ambient Ambient _ 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 -- Domestic Hot Water 43-71 110-160 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 -- Above Grade Drains and Piping Receiving 1 4.5-15.5 40-60 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 -- 2.09 IIEAT CABLE FOR FREEZE PROTECTION OF PIPING A. Provide electric heat tracing on all domestic water piping and sanitary traps exposed to exterior conditions. B. Provide a complete UL listed, CSA certified, or FM approved system of heating cables, components, and controls to prevent pipes from freezing. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 15 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMING GENERAL C. Electric heat cable shall be installed linearly along the bottom of the pipe and allowance shall be made for all fittings, valves, pipe supports, etc. Cable shall be installed prior to insulation of the piping system. D. Electric cable shall be capable of maintaining a minimum water temperature of 40 degrees F at an ambient air temperature of 0 degrees F. E. The electric cable shall be the self-regulating type that responds to varying localized temperature conditions by varying the heat output along its length. This shall be accomplished by a self-regulating core, which varies its resistance continuously with changes in temperature. A constant wattage heater is unacceptable. F. Provide a thermostat control, which de -energizes the heating cable when the ambient air temperature is above 40 degrees F (adjustable). While energized, the heat cable shall be entirely self-regulating. G. Provide all power connection hardware, splices, end seals, etc., to accomplish installation. All hardware shall be by the same manufacturer as the cable. H. Electric heating cable and accessories shall be UL listed. Electric heating cable shall conform to all requirements of Division 16. I. Electric heating cable shall be Raychem XL or approval equal. J. All piping shall be insulated with 1 " thick fiberglass insulation. K. Heating -cable circuit shall be protected by a ground -fault device for equipment protection. This requirement is in accordance with section 427-22 of the NEC-2002. L. All heating cable components shall be UL listed, CSA certified, or FM approved for use as part of the system to provide pipe freeze protection. Component enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall not require the installing contractor to cut into the heating -cable core to expose the bus wires. Connection systems that require the installing contractor to strip the bus wires or that use crimps or terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. 2.10 PIPE SUPPORTS & HANGERS A. All piping shall be supported by means of hanger rods and pipe hangers from roof or floor structure using supplementary steel and/or lagbolts. Water supply pipe connecting fixtures or fixture supplies shall be made rigid. 1. Piping shall be supported from new concrete construction with Grinnell Fig. 282 inserts or drilled expansion anchors. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 16 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL 2. piping shall be supported fiom new steel construction with Grinnell Fig. 131 beam clamp, Fig. 61 beam clamp, Fig. 66 welded beam attachment or Fig. 60 washer plate with all -thread rod. 3. Piping and brackets shall be supported from hollow block construction using masonry drilled holes and toggle bolts. 4. Piping shall be supported from wood truss construction with plated lag screws or bolts, B-3227 and B-3228. 5. Pipe supports shall not be attached to floor or roof deck. B. Unless otherwise noted, hangers and clamps shall be as listed below (all model numbers are B-Line Systems): 1. Cast iron/steel pipe - B3100 or 13310(). 2. Insulated water pipe •- B3100 or B3109 with B3151 placed over insulation protection saddle. 3. Uninsulated bare copper pipe - B3170 CTC plastic coated. 4. All supports and mounti<ig hardware are to be galvanized, cadmium plated, or factory enamel painted: 5. All supports on insulated piping systems shall be sized to fit outside the insulation and shall be provided with insulation inserts and shields at each hanger or support point. C. Branch piping to fixtures in chases shall be supported with plastic or copper clamp type supports: 1. 13-Lace Ruffin series. 2. Holdrite Systems. U. Maximum spacing bchvccn pipe hangers shall be: 1. Steel pipe a. 1-1/4" and smaller: 6'-0" b. 1-1 /2" — 2": 8'-0" C. 2-1/2" and larger: 10'4" 2. Cast iron soil pipe: 2" and larger: 10'-0" 3. Copper tubing: a. 1 /2" —1 ": 5'-0" b. 1-1/4"-2": 8'-0" C. 2-1/2" and larger: 10'-0" 4. PVC/CPVC and all plastic ripe: a. 1-1/4" and Smaller: 3'-0" b. 1-1/'2" and larger: 4'-0" COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 17 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL E. At least one hanger shall occur within 2'-0" from where change in direction takes place. Where pipes extend down or up to other floors, pipe clamps shall be provided on each floor to support vertical risers. F. Special approved hangers that require less installation space are to be used where required due to ceiling space limitations. 2.11 GAS FIRED WATER HEATER A. Furnish and install gas -fired water heater as shown on plans or as specified here -in. Water heaters shall have an efficiency factor greater than, or equal to 96% B. Gas water heaters shall be as manufactured by: 1. Lochinvar 2. Bradford White 3. A. O. Smith 2.12 FLASHING A. Vent pipes passing through roof shall be flashed watertight. B. The roof connections shall meet the approval of the manufacturer of the roofing materials and shall comply with the roof bond requirements. C. All vent piping shall be offset above ceilings or in attic space and as shown on the drawings to penetrate roofs on the least visible sides of building. 2.13 FLOOR, WALL & CEILING PLATES A. Furnish and install heavy gauge chromium plated steel wall and ceiling plates on all exposed pipes in finished areas where they pass through walls, ceilings, etc. Plates shall be of type that will remain permanently in position and where pipes are insulated they shall be of size necessary to cover insulated pipe. 2.14 GALVANIC PROTECTION A. Insulate joints between dissimilar metals with suitable isolation gasket and bolts with fiber ferrules and washers and/or suitable armored insulation fittings by Clearflow, Crane, Capital, or Epco, so there will be no contact between the metals or with insulating bushings. 2.15 PIPING SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 18 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL A. A marker showing the service and an arrow indicating the direction of flow shall be applied on all of the following piping systems applicable to the project installed under this section of the Specifications: 1. Domestic hot, cold water and hot water return piping. B. Piping identification shall be applied on all piping systems in areas of exposed construction and in areas with accessible or lay -in ceilings. The piping shall be labeled at each wall and floor penetration (both sides), and at connections to equipment. In addition, straight runs of piping shall be labeled at intervals not greater than 25 feet. C. The letter size and background color shall conform to the Identification of Pipe System ANSI A-13-1. The vinyl plastic markers shall be as manufactured by Seton Name - Plate Company, W. H. Brady Company, or. Westhne products. D. Each valve in the Plumbing and Fire Protection systems is to be Provided with an, individually numbered valve tag. E. Valve tags are to be bras-, or plastic laminate, 1-1l2" minunum diameter with brass chain and hook for securing to the valve. F. Valve tags will include a "P" or "FP" lettering designation to indicate the appropriate system. Numbering shall be consecutive for each service of either the Plumbing or Fire Protection systems. G. A printed list ur schematic drawing shall be compiled for each system indicating the location and detailed description of the system or equipment served. H. One copy of each list shall be framed and mounted at the location designated by the Building Engineer. An additional copy of each list is to be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual. 2.16 EQUIPMENT LABELING A. Al equipment shall be labeled. This shall include all pumps, water heaters, storage tanks, and other similar equipment. B. Equipment labeling shall be one of the following, unless noted or specified otherwise. 1. Permanently attached plastic laminate signs with 1" high lettering. 2. Stencil painted identification, 2" high letters, with standard fiberboard stencils and standard black (or other appropriate color) exterior stencil enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 19 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment and materials shall be completely installed, adjusted, and fully operational with all accessories and connections. B. Equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall fit into the spaces provided in the building and shall be installed at such times and in such a manner as to avoid damage and as required by the job progress. The Contractor shall coordinate work with other trades and locate work described herein to avoid interferences with structural, electrical and architectural work. Equipment, accessories and similar items requiring normal servicing or maintenance shall be accessible. C. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal of any item which, in his opinion, does not present an orderly and reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance. Such removal and replacement shall be done when directed by the Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner. D. Mounting heights, unless otherwise noted, are to the finished bottom of the device. 3.02 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING & BACKFILLING A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to install the work herein specified and as indicated on drawings. During excavation, material for backfilling shall be piled back from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides and cave-ins. All excavated materials not to be used for backfill shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Grading shall be done to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches and others excavation and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping. All excavation shall be made by open cut. No tunneling or boring shall be done except under pavement. B. The bottom of the trenches shall be graded to provide uniform bearing and support for conduits, cables, or duct bank on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Overdepths shall be backfilled with loose, granular, moist earth, and tamped in 12" layers. Remove unstable soil that is not capable of supporting equipment or installation and replace with specified material for a minimum of 12" below invert of equipment or installation. C. The trenches shall be backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or soft shale, free from large clods of earth and stones, deposited in 6" layers and tamped until the crown of the pipe is covered by a minimum of 6" of tamped earth. The backfill under and beside the pipe shall be compacted for pipe support. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe so that the pipe remains aligned. In instances where the manufacturer's installation instructions for materials are more restrictive than those prescribed by the code, the material shall be installed in accordance with the more restrictive requirement. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 20 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL The backfilling shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so that injurious pressures do not occur. The compaction of the filled trench shall be at least equal to 95% of the maximum density as determined by the Standard Proctor Test. Settling the backfill with water will not be permitted. Reopen any trenches not meeting compaction requirements or where settlement occurs, refill, compact, and restore the surface to the grade and compaction indicated, mounded over and smoothed off. A metallic lined underground warning tape shall be provided 12" below finished grade. The tape shall be identified as to the type of line per ANSI standard nomenclature and color. D. Provide a layer of sand at least 6" deep under all plastic pipe installed in soil. Bell holes shall be excavated to ensure that the sewer pipe rests for its entire length upon a solid trench bottom. F Perform exuavation and backfilling wurk in accordance with applicable portions of the earthwork section. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. During construction, all equipment shall be properly protected against damage, defacing and freezing with shipping cartons, plastic sheeting, shipping covers, etc. B. All open ends of piping and equipment shall be scaled with nipples and caps, plugs, test plugs until final connection to system is made. C. All equipment and piping shall be protected to prevent entrance of foreign matter and debris by covering exposed openings during construction. D. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's and supplier's recommendations and in manner to prevent damage to materials during storage and handling. Replace damaged materials. E. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment or materials. Equipment or materials damaged or which are subjected to these elements are unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises and replaced. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Work shall include all cuttii.ig, patching, masojury and carpentry required as part of the equipment installation when not provided by other sections of these specifications. B. All work shall he performed as specified cutler architectural specification section for cutting and patching. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 21 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL 3.05 CONCRETE WORK A. Construct curbs, pads, vaults and similar supports for equipment where required. B. Provide 4" thickness housekeeping pads at floor mounted equipment a minimum of 3" larger than the entire area occupied by equipment. Dowel pads to structural slab. C. Perform concrete work in accordance with applicable portions of Concrete sections. Minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be same as specified for slabs on grade. 3.06 CLEANING A. At all times, the premises shall be kept reasonably clean and free of undue amounts of waste, trash and debris by periodic cleaning and'removal. After completion, all foreign material, trash and other debris shall be removed from the job site. B. After all equipment has been installed, but prior to testing and balancing, all equipment, piping, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned both inside and out. C. After testing and balancing of systems as specified and just prior to Owner review and acceptance, all systems shall be finally cleaned and shall be left ready for use. 3.07 PAINTING A. Painting, except as otherwise specified, will be done under another section of the specifications, but the Contractor shall leave all surfaces of work free of rust, dirt and grease. B. The Contractor shall touch-up to match original finish any equipment scratched in shipment or installation. Touch-up painting of plumbing equipment shall be part of the plumbing work. C. Provide one coat of rust preventive primer on all new structural steel supports and new ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized (this includes piping systems). Rust preventative painting shall be part of the plumbing work. D. All painting and coating shall match the original and shall conform to the requirements detailed in other sections of these specifications. Do not paint over nameplates on equipment, nonferrous hardware, accessories or trim. 3.08 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. Major equipment supports (framed structural openings, etc.) shall be furnished and installed by others as shown on the drawings. The plumbing work shall include, the COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 22 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL furnishings, anal installation of all miscellaneous equipment supports, structural members, rods, clamps and hangers required to provide adequate support of all equipment. B. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all equipment, piping, and accessories shall be installed level, square, and plumb. C. All equipment, piping, etc. supported by structural joists shall be supported by the tp chord only of such joists. Hangers shall not be attached to the bottom chord of any joists. 3.09 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Sleeves shall be installed in all masonry or concrete walls, floors, roots, etc. for pipe penetrations. Sleeves for pipe shall be schedule 40 black steel. Sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum of 1/4" clearance between the sleeve and pipe. For insulated pipes or ducts, the clearance shall be between the sleeve and the insulation. B. As far as possible, all pipe penctratiuus shall be provided for at the time of masonry or concrete construction. Where drilling is required, only core drills shall be used. Star drills shall not be used. C. All pipes penetrating walls or floors of auy construction shall be installed with escutcheon plates on both sides of the penetration securely fastened to the wall or floor. In exposed areas, escutcheon plates shall be chrome plated. All escutcheon plates shall be sized to completely conceal the penetration. D. Pipe penetrations through exterior walls shall be sealed weathertight with expandable link type seals by Thunderline, Linkseal or Engineer approved equal. E. All pipe and duct penetrations of fire, smoke, or fire and smoke -rated assemblies shall be fire -stopped as required to retain the integrity of the UL rated assembly. Fire barrier products shall be as manufactured by Tremco, Hilti, 3M, Metacaulk, Nelson, or approved equal. Also, refer to Division 7 — Thermal and Moisture Protection. 3.10 FLASHING A. All piping penetrating roofs shall be flashed in an approved manner, shall be watertight, and shall conform to the requirements detailed in other sections of these specifications. B. Flashing for piping shall, be shcct lead of not less than 6 pounds per square foot, shall have a base not less than 2 square feet, and shall extend up over and into the open end of the pipe. All flashing shall be properly caulked and sealed. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 23 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL . 3.11 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Water Piping - General 1. Pipe used in piping assembly must be clean of dirt and obstructions and shall have ends square and reamed before putting into the fittings. 2. All piping must be true and plumb with proper pitch for draining of the soldering. 3. All domestic water lines serving flush valve fixtures and washing machines shall be protected from water hammer by shock absorbers. Where shock absorbers are required they shall be as manufactured by Josam Mfg. Company, J. R. Smith, Sioux Chief Ind., Precision Plumbing or Zurn Mfg. Co. and shall conform to the Plumbing and Drainage Institute published requirements. 4. All connections to water heaters, tanks and equipment shall be made with unions or flanges. Insulated piping systems shall be installed to provide space for insulation. B. Sanitary Waste, Vent, Indirect Waste Piping - General: 1. Pipes shall be plumb and parallel to building walls, beams and columns unless otherwise indicated. All horizontal lines are to be evenly pitched and properly secured with iron or steel hangers, unless noted otherwise. A pitch of 1/4 inch per lineal foot shall be maintained on all soil, and waste lines, wherever possible. Where long runs of piping require less pitch due to space restrictions, a less pitch shall be allowed on main lines four (4) inches and over in size, but in no event should any pipeline have a slope less than 1/8 inch per foot. 2. All soil and waste pipes shall be extended out full size through the roof or connected to a common vent as shown on the drawings. 3. The main ventilation stacks shall run parallel to the soil pipe stacks and shall connect to the vent continuation of the soil stack at least three (3) feet above the rim of the highest plumbing fixtures on the stack. Vent stacks shall also be connected at the base or horizontal offset of the soil stack through a Y and 1/8 bend or an upright Y fittings. Offsets in vent pipe shall be made with 45 degree fittings wherever possible. Horizontal vent lines shall pitch toward a waste line. 4. Threaded joints shall have American National taper screw thread with graphite and oil compound applied to the male threads. 5. Piping is to be run straight and plumb and all offsets shall be made at an angle of not less than 45 degrees. C. Mounting heights, unless otherwise noted, are to the centerline of the equipment and/or device. 3.12 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 24 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL 1. All piping systems shall be subjected, before being insulated or concealed, to testing with water or air as noted and shall hold tight at the pressure head stated for the time interval required without adding air or water. While any system is being tested required head or pressure shall be maintained until all joints are inspected. 2. All tests shall be witnessed by the inspector having jurisdiction and the Owner's Representative, with a miniumum 48-hour notice given these authorities. 3. All equipment, material, labor and testing mediums required for testing any of the various systems or any part thereof shall be funmished by the Contractor. 4. All connected equipment, accessories, etc. shall be isolated from piping systems prior to testing. B. Sanitary Piping Systems 1. Water test shall be applied to these drainage systems either in their entirety or in sections as required, after rough piping has been installed. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly closed except the highest opening in the section under test. All sections shall be tested with a minimum of 10 feet of head. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of the next section shall be tested so that no joint of piping in the building shall be submitted to a test of less than 10 feet of head. The water shall be kept in the system for at least 30 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be made tight at all points 2. Any points of the drainage systems to be tested with air instead of water shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to any suitable opening and after closing all other inlets or outlets, forcing air into the system until there is a minimum gauge pressure of 5 psi. This pressure shall be held without the introduction of additional air for a period of at least 30 minutes. 3. Exterior connections shall be tested as part of the interior systems. C. Interior Water Piping Systems 1. Upon completion of the entire water supply system or a section of it as required, it shall be tested prior to connection of fixtures and proved tight under a water/air pressure of 150 psi. Pressure shall hold for a period of one hour without introducing additional water/air. Water used for testing shall be from a potable source of supply. Defective joints or piping shall be replaced as required and all piping shall be retested. D. Exterior Water Piping System All exterior domestic water piping shall be tested to 150 psi for a period of two hours. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 25 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL E. Defective Work 1. If inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and inspection and tests shall be repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new material. Caulking of screwed joints or holes is not acceptable. F. Additional Tests 1. Provide all additional tests such as smoke or pressure tests as required by the regulations or as directed by authorities making the inspection. 2. Provide for any repeated test as directed by the Owner's Representative, to make all systems tight as required. 3. Visual inspections of joints, valves, etc. shall be made as directed by the Engineer. 3.13 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR A. Prior to project completion, all potable water piping systems shall be disinfected per local code requirements. B. Whenever the authority having jurisdiction does not specify disinfection procedures, the new water piping system shall be thoroughly disinfected with a solution containing not less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine of sodium hydrochloride solution, shall be introduced into the system and drawn to all points in the system. The disinfection solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of eight hours, during which period all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After disinfection, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clear water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. C. This work is to be supervised or performed by an approved chemical testing laboratory and results sent to Engineer or his representative for verification. 3.14 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Wall fixtures shall be hung by means of carrier type fixture supports as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Josam, Mifab, Wade or Zurn. 3.15 SLEEVES A. Furnish and install pipe sleeves around all piping passing through masonry walls, floors, beams, etc. Sleeves shall be of such diameter as to allow pipe to pass through easily and permit expansion and contraction of pipe. Where pipes are insulated, the sleeves shall be of such diameter as to allow the insulated pipe to pass through easily. The COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 MARCH 15, 2011 220000 - 26 PLUMBING GENERAL sleeves shall be placed before the puuring of concrete and before construction of walls. Sleeves for vertical risers shall extend a minimum of 1" above the floor slab. Sleeves to outside walls below grade shall be caulked or provided with expansion type mechanical seals as required to make them waterproof. B. Spacing between or location of pipe sleeves in floor slabs, structural beams or structural walls shall be subject to the Structural Engineer's approval. 3.16 INSTALLATION OF UNIONS A Unions shall be located as shown on plans and as required by equipment so piping and equipment can be easily dismantled. Unions shall not be installed in any location where they are not readily accessible. 3.17 TRAPS A. All fixtures, drains, etc. shall be provided with traps, unless specifically shown or specified otherwise. Traps shall be set in an upright position, level and true, and shall be vented as shown and required. All exposed traps shall be provided with cleanout plugs. 3.18 CLIEANOU`1' INSTALLATION A. Famish and install cleanouts in soil and waste lines as required by Code and/or job conditions, as shown on the drawings and as follows: At or near the end of each branch and main drainage line, horizontal lines at intervals as required by code. All cleanouts shall be readily accessible, with plugs easily removable for cleanout lines. Cleanouts at the base of vertical piping shall be held within 2'-0" from finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 3.19 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. All pipes passing though routs shall be tlashed in an approved manner. Flashing shall be watertight. R Roof connections shall meet the approval of the manufacturer of roofing material and shall comply with roof bond requirements. C. The Contractor is to inspect all existuig plumbing system roof penetrations and repair/replace flashing as required to provide a watertight installation. 3.20 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION COT J FGE STATION IT -IRE ST'AXION WO.6 220000 - 27 MARCH 15, 'NI I PLUMBING GENERAL A. During construction all equipment shall be properly protected against damage, defacing and freezing with shipping cartons, plastic sheeting, shipping covers. B. All open ends of piping and equipment shall be sealed with nipples and caps, plugs, test plugs until connection to system is made. 3.21 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Piping, apparatus and equipment shall fit into the space provided in the building or within the property and shall be installed at such time and in such manner as to avoid damage to the building structure or property as required by the job progress. Equipment, apparatus and accessories requiring normal servicing or maintenance shall be made easily accessible. END OF SECTION 220000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 220000 - 28 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING GENERAL SFf.1'ION 221600 - NATURAL (SAS PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM A. Provide a complete system of natural gas piping from gas meter to all natural gas burning equipment and appliances. B. All gas equipment specified herein shall be suitable for use with natural gas system. 1.02 DESIGN STANDARDS A. The natural gas system shall be designcd and installed m accordance with the requirements of the following codes and staudards: 1. The International fuel Gas Code, 2006 Edition, with most current local. Amendments 2. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code 3. Local Gas Utility supplier. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Underground Piping: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53 with polyethylene jacket, welded joints and standard weight black steel butt weld or socket weld fittings, ASTM A243. 2. Polyethylene pipe, ASTM 2513, with heat fusion joints and fittings, ASTM D2513. B. Aboveground Piping: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53 with welded joints and standard weight black steel butt weld fittings, ASTM A234 or socket weld fittings, ASTM A105. 2. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53, with 150 pound steel slip-on welding flanges, ASTM A181, for connection to flanged valves and equipment. 3. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53, with screwed joints and 150 pound threaded malleable iron fittings, ASTM A47, for connections to threaded equipment. 4. Corrugated 304 stainless steel tubing (CSST) with energy dissipating UktANGF CENTRAT, FUM. STATION No. 1 221600 — 1 MARCH 15, 2011 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM polyethylene jacket conforming to ASTM-A240; brass flare type fittings, ASTM B 16, 5 psi maximum system pressure. Polyethylene jacket shall not exceed 25/50 flame/smoke spread rating. Tracpipe Counterstrike CSST system only. 5. Copper tubing as permitted by Gas Code and local authorities. 2.02 JOINTS A. Threaded joints shall be made with a pipe compound specifically listed as resistant to reaction with liquefied petroleum gas and shall be applied to male threads only. After cutting and prior to threading, pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. B. Welded joints shall be fusion welded in accordance with the American Standards Code for pressure pipe, ASME B31.1, Section 6. C. Flanged joints shall be faced true, provided with ring type gasket, and made square and tight. Flanges shall have raised or flat faces to mate with adjacent flanges of valves. 2.03 UNIONS A. Unions in steel piping shall be 150 pound socket welded carbon steel conforming to ASME B.16.11 or class 150 malleable iron threaded fittings conforming to ASME B.16.3. 2.04 VALVES A. Valves 3" in size and larger shall be semi -steel plug valves with cast iron body, lubricated cast iron plug, flanged ends, and wrench operated for 175 pound WOG. Valve shall be Rockwell Nordstrom Fig. 143 or equal. B. Valves 2-1/2" in size and smaller shall have bronze body and plug, socket welded ends, and square head for 125 WOG. Valve shall be Crane or Fig. 250 or equal. C. Full port ball valves 2" in size and smaller shall have brass body with chrome plated brass ball with threaded or socket welded ends, 600 psi WOG, FM approval, AGA approval. Valve shall be Watts series FBV-3 or equal. D. Lubricated plug valves shall be lubricated at the factory and sealant shall be suitable for natural gas. Provide two valve wrenches for each type of valve specified. E. Acceptable valve manufacturers are Rockwell Nordstrom, Crane, Stockham, Powell, Walworth, or Milwaukee. F. Automatic Emergency Solenoid Gas shut-off valve for gas cooking ranges: Valve shall be equal to Snap-Tite model 230FV-8NA-AKG1, 120vav, normally closed, 1-1/4"npt ORANGE CENTRAL FIRE STATION NO. 1 221600 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM or Jefferson YC2030LA08T, 120vac, normally closed, 1-1/4"npt. A push button manual reset switch equal to Lamb Industries KJD 17 series shall be installed at location shown on drawing. The electromagnetic switch shall operate the valve to close upon signal from dispatch and shall remain closed until the GREEN reset button is pushed. In local emergency, the RED button is pushed to cause the valve to close. The valve is to remain closed until the GREEN reset button is pushed. The switch shall be labeled as "Manual Gas Reset". Push button switch and electrical wiring shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor. The electrical contractor shall fizrnish the solenoid valve and the plumbing contractor shall install. 2.05 PROTECTIVE, COATING A. Underground steel service entry piping shall be furnished with factory applied plastic coating and field coating at joints conforming to AWWA Standard C-203. All valves, fittings, and joints in underground piping shall be field coated using a heat -applied coal tar enamel tape, using two coats of heavy mastic, using "Scotchwrap," "CT Tapecoat" or "X-Tru-Tape." Field coating shall extend over mill wrapping a minimum of 4 inches. Damaged coating shall be repaired as specified for valves, fittings, and joints. 2.06 CATHODIC PROTECTION A. All underground gas piping shall be cathodically protected. Provide a minimum of two 17-pound magnesium anodes containing 6% aluminum and 3% zinc alloy. Anodes shall be distributed equally along the pipe run, but spacing shall not exceed 100 feet between anodes. Each anode shall be attached to the pipe by the Caldwell or brazing process. The connecting wire shall be buried in backfill composed of 75% gypsum, 20% bentonite and 5% sodium sulphate. Wherever the underground gas piping rises above grade, provide an insulating dielectric fitting. 2.07 PIPE SUPPORTS & HANGERS A. All piping shall be supported by means of hanger rods and pipe hangers from roof or floor construction using supplementary steel and/or lagbolts. L Piping shall be supported from new concrete construction with Anvil International Fig. 282 inserts. 2. Piping shall be supported from new steel construction with Anvil International Fig. 131 beam clamp, Fig. 61 beam clamp, Fig. 66 welded beam attachment or Fig. 60 washer plate with all -thread rod. 3. Piping and brackets shall be supported from hollow block construction using masonry drilled holes and toggle bolts. 4. Piping shall be supported from wood truss construction with plated lag screws or bolts, B-3227 and B-3228. B. Unless otherwise noted, hangers and clamps shall be as listed below (all model numbers OR ANGE CENTRAL FIRE 91-ATION NO. 1 221600 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM noted are B-Line Systems): 1. Gas pipe — B3100 or B3109. 2. All supports and mounting hardware are to be galvanized or cadmium plated. C. Maximum spacing between pipe hangers shall be: 1. 1/2": 6'-0" 2. 3/4"4 ": 8'-0" 3. 1-1/4" and larger: 10'-0" D. At least one hanger shall occur within two feet (T-0") from where a change in direction takes place in the line. Where pipes extend down or up to other floors, pipe clamps shall be provided on each floor to support pipe. Equal manufacturers for hangers and clamps are B-Line Systems, Anvil International, Fee and Mason, PHD Manufacturing, or approved equal. E. Piping on roofs shall be supported every six feet on piping 1/2" size, eight feet on piping 3/4" — 1" size, and ten feet on piping 1-1/4" and larger, and at each change in direction, with manufactured adjustable height stainless steel pipe stands with integral pipe roller guides or clevis hanger for securing horizontal piping. Pipe stands shall be secured to the roof per the roofing manufacturer's installation requirements. Pipe stands shall be Miro Industries Model 4-RAH Series or PPH Models PP10 or PS-1-2. F. Pipe supports for rooftop gas piping may be painted fabricated steel pipe stands with integral pipe guides if approved by the roofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All interior gas systems shall be bonded to the building's grounding system per the requirements of NEC Section 250. A written statement bearing the names and signatures of the plumbing and electrical contractors indicating compliance with the NEC grounding requirements is to be submitted prior to project close-out. B. A valved union shall be provided at each connection to a piece of equipment. Equipment provided with a flanged inlet shall have a flanged connection. C. All valves installed in horizontal lines shall be installed with the stems horizontal or above. D. All gas piping shall be graded at the maximum slope available to prevent traps. All horizontal lines shall slope to risers and from the risers to the meter or appliance. ORANGE CENTRAL FIRE STATION NO. 1 221600 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM E. Drip legs, 6" long, shall be provided in gas piping at ends of horizontal runs, at the base of risers, and at connections to equipment. F. Provide pressu a reVilators at all required connections to equipment; regulators shall be provided at the pressure required by the equipment served. Extend all pressure regulator vents individually to the exterior per local code authority requirements. G. Branch piping shall be taken off the top or sides of horizontal lines, but not from the bottom. H. Changes in pipe size shall be nadc w 11li reducing fittings. No bushings will be allowed. 1. No gas piping shall be placed underground inside the building. J. All interior and exterior ferrous metal gas piping, fittings and supports shall be primed and painted with two (2) coats of exterior grade enamel paint unless galvanized. The paint color shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. K. All gas supply connections to food service equipment are to be provided with an AGA rated flexible connector with quick disconnect coupling. The flexible connector shall be 5'-0" minimum length or longer as required to allow for removal of the food service equipment item. L. Underground Piping 1. General: a. Lay, align, anchor and test pipe and make-up joints. Perform excavating, cleaning, laying, jointing and backflling as concurrently as possible to maintain uniform installation. Replace or repair damaged materials to condition equal to new material. 2. Excavation and Backfilling: a. Care shall be taken not to excavate below depth necessary. b. Do not leave unjointed piping in trench overnight. Backfill trenches by filling and tamping in not more than 6" layers after pipes, tanks, or other structures have been installed, tested and approved. 3. Pipe Crossing: a. Lay lower pipe, backfill with crushed stone, gravel or concrete as directed and thoroughly compact to level of upper pipe. 3.02 TESTING A. All piping is to be inspected and purged per the requirements of NFPA 54 and the local authorities' requirements. B. The entire gas piping system shall be tested with compressed air to 100 psi for a period of two (2) hours. ORANGE CENTRAL FIRE STATION NO: 1 221600 - 5 MARCH 1 S, 2011 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM C. Defective joints or piping shall be replaced as required and the system shall then be re- tested. END OF SECTION 221600 ORANGE CENTRAL FIRE STATION NO. 1 221600 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SUPPORTS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 15400 — Plumbing Cleneral. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Receipt, unloading, handling, proper storage and protection from damage of all materials. B. Layout and coordination of work with other trades. C. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install the plumbing fixtures, trim and supports, complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. PAKf 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All fixtures shall be white, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aff exposed trim to be heavy polished chrome plated brass, unless otherwise indicated. Chrome plated escutcheons are to be provided on all exposed fixture supplies and waste lines, including lavatory vanities. C. Electric water coolers shall be ARI Certified and shall carry a UL Listing. Units shall use refrigerant which is approved for use without ozone depleting properties. All waterway components are to be certified as lead free. D. All sinks and lavatories for use by the handicapped shall have manufactured insulation shields on all supplies and P-traps per ADA requirements unless the vanities are provided with ADA compliant shrouds. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 224000 -1 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SUPPORTS 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The following is a list of acceptable manufacturers for the project: 1. Fixtures: American Standard, Kohler 2. Faucets: American Standard, Chicago Faucets, Kohler, Moen, Speakman and Symmons 3. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Just, Kohler 4. Trim: American Standard, Brasscraft, Kohler and McGuire 5. Drains and Carriers: Josam, Mifab, Jay R. Smith, Wade and Zum B. Plumbing fixtures shall be as scheduled on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All wall hung fixtures shall be supported on concealed chair carriers furnished complete with all necessary bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets unless noted otherwise. The adjustable nipple between the cast iron fitting and the closet bowl shall be threaded cast iron. Secure all floor pieces to floor slab. B. All exposed piping in connection with fixtures shall be chromium plated. Where supply and waste lines pass through walls, provide chromium plated escutcheons and firmly secure in place. C. Provide straight or angle supply valves on inlet supplies to all fixtures. D. Fixtures, trim and methods of piping and installation shall conform to local plumbing code. All fixture types shall be the product of one manufacturer. All fixtures shall be white unless otherwise noted. E. Shower waste and overflow fittings shall be provided with soldered metal connections or PVC solvent welded connections if required by code authorities to eliminate the requirement for access to the fitting. F. Fixtures shall be cleaned, adjusted and left in proper working order before the project is turned over to the Owner. Flush and clean all faucet aerators prior to turn over. Adjust all faucet lever handles to be parallel to adjacent rear wall in the off position. G. The Contractor shall fizrnish and install protective guards as required to protect fixtures against damage by normal operations of other trades. Bathtubs shall be provided with tub liners at all times during construction. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 224000 -2 MARCH 15, 2011 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SUPPORTS H. Caulk all floor and counter top mounted fixtures and behind all wall -hung plumbing fixtures with white, non -shrinking, silicone caulking eliminating all voids and cracks. I. Coordinate the mounting height of all fixtures with the Architect prior to installation. The Contractor shall obtain exact information relative to finish grade of the top of the floor drains. All floor drains shall be set flush with finished floors. K. Cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on drawings and else where as required by code. L. Where test tees are installed at the base of the stack or on the stack, they may he used as a cleanout. M. Provide the Owner with three (3) wrenches for removing flush cleanout plugs. END OF SECTION 224000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 224000 -3 MARCII 15. A )11 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SUPPORTS SECTION 230000 - HVAC GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1-General Requirements and any and all Supplementary or Special Requirements, all of which apply to work described in Division 23 - HVAC as if written in full herein. �. The scope of wuik described in these Specifications and/or indicated on the Drawings shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment, appurtenances, accessories, connections, labor, etc. required and/or necessary to completely install, clean, inspect, adjust, test, balance and leave in safe and proper operating condition all HVAC systems. All HVAC work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the various trades involved. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawings and Specifications, the higher implied cost shall be included in the bid, and the Architect shall be notified of the discrepancy in writing. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All HVAC work shall conform to all ordinances and regulations of the City, County and State where the work will take place, including the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. The following codes, standards and references shall be observed as a minimum: 1. The 2006 International Codes 2. Any and all local amendments to the Code 3. National Fire Protection Association (NrPA) Standards and Guidelines 4. Local and State Fire Marshal requirements 5. Local Building and Inspection Department requirements 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) 7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Manuals S. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 9. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) B. If Code or other requirements exceed the provisions shuwn on the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be notified in writing. Where requirements of the Contract Documents exceed Code requirements, work shall be furnished and COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any work done contrary to these requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED The HVAC Systems installed and work performed under this Division of the Specifications shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: A. Airside Systems 1. Equipment: including fans, unitary air conditioners, air handling units, fan - coil units, split systems, furnaces, etc. 2. Ductwork and Accessories: including sheet metal, flexible ductwork, fire and smoke dampers, access doors, etc. 3. Air Distribution Devices: including louvers, registers, grilles, diffusers, etc. B. Refrigerant and Water Systems 1. Equipment: including condensing units, etc. 2. Piping, Tubing and Accessories: including pipe, refrigerant tubing, thermal expansion valves, and condensate drains, etc. C. Equipment, Ductwork and Piping Supports 1. Equipment Mounts: including concrete housekeeping pads, miscellaneous steel, etc. 2. Hangers and Support Devices: including inserts, hanger rods, unistrut, cross -bracing, anchor bolts, restraints, etc. 3. Vibration Isolation and seismic restraint: including inertia bases, flexible couplings, expansion devices, snubbers, springs, waffle pads, seismic restraints, etc. D. Insulation 1. Ductwork Insulation: including exterior duct wrap, internal duct liner, fire wrap, etc. 2. Piping and Equipment Insulation: including preformed, board and wrap. E. Miscellaneous HVAC Equipment: Unit heaters, wall heaters, roof hoods, etc. F. Automatic Temperature Controls Decentralized: including all thermostats, control dampers, smoke detectors, control logic, etc. G. Labor and Equipment: including project management, supervision, tradesmen, lifts, fork -trucks, cranes, scaffolding, saws, wrenches, etc. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL H. Equipment Identification I. Start-up and Commissioning J. Demonstration and Owner Training K. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.04 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The locations, arrangement and extent of equipment, devices, ductwork, piping, and other appurtenances related to the installation of the HVAC work shown on the Drawings are approximate and define the intent of the design. The Contractor shall not scale Engineer's Drawings, but shall refer to the architectural drawings for exact dimensions of building components. Should a conflict exist between the architectural and engineering drawings regarding dimensions and scale, the Contractor shall notify the Architect of the discrepancy. B. Materials, equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material, equipment, or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation. 1.05 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND BID BASIS A. Manufacturers' names, model numbers, etc. cited on the Drawings and in the Specifications are for the purpose of describing type, capacity, function and quality of equipment and materials required. All project design and coordination between disciplines has been performed as if the named manufacturer and specific piece of equipment will be provided to the project by the Contractor. B. Alternate equipment and/or materials other than that named on the Drawings and in the Specifications may be proposed for use, but all equipment and materials shall conform entirely to the specified base items. Proposed alternate equipment shall be substantially equal in size, weight, construction and capacity. Alternate equipment and materials shall be submitted only as full equivalent to the equipment and materials specified, with sufficient supportive documentation and technical literature to demonstrate quality, performance, and workmanship without doubt or question. Requests for prior approval of alternate products shall be made at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date and as required by Division 1 - General Requirements. The Engineer shall consider the use of the alternate equipment based on the supportive documentation made available to him, and shall approve or disapprove any proposed alternates. The decision of the Engineer shall, in all cases, be final. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL C. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all HVAC equipment proposed for use in this project with all building trades (architectural, structural, electrical, etc.). Coordination shall be accomplished prior to, and shall be reflected in, the equipment submittals for approval. When the Contractor requests substitution of alternate equipment, it is with the knowledge that he shall be responsible for any and all costs required by the substitution, including necessary engineering and construction revisions in his or any other contract or trade to satisfy the design intent shown on the Plans and described in the Specifications. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall prepare, submit and obtain Engineer's review of all manufacturers' data on the HVAC equipment and systems prior to ordering, purchasing or installing any equipment or materials. Six (6) hard copies of the complete submittal package are required, five of which will be reviewed and returned by the engineer. All submittals shall be transmitted simultaneously in hard ring binders (or in a single .zip file), with the associated specification sections cited and the items submitted clearly identified. Partial submittals will be returned without review. Submittals, as a minimum, shall include: 1. All HVAC items scheduled on the Drawings 2. Equipment arrangement, ductwork and piping drawings. Contractor drawings shall be prepared at a minimum scale of 1/8" = F-0". A scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" scale is preferred. Drawings shall be indicative of actual equipment purchased and shall show all offsets, transitions, fittings, dampers, hanger locations, etc. Sections are required in spatially tight areas (e.g. mechanical rooms, etc.) The following will guide the Contractor as to minimum drawing detail required: a. Clearly indicate top and bottom of duct and pipe elevations. All elevations shall be coordinated as to not conflict with structural, plumbing, electrical and architectural trades. b. Indicate all offsets (both vertical and horizontal). C. Indicate graphically all duct and pipe joints and their lengths. d. Submit duct -work fabrication schedule indicating duct size range with minimum duct material gauges, being used, duct joint types, section lengths, duct reinforcement type and spacing, etc. e. Indicate graphically all ductwork to be fabricated with internal duct liner. f. Indicate all insulation for ductwork and piping. g. Indicate all dampers as shown on design documents and called for in the specifications. h. Indicate all flexible connectors where required by specifications and notes. 3. Flexible ductwork, insulation and linings 4. Dampers, louvers, air distribution devices 5. Manufacturer's cut sheets of all piping and tubing materials 6. Equipment supports, vibration isolators, seismic restraints COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL 7. Control equipment, systems and diagrams 8. Test and balance reports B. All submittal approvals required by any code or enforcement authority, insurance underwriter, etc. shall be obtained prior to being submitted to the Engineer. C. Review of submittals by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Furthermore, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the requirements (roof penetrations, wall penetrations, floor penetrations, electrical, etc.) of all approved equipment with the other trades and disciplines. D. All submittals shall be identified by the equipment mark or tag identification numbers shown on the Contract Drawings. Each individual submittal item shall be marked to show which specification section pertains to the item. >. The Contractor shall provide a written statement confirming coordination of voltage requirements for all HVAC equipment requiring an electrical connection. Statement shall bear the names and signatures of the HVAC and electrical contractors. A photocopied reproduction of the below statement is acceptable. VOLTAGE COORDINATION STATEMENT This statement is to confirm that the voltages of the equipment provided under this specification have been coordinated with the Electrical Drawings, as well as with the Electrical Contractor. HVAC Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature./Date: Electrical Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: 1.07 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections required for the installation of the HVAC work and pay all charges incident thereto. He shall deliver copies of all certificates of permit and inspection to the Architect. 1.08 COORDINATION OF TRADES COT T EGE STATION r-ME STATION NO.6 230000 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL A. The Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades, and shall furnish all information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. B. Piping and other HVAC equipment shall not be installed without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated ductwork, piping and other HVAC equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical, plumbing equipment, ceilings and other architectural or structural finishes. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the elevations of all ductwork, piping and equipment above ceilings and in exposed areas with the work of all other disciplines prior to installation. D. In areas where more than one trade is required to use common openings in beams, joists, chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, the Contractor must coordinate the positions of all piping and equipment to be furnished under this section so that all items including the materials and equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. E. The HVAC Contractor shall confirm that his work does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions, walls or other architectural or structural elements as shown on the Contract Documents. F. Work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure shall be removed and relocated as required at no additional cost to the Contract. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare a minimum of two (2) instruction manuals, one of which shall be submitted to the Architect for the Engineer's review. Manuals shall describe installation, operation and maintenance of all HVAC equipment and shall include copies of control schematics, sequences of operation, function and operations of all components, as well as the Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. Manuals shall also contain one copy of all manufacturers' drawings, pamphlets, data, parts lists, and instruction manual for each piece of equipment. Upon approval, one copy shall be delivered to the Owner; one copy shall be kept by the Contractor. The pamphlets and drawings are to be neatly bound in (a) 3-ring binder(s). 1.10 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL A. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all changes in the work from that shown in the Contract Documents. The record shall be by red -line mark-up on the most current set of Engineer's Drawings kept in the field office. After all work is completed, the Contractor shall prepare a set of "as -built" reproducible drawings of similar type and quality as the Engineer's Drawings. As -built drawings shall accurately depict actual final arrangement of all HVAC items. As -built drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. A. All equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard warranty unless otherwise noted. B. All reciprocating and scroll air conditioning compressors shall be provided with an extended 5-year parts warranty. C. The Contractor shall make good all defects m material, equipment, or workmanship disclosed within a period of one (1) year from date of building acceptance by the Owner. The phrase "make good" shall mean to furnish promptly, without charge, all work necessary to remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All equipment, materials, accessories, etc. used shall be new and of current production unless specified otherwise. Equipment not specified in the Engineer's Drawings shall be suitable for the intended use and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. B. All equipment, products and materials shall be free of defects and shall be constructed to operate in a safe manner without excessive noise, vibration, leakage, or wear. C. All equipment shall bear the inspection Label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. D. All equipment and material for similar applications or systems shall be provided from the same manufacturer unless noted otherwisc. 2.02 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Except as otherwise specified or noted, electrical equipment used in HVAC systems shall be as specified herein. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 7 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL B. Motor controls, system controls, starters, push buttons, etc. shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor complete as a part of the motor or apparatus that it operates. Electrical equipment shall be wired for the voltage shown on the Electrical Engineer's Drawings. C. Electric motors shall be high efficiency, open drip -proof type unless otherwise specified. Motors shall be standard NEMA continuous duty type and shall bear the UL Label. Motors shall be selected with a minimum of 15% safety factory greater than the fan brake/horsepower (e.g. 4.75 BHP would require a nominal 7-1/2 HP motor). The motor service factor shall not be used as part of the safety factor. All motors shall have thermal overload protection. Motors shall meet Table MG-1- 12C of EPACT 1992. D. Starters for motors 1/3 HP and smaller shall be manual type, and for 1/2 HP and larger, shall be magnetic type. Starters shall be minimum size 0, combination type (with disconnect and lockable handle) with molded case circuit breaker. Starters for motors with remote or automatic control shall be magnetic. Relays, interlocks and auxiliary contacts shall be provided as specified and required. E. Magnetic motor starters shall be across -the -line, full voltage, non -reversing type unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Starters for motors 75 HP and greater shall be solid state, reduced voltage type. F. Motor controls shall be either "Hand -Off -Auto" switches or "On -Off' push buttons with one indicating light. "Hand -Off -Auto" switches shall be provided for automatically controlled apparatus. G. Motor starters that are not an integral part of HVAC equipment shall be installed in conformance with Division 26 - Electrical requirements. H. Electrical power wiring to disconnects, starters, motors and similar devices shall be provided under the Electrical Section. All equipment requiring electrical power shall be installed with disconnect switches at each piece of equipment. Coordinate switch type (fused or non -fused) with equipment characteristics, manufacturer's recommendations and electrical drawings. I. The Contractor shall provide all system controls, control and interlock wiring 120 volts and less in conduits and in accordance with materials and installation requirements of Division 26 - Electrical. J. All starters shall be labeled on the face of the starter with a semi -rigid plastic laminate nameplate with V high white letters on a black background securely affixed to the equipment. The label shall indicate equipment served by the starter (equipment tag used on the Drawings). Labels shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. K. All starters for 3-phase equipment shall have overload devices in each phase. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 8 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL L. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor. M. Acceptable manufacturers shall be General Electric, Square D, Cutler -Hammer, Siemens and Allen Bradley. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall be completely installed, adjusted, and fully operational with all accessories and connections. B. Equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall fit into the spaces provided in the building and shall be installed at such time and in such a manner as to avoid damage and as required by the job progress. The Contractor shall coordinate work with other trades and locate work described herein to avoid interferences with structural, electrical and architectural work. Equipment, accessories and similar items requiring normal servicing or niaiutenance shall be accessible. C. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal of any item which, in his opinion, does not present an orderly and reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance. Such removal and replacement shall be done when directed by the Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner. D. Listed mounting heights are to the finished bottom of the device unless otherwise noted. E. All work shall be designed and installed to comply with the requirements for the seismic design category and use group for the area in which the building is constructed. 3.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. During construction, all equipment shall be properly protected against damage, defacing and freezing with shipping cartons, plastic sheeting, shipping covers, etc. B. All open ends of piping and equipment shall be sealed with nipples and caps, plugs, and test plugs until final connection to system is made. C. All equipment, piping and ductwork shall be protected to prevent entrance of foreign matter and debris by covering exposed openings during construction. D. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's and supplier's recommendations and in a manner to prevent damage to materials during storage and handling. Replace damaged materials. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 9 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL E. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment or materials. Equipment or materials damaged or which are subjected to these elements are unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises and replaced. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The work shall include all cutting and patching required as part of the HVAC installation. Refer to Division 1 — General Requirements. 3.04 CONCRETE WORK A. Construct curbs, pads and similar supports for equipment where required. B. Provide 4" thick housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment, extending 6" beyond the area occupied by the equipment. Dowel pads to structural slab. C. Perform concrete work in accordance with applicable portions of Division 3 - Concrete. Minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be same as specified for slabs on grade. D. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces and anchors. Provide forms as necessary and place grout to completely fill equipment bases. 3.05 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Major equipment supports (structural steel frames, framed structural slab and wall openings, etc.) shall be furnished and installed by others; however, the HVAC work shall include furnishing and installation of all miscellaneous equipment supports, structural members, rods, clamps and hangers required to provide adequate support of all HVAC equipment. B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all HVAC equipment, piping, and accessories shall be installed level, square, and plumb. C. All equipment, piping, etc. supported by structural bar joists shall be supported only by the top chord of the joists. Hangers shall not be attached to the bottom chord of any joists. 3.06 PIPE AND DUCTWORK PENETRATIONS A. Sleeves shall be installed in all masonry or concrete walls, floors, roofs, etc. for pipe and ductwork penetrations. Sleeves for pipe shall be schedule 40 black steel. Sleeves for ductwork shall be 20-gauge galvanized steel. Sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum of 1/4" clearance between the sleeve and pipe or duct. For insulated pipes or ducts, the clearance shall be between the sleeve and the insulation. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230000 - 10 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL B. As far as possible, all pipe and ductwork penetrations shall be provided for at the time of masonry or concrete construction. Where drilling is required, only core drills shall be used. Star drills shall 'not be used. C. All pipes penetrating walls or floors of any construction shall be installed with escutcheon plates on both sides of the penetration securely fastened to the wall or floor. In exposed areas, escutcheon plates shall be chrome plated. All escutcheon plates shall be sized to completely conceal the penetration. D. Ductwork penetrating walls or floors of any material shall be installed with closure plates on both sides of the penetration. Pipe penetrations through exterior walls shall be sealed weather -tight with expandable link type seals by Thunderline, Linkseal, or Engineer approved equal. E. All pipe and duct penetrations of fire, smoke, or fire and smoke -rated assemblies shall be fire -stopped as required to retain the integrity of the UL-rated assembly. Fire barrier products shall be as manufactured by Tremco, Hilti, 3M, Metacaulk, Nelson, or approved equal. Refer to Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection. 3.07 FLASHING A. All piping and ductwork penetrating iuofs shall be flashed in an approved manner, ihall be watertight, and shall conform to the requirements detailed in Division 7 — Thermal and Moisture Protection. 3.08 EQUIPMENT LABELING A. All IIVAC equipment shall be labeled. This shall include all air handling or air conditioning equipment, and other similar and miscellaneous equipment. B. Equipment labeling shall he one of the following, unless noted or specified otherwise: 1. Permanently attached plastic laminated signs with 1" high lettering 2. Stencil painted identification, 2" high letters, with standard fiberboard stencils and standard black (or other appropriate color) exterior stencil enamel. 3.09 CLEANING A. At all times, the premises shall be kept reasonably clean and free of undue amounts of waste, trash and debris by periodic cleaning and removal. After completion, all foreign material, trash and other debris shall be removed from the ,job site. COT T.EGE STATION FIRE S YA ION NO.6 230000 -11 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC GENERAL B. After all equipment has been installed, but prior to testing and balancing, all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned both inside and out. C. After cleaning, filters shall be installed where required and all systems shall be tested and balanced. D. After testing and balancing and just prior to Owner review and acceptance, all systems shall be finally cleaned and left ready for use. 3.10 PAINTING A. Painting will be done under Division 9 — Painting except as otherwise noted, but the HVAC Contractor shall leave all surfaces of work free of rust, dirt and grease. B. The HVAC Contractor shall touch-up any equipment scratched in shipment or during installation to match original finish. Touch-up painting of HVAC equipment shall be part of the HVAC work. C. Any visible ductwork through grilles, registers and diffusers shall be painted flat black. D. Provide one coat of rust preventive primer on all new structural steel supports and new ferrous surfaces not galvanized, including HVAC piping. Rust preventive painting shall be part of the HVAC work. Rust preventive paint shall be "Rust Destroyer" by Advanced Protective Products, Inc., Fairlawn, NJ, (201) 794-2000. Product shall have a 5-year warranty when applied directly over rust. Clean and prepare surface per manufacturer's recommendations. E. All painting and coating shall match the original finish and shall conform to the requirements detailed in Division 9 - Finishes. F. Do not paint over equipment nameplates, nonferrous hardware, accessories or trim. 3.11 PERFORMANCE AND DEMONSTRATION TESTS A. All testing and demonstration of any and all HVAC systems required for acceptance by any authorities having jurisdiction shall be included as part of the HVAC work. This shall include the furnishing of any and all testing equipment, smoke generation devices, and any other required equipment or accessories, and all necessary labor required to perform any required tests or demonstrations. The Contractor shall coordinate and verify all devices, equipment and sequence of testing and/or events with such authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall perform a minimum of two (2) satisfactory preliminary tests or demonstrations prior to any formal tests and/or demonstrations for any code authorities, and shall give a minimum of five (5) days advance notice to the COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 MARCH 15, 2011 230000 - 12 HVAC GENERAL Engineer of any and all preliminary tests and/or demonstrations, indicating the date and time of such tests. 3.12 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall conduct operation and training session(s) for the Owner's key operating personnel. These sessions shall be of sufficient length and duration to adequately explain the design intent and proper operating and maintenance techniques for all HVAC equipment and systems. After these sessions are completed, the Contractor shall provide a copy of a signed statement by the Owner that his personnel are thoroughly familiar with and capable of operating all HVAC equipment and systems. END OF SECTION 230000 COLLEGE STATION FIRF STATION NO.G 2j0000 - 13 MARCH 15, 2011 J IVA.0 GENEIc L SECTION 230548 - NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install vibration control devices, materials, and related items. Perform all work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein to provide complete vibration isolation systems in proper working order. 1.02 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Vibration isolation mounts sliall be supphed by one of the following approved manufacturers: 1. Amber/Booth Co. (Houston, TX) A.B 2. Mason industries, Inc. (Hauppauge, NY) M.I. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. (Dublin, OH) K.N.C. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. (Copiague, NY) V.E 5. Vibration Mountings & Cuntrols, Inc. (Butler, NJ) V.M.&C B. Unless otherwise specified, supply only new equipment, parts and materials. C. Substitutions of equal equipment beyond the alternatives listed will be permitted only with the written permission of the Architect. Accompany each request for acceptance of substitute equipment with manufacturer's certified data proving the equivalence of the proposed substitute in quality and performance. The Architect shall be the final judge of the validity of the data submitted. D. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, field -installed vibration isolation equipment shall be furnished by a single manufacturer or his authorized representative, who shall also be responsible for all work specified in this section to be performed by the manufacturer. 1.03 REQUESTS FOR CHANGE A. Any requests for changes to the specifications must be submitted in writing at least ten (10) days prior to bid closing. Approval will be given through a written addendum. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230548 -1 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate the size, location, and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of housekeeping pads. B. Provide vibration isolators of the appropriate sizes, with the proper loading to meet the specified deflection requirements. C. Supply and install any incidental materials such as mounting brackets, attachments and other accessories as may be needed to meet the requirements stated herein, even if not expressly specified or shown on the drawings, without claim for additional payment. D. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specifications. E. Should any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration when properly installed on the specified isolators, the Contractor shall be responsible for rebalancing, realignment, or other remedial work required reducing noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding the manufacturer's specifications for the unit in question. F. Upon completion of the work, the Architect or Architect's representative shall inspect the installation and shall inform the installing contractor of any further work that must be completed. Make all adjustments as directed by the Architect that result from the final inspection. This work shall be done before vibration isolation systems are accepted. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to related sections elsewhere for procedural instructions for submittals. B. Before ordering any products, submit shop drawings of the items listed below. The shop drawings must be complete when submitted and must be presented in a clear, easily understood form. Incomplete or unclear presentation of shop drawings may be reason for rejection. 1. A complete description of products to be supplied, including product data, dimensions, specifications, and installation instructions. 2. Detailed selection data for each vibration isolator supporting equipment, including: a. The equipment identification mark; b. The isolator type; C. The actual load; d. The static deflection expected under the actual load; COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL e. The specified minimum static deflcction. 3. Concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, vibration isolator mounting attachment method, and location of equipment attachment bolts. 4. Special details necessary to convey complete understanding of the work to be performed. C. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples will be returned for installation at the job if requested. All costs associated with submission of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design isolators for equipment installed outdoors to provide adequate restraint to withstand the force as required by code to any exposed surface of the isolated equipment. Isolators for outdoor equipment shall have bolt holes for attachment to equipment and to supports. The vibration isolation Vendor shall submit verifying shear and over turning calculations, for their product and equipment installation arrangement, stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer. The design and supply of miscellaneous support steel above and below isolators will not be the responsibility of the vibration isolation man,ifacturer. 1.07 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Scope 1. Provide isolators, flexible connections, and equipment bases for all rotating, piston driven, or vibrating equipment. 2. Guarantee specified isolation system deflections. 3. Provide installation instructions, drawings, and field supervision to ensure proper installation and performance of all items specified in this section. B. Definitions 1. "Attaclunent Devices" are devices such as double sided beam clamps, concrete inserts, and attachment plates that serve to secure the supported device to the structure. 2. "Positive Attachment" is defined as a support location with a cast -in or wedge type expansion anchor, a double -sided beam clamp, or a welded or through bolted connection to the structure. 3. "Transverse Bracing" Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. 4. "Longitudinal Bracing" Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of the pipe, duct, conduit, etc. 5. Life Safety Systems COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230548 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL a. All systems involved with fire protection, including sprinkler piping, service water supply piping, water tanks, and fire dampers. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply, including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all circuits to fire equipment. C. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply, including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all circuits to fire protection, smoke evacuation and/or emergency lighting systems. C. Reference Codes and Standards 1. 2006 International Building Code 2. "SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Mechanical Systems" - Second Edition (1998) with Addendum No. 1 (September 2000) 3. Seismic design category D. Exclusions from Seismic Restraint Requirements 1. With the exception of life safety components, certain components do not require seismic restraints. These are specified herein. E. Submittal Data Requirements 1. Submittals: a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on specific products utilized, which detail compliance with the specification. Reference "TYPE" as per "PRODUCTS" section of this specification. 2. Shop Drawings a. Show base construction for equipment; include dimensions, weights, structural member sizes and support point locations. b. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection data before condition is accepted for installation. C. Calculate thrust for fan heads (axial and centrifugal fans) to determine whether thrust restraints are required. F. Manufacturer Inspection 1. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices, a certification report prepared by the manufacturer shall be submitted in writing to the Contractor indicating that all systems are installed properly and in compliance with the specifications. The report must identify those areas that require corrective measures or certify that none exist. Any field coordination type changes to the originally submitted seismic restraint designs must be clearly defined and detailed in this report. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPES A. General 1. All metal parts installed out-of-doors shall be corrosion resistant after fabrication. Galvanizing shall meet ASTM Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard No. 14. 2. Isolators installed out-of-doors shall have base plates with bolt holes for fastening the isolators to the support members. 3. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the Contractor's option, labor-saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories and seismic restraint features must not degrade the isolation performance of the isolators. 4. Static deflection of isolators shall be as provided in the EXECUTION section and as shown on the drawings. All static deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflections are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Type FSN (Floor Spring and Neoprene) 1. FSN isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing. Spring diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel -to - solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ratio of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately 1. Mounts shall have leveling bolts. 2. The spring element in the isolator shall be set in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene. Alternatively, each isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad uniformly within the manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is used, the holes in the isolator base plate shall be oversized and GROMMETS shall be provided for each base plate bolt hole. 3. If the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and an NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum bearing plate shall be used between the friction pad and the NP isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, bearing plate and friction pad shall be COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230548 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 4. Type FSN isolators shall be one of the following products with the appropriate neoprene pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type SW A.B. b. Type SLF M.I. C. Type FDS K.N.C. d. Type OST V.E. e. Series AC V.M.&C. C. Type FSNTL (Floor Spring and Neoprene Travel Limited) 1. FSNTL isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing. Spring diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel -to -solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ratio of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately 1. Mounts shall have leveling bolts. Mounts shall have vertical travel limit stops to control extension when weight is removed. The travel limit stops shall be capable of serving as blocking during erection of the equipment. A minimum clearance of 1/4" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the limit stops and the spring to avoid interference with the spring action. 2. The spring element in the isolator shall be set in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene. Alternatively, each isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad uniformly within the manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is used, the holes in the isolator base plate shall be oversized and GROMMETS shall be provided for each base plate bolt hole. 3. If the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and an NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum bearing plate shall be used between the friction pad and the NP isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, bearing plate and friction pad shall be permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 4. Type FSNTL isolators shall be one of the following products, with the appropriate neoprene pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type CT A.B. b. Type SLR M.I. C. Type FLS K.N.C. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL d. Type KW V.E. e. Series AWR V.M.&C. D. Type FN (Floor Neoprene) 1. NP isolators shall be neoprene -in -shear type with steel reinforced top and base. All metal surfaces shall be covered with neoprene. The top and bottom surfaces shall be ribbed. Bolt holes shall be provided in the base and the top shall have a threaded fastener. The mounts shall include leveling bolts that may be rigidly connected to the equipment 2. 'Type FN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. X'ypc R'VD A.B. b. Type ND M.I. C. Type D K.N.C. d. Type D44 V.E. e. Series RD V.M.RrC E. Type FNC (Floor Neoprene Constrained) 1. FNC isolators shall incorporate bridge -bearing neoprene elements with all - directional restraiuit. The niount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two (2) separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. Bolt holes shall be provided in the base and the top shall have a threaded fastener. 2. Type FNC isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type BR M.I. b. Series RSM V.M.&C. F. Type PCF (Pre -compressed Fiberglass) 1. PCF isolator blocks shall be made of molded inorganic glass fiber that is individually coated and sealed with an impervious elastomeric membrane. Fiberglass shall be severely overloaded during the manufacturing process to stabilize the material into a product that is permanent and has consistent, predictable dynamic properties. 2. Type PCF isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type KIP K.N.C. G. Type NP (Neoprene Pad) 1. NP isolators shall be one layer of 5/16" to 3/8" thick ribbed or waffled neoprene. The pads shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230548 - 7 MARCII 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL manufacturer's recommended range. 2. Type NP isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type NR A.B. b. Type W M.I. C. Type NPS K.N.C. d. Type 20ON V.E. e. Series Maxi -Flex V.M.&C. H. Type DNP (Double Neoprene Pad) 1. DNP isolators shall be formed by two layers of 1/4" to 3/8" thick ribbed or waffled neoprene, separated by a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum plate. If the isolator is outdoors, the plate shall not be made of galvanized steel. These layers shall be permanently adhered together. The pads shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended range. 2. Type DNP isolators shall be formed from one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type NR A.B. b. Type WSW M.I. C. Type NPS K.N.C. d. Type 200N (Multilayers) V.E. e. Series Maxi -Flex V.M.&C. I. Type HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene) 1. HSN isolators shall consist of a freestanding and laterally stable steel spring and a neoprene element in series, contained within a steel housing. Spring diameters and hanger housing lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degrees arc before contacting the housing. Alternatively, other provisions shall be made to allow for a 30 degrees arc of movement of the bottom hanger rod without contacting the isolator housing. Spring diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Spring elements shall have a minimum additional travel -to -solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. The neoprene element shall be designed to have a 0.3" minimum static deflection. The deflection of both the spring element and the neoprene element shall be included in determining the overall deflection of Type HSN isolators. 2. A pre -compressed glass fiber element may be substituted for the neoprene element. 3. Type HSN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type BSR-A A.B. b. Type 30N M.I. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 8 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL C. Type SRH or SFH K.N.C. d. Type SNRC V.E. e. Type RSH 30A or RSHSC V.M.&C. J. Type HN (Hanger Neoprene) 1. HN isolators shall consist of a neoprene -in -shear element contained within a steel housing. A neoprene neck bushing shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the hanger housing to prevent the rod from contacting the hanger housing. 2. A pre -compressed glass fiber element may be substituted for the neoprene element. 3. Type HN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type DRD-A A.B. b. Type HD M.I. C. Type RH or FH K.N.C. d. 'Type 3C V.E. e. Type RHD V.M.&C. 2.02 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Type BSR (Base - Steel Rail) 1. Steel rail Lases shall consist of structural steel sections sized to provide a rigid beam that will not twist, deform, or deflect in any manner that will negatively affect the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Rail bases shall include mounting brackets for attachment of vibration isolators. 2. Type BSR bases shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type C or CIS A.B. b. 'Type R or ICS M.I. C. Type KRB or KFB K..N.u. d. 'Vype CS V.E. e. Type WFR V.M.&C:. B. Type BSF (Rase - Steel Frame) 1. Steel frame bases shall consist of structural steel sections sized, spaced, and connected to form a rigid base which will not twist, rack, deform, or deflect in any manner which will negatively affect the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Frames shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. The depth of steel COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230548 - 9 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL frame bases shall be at least 1/10 the longest dimension of the base supported between isolators and not less than 6". The base footprint shall be large enough to provide stability for supported equipment. 2. Frame bases shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. 3. Type BSF bases shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type WX A.B. b. Type WFSL M.I. C. Type SFB K.N.C. d. Type HB V.E. e. Series WFB V.M.&C. C. Type BIB (Base - Inertia Base) 1. Inertia bases shall be formed of stone -aggregate concrete (150 lb/cu. ft.) and appropriate steel reinforcing cast between welded or bolted perimeter structural steel channels. Inertia bases shall be built to form a rigid base that will not twist, rack, deform, deflect, or crack in any manner that would negatively affect the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Inertia bases shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. Inertia base depth shall be at least 1/12 the longest dimension of the base supported between isolators and not less than 6". The base footprint shall be large enough to provide stability for supported equipment. Inertia bases shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. Concrete may be provided by the General Contractor. 2. Frame and reinforcement for Type BIB bases shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type CPF A.B. b. Type KSL or BMK M.I. C. Type CIB-L or CIB-H K.N.C. d. Type SN V.E. e. Series MPF or WPF V.M.&C. D. Type RC-1 (Roof Curb, Type 1) 1. Type RC-1 isolation bases shall be a prefabricated assembly consisting of an extruded aluminum frame and steel spring isolation system that fits over the roof curb and under the isolated equipment. The aluminum frame shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment load without detrimental COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 10 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL twist or deflection. Spring isolators shall be selected and positioned along the curb to achieve the minimum static deflection called for in the schedule. The static deflection shall be constant around the entire periphery of the base. Springs shall be free standing, laterally stable with a diameter of not less than 0.8 times the compressed height, and have additional travel -to - solid that is at least 50% of the rated deflection. Resilient neoprene snubbers shall be provided at the corners of the base to limit equipment movement to 1/4" under wind load. 2. The isolation curb base shall be made weather tight by sealing all around the periphery with closed cell neoprene or flexible membrane that shall in no way inhibit the vibration isolation of the spring elements. Closed cell sponge gasketing or field caulking shall be used between the equipment unit and the isolation curb base and between the isolation curb and roof curb to form a wcather-tight seal. Each spring isolator used in the curbs shall be weather -protected as described in the PRODUCTS section under General. 3. Type RC-1 vibration isolation curb bases shall be supplied by the isolator manufacturer and shall be one of the following products or approved equal- a. Type RTIR A.B. b. Type CMAB M.I. C. Type ASR K.N.C. d. Type AR V.E. e. Series AXR V.M.&C.. E. Type RC-2 (Roof Curb, Type 2) 1. Type RC-2 isolation bases shall be a prefabricated assembly consisting of a structural steel frame and steel spring isolation system that also forms the roof curb under the isolated equipment. The steel frame shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment load without detrimental twist or deflection. Spring isolators shall be selected and positioned along the curb to achieve the minimum static deflection called for in the schedule. The static deflection shall be constant around the entire periphery of the base. Springs shall be free standing, laterally stable with a diameter of not less than 0.8 times the compressed height, and have additional travel -to -solid that is at least 50% of the rated deflection. Spring isolators shall include travel limit stops that are capable of serving as blocking during erection of the equipment. A minimum clearance of 1/4" shall be maintained around restraining bolts as they pass through the limit stop brackets. Springs and limits stops shall be provided at the corners of the base to limit equipment movement to 1/4" under wind load. 2. The isolation curb base shall be made weather tight by sealing all around the periphery with closed cell neoprene, flexible membrane or light gauge spring metal loop, which shall in no way inhibit the vibration isolation of the spring elements. A closed cell sponge gasket or field caulking shall be used between the equipment unit and the isolation curb base and between COLLEGE, STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230548 - 11 MARCI I 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL the isolation curb and roof curb to form a weather -tight seal. Each spring isolator used in the curbs shall be weather -protected as described in the PRODUCTS section under General. 3. Type RC-2 vibration isolation curb bases shall be supplied by the isolator manufacturer and shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type RSC M.I. b. Type SSR K.N.C. C. Vibrocurb ThyCurb 2.03 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL A. Resilient penetration sleeve/seals shall be field -fabricated from a pipe or sheet metal section that is 1/2" to 3/4" larger than the penetrating element in all directions around the element, and shall be used to provide a sleeve through the construction penetrated. The sleeve shall extend 1" beyond the penetrated construction on each side. The space between the sleeve and the penetrating element shall be packed with glass fiber or mineral wool to within 1/4" of the ends of the sleeve. The remaining 1/4" space on each end shall be filled with acoustical sealant to form an airtight seal. The penetrating element shall be able to pass through the sleeve without contacting the sleeve. Alternatively, prefabricated sleeves accomplishing the same result are acceptable. 2.04 RESILIENT LATERAL SUPPORTS A. These units shall either be a standard product of the vibration isolator manufacturer, or be custom fabricated from standard components. These units shall incorporate neoprene isolation elements similar to Type FN that are specifically designed to provide resilient lateral bracing of ducts or pipes. B. Resilient lateral supports shall be one of the following products or approved equal: 1. Type Custom A.B. 2. Type ADA M.I. 3. Type RGN K.N.C. 4. Type VERG or VPL V.E. 5. Type MDPA V.M.&C. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Flexible duct connections shall be made from coated fabric. The clear space between connected parts shall be a minimum of 3", and the connection shall have a minimum of 1.5" of slack material. 2.06 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Flexible pipe connections shall be fabricated of multiple plys of nylon cord, fabric, COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 12 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL and neoprene; and shall be vulcanized so as to become inseparable and homogeneous. Flexible connections shall be formed in a double sphere shape, and shall be able to accept compressive, elongating, transverse, and angular movements. B. The flexible connections shall be selected and specially fitted, if necessary, to suit the system temperature, pressure, and fluid type. In addition, suitable flexible connections should be selected, if possible, which do not require rods or cables to control extension of the connector. C. Connectors for pipe sizes 2" or smaller shall have threaded female union couplings on each end. Larger sizes shall be fitted with metallic flange couplings. D. Flexible pipe connections shall be one of the following or an approved equal: 1. Type 2600 or 2655 A.R. 2. Type Twin Sphere Metraflex 3. Type MFTNC or MFTF U M.I. 4. Double Sphere Flexible Connectors V.E. 5. Series VMT or VMU V.M.&C' 2.07 GROMMETS A. Grommets shall be made of neoprene or neoprene impregnated duct that is specially formed to prevent bolts from directly contacting the isolator base plate, and shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended load range. B. Grommets shall either be custom made by combining a neoprene washer and sleeve, or be one of the following products or an approved equal: 1. Type lsogrommets , 2. Type WB 3. Type HG 2.08 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT MBIS, Inc. (Bedford Heights, OH) Barry Controls (Brighton, MA) Mason Industries Inc. (Hauppauge, NY) A. Sealants for acoustical purposes as described in this specification shall be silicone or one of the resilient, non -hardening sealants indicated below: 1. Acoustical sealant D.A.P. 2. BR-96 or AC-2U (AC-20 FTR - Fire Rated) Pecora 3. Sonoloc Sanborn 4. Acoustical Scalant #834 (Acrylic Latex) Tremco 5. Acoustical sealant U.S.G. COLLEGE STATION DIRE STATION NO.6 230548 - 13 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. General 1. Refer to the PRODUCTS section of this specification for vibration isolation devices identified on the drawings or specified herein. 2. The static deflection of all isolators specified herein is the minimum acceptable deflections for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Major Equipment Isolation 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all floor -mounted major equipment shall be set on housekeeping pads. See architectural or structural drawings for details. 2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major equipment items shall be as scheduled on the drawings or specified hereunder. 3. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit discharges, and wherever else shown on the drawings. 4. Flexible pipe connections shall be installed at all pipe connections to vibration -isolated equipment in the positions shown on the drawings. 5. Electrical connections to vibration -isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called for in the electrical portion of the specification. 6. Thrust restraints shall be installed on all suspended fans and on all floor - mounted fans developing 4" or more of static pressure, unless the horizontal component of the thrust force can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the equipment weight. C. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment Isolation 1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment, such as converters, pressure reducing stations, dryers, strainers, storage tanks, condensate receiver tanks, and expansion tanks, which are connected to isolated piping systems, shall be vibration -isolated from the building structure by Type NP or Type HN isolators (selected for 0.1" static deflection), unless their position in the piping system requires a higher degree of isolation as called for under Pipe Isolation. D. Duct Isolation 1. All sheet metal ducts and air plenums that are within mechanical rooms or within a distance of 50' total duct length of connected vibration -isolated COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 14 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL equipment (whichever is longer) shall be isolated from the building structure by Type FN, PCF or HN isolators. All isolators shall achieve 0.1" minimum static deflection. 2. Ducts within the specified limits that penetrate the building construction shall be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetration sleeve/seals. 3. Flexible duct connections shall be provided as called for above under Major Equipment and wherever shown on the drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT A. General Locations of all vibration isolation devices shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation. 2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the manufachirer's instructiuu:;. B. Isolators 1. All vibi ation isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the supported equipment. 2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical constraints. 3. Locate isolators to provide stable support for equipment, without excess rocking. Consideration shall be given to the location of the center of gravity of the system and the location and spacing of the isolators. If necessary, a base with suitable footprint shall be provided to maintain stability of supported equipment, whether or not such a base is specifically called for herein. 4. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad and the isolator base plates shall rest entirely on the pad. 5. Hanger rods for vibration -isolated support shall be connected to major structural members, not the floor slab between major structural members. Provide suitable intermediate support members as necessary. 6. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without contacting any object. 7. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze that is isolated from the building. Isolator deflections must be the greatest required by the provisions for pipe isolation for any single pipe on the trapeze. Do not mix isolated and un-isolated pipes on the same trapeze. 8. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall not be supported from other pipes, ducts and equipment. COLLEGE STATION FIRES 1 A110N NO.6 230548 - 15 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 9. Resiliently isolated pipes, ducts and equipment shall not come in rigid contact with the building construction or rigidly supported equipment. 10. The installed and operating heights of equipment supported by Type FSNTL isolators or with Type RC-2 isolation bases shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Adjust isolators to provide 1/4" clearance between the limit stop brackets and the isolator top plate, and between the travel limit nuts and travel limit brackets. 11. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes. C. Bases 1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional expense. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 1" between steel rails, steel frame bases or inertia bases and the floor beneath the equipment. The isolator mounting brackets shall be positioned and the isolators adjusted so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system. 3. Isolation bases shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. D. Flexible Duct Connections 1. Prior to installation of the flexible connection, sheet metal ducts and plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section, and the gap between connected parts shall be uniform. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is met. There shall be no metal -to -metal contact between connected sections, and the fabric shall not be stretched taut. E. Grommets 1. Where grommets are required at hold down bolts of isolators, bolt holes shall be properly sized to allow for grommets. The hold down bolt assembly shall include washers to distribute load evenly over the grommets. Bolts and washers shall be galvanized. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230548 - 16 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL F. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals Maiiilain an airtight seal around the penetrating element and prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant. END OF SECTION 230548 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230548 : 17 MARCH 15, 2011 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to specification section 23 00 00 — HVAC General, all of which applies to work described in this section as if written in full herein. B. The work described by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials, instruments, labor, and appurtenances to test, adjust and balance all of the HVAC systems furnished and installed under Division 23 of the specifications. C. The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the General Contractor and shall not report to or be paid by the HVAC Contractor. The HVAC subcontractor shall be responsible to cooperate with and provide for the balancing subcontractor any and all materials, services, labor, etc. to facilitate completion of the balancing work. 1.02 QUALITY A'WLI ;ANCE A. The TAB agency and its specialist shall be certified members of Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or certified by the National Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB) to perform TAB service for HVAC, and vibration and sound testing of equipment. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. The TAB agency shall have been in business for at least the past five years and must be free of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the. NEBB during that time. B. All TAB technicians performing actual TAB work shall be experienced and must have done satisfactory work on a minimum of 3 projects comparable in size and complexity of this project and must be certified so by the TAB agency in writing. C. The basic instrumentation shall be calibrated to accuracy requirements by its manufacturer, AABC or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. Provide calibration history of the instruments to be used for test and balance purpose. D. One or more of the applicable AABC, NEBB or SMACNA publications, supplemented by the ASHRAE Handbooks and requirements stated herein shall be the basis for planning, procedures, tolerances and reports. Final report shall cite the exact names of publications used as a basis or reference for the TAB work or reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230593 -1 MARCH 15, 2011 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes. B. Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for TAB work to match installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TAB PROCEDURES A. TAB shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Standard under which the TAB agency is certified, either AABC or NEBB. B. During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. C. Adjustment of the temperature controls shall be coordinated by the TAB work specialist in conjunction with the Automatic Temperature Control Company's Engineer. Both shall cooperate to simulate a complete cycle for every system in every mode of operation (automatic, economizer, fire emergency, etc.). D. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Provide TAB reports for each phase of the project prior to partial final inspections of each phase of the project. 3.02 AIR SYSTEMS TAB A. Systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced so that air quantities and temperatures at outlets are as shown on the Contract Drawings and so that the distribution from supply outlets is uniform over the face of each outlet. B. Direct reading velocity meters may be used for comparative adjustment of individual outlets, but air quantities in ducts having velocities of 1,000 feet per minute or greater shall be measured by means of pitot tubes and inclined gauge manometers. Instrument test opening enclosures shall be provided as required at the direction of the TAB agency. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230593 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) C. Adjustments shall be made in such a manner that splitter and volume adjusters close to air outlets will have the least pressure drop consistent with volume requirements. Primary balancing shall be obtained by adjustment of the dampers at branch duct take -offs. Adjustable fan drives shall be used for making final adjustments of total air quantities. Additional dampers or other air volume adjusters required to accomplish the balancing and adjusting shall be furnished and installed as part of the HVAC work. D. Artificially load air filters by partial blanking to produce air pressure drop of at least 90 percent of the design final pressure drop. E. Check and readjust factory set minimum and maximum air terminal unit flow rates if necessary. Balance air distribution on full cooling maximum. Reset room thermostats and check operation from maximum to minimum cooling, to the heating mode, and back to cooling. Record and report the heating coil leaving air temperature when in the maximum heating mode. F. Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow. Adjust V-belt drives, including fixed pitch pulley requirements. G. After completion of Ihe. testing, adjusting and balancing of the air systems, six (6) copies of a recognized complete set of reports showing the minimum following information shall be submitted to the Engineer for review: 1. systems inspection narrative on equipment and installation for conformance with design 2. Duct Air Leakage Test Report 3. Systems Readiness Report 4. TAB report covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests, vibration tests and sound tests. Required information: a. Location of each air outlet or inlet. This shall be presented in the form of a reduced size floor plan showing outlet number keyed to the outlet number in the report. b. Dimensions or size of each outlet or inlet C. Type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers. Indicate duty as supply, return, exhaust, etc. d. Cfin of air as indicated on the Drawings for each outlet or inlet with corresponding velocity e. Velocity of air as measured and corresponding cfin at which system has been balanced and adjusted, for each outlet or inlet f. Velocity of air measured and corresponding cfin, after each complete system has been balanced and adjusted, for each main branch or zone duct at the supply fan, the return fan and the exhaust fan, as the case may be g. After each complete system has been balanced and adjusted, the total cfin at fan discharge, the total return air to the apparatus, the COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230593 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) total outside air to the apparatus, the total outside air to the apparatus, static pressure at fan outlet, total static pressure for apparatus, fan speed, motor amperage for each phase and voltage 5. Narrative of uncorrected installation deficiencies noted during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that differ from design requirements H. The above testing, adjusting and balancing shall be performed for the first season of the year, cooling season or heating season, which occurs at the completion of the building. Additional balancing and adjusting which may be required for the season of the year next following shall be performed as part of the work under this specification. 3.03 VIBRATION TESTING A. Furnish instruments and perform vibration measurements for all rotating HVAC equipment of 1/2 horsepower and larger, including centrifugal/screw compressors, cooling towers, pumps, fans and motors. B. Record initial measurements for each unit of equipment on test forms and submit a report to General Contractor. Where vibration readings exceed the allowable tolerance, the HVAC Contractor shall correct the problem and the TAB agency shall verify the corrections are done for final reporting. 3.04 SOUND TESTING A. Perform and record required sound level measurements in approximately 15% of all rooms as designated by the General Contractor. B. Take measurements with a calibrated sound level meter and octave band analyzer of the accuracy required by AABC or NEBB. C. Where measure sound levels exceed specified levels, the installing contractor or equipment manufacturer shall take remedial action approved by the General Contractor and the necessary sound tests shall be repeated. 3.05 MARKING OF SETTINGS AND TEST PORTS A. Following the approval of the final TAB Report, the setting of all HVAC adjustment devices including splitters and dampers shall be permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Style and colors used for markings shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. B. The TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location points of duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the identification shall be COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230593 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) made on the exterior side of the insulation. All penetrations through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be sealed to prevent air leaks and maintain integrity of vapor barrier. END OF SECTION 230593 COLLEGE STA'110N FIRE STATION NO.G 230593 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) SECTION 230700 - HVAC INS1 II,ATION PART I - C:FNERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00 - Mechanical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDFD B. The work clone under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install all insulation, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials as specified in this section shall be manufactured by Armstrong, Johns - Manville, Knauf, Pittsburgh -Corning, Certainteed, Pabco, Dow Chemical, Owens Corning or approved equal. B. Insulation thicknesses shall be as shown in the following table: Minimum Pie Insulatiod I linsulation Thickness for Pipe Size efri erant or Brin gelow 4. elow 4 C. Ductwork 1. All supply air ducts with heated or cooled air on the top floor and within 10 feet of the building perimeter shall be insulated. All return ducts in concealed and unheated areas shall be insulated. 2. Toilet and general exhaust ductwork exhausting air conditioned air and routed in attic spaces shall not be insulated. 3. Ductwork described in 1. and 2. above shall be insulated with 2" thick blanket, 3/4 lb/cu. ft. with reinforced foil faced vapor barrier (R-8 min.). Insulation shall be securely adhered to ductwork. All joints shall be sealed with 3" wide strips of the foil faced vapor barrier tape and applied to form a continuous vapor seal. 4. Ducts within Mechanical Rooms shall be insulated with 1" thick 3 lb/cu. ft. rigid fiberglass board with an R factor of not less than 5 (K = 0.235 at 75 degrees F mean temperature) with reinforced foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be secured to ductwork with stick pins and speed washers. All joints and stick pin terminations shall be sealed with 3" wide strips of vapor COLLEGE, t0 A'rION FIRE STATInN NO.6 230700 - 1 MARCI1 15, 2011 HVAC INSULATION barrier material and applied to form a continuous vapor seal. D. All outside air ducts shall be insulated. Outside air ducts located within mechanical rooms shall be rigid fiberglass board as described above. All other outside air ducts shall be blanket type insulated as described above. E. Sheet metal supply, return, and outside air ductwork in non -air conditioned areas shall be insulated with 2" thick 1-1/2 lb/cu. ft. fiberglass blanket duct insulation with foil faced vapor barrier (R-6 min.). F. Exterior supply and return air ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal lined with 2" thick 3 lb/cu. ft. duct liner board (R-8 min.). All seams shall be externally sealed watertight with a 20-year silicone caulk and coated with a rust preventive coating over the entire duct surface. G. All insulation must meet applicable codes for Flame Spread and Smoke developed ratings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Shop drawing submittals shall include a complete package of materials and methods intended for use as described in this section. B. All work shall be in strict accordance with applicable codes, ordinances and the manufacturer's recommendations. C. All work shall be performed in a professional workmanlike manner and standard trade practice. It shall be smooth in appearance and suitable for finish painting. END OF SECTION 230700 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 230700 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 HVAC INSULATION SECTION 230900 - AUTOMATIC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00 - Mechanical General. B. Furnish and install a complete system of automatic controls of the type and characteristics and which will perform the functions described herein and on the Drawings. C. All equipment, labor, tubing, etc. required to accomplish the control sequences outlined in this section shall be furnished as part of the mechanical work. D. All other mechanical equipment purchased and installed as described in other sections of these specifications shall be coordinated with the requirements of this section to assure compatibility and function. E. All electrica I c: ontrnl wiring rcquu cd as part of this work shall be furnished and installed as part of the mechanical work and shall be installed in accordance with Division 26. F. This section generally describes the desired operating sequence and characteristics of all mechanical systems provided and installed as part of Division 23 of these specifications. The preparation of the detailed control schematics necessary to accomplish the desired systems operation shall be included as part of the mechanical work. Six (6) copies of these control schematics shall be submitted and reviewed by the Engineer as part of the Shop Drawings prior to the purchase or installation of any control equipment or other equipment that depends on these control schemes for proper operation. 1.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers/installers for automatic controls: Johnson Controls, Inc., Siemens, ALC, Honeywell, American Auto -Matrix, Alerton, Carrier, York, or Trane. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Only those products of particular importance to appearance or function are described in this Products section. Other items required for satisfactory systems COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230900 -1. MARCH 15, 2011 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS operation but not herein described shall be furnished and installed to meet the intent and Operating Sequences herein described. 2.02 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be of the opposed blade low leakage type with polyurethane blade seals and stainless steel jamb seals. B. Leakage shall not exceed 1 % of full air flow at 4" WG and below (based on 1,500 FPM approach velocity). C. Units shall be full size of ductwork with duct mounting flanges as shown on the Drawings. D. Units shall be Robertshaw D211 or equal with required operators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATING SEQUENCE A. All units and systems shall be controlled as described on the Drawings and as recommended by equipment manufacturers. END OF SECTION 230900 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 230900 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 AUTOMATIC CONTROLS SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install all materials, labor, accessories, etc. shown on the Drawings and specified herein to completely install all piping systems. B. Refrigerant piping shall meet the requirements of the American National Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI/ASHRAE 15-78, B9.1), and the Code for Pressure Piping (ANSI B11 5). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Piping shall be minimum type "L" or refrigeration service copper tubing and shall conform to ANSI H23.5 standard for seamless copper tubes for refrigeration field service. B. Fittings shall be wrought copper. C. Joints shall be brazed. D. Valves, filter -driers and other accessories shall be suitable for refrigerant service. 2.02 INSULATION A. Refrigerant suction piping shall be insulated with 3/4" thick flexible elastomeric tubing insulation, AP Armaflex Pipe Insulation manufactured by Armacel or equal. Where possible, insulation shall be slid over piping from one end before pipe ends are joined and shall not be slit or cut. All joints and seams shall be sealed weather - tight. B. Finish coat for flexible elastomeric insulation installed outdoors shall be water - based latex enamel designed for use over all forms of flexible elastomeric insulation. Finish coat shall provide a protective finish suitable to both indoor and outdoor applications, formulated for cold weather flexibility to resist cracking and weather -resistant to ultraviolet (UV) and ozone. Coating shall be Armaflex WB Finish or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 232300 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 REFRIGERANT PIPING 3.01 GENERAL A. Refrigerant piping shall be supported as shown on the Drawings and as required at intervals not over 8'-0" O.C. and at all turns and offsets. Hangers shall be copper plated tubing hangers of adequate size to fit around tubing and insulation as required. Saddles shall be used under insulated tubing to protect insulation. B. Refrigerant piping shall be clean and free of outside contaminants at all times. Prior to start-up of any equipment or insulation installation, all piping shall be cleaned, tested, dehydrated and charged as recommended by the refrigerant compressor manufacturer. 1. Procedure: Joints and connections in refrigerant piping shall not be installed in partitions or walls or where inaccessible for testing, inspection and rework. Make provisions to prevent contact of dissimilar metals. During construction, cap all tubing to prevent moisture from entering. Keep in dry location. 2. Leak testing and recharging: Upon completion of installation of air conditioning equipment, test all refrigerant piping, components and accessories, including quick -connect refrigerant connectors for evaporator and condensing unit; test with a halide torch; prove tight by Contractor to assure a leak -tight refrigerant system. If leaks are detected at the time of installation or during warranty period, remove entire refrigerant charge from system, correct leaks, and retest system. After system is found to be leak free, evacuation shall be accomplished by use of a reliable gauge and a vacuum pump capable of pulling vacuum of at least one mm Hg absolute. Accomplish system evacuation in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed instruction. System leak testing, evacuation, dehydration and charging with refrigerant shall comply with requirements contained in ARI Standard 260. C. All joints in refrigerant piping shall be made accessible. Joints shall not be permitted below concrete. D. All piping shall be run true to grade and shall be arranged to make the best possible appearance. Except where otherwise required by conditions of installation, all piping shall be symmetrical and parallel with lines of buildings or structure in which it is installed. All piping shall be run concealed except in mechanical room and where indicated otherwise. E. All piping and equipment shall be supported and guided. Anchors shall be provided to absorb or transmit thrust and eliminate vibration or pulsation. Hangers or supports shall be provided near each change of direction. Supports shall be so located or shall be of such type as not to unduly restrict the movement of the pipe due to lateral or longitudinal expansion. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 232300 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 REFRIGERANT PIPING END OF SECTION 232300 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 232300 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 REFRIGERANT PIPING SECTION 233100 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All work in this section shall be subject to the provisions of Section 23 00 00 - Mechanical General. B. Furnish and install all material, labor, accessories, etc. shown on the drawings and as specified herein to completely install all ductwork systems. C. Ductwork systems shall be classified as follows: 1. Static pressure class +2" W.G. - from constant volume air handling unit, and terminal unit to supply diffusers, and all return and exhaust ductwork D. Ductwork shall be constructed according to the latest edition of SMACNA ductwork construction standards applicable to the system pressures described above, and the system material construction E. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are nominal inside clear. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK A. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets of the thickness listed in the SMACNA manuals for the pressures referenced above, or of 1" thick (1- 1/2" thick if required by the applicable energy code) resin bonded fiberglass with fire resistant foil-scrim-kraft vapor barrier. 2.02 FIRE DAMPERS A. Type B or C fire dampers with the blade stack out of the airstream shall be installed at all locations where ductwork penetrates any floor, wall or partition with a fire rating of 1 hour or more and where otherwise shown on the drawings. Fire dampers shall have a rating compatible with the floor, wall or partition, and shall be UL 555 rated. Type A fire dampers with the blade stack in the airstream may be used behind grilles or where space conditions do not permit the use of a Type B damper. B. All fire dampers shall be of the "Dynamic" type as classified in UL Standard 555. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 233100 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES C. Slab, Wall and Partition Dampers 1. Dampers shall be factory built curtain type. They shall conform to.. the requirements of NFPA Standard 90 and be UL labeled for the required rating (1-1/2 hour minimum). 2. Provide factory built sleeves of design and length to permit mounting within the opening. 3. All dampers shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's UL approved installation. 4. Where fire dampers are shown on the drawings, and if fiberglass ductwork is used, dampers shall be installed in sheet metal duct extending on both sides of the partition as required by governing code authorities. 2.03 FLEX DUCT CONNECTORS A. Install flex duct connectors at connections of sheet metal duct to motor driven equipment, or otherwise noted. Flex duct connectors shall be glass fabric coated with neoprene, suitable for service. Install per manufacturer's instructions, and support sheet metal ductwork so that no weight is supported by flex duct connector. B. Flex duct connectors shall also be provided at building expansion joints. 2.04 ACCESS DOORS A. Hinged, gasketed and latched access doors and/or panels shall be installed at each fire and smoke damper, each duct mounted smoke detector, each valve, at each duct mounted balancing damper or any other mechanical equipment or device that requires accessibility. Doors and panels shall be sized and located to optimize access to dampers, detectors, and other equipment for service and replacement. Access doors in ductwork shall be per SMACNA Standards. Access doors and panels in walls, ceilings or other surfaces shall be coordinated with architectural finishes, and shall be as manufactured by Cesco Products. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Flexible ductwork shall be UL Class I air duct. B. ' Flexible ductwork (maximum 8-0" long) shall be installed between main supply ducts and diffusers. C. Take -offs shall be made using spin -in type fittings with scoop and balancing damper. Flexible ductwork shall be Thermaflex M-KE R-8 (R value = 8.0 minimum or as required by local energy code) flexible air duct or approved equal. Duct size shall be the same size as diffuser neck it serves. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 233100 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES D. Flexible duct connections to ceiling diffusers shall be installed without kinks or sags to provide unrestricted airflow. Provide Flex Flow Elbow supports by Thermaflex. 2.06 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS A. Automatic control dampers shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall be controlled as described in the 23 09 00 - Automatic Controls section of these specifications. B. Dampers shall be of the opposed blade type constructed of minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel and shall have rigidly constructed blades less than 6" wide, and shall have duct mounting flanges. C. Dampers shall be of the low leakage type with replaceable blade and jamb seals. Damper leakage shall not exceed 6 cfin per sq. ft. of damper area at 4 in. w.c. 2.07 DUCT INSULATION A. Also rcfcr to Scc,tioii 2107 00 - HVAC lusulatiun. B. Supply air ductwork a minimum of 15 linear feet (or as indicated) downstream of low pressure air handling equipment and terminal units shall be internally lined with 1" thick, 3 lb/cu. ft. acoustical duct liner, Certainteed "Toughgard 2" textile duct liner or approved equal. 1. Duct liner shall be securely fastened to ductwork with stick pins, speed washers and adhesive. Leading edges of liner in medium pressure ductwork shall have a sheetmetal nosing. 2. Exposed edges and butt joints shall be "buttered" with duct sealer. C. Return air ductwork and transfer ducts shall have 1" thick, 1 1/2 lb/cu. ft. duct liner, Certainteed "Toughgard 2" textile duct liner or approved equal. D. Round duct liner shall be 1" thick, 4 lb/cu. ft. (nominal) fiberglass duct liner, Johns Manville Spirocoustic Plus or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK A. All ductwork shall be installed in accordance with applicable SMACNA Standards according to the pressure class described in PART 1 - GENERAL. B. Ductwork shall be supported as recommended by SMACNA Standards from structural members. Ductwork shall not be allowed to rest on ceilings, light COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 233100 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES fixtures or structural members. Ductwork supported from joists shall be supported from the Lop chord of all joists. C. All ductwork accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. All ductwork shall be leak tested in accordance with SMACNA Standards. All ductwork seams shall be sealed with mastic to provide a system that is within the allowable SMACNA leakage limits. Six (6) copies of the ductwork test report shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the Contractor's request for final payment. E. All ductwork shall be cleaned inside and out prior to system start up, and shall be left in a neat and orderly manner. F. Ducts, unless otherwise approved, shall be true to dimensions indicated, straight and smooth on inside with neatly finished joints; securely anchor to building in an approved manner, and install to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Exact routing of ductwork will be dependent on location of framing members. Route duct to avoid cutting framing members. Duct sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions. G. Brace ducts not more than 60 inches on center. Make slip joints in direction of flow. Unless otherwise indicated, elbows shall have a centerline radius of not less than 1 '/2 times the width of the duct. Where space limitations necessitate use of short radius or square elbows, install turning vanes. Offset ducts around obstructions where possible. Where duct must encompass obstruction, area of duct shall remain constant. Duct tapers shall not exceed 1:4 ratio and transformations 30 degrees between air flow and diverging or converging air flow. Provide access doors for access to all equipment, dampers and motors concealed by sheet metal. 3.02 DAMPERS A. Install dampers where indicated on drawings. Provide friction damper behind face of each supply outlet which shall be adjustable through the face of the grille with a screwdriver. END OF SECTION 233100 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 233100 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 233400 - UNITARY EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to specification section 23 00 00 — HVAC General, all of which applies to work described in this section as if written in full herein. B. Furnish and install all unitary exhaust and supply tans of the size, type, capacity and characteristics as shown on the equipment schedules and herein described. C. Acceptable manufacturers include only those whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. D. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical motors and products which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and comply with NEMA Standards. E. Certification, Fan Performance: Provide fans whose performance is certified by AMCA under the specified conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRIFUGAL AND AXIAL FANS A. All units shall be rigidly constructed of materials suitable for the intended service and shall be installed with all accessories listed on the Drawings. B. Fan wheels and blades shall be constructed of aluminum and shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. 2.02 CEILING -CENTRIFUGAL AND CABINET FANS A. Units shall be direct -drive type with back -draft damper, acoustically insulated cabinets and speed controller. PART' 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 233400 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 UNITARY EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS B. Ceiling -centrifugal and cabinet fans shall be supported from structural members and shall not rest on the ceiling, on lights or on structural members. C. Units shall be interlocked and controlled as indicated on the Drawings. D. Ceiling -mounted units shall be installed with ceiling grilles flush with the ceiling. E. Electrical connection to the fan motor shall be made through the roof opening inside the roof curb. END OF SECTION 233400 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 233400 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 UNITARY EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS SECTION 233700 - LOUVERS, GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install all louvers, grilles, registers and diffusers of the size, type, capacity, and characteristics as shown on the equipment schedules and described herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS A. Louver components (Beads, jambs, sills, blades, etc.) shall be factory assembled by the manufacturer into a complete unit. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be built-up by the Contractor from factory assembled louver sections to provide the overall sizes required. B. Louver design shall incorporate structural supports required to withstand a wind load of 20 lbs. per square foot. Louvers shall be a drainable blade type. C. All louver performance data submitted for approval shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water Penetration. D. All louvers shall have a standard factory applied finish coating with color selection made by the Architect at the time of shop drawing approval. Color charts shall be submitted with louver shop drawings. 2.02 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Units shall be of the type, size, and construction as scheduled on the drawings. B. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all units shall be supplied with a factory finish of white baked enamel. C. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be ordered with borders compatible with the ceiling system type in which they are installed. COLLEGE STATION FIRES STATION NO.6 233700 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 LOUVERS, GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS D. Aluminum devices shall be used for all areas subject to excessive moisture or humidity (e.g. showers, pools, bathrooms, etc.). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LOUVERS A. Louvers shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be caulked and sealed at the frame and flanges to make the installation weatherproof. B. Combination louver dampers shall be installed with required damper operators and linkage mechanisms and shall be field adjusted for full opening/closure stroke. Louvers shall be interlocked as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. All units located in ceiling tiles shall be centered or shall be on quarter points of 2 ft. x 2 ft. tiles. B. Where a line of sight allows the ductwork, wall or ceiling structure to be seen behind any units, such ductwork, wall or ceiling structure shall be painted with nonflammable flat black paint to minimize visibility. C. All units not installed on T-bar ceiling grids shall be securely fastened to adjacent structures. D. Where air distribution devices are installed in inaccessible ceilings, provide spin -in with scoop without volume damper. Provide opposed blade damper in neck of air distribution device with access to damper control through face. E. All supply air diffuser shall have insulating blankets installed where open to unconditioned space or attic. END OF SECTION 233700 COLLEGE STATION FIRES STATION NO. 6 233700 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 LOUVERS, GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS SECTION 23 38 00 - KITCHEN VENTILATION EQUIPMENT PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install a ventilation hood over the cooking battery complete with makeup and exhaust fans with curbs, grease filters, dry chemical fire suppression system, vapor -proof lights and controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN HOOD `'VENTILATION AND EX14AUST SYSTEM A. Description: Hood over food cooking equipment shall provide for both air supply and air exhaust. Supply air provided through blower with filters directly from outside. Exhaust air pulled through "grease" extractor filters and discharged vertically above the roof. Canopy shall be constructed with a totally welded inner exhaust canopy. Refer to the Drawings for model, size and capacities. B. Features of Range Hood: 1. Stainless steel construction with matching soffit above to ceiling. 2. "Grease" extractor filters shall be stainless steel, UL labeled, 20" x 20" x 2" size, self -draining. 3. Removable grease gutters under filters, pitched to drain to a removable metal collection container. 4. Makeup air slots shall be adjustable. Hood shall have been tested and rated by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for a proven exhaust rate of 250 cfin L/F over high heat (600 degrees F+) cooking equipment with a supply air ratio of 84%, as listed by UL for the high heat test. 5. Built in vapor proof hood interior lights, one per each 3 feet of length, pre - wired to switch. 6. Pre -wired control panels with stainless steel exposed surface containing operating pilot lights and switches. 7. Hood size to completely cover the cooking equipment plus an overhang of 12" minimum on all sides. 8. Hood to be UL classified. C. Features of Duct Package: 1. Exhaust duct shall be all welded construction per NFPA 96. 2. Exhaust and supply ducts shall be of the concentric arrangement and UL COLLEGE STATION FTRESTATTON NO.6 233800 -1 MARCH 15, 2011 KITCHEN VENTILATION EQUIPMENT labeled number MH 10644 so that the exterior duct can be installed to within V of combustible materials. Duct to include slip joint connections as approved by UL for vertical duct, with horizontal duct to include flanges for field welding. 3. Parallel duct arrangement is acceptable providing the Contractor satisfies the clearance requirements of NFPA 96 and the local fire marshal. D. Features of Roof -Mounted Assembly: 1. Supply air fan package constructed of aluminized steel including intake section with air filters and birdscreen, support legs and factory enamel finish. 2. Top discharge exhaust fan with plug in connection for master electric panel, furnished for field installation of factory furnished economizer section. No birdscreens or backdraft dampers. The fan shall be UL labeled for grease contaminated air. Provide low silhouette curb as drawn. 3. Master electric pre -wired control panel, factory mounted and wired with main power source connection, control circuit terminal strip, magnetic motor contactors, manual motor overload switch, contactors, relays, transformers, circuit breakers, fuses and fused disconnect. 4. Factory wiring in conduit conforming to NFPA Standard 70 and designed to withstand effects of heat, vapor and grease on the equipment. Wiring shall include low voltage (24 volt) control wiring in conduit to opening in top of canopy, connecting wiring harness and conduit to master electric control panel. 5. A complete kitchen hood fire extinguishing system shall be provided under this item. 6. Approval: The "Seal of Approval" of the NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION TESTING LABORATORY (NFS) shall appear on the Ventilation System. 7. Code: The system construction shall be in accordance with NFPA Standard 96, "Vapor Removal from Commercial Cooking Equipment," and the Southern Building Code Congress. 8. Manufacturers: Captiveaire or approved equal. 2.02 EXHAUST CANOPY FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM A. The fire suppression protection system should be of the stored pressure, wet chemical pre-engineered fixed nozzle type manufactured by Wells Fargo Pyro Technologies, Inc. A carbon dioxide cartridge is designed in compliance with Military Specification "MIL-C-601 G," and shall be used as the pneumatic releasing device for the system. The cartridge shall be an integral part of the control head assembly. The wet chemical storage cylinder shall be D.O.T. rated for stored pressure of 175 psig, and a pressure gauge shall be provided on the cylinder valve for visual inspection. The system shall be capable of automatic and manual actuation. Automatic actuation shall be provided by an appropriate number of COLLEGE STATION FIRESTATION NO.6 233800 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 KITCHEN VENTILATION EQUIPMENT thermal detectors mounted in series on a stainless steel wire input line to the control head. Manual actuation shall be provided by turning a handle on the primary head and/or by an optional remote pull station with a dedicated stainless steel input line to the control head. B. The system shall have been tested to the UL Standard for Fire Extinguishing Systems for Protection of Restaurant Cooking Areas, UL 300, and listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. It shall be installed in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 17A Wet Chemical Extinguisher Systems, and No. 96 Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment, and comply with all local and/or state codes and standards. C. Provide pressure activated electric shutoff switch and remote manually operated shutoff switch to all gas and electric cooking equipment located under hood and to exhaust wid. rnakeup fans shutoff switch. D. All piping shall be schedule 40 hot -dipped galvanized steel. Fittings shall be banded pattern, extra heavy galvanized malleable iron threaded with a 2,000 psi WOG rating. 2.03 SUPPLY AND EXHAUST DUCT A. Furmsh and install supply and exhaust ductwork in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 96 and all applicable local codes. B. Exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of black steel minimum of 16-gauge thickness. All seams, joints, and penetrations shall have a continuous external weld except where the exhaust duct is connected to the exhaust canopy collar. Connection to the exhaust canopy collar shall be constructed in accordance with NFPA 96. 2.04 ROOFTOP MAKEUP AIR FAN A. Provide air supply utility set of the single inlet, single width type. Fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with weatherproof coating. Fan shall be provided with weather housing. B. Fan wheel shall be aluminum, backwards inclined non -overloading. Fan shall be complete with adjustable belt drives, motor and disconnect switch. COLLEGE STATION FIRESTATION N0:6 233800 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 KITCHEN VENTILATION EQUIPMENT C. Provide fan with filter hood for use with 2" thick cleanable filters complete with hood support frame, roof curb adapter for use in the downblast arrangement, backdraft damper and birdscreen. 2.05 ROOFTOP CENTRIFUGAL UPBLAST EXHAUST A. Provide UL listed upblast centrifugal fan of aluminum construction complete with non -sparking centrifugal fan wheel. B. Fan shall come complete with motor and adjustable belt drive, disconnect switch, birdscreen, grease trough, and hinged base (for cleaning). C. Fan and installation shall comply with NFPA 96. D. Motor, bearings, and drive shall be isolated from exhaust air. Motor shall be cooled by clean outside air. PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION 233800 COLLEGE STATION FIRESTATION NO.6 233800 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 KITCHEN VENTILATION EQUIPMENT SECTION 238127 - SPLIT SYSTEM (ELECTRIC COOLING. GAS HEATING) PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install direct expansion air cooled, split system HVAC units of the size and capacity shown on the equipment schedules. B. Condensing uuit, coils, furnaces shall be factory matched for compatibility and shall be rated in accordance with ARI standards, C. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on Lennox series units. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. D. Equal products: Carrier, Trane, York. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Each unit shall be a complete factory package consisting of compressor(s), condenser coil, condenser fans and motors, weatherproof casing, refrigeration and temperature controls, supply fans, gas heat exchanger, etc. Units shall be UL and/or CSA Listed, AGA and GAMA certified. 2.02 OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNIT A. Outdoor units shall be complete, including cabinet, hermetic compressor nonferrous condenser coil with guard, condenser fan and motor, refrigerant reservoir or receiver, charging valve, controls, refrigerant holding charge, heavy duty permanently lubricated motors with built-in thermal overload protection, locked rotor, over and under voltage protection, high pressure cutout with auto - reset, motor starters and contactors, compressor protection, crankcase heater, equipped with low ambient operation, transformer, filter/drier, vibration isolation, and other required components. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 238127 -1 MARCII 15, 2011 SPLIT SYSTEM (ELECTRIC COOLING, GAS HEATING) B. Casings shall be constructed of zinc -coated steel, double phosphatized and finished with baked enamel for positive weatherproof protection. Removable panels shall provide access to all components from one side of the unit. Drain holes shall be provided in all units for elimination of rain. Compressor shall have a 5-year warranty. 2.03 INDOOR UNIT A. Furnace shall be complete including automatic gas controls with 100% shutoff electronic pilot ignition, aluminized steel burners, multi -speed direct drive centrifugal fans, permanently lubricated motors and bearings, motors with thermal overload protection, and 1" thick high velocity type filters. Cabinet shall be of heavy gauge cold rolled steel painted with baked -on enamel, lined with foil - covered fireproof fiberglass insulation. Access panels shall be at front side of unit. Return air shall be from either side or bottom of unit. B. Evaporator coils shall be constructed of precisely spaced ripple edged aluminum fins machine fitted to copper tubes. Assembled in an "A" configuration. Provide flared shoulder tubing joints with silver soldering. Refrigerant lines to be equipped with flared fittings. Drain pan to be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized insulated drain pan with 3/4" drain connection minimum. Provide adapter base to simplify mounting of coil assembly to furnace. C. Provide two (2) sets of filters, one set to be used during construction and one set to be installed after completion of project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Units shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. The mechanical scope of work shall include the installation of a reinforced concrete base under each condensing unit. Bases shall be a minimum of 4" thick, and shall extend beyond the footprint of the condensing units a minimum of 6" in all directions. C. Condensing units shall be installed level. D. Units shall be installed to allow adequate service to all components. END OF SECTION 238127 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 238127 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 SPLIT SYSTEM (ELECTRIC COOLING, GAS HEATING) SECTION 23 82 39.19 - ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00 - Mechanical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Receipt, unloading, handling, proper storage and protection from damage of all materials. B. Layout and coordination of work with otllvl; trades. C. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install wall heaters complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL HEATERS A. Unit shall be UL listed, completely factory assembled, wired, tested and shipped as a single assembly. Capacity shall be as indicated on the Drawings. B. Front grille shall be 16-gauge steel or aluminum finished in baked enamel or anodized with downflow discharge louvers. C. Element shall consist of helically coiled nickel chromium alloy resistance wire enclosed in corrosion resistant sheaths. D. Controls shall include fan delay switch, built-in thermostat, automatic reset thermal overload switch and a non -fused disconnect power switch. E. Unit shall be designed to either recess into the wall or for surface mounting as scheduled, and shall include all mounting accessories. F. T Init shall be Q-Mark, Markel, Raywall or approved equal. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 238239.19 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS manufacturer's COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 MARCH 15, 2011 238239.19 - 2 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS SECTION 238240 - GAS -FIRED UNIT HEATERS PART 1- GENERAT, 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install all gas -fired unit heaters of the size, type, capacity and characteristics as shown on the equipment schedules and herein described. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed on the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be wiltiirtd to satisfy plans and specifications. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS -FIRED UNIT HEATERS A. Gas -fired unit heaters shall be the gravity -vented units, arranged for ceiling suspension with threaded hanger connections (and provided with hanger kits). They shall be provided with propeller fan(s), open drip -proof motor with internal overloads and a safety fan guard(s). Horizontal and vertical directional louvers will be provided for directing air throw. B. Each unit shall be equipped for use with natural gas and 120 volt power supply. The heat exchanger shall be aluminized and an intermittent safety pilot with electronic flame supervision and timed lockout. The unit is to include all required limit and safety controls, including an energy cut-off device on units with manual pilots. C. These units must be design -certified by the American Gas Association and bear the AGA label. The manufacturer of this equipment must have a minimum of eight (8) years field operating experience. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Unit shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 238240 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 238240-1 MARCH 15, 2011 GAS -FIRED UNIT HEATERS SECTION 260519 — CONDUCTORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install conductors, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Provide a complete system of wiring with all feeders and branch circuits as shown on the Drawings. The wiring system shall be complete to each and every outlet and apparatus shown on the Drawings which requires electrical connections. B. This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts or less. 1.03 COLOR CODING A. Color coding shall be as follows: 120/208 Volt System Phase A —Black Phase B Red Phase C — Blue Neutral — White Ground — Green Isolated Ground - Green with yellow strip (where applicable) (Verify color -coding with local code Authority and use local code requirements if and only if the above color code is not acceptable to local authority.) B. All wire shall be color coded to indicate the various phase and neutral. Approved 3/4" wide tape bands, corresponding to Color code, NEC Section 210-5, and as specified hereinbefore, shall be provided for cables No. 6 AWG and larger with 6" of each conductor termination, or color -coded jacket/insulation throughout its COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260519 - 1 MARCH Pi, ?01.1 CONDUCTORS entire length is acceptable. Wiring No. 8 AWG or smaller shall have color -coded jacket throughout its entire length. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Wire shall be Southwire, Pirelli, Rome, General Cable, Senator, United Copper Industries, Alcan, AFC, or approved equal. 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Conductor Material: Unless noted otherwise, conductors shall be copper, 98.5% conductivity except where specifically noted otherwise on Drawings. B. All wire and cable for feeders and branch circuits shall have copper conductors and shall be 600 volts, 90 degrees C, NEC type conductors with THHN/THWN-2 insulation. Conductors for services shall have XHHW-2 insulation. C. Wire No. 8 AWG and larger shall have stranded conductors. Wire No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid conductor type. D. No conductor shall be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise specified or noted. E. Branch circuit wiring which supplies more than one fluorescent fixture through the wiring of other fixtures shall be high temperature wire approved for such use. F. THHN/THWN-2 conductors sizes 1/0 and larger along with associated grounding conductors with a low friction insulation (Southwire SIMpullTM) not requiring the use of pulling lubricant shall be permitted. G. Nonmetallic -sheathed cable is not allowed. H. Service entrance cable (SER), is not allowed. 2.03 ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS A. Aluminum Conductor is not allowed. B. Aluminum conductors shall not be used where expressly forbidden by the local electrical inspections department or plan review board of jurisdiction. The electrical contractor shall verify this requirement prior to bid. C. Service entrance cable (SER), is not allowed. 2.04 METAL CLAD "MC" CABLE COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260519 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUCTORS A. Whcre allowed by the authority having jurisdiction, the use of metal clad cable is permitted as described below and shall meet all the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 83, 1479, 1569, and 1581 2. National Fire Protection Associatiuu NFPA 70, Article 330 3. All local codes and municipal ordinances. B. The conductors of the metal clad cable shall comply with Articles 1.03 and 2.02 of this same section. C. MC cable shall be limited to branch circuits concealed in walls or above ceilings. Unless noted otherwise, metal clad cable may not be run directly into surface - mounted panels, cabinets, switches or other devices. All circuit homeruns shall be installed in conduit and shall be routed from the panelboard to the first branch circuit device. D. MC cable shall not be allowed for wiring to mechanical equipment. E. Unless noted otherwise, the metal clad cable shall be MC with either a galvanized steel jacket or aluminum interlocked armor, a Mylar assembly covering tape, rated at 90 degrees centigrade, with either a green insulated grounding conductor or MCAP Type MC cable with interlocked armor that is listed and identified for grounding, and rated for a maximum of 600 volts. F. Where indicated, the metal clad cable shall be a Jacketed Metal Clad and Parkine Deck Cable with a black or gray PVC covering, using solid copper conductors, a Mylar assembly covering tape, rated at 90 degrees centigrade, with a green insulated grounding conductor and rated for a maximum of 600 volts. G. Where indicated, the metal clad cable shall be MC/IG Isolated Ground Cable using a galvanized steel jacket (blue with green strip), solid copper conductors, a Mylar assembly covering tape, rated at 90 degrees centigrade, with a green insulated grounding conductor, an extra green with yellow strip insulated grounding conductor and rated for a maximum of 600 volts. Type HCF MCAP cable shall be permitted. H. Refer to National Electrical Code Article 330-12 for uses not permitted. I. Cables installed in other than vertical runs through bored or punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or through notches in wooden framing members and protected by a steel plate at least 1/16 inches thick, shall be considered supported and secured where such support does not exceed six (6) feet intervals. J. Cables containing four or fewer conductors sized not larger than No. 10 AWG shall be secured within 12 inches of every box, cabinet, fitting or other cable termination. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260519 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUCTORS K. Metal clad cable shall not be installed outside the building without written authorization from the Engineer. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Wire Joints: T & B "Sta-Kon," Scotchlok Type "R," Ideal No. 452 or 453, or Buchanan `B-Cap." B. Cable Connectors: Solderless Type O.Z. "circular clamp type" or T & B "lock- tite" appropriate for the particular application involved. C. All field terminations shall be treated with Copper Shield gasket paint or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Lubricant: No grease, oil or lubricant other than powdered soapstone or approved pulling compound shall be used to facilitate the pulling of wires. Lubricant shall not be used for conductors with SIMpuff m insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Complete electrical systems shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Wires shall be pulled without excessive strain to prevent damage to conductor or insulation. Provide pull boxes as required to facilitate pulling of wire. C. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. D. Each raceway indicated by symbol on Drawings shall contain three (3) No. 12 AWG wires unless otherwise noted, scheduled or indicated. Hatch marks on raceway symbols indicate the number of conductors in a raceway when the number exceeds three (3). E. At each fixture or device outlet, a loop or end of wire not less than 6" long shall be left for connection to fixture or device. F. Splices, taps and connections shall be made up as follows: 1. Wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller with wire nuts. 2. Wire and cable of sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, with insulated mechanical or crimped connectors. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260519 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUCTORS Perform conductor tests as described in Section 26 UU UO - Electrical General. FND OF SECTION 260519 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260.1%19 - 5 MARCH 15,1u I! CONDUCTORS SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work required under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing, installation and connections of the building grounding system. Exterior branch circuit wiring and feeder conductors extended beyond the building are included. The building electrical system shall be 3-phase, 4-wire grounded wye system supplemented with equipment grounding system. Equipment grounding system shall be established with equipment grounding conductors; the use of metallic raceways for equipment grounding is not awcptable. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install a complete grounding system in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all materials under this section of the specifications B. All materials shall be new, UL Listed, and bear a UL Label. C. Refer to Section 26 05 19 - Conductors for conductor specification. 2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be bare or green insulated copper conductor sized as indicated on the drawings. B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors sized as indicated on the drawings. Where size is not indicated on the drawings, conductnr size shall be determined from the National Electrical Code table on sizes of equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding jumpers shall be flexible copper bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the National Electrical Cude tables for grounding electrode conductors. 2.03 PANELBOARDS, TRANSFORMERS, AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide each low voltage distribution and branch circuit panelboard with a copper equipment grounding bar brazed or riveted to the associated enclosures or cabinet COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260526 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 GROUNDINU and an insulated neutral bar. B. Provide a conductor termination grounding lug bonded to the enclosure of each equipment item. 2.04 DEVICES A. Each receptacle and switch device shall be furnished with a grounding screw connected to the metallic device frame. 2.05 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be 3/4" x 10'-0 copper clad steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ground all non -current carrying parts of the electrical system including raceways, equipment frames and enclosures, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and other conductive material in close proximity with electrical circuits. B. Service entrance and separately derived electrical systems, grounding electrode system 1. The grounded conductor(s) of the electrical service serving the premises wiring system shall be connected to the neutral bus bar in the service equipment which shall be grounded to the cold water system, the ground rod system, and other grounding electrodes specified herein or indicated on the drawings. Grounding electrode conductors shall be installed rigid, nonmetallic conduit to point of ground connection, unless subject to physical damage in which case it shall be installed in galvanized rigid steel. 2. Make connection to main water line entering the building. Make connections ahead of any valve or fittings whose removal may interrupt ground continuity. 3. Bond together the following systems to form the grounding electrode system. All system connections shall be made to the electrodes as close as possible to the service entrance equipment and each connected at the service entrance equipment neutral bus. Do not connect electrode systems together except at neutral bus. a. Cold water piping system b. Ground rod system C. Rebar in concrete footing d. Structural steel metal building frame e. Lightning protection system 4. Ground the neutral of all dry type transformers to both building steel and to the nearest available point on the interior water piping system, which shall serve as the grounding electrodes for the separately derived system. In COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260526 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 GROUNDING reinforced concrete structures building steel shall be considered to be reinforcing steel of vertical columns. Make connection to building steel with chemical weld type connector, in a location in unfinished space where the connection will not be subject to physical abuse. 5. Grounding electrode connections to structural steel, reinforcing bars, ground rods, or where indicated on the drawings shall be with chemical exothermic weld connection devices recommended for the particular connection type. Connections to piping shall be with UL Listed mechanical ground clamps. 6. Where there is more than one service to a building or interconnected buildings, services shall be connected by means of a grounding electrode conductor. 7. Bonding shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 8. Install ground rods where indicated on the drawings with the top of the ground rods 12 inches below finished grade. 9. Ground the neutral and frame of the emergency generator to building steel and the main electrical service ground rod system. In reinforced concrete structures building steel shall be considered to be reinforcing steel or vertical columns. Make connection to building steel with chemical weld type connector, in a location in unfinished space where the connection will not be subject to physical abuse. 10. Generator ground and neutral connections shall be bonded together. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor 1. Grounding conductors for branch circuits are not shown on the drawings; however, grounding conductors shall be provided in all branch circuit raceways and cables. 2. Grounding conductors for feeders are typically indicated on the drawings and the raceway is sized to accommodate grounding conductor shown. Where grounding conductor size is not indicated on the drawings, conductor shall be in accordance with the equipment grounding conductor table of the National 'Electrical Code. D. Other Grounding Requirements 1. Each telephone backboard shall be provided with a No. 6 grounding conductor. When backboard is located in vicinity of electrical service equipment, the "point of grounding" of this conductor shall be the main cold water service with connections make ahead of any valves or joints. Remote backboards shall use building steel as "point of ground." Terminate conductor by stapling to backboard. 2. At each building expansion joint flexible copper bonding jumpers shall be attached to building structure by chemical weld process. Install bonding jumpers in concealed locations that will not subject connections or jumpers to physical abuse. Install 100' on centers across expansion joints. 3.02 TESTING COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260526 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 GROUNDING A. Upon completion of the ground rod installation, the Contractor shall test the installation in accordance with the "Electrical Testing" section of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General. Grounding resistance reading shall be taken before connection is made to the building cold water piping system. Ground resistance readings shall not be taken within 48 hours of rainfall. END OF SECTION 260526 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260526 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 GROUNDING SECTION 260530 - FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 26 shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Firestopping lur Electrical Systems. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. Typical firestopping installation details will be provided on Drawings as an attachment to this document. If the bid documents are in conflict, the Drawings shall take precedence. The successful Contractor sliall ineet or exceed all requirements described in this document. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Provide product data from m,-irnu.fnrtnrrr's spccificatiwis. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all Firestopping Materials. PART 2 - PROD U CTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Firestopping manufacturer(s) 1. Flamestopper Thru-Wall Fitting - Wiremold Company (Firestop Devices) 2. Tremco Inc. (Firestop Cast in Place Sleeves, Caulks, QuickComm Sleeves, QuickComm Units, Pillows, Putty Pads, Outlet Box Inserts, Silicone, COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260530 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Composite Sheets, Collars, Devices) 3. STI Firestop Products (Firestop Devices, Putties, Caulks, Sealants, etc.) 4. Hilti (Putties, Caulks, Sealants, etc.) 2.02 TYPES OF PRODUCTS A. Firestop Products 1. Intumescent Firestop Sealants and Caulks 2. Acrylic Firestop Sealant and Caulks 3. Silicone Firestop Sealants and Caulks 4. Cast in Place Devices 5. Firestop Putty, Putty Pads 6. Outlet Box Inserts 7. Quick Comm Sleeves 8. Tremstop Straps 9. Firestop Collars 10. Wrap Strips 11. Firestop Mortar 12. Firestop Pillows 13. Accessories: Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral Wool, Backer Rod or other type as per manufacturer recommendation. B. Firestop Devices 1. Thru-Wall Fitting (Flamestopper by Wiremold) a. The firestop device box shall be constructed of 16-gauge G90 steel. b. The firestop device intumescent block shall be constructed of a graphite base material with expansion starting at 375 degrees F and an unrestrained expansion between 6 to 12 times. The intumescent block shall be held securely by the box in order to prevent tampering and damage during installation. C. The firestop device shall have doors which can be adjusted to prevent materials from penetrating the device if the device is empty or completely full. The doors shall be constructed of 16-gauge G90 steel with No. 10-32 screws use to adjust opening size. d. The firestop device shall be available for 2" and 4" trade size EMT conduit. e. The firestop device shall be available in safety yellow powder coat, custom colors and an unpainted galvanized finish. 2. Fire Rated Cable Pathway (STI EZ-PATH) a. Fire rated cable pathway device modules shall be comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 - 100% cable fill. 3. Tremco (QuickComm Unit) 24" x 12" or 34" x 18" a. Fire rated steel frame with an intumscent channels. UL Tested for COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 2 MARCH 15, 2011 260530- FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS large openings with 100% visual cable fill. UL Tested for Concrete Floors, Block Walls, Dry Walls and Hollow Core Floors. 4. Tremco (QuickComm Sleeve) a. Fire rated steel sleeve with an intumescent inner sleeve. UL Tested for Concrete Floors, Block Walls, Dry Walls, Hollow Core and Fluted Decks. 2.03 UL CLASSIFICATION A. Thru-Wall Fitting: The firestop device for use in through -penetration firestop systems shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL1479 (ASTM E 814 & AS'TM E 84). B. Threaded, Smooth and Split -Sleeve Firestop Devices: Firestopping sealants and devices shall be used together as a firestop system. All firestop systems shall bear a UL Classificatiuu system number. C. QuickComm Sleeve: Firestop Sleeve for use m through penetration firestop systems. Shall be tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or a recognized Testing Laboratory for through penetration fire stopping applications. D. QuickComm Unit: Intumescent Firestopping Unit for use in large openings for firestopping for cables, Fiber optic, Power Control, 'Telecommunications 1. 'Threaded Firestop System a. Block Wall - W-J-3049 b. Dry Wall - W-L-3138 2. Threaded Firestop System (Vertical) a. Slab - F-A-3010 I Smooth Firestop System a. Block Wall -- W- I-3048 b. Dry Wall - W-L-3137 4. Split -Sleeve Firestop System a. Block Wall - W-J-3047 b. Dry Wall - W-L-3136 5. Tremco QuickComm Sleeve a. Block Wall- C-AJ-0123, C-AJ-2580, C-AJ-3270 b. Dry Wall- WL-0025, MIL-2418, WL-3318 C. Concrete Floor- C-AJ-0123, C-AJ-2580, C-AJ-3270 d. Fluted Deck- C-AJ-0123 e. Hollow Core- C-AJ-0123, C-AJ-2580, C-AJ-3318 6. Trrmro QuickConnn Unit a. Dry Wall- WL-3319, MIL-4070 b: Concrctc Floor- IF-A-3035, F-A-4006 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260530 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2.04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Thru-Wall Fitting Firestop System 1. The device shall be classified for use in one-, two-, three, and four-hour rated gypsum, concrete and block walls and provide an L rating of less than 5 cfin. The device shall also be tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL2043 and determined to be suitable for use in air handling spaces. B. Threaded, Smooth and Split -Sleeve Firestop Systems 1. Shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by local building codes and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 and ASTM E 84 (UL 1479) fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions. 2. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating when required by code authority shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column. C. Firestopping materials and systems must be capable of closing or filling through - openings created by the burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials. D. Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents. E. Firestopping sealants must be flexible, allowing for normal pipe movement. F. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surfaces. G. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water after curing. H. Firestopping material shall be installed inside the cavity of the wall as shown by the annular space requirements in the UL Tested System. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 4 260530- MARCH 15, 2011 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Gencral 1. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and if indicated, whether such material is designed as insulation, safing, or otherwise. B. Tlufuugh-Penetrations 1. Firestopping shall be installed in all open penetrations and in the annular space in all penetrations in any bearing or non -bearing fire -rated barrier. C. Membrane -Penetrations 1. Where required by code, all membrane -penetrations in rated walls shall be protected with firestopping products that meet ASTM E 814 and ASTM E 84 Test requirements. D. Smoke -Stopping L As required by the other sections, smoke -stops shall be provided for tlu-uugh-penetrations, membrane -penetrations, and construction gaps with a material approved for the ASTM E 136 Standards. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop products. C. Verify that all pipes, conduit, cable, and other items that penetrate fire -rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Through Penetration firestop submittals showing each UL Rated Assembly shall be located in the general Contractor's trailer for Inspection purposes. 2. Installation of firestops shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Written documentation stating training done on the specific project shall be supplied to the General COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260530 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Contractor for inspection purposes. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures. 3. Apply firestops in accordance with UL Tested Systems, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Unless specified and approved, all insulation used in conjunction with through -penetrants shall remain intact and undamaged and may not be removed. 5. Seal holes and penetrations to ensure an effective smoke seal. In areas of high traffic, protect firestopping materials from damage. If the opening is large, install firestopping materials capable of supporting the weight of a human. a. Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein. b. All combustible penetrants (e.g. non-metallic pipes or insulated metallic pipes) shall be firestopped using products and systems tested in a configuration representative of the field condition. B. Dam Construction 1. When required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings, damming or packing materials may be utilized. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Noncombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the firestop system. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Preconstruction meeting shall take place to address firestopping systems to be installed. B. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with UL Tested System and manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. C. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets. D. Finish surfaces of firestopping that are to remain exposed in the completed work to a uniform and level condition. E. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code Authorities. F. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this Specification. 3.05 CLEANING COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 6 MARCH 15, 2011 260530- FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Reiuuve spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in a neat and clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 260530 COLLEGE STATION 7 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRE STATION NO. 6 260530 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533 - CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This section covers the complete interior and exterior conduit system. B. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Industry Standards 1. Undexwriters Laboratories Tnc. (1_IL) Publications No. 1: Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit No. 6: Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit No. 467: Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment No. 651: Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit No. 797: Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel No. 1242: Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel 2. American National Standards Tnstihrte (AMST) C-80.1: Rigid Gralvnnived Conduit C 80.3: Electrical Metallic Tubing 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install conduits and raceways, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATTON NO F 260533 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS 1. Metallic Conduit Fittings a. Thomas and Betts b. Appleton C. RACO d. Crouse Hinds e. Steel City 2. Support Channel a. Unistrut b. Kindorf 3. Non-metallic Conduit Fittings a. Carlon b. Georgia Pipe Company 4. Rigid, IMC or Flexible Conduit a. Allied b. Republic C. Triangle d. Wheatland e. Youngstown f. Southwire 5. Flexible Conduit (PVC Conduit) a. Anaconda "Sealtite" b. Robroy C. Southwire 6. Electrical Metallic Tubing a. Steeltubes b. National C. Wheatland d. Allied e. Triangle f. Youngstown 7. Plastic PVC a. Carlon b. Georgia Pipe Company 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) couplings and connectors shall be steel. Malleable iron, pressure cast or die cast fittings are not permitted. B. Fittings and couplings shall be set -screw type and/or compression type per 3.01 12. Steel set screw type for 2.5" conduit and larger shall have 2 screws for connectors and 4 screws for couplings. All connectors shall be insulated throat type. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260533 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS C. Rigid steel and IN4C couplings and connectors shall be standard threaded couplings, lockouts, bushings and elbows. All materials shall be steel. Erickson - type couplings may be used to complete a conduit run. 2.03 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Non-metallic conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40 PVC B. Couplings and connectors for non-metallic conduit shall be of the same material and be the product of the same manufacturer of the conduit furnished. 2.04 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Individual conduit hangers shall be galvanized spring steel specifically designed for the purpose and sized appropriately for the conduit type and diameter. Support individual conduits 1-1/2" and smaller with 1/4" threaded steel rods and use 3/8" rods for 2" and larger. B. Conduit support channels shall be 14-gauge galvanized (or equivalent treatment) channel sized for the amount of conduit to be supported. Channel suspension shall be 3/8" threaded steel rods. Conduit straps shall be spring steel type compatible with channel. C. Conduit straps shall be single -hole cast metal type or two -hole galvanized metal type. Conduit clamps shall be spring steel type for use with exposed structural steel. 2.05 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Flexible conduit shall be steel or aluminum type classified for system grounding. B. Connectors for flexible conduit shall be insulated throat type rated as suitable for system ground continuity. C. Flexible conduit used for other than connections to lighting fixtures shall not be less than 1/2" trade size. 3/8" flexible conduit may be used for connection to lighting fixtures when sized according to the National Electrical Code. D. Flexible conduit used in damp or wet locations shall be liquid tight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General COI.I.FGE STATION FTR.F. STATInN NO. 6 260533 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS 1. Minimum size for conduits shall be 1/2" trade size. 2. Conceal all conduits, except in unfinished spaces such as equipment rooms or as indicated by symbol on the drawings. 3. Leave all empty conduits with a 200 pound test nylon cord pull line. 4. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduits are not permitted and shall be removed and replaced. 5. Fasten conduit support device to structure with wood screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry, anchors as specified on solid masonry or concrete, and machine bolts, clamps, or spring steel clips, on steel. 6. Protect conduits against dirt, plaster, and foreign debris with conduit caps or plugs, which shall remain in place until all masonry is complete. Protect conduit stub -ups during construction from damage, any damage conduits shall not be used and are to be replaced. 7. All feeder conduits shall be cleared of any dirt, foreign debris, etc. 8. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns as indicated on the drawings. Any change resulting in a savings in labor or materials is to be made only in accordance with a Contract change. Deviations shall be made only where necessary to avoid interferences and when approved by Engineer by written authorization. 9. Conduits which penetrate roof membranes shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and architectural specifications. 10. Seal all conduits entering building from below grade, all conduits entering refrigerated spaces i.e. freezers and coolers, and all conduits entering exterior mounted electrical equipment with insulating electrical putty to prevent entrance of moisture. 11. Separate raceway systems are to be installed for power systems and for control, signal and communications systems. Do not install control, signal or communications cables in the same raceways as branch circuit or feeders cables, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 12. Conduit fittings shall be set screw type for dry, indoor environments. Conduit fittings shall be gland and ring compression type for all conduit exposed to outdoor environments or wet locations. 13. Conduit shall be run parallel or at right angles to walls, ceilings, and structural members. 14. Support branch circuit conduits at intervals not exceeding ten feet and within three feet of each outlet, junction box, fitting, panelboard, enclosure or cabinet. Per local Amendment to the NEC, "EMT installed in dry walls, attics, and outdoors with watertight fittings to be supported every five feet. Fiber bushings shall be be used on all connectors 1-1/4 inch or greater in size." Support conduits from structural steel members with spring steel type or beam conduit clamps and to non-metallic structural members with one -hole conduit straps. For exposed conduits and where conduits must be suspended below structure, single conduit runs shall be supported from structure by hanger rod and conduit clamp assembly, and multiple conduits shall be supported by trapeze type support suspended from structure. Do COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260533 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS not attach conduits to ceiling suspension system channels or suspension wires. 15. Attach feeder conduits larger than one inch trade diameter to or from structure on intervals not exceeding twelve feet with conduit beam clamps, one -hole conduit straps or trapeze type support Per local Amendment to the NEC, "EMT installed in dry walls, attics, and outdoors with watertight fittings to be supported every five feet. Fiber bushings shall be be used on all connectors 1-1/4 inch or greater in size." 16. Per local amendments to the Code, "Under no conditions shall EMT be installed in concrete or underground." 17. Where conduits must pass through structural members obtain approval of Architect. 18. Install all conduits or sleeves penetrating or routed within rated fire walls or fire floors to maintain fire rating of wall or floor. Conduit shall not be installed in rated floors or walls if it compromises or violates the fire rating of floor or wall. Refer to architectural documents. 19. Provide expansion and deflection coupling where conduit passes over a building expansion joint. 20. keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 21. Telephone and signal system raceways: 2" trade size and smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. B. Uses Peruiiaed 1. Conduits installed within concrete floor slabs which are in direct contact with grade or which penetrate the building roof shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS), intermediate metal conduit (IMC) or Schedule 40, heavy wall PVC, or electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT). 2. Conduit run exterior exposed: Galvanized rigid steel (GRS) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 3. Conduits in direct contact with earth shall be Schedule 40, heavy wall PVC. Elbows for underground conduits greater than 200' in length shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT) if elbows are concrete encased. Service entrance conduits installed exposed, or concealed in walls or above ceilings, shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Unless indicated otherwise, service entrance conduits shall be installed "outside" of the building as defined by the NEC. Provide concrete encasement where required or as indicated on drawings. 4. All other conduit, unless specified herein, not permitted in accordance with the NEC, or otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be electrical COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260533 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS metallic tubing (EMT). PVC conduit is not allowed in exposed or concealed areas, but only within concrete or below grade. Feeder or branch circuit conduits that emerge from a floor slab in an exposed location shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS), electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Where conduits emerge from a floor slab in a concealed location (a wall cavity or above ceiling), PVC elbows are permitted, provided that a conduit adaptor for steel conduit is installed at the nearest point at the slab. 5. Use flexible conduit for connections to motors, dry type transformers, electrical duct heaters, unit heaters, kitchen equipment, laundry equipment, flush mounted lighting fixtures, and any vibrating equipment. a. Flexible conduit used for connection of motors, dry type transformers, electric duct heaters, unit heaters, and bus duct tap devices shall not exceed 36 inches in length. b. Flexible conduit from outlet box to flush mounted lighting fixture shall not exceed 6 feet in length. C. Maintain ground continuity through flexible conduit with green equipment grounding conductor; do not use flexible conduit for ground continuity. d. Flexible conduit installed within plenum spaces shall be limited to lengths not exceeding 4 feet. e. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used to connect equipment in exterior, damp or wet locations and the kitchen area and laundry area and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Below Grade Raceway Installations 1. Install top of conduits 2 inches minimum below bottom of building slabs. D. Raceway Installations within Concrete 1. Conduit shall be run following the most direct route between points. 2. Conduit shall not be installed in concrete where the outside diameter is larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness. 3. Conduits shall not be installed within shear walls unless specifically indicated on the drawings. Conduit shall not be run directly below and parallel with load bearing walls. 4. Protect all conduits entering and leaving concrete floor slabs from physical damage during construction. 5. Provide expansion fittings in all conduits that pass through building expansion joints. END OF SECTION 260533 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260533 -6 MARCH 15, 2011 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS SECTION 260534 - OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOX + S PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install outlet and junction boxes, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineered and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Mctal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast -Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. F. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard uuainel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: resistant paint. Plastic, finished inside with radio -frequency - COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 MARCH 15, 2011 260534 - 1 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES G. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: Anchor boxes securely to formwork. Provide necessary protection to prevent entry of concrete. B. Sequencing, Scheduling: Locations of outlets shown on the Drawings are relative and approximate. Exact locations shall be determined on the job and the outlets accurately set according to the architectural drawings, dimensions, casework knee - space, building conditions, furniture positions and Architect's direction. The right is reserved to change the exact location (10'-0" or less) of any switch, ceiling outlet or other outlet in any room before it is permanently installed without increase in Contract cost. C. All outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be accessible. Any boxes in non - accessible areas (furred ceilings) shall be set flush with barrier surface at a location approved by the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Electric Products Company, Thomas & Betts/Steel City, Appleton or Raco. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Standard Outlet Boxes: Boxes and covers shall be galvanized steel not less than 1/16" thick and in every instance, of such form and dimensions as to be adapted to its specific use and location, kind of fixtures to be used and number, size and arrangement of conduits connecting thereto and particularly sized to accommodate the number and size of wires to be contained therein. B. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 1-1/2" or 3-3/8" deep, 4" octagonal (or 4" square when required due to number of wires). Plaster rings or device covers need not be provided on ceiling boxes. Provide extension rings on ceiling boxes to accommodate number of conductors in box. C. Wall outlet boxes for toggle switches and convenience outlets shall be 1-1/2" or 2- 1/8" deep, 4" or 4-11/16" square. Provide with single -device covers (or two - device covers where needed). Covers shall be raised type to compensate for thickness of plaster or gypsum board wall finish. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260534 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES D. Outlet boxes for telecommunication purposes (telephone, data, etc.) shall be 4" x 4" square, 2-1/8" deep. Provide with single `device, covers (or two -device covers where needed). Covers shall be raised type to, compensate for thickness of plaster or gypsum board wall finish. E. Junction boxes shall be as specified for ceiling and wall outlet boxes. Provide flat covers on ceiling outlets to match ceiling finish. Provide blank device type coverplates on wall outlets, of same materials as specified for device coverplates in same room or area. F. Outlet boxes where exposed rigid conduit is used shall be cast ferrous alloy, galvanized or cast aluminum. G. Covers. Where outlet boxes are to be capped, blank coverplates shall be used. H. Barriers: Provide barriers between devices operating at different voltages or on separate systems such as normal, critical, or life safety. 2.03 FLOOR BOXES A. Product Description 1. Floor boxes for receptacles and telephone/data outlets shall be rectangular, non-metallic PVC. Boxes shall be suitable for use in slab -on -grade or above grade. Boxes shall include a non-metallic concrete cover to prohibit concrete or debris form entering the box during installation. 2. Provide number of compartments as indicated on drawings. 3. Coverplates and flanges shall be brass. 4. Floor boxes shall meet UL 514C requirements for scrub -water test standards. B. Manufacturer 1. Hubbell PFBRG Series 2. Walker/Wimmold 880MP Scrics 3. Thomas & Betts 640P Scries C. For pokc-thru devices, refer to 2.04 D of Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Pull and Junction boxes are not completely indicated. They shall be sized and installed where required in accordance with the NEC. B. Pill and Junction boxes shall be the suitable NEMA type number to match the COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260534 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES environmental conditions. C. Locations of concealed pull and junction boxes shall be indicated on the record as built drawings for Owner's record. 2.05 CABINETS, FITTINGS, BOXES: GENERAL A. Cabinets shall be in accordance with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes" and NEMA 250, Type 1. Electrical cabinets, boxes and fittings shall be as required for types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. B. Construction shall be sheet steel, NEMA 1 class except as otherwise indicated. Cabinets shall consist of a box and a front consisting of a 1-piece frame and a hinged door. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame, with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24" apart, to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24" apart and not over 6" from top and bottom of door. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4" larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets make from same height and width as box. Furnish metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and furnish accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. C. Fasteners for general use shall be corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items. D. Fasteners for damp and wet locations shall be stainless steel screws and hardware. E. Exterior finish shall be gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated. F. Painted interior finish, where indicated, shall be white baked enamel. G. Fittings for boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be in accordance with UL 5148 and shall be zinc plated steel for conduit hubs, bushings and box connectors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. The location of all wall outlets, including light fixtures, receptacles, switches, etc., shall be checked to see that the outlet will clear any wall fixture, shelving, work tables, sinks, baseboard and fin type convectors, bulletin boards, etc., that will be COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260534 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES installed. B. Exact locations of outlet boxes shall be coordinated with other trades so that outlet will not be covered by ductwork, piping, etc. C. The approximate locations of outlets are indicated on the Drawings. The exact locations shall be determined at the building. The right is reserved to change, without additional cost, the exact location of any outlet, a maximum of 10' before it is permanently installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Architectural Placement: Outlets occurring in architectural features shall be aeeuratcly centered in same. Space wall switch outlets equidistant from door trims on the strike side of doors as actually installed so that coverplate clears trim. Orientation of outlet boxes (horizontal or vertical) shall be as indicated on architectural elevations. B. Install all outict boxes in finished areas flush with wall or ceiling finish. Maintain 1/4" or less space between outlet box front and finish wall surface. C. All switches at same lcvel shall be installed on one horizontal line as shown on the Drawings. D. Wall mounted controls, including temperature controls, in a room shall be grouped at the same location and at same mounting heights. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. At all concealed outlets for electric lights, switches, wall receptacles, etc., standard outlet boxes and plaster rings shall be provided. B. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored in place and shall be provided with approved fixture studs where required. Outlet boxes shall not depend on the coverplate to hold it secure to the wall. C. Boxes on opposite sides of walls or partitions: Where drawings show back-to-back wiring devices, the devices on opposite sides of the wall shall be offset a minimum of 6". Through -the -wall type boxes shall not be used. Where boxes will be located on opposite sides of walls or partitions located 24" or closer to each other, moldable putty pads shall be installed to completely cover the exterior surfaces of the box within the stud cavity with a ball of putty material used to plug the end of each conduit at its connection to the box. These pads shall be of the CLIV type and manufactured by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. 2. Nelson Firestop Products COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260534 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES 3. Specified Technologies, Inc. D. All holes cut through new or existing smoke or fire partitions shall be sealed. Sealant shall be 3M Brand Fire Barrier System or approved equal. Seals shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. All flush boxes in rated walls that are larger than 16 square inches in area shall be backed as follows: 1-hour wall - 1 layer of 5/8" gypsum board; 2-hour rated wall - 2 layers of 5/8" gypsum board. Gypsum shall be fire code and attached to outside surfaces of box(es). F. Cast aluminum, threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers shall be used for wet locations where box is surface mounted. G. Location of floor boxes indicated are approximate. The Contractor shall refer to the final furniture layout or request field instructions for the exact location. Consult the Architect prior to installation. END OF SECTION 260534 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260534 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES SECTION 260535 - COMM CONDUIT SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete telecommunication conduit system as shown on the plans -and the plans and herein specified for wiring by others which includes raceways for voice, data, CCTV and security systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conduits, Sleeves and Backboards 1. Entrance facility conduits shall be installed to extend 4" beyond the finished surface it penetrates and be equipped with pull rope or mule tape with a breaking strength of 600 pounds. Entrance facility conduits that penetrate external building walls shall be installed in "Jack Moon" type plugs used in conjunction with expandable grout to waterproof the penetration. 2. Conduits used for horizontal cabling shall be equipped with nylon bushings and polypropylene pull line with a breaking strength of 200 pounds. 3. All underground entrances shall have metallic sleeves through building foundation walls, extending to undisturbed ground to avoid shear. 4. All 90 degree bends shall have a radius of not less than 10 times the diameter of the conduit. 5. Backboards shall be provided where indicated on the plans. Backboard shall be constructed of 3/4" void free, fire rated (or 2 coats of fire retardant paint) plywood secured to wall and painted grey. 6. Provide and install conduits as indicated on electrical drawings. 7. Telephone service entrance conduits shall be schedule 40 PVC; quantity shall be as shown on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Providc one (1) #6 ground conductor in 3/4" conduit from each telephone equipment backboard to the building ground for the telephone company's connection. B. Provide a Brady "Write -On" label on each conduit at each telephone wood backboard and designate on the label the room or rooms served by the conduit. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260535 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 COMM CONDUIT SYSTEM C. Label all outlet boxes (indicate as voice, data, or combination using the symbols as shown on the plans). Labels shall be affixed on the inside back of the box. D. In areas with non -accessible ceilings, telephone conduits shall be continuous from the outlet box to the telephone equipment backboard. In areas with accessible ceilings, conduits shall be routed from outlet box/backboard to 6" above the ceiling and terminated with a nylon grommet. E. Each conduit homerun can serve one to three outlet boxes. For conduit homeruns serving one outlet box, conduit size shall be 3/4". For homeruns serving two (2) outlet boxes, conduit size shall be 1 ". For homeruns serving three (3) outlet boxes, conduit size shall be 1-1 /4". F. Maintain a minimum cover of 24 inches below final grade of conduits, or greater as required by the telephone utility company. G. Service entrance conduits shall be provided and installed by the electrical contractor in accordance with the telephone utility company rules, regulations, and installation guide. H. Service entrance conduits shall extend from the backboard to the utility demarcation/customer termination point on the site as directed by the local telephone utility company. I. It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to coordinate the type of telephone cable used and the local authority's acceptance or rejection of exposed cabling with the electrical work as indicated on the plans. This coordination shall be performed by the electrical contractor prior to the bid of construction documents. J. All raceway systems, outlets, lighting, grounds, backboards, cabinets, and pull lines respective to each system shall be completely installed prior to the cabling contractor's arrival on site. END OF SECTION 260535 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 260535 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 COMM CONDUIT SYSTEM SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work required under this section of the Specifications consists of the installation of all switchboards for use on systems 600 volts and below. All materials and devices which are an integral part of the switchboards shall be provided under this section of the Specifications. B. Switchboards as specified in these Contract Documents are free standing, dead - front, metal enclosed panels of one or more sections. The overcurrent devices may he individually or group inuunlcd. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Acceptable Manufacturers. Pioducts of the iollowmg manufacturers, which comply with these Specifications, are acceptaIde . 1. Square D 2. Siemens 3. Cutler Hammer 4. General Electric B. Equipment Dimensions 1. Dimensions noted on the Drawings are the maximum allowable and shall not be exceeded. Where switchboard(s) of acceptable manufacturers listed exceed the maximum dimensions, products of such manufacturers shall not be acceptable. C. Coordination 1. Coordinate installation with architectural and structural features, equipment installed under other sections of the Specifications and electrical equipment to ensure access and so that clearance minimums are provided. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General for submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Include electrical characteristics and ratings for each switchboard with COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262413 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 SWITCHBOARDS dimensions, mounting, bus material, voltage, bracing, ampere rating, mains, poles and wire connection, and any accessories. 2. Include bussing diagram indicating each circuit breaker or fused switch position. 3. Provide a schedule indicating overcurrent device, trip and size, poles, frame type, fuse size and type, or circuit breaker interrupting capacity. 1.04 SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY A. Manufacturer of switchboards and panelboards shall provide a coordination study between the main protective devices for the system, feeder protective devices and all downstream protective devices to ensure a coordinated system to the greatest extent feasible. Costs for any changes to the equipment sizes and ratings due to this Coordination Study shall be a part of the Contractor's bid. Submit this Coordination Study in the shop drawing submittals. B. Overcurrent protective devices shall be selectively coordinated for distribution systems serving emergency and standby loads, as well as those serving multiple elevators. Manufacturer shall provide a selective coordination study showing breaker coordination for faults with durations of 0.01 second and greater. For projects with generator -powered loads, the first overcurrent device(s) on the load - side of transfer switches shall be coordinated to generator -provided fault current levels. Devices further "downstream" shall be coordinated to utility fault current levels. For devices on the line -side of transfer switches: 1) coordination is not required for devices connected to utility, and 2) coordination is required for devices connected to generator, but to generator -provided fault current levels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish all materials specified herein. B. The switchboard, circuit breakers, and fused devices shall be UL Listed and bear the UL Label. Where a switchboard is utilized as service entrance equipment, it shall be UL Labeled as suitable for such use. C. The switchboard(s) shall be suitable for operation on the voltage system indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 STRUCTURE ARRANGEMENT A. The switchboard(s) shall consist of free-standing, standardized vertical sections bolted together to form a continuous structure. B. Adequate space for conduit and conductors entering the top or bottom, in COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262413 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 SWITCHBOARDS accordance with the National Electrical Code, shall be provided without structural interference, conductors shall be safely accessible without disrupting service. C. The structure and all components shall be finished in the manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistaut pruner and coating. D. Unless noted otherwise, switchboard sections shall be front accessible. 2.03 BUS ARRANGEMENT A. All busses shall be silver-plated copper , rated for a 65 degrees C temperature rise above a 40 degrees C ambient. The minimum bus bracing, in RMS-symmetrical- amperes, shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. A neutral bus bar shall be provided, rated 100% of the main phase bus bar ampacity. C. The main bus shall be fully rated for the entire length of the switchboard. D. All non -current -carrying parts of the switchboard shall be grounded through the use of a continuous horizontal ground bus connected to vertical ground busses in each section. Ground bus rating shall meet or exceed the ampacity of the electrical service grounding electrode conductor(s). E. An accessible cable termination compartment shall be provided for incoming line termination. Lugs shall be suitable for terminating the size and quantity of conductors as indicated. F. All terminal lugs shall be UL Labeled for AL or CU conductors rated for 75 degrees C. 2.04 MAIN PROTECTIVE DEVICE(S) A. The main protective device(s) shall employ fixed type mounting. The devices shall be individually mounted in the switchboard. B. Provide molded case circuit breaker(s) 1. Breaker(s) shall be 600V AC, 50/60 HZ rated. The frame and current ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Circuit breaker(s) shall be of the quick -make, quick -break, trip -free thermal magnetic type. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Provide molded case circuit breakers. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 262413 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 SWITCHBOARDS 1. Circuit breakers shall be provided with trip rating, poles and minimum interrupting rating as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. Circuit breakers 600 amps or less shall be of the quick -make, quick -break, trip -free thermal magnetic type. 3. Circuit breakers greater than 600 amps shall be of the quick -make, quick - break, trip -free, solid state type. Solid state breaker trip functions shall include adjustments for continuous amperage, long time pickup and delay, instantaneous, and ground -fault pickup and delay. 4. Circuit breakers shall be bolted to the switchboard bus. 5. Provide shunt trip device to electrically trip circuit breakers where indicated on the Drawings. 2.06 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT A. Identification 1. Refer to Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General for nameplate requirements. B. Provide surge protective devices (SPD) integral to the switchboard assembly complying with the following: 1. SPD shall be listed and component recognized in accordance with UL 1283 and UL 1449 Third Edition. 2. SPD shall be installed by and shipped from the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer's factory as an integral device to the electrical equipment. 3. SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L-L, L-N, L-G, N-G in WYE systems (L-N or L-G if at service entrance with bonding jumper), and L-L, L-G in DELTA systems. 4. SPD shall be modular in design. Each module shall be fused with a surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal cutout device. 5. A UL approved disconnect switch shall be provided as a means of disconnect in the switchboard device only. 6. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Maximum surge current capability (single pulse rated) shall be 120 KA per mode. b. Nominal discharge current rating shall be 20 KA. C. MCOV shall not be less than 125% of the nominal system operating voltage. d. The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 P Edition voltage protection rating for the device shall not exceed the followiniz: Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 L-N; L-G; N-G 700 1200 L-L 1200 2000 7. SPD shall have successfully passed ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 10 x 1000 µs waveform testing performed by a nationally recognized independent test lab. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262413 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 SWITCHBOARDS 8. SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of -50dB at 100 kHz with an insertion ratio of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology. 9. SPD shall be provided with 1 set of NO/NC dry contacts. 10. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five years, incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if they are destroyed by transients during the warranty period. Warranty shall be the responsibility of the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be supported by their respective field service division. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard on 3" high concrete pad, the horizontal dimensions of which shall exceed the base dimensions of the switchboard by 3" on all sides. B. I..ace and group conductors installed with nylon tie straps. Only one conductor shall be installed under each terminal. Form and train conductors in enclosure neatly parallel and at right angles to sides of box. Un-insulated conductor shall not extend beyond 1 /9" from terminal h1g. C. Do not splice conductors in switchboard. Where required, install junction box adjacent to enclosure and splice or tap conductors in box. Refer to number of conductors in a conduit limitation defined in the conductors and cables section of the Specifications and do not exceed. D. Maintain conductor phase color code requirement described in the conductors and cables section of the Specifications. E. All switchboard breakers and fuses shall be labeled per the requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General 2.03 A. 3.02 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A: After completion, clean the interior and exterior of dirt, paint and construction debris. B. Circuit breaker adjustments shall be performed as directed by the Engineer at projection completion. END OF SECTION 262413 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262413 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 SWITCHBOARDS SEC;'nON 262416 = PANELBOARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General. B. Provide the panelboards indicated on the Drawings complete with circuit breakers and spaces. C. This section includes panelboards and distribution panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less as shown on the drawings. D. Refer to panel schedule and one -line power diagram on drawings for specific requirements of each panel. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install panelboards, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Panels shall be factory assembled. B. Coordination: Coordmate installation with architectural and structural features, equipment installed under other sections of the Specifications and electrical equipment to ensure panel access and so that clearance minimums are provided. C. Components and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," NEMA PBI, "Panelboards" and UL67 and UL50. COT,T,FCYF STATION FIRE STATION N(1_ F 262416 = 1 MAKC;H 15, 2011 PANELBOARDS D. Panelboards and load centers shall be listed and identified for use with 75 degrees C rated conductors. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General for submittal requirements. B. Manufacturers Product Data: 1. Submit material Specifications and installation data for products specified under Part 2 - Products to include: a. Circuit Breakers b. Panelboards C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to indicate information not fully described by the product data to indicate compliance with the Contract Drawings. 1. Include electrical characteristics and ratings for each panelboard with dimensions, mounting, bus material, voltage, ampere rating, mains, poles and wire connection, and any accessories. Indicate method of ground bus attachment to enclosure. 2. Include bussing diagram indicating each bussing circuit breaker position. 3. Provide a schedule indicating circuit breaker type, trip and size, poles, frame type, interrupting capacity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboard manufacturer shall be: 1. Siemens 2. Square D 3. General Electric 4. Cutler -Hammer B. TVSS Panelboard manufacturer shall be: 1. Current Technologies, Inc. 2. Liebert Corporation 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish all materials specified herein. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262416 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 PANELBOARDS B. All panels and circuit breakers shall be UL Listed and bear a UL Label. Where panel serves as service entrance equipment, panel shall bear a UL Label indicating suitability as service entrance equipment. C. Panels shall be of the dead front safety type. D. Provide panels complete with factory assembled circuit breakers connected to the bus bars in the positions shown on the panel schedules E. Provide all panelboards fully rated to the A.I.C. ratings noted on the schedules, but not less than 10,000 amperes for 120/208 volt panelboards and not less than 14,000 amperes for 277/480 volt panelboards. All devices in a panelboard shall be rated for the A.I.C. ratings shown for the panelboard. 2.03 BUSSING AND INTERIORS A. All bus bars shall be copper. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors and shall be of a size range for the conductors uidicated on the drawings. Each panel shall contain a full size grounding bus. All panelboards shall contain a full size insulated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated on the drawuigs. B. The neutral and ground bus shall have a sufficient number of lugs to singularly terminate each individual conductor requiring a connection. C. Where designated on panel schedule as "space," include all necessary bussing, device support and connections. Provide blank cover for each space. D. Where specified or indicated on the drawings, provide sub -feed lugs adjacent to the mains or feed -through lugs opposite end of mains and increase box heights to provide additional cable bending and termination space. Lugs to be the same size and capacity as mains and rated for aluminum or copper conductor terminations. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. Panelboard width shall not be less than twenty inches unless indicated on the drawings (32" minimum for distribution panclboards). B. Provide concealed captive clamping devices, concealed hinges and chrome lock for all flush mounted panels. Key all panels throughout project alike. C. Where two section panels are required, both sections shall have fully rated bus, separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. Interconnect sections with copper conductors with ampacity equal to rating of main bus. Route phase and neutral conductors together between panels. Provide separate trims for each section. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262416 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 PANELBOARDS D. Provide a typed directory card, and transparent cover permanently mounted on inside of doors. E. Panelboard trims for surface mounted panelboards shall be continuously hinged on one side so that when opened, wiring gutters are completely exposed. F. Provide a label for each branch circuit, feeder, and main circuit breaker in distribution panels, permanently attached. G. Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as indicated. NEMA PB-1, Type 1 enclosure, except where the following enclosure requirements are indicated: 1. NEMA 250, Type 3R - Raintight. 2. NEMA 250, Type 3S - Raintight and dust tight. 3. NEMA 250, Type 4X - Corrosion -resistant stainless steel enclosure, watertight, dust tight, and resistant to oil and coolant seepage. This type shall be used in kitchen areas. 4. NEMA 250, Type 12 - Dust tight, dripproof, and resistant to oil and coolant seepage. H. Enclosure shall be fabricated with galvanized steel. Trims shall have electrostatic applied ANSI gray enamel finish and adjustable indicating trim clamps for securing trim to the enclosure. Screwed -on trims shall not be acceptable. Trim shall have an angle support along the bottom serving as a support between trim and enclosure for safe installation and removal of trim. I. EXTERIOR PANELS: Panelboards mounted outside of building shall be in NEMA type 3R enclosures. Panelboards shall have in addition to the standard specified items the following: 1. Piano hinge 2. Seams continuously welded 3. Rolled lip around door and cabinet 4. No knockouts or holes 5. Neoprene gaskets on inside of door 6. Stainless steel hardware 7. Drip hood at top above door 2.05 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Interrupting rating of all circuit breakers in panelboards shall have UL rating of not less than the RMS symmetrical amps indicated on the drawings at system voltage. Series rated devices are acceptable with the following exceptions: devices used in distribution serving emergency, standby and multiple elevator loads (selective COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262416 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 PANELBOARDS coordination). B. Circuit breakers shall be provided with trip rating and poles as indicated on the drawings or specified herein. C. Multi -pole breakers shall be common trip and common reset; tie handle connection between single pole breakers is not acceptable. D. Branch circuit breakers in lighting and appliance panels shall be quick -make, quick - break, thermal magnetic type bolted to the bus. Circuit breakers in distribution type panel boards shall be bolted to the bus. E. Provide the following special devices and accessories when indicated on the drawings or specified herein. 1. Ground fault interrupting circuit breakers (GFI) where indicated on the drawings. 2. Provide handle lock -off device to prevent manually turning off device without removal. Install on all circuit breakers indicated on the panel schedule, fire alarm system, and security system. 3. Provide UL Listed `°SWD" switching_ duty circuit breakers on the devices indicated on the drawings. 4. Provide shunt trip device for electrically tripping circuit breakers indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide from each flush mounted panelboard four (4) 3/4" empty conduits stubbed out above ceiling line and capped. B. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB L I, "General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less" and manufacturer's written installation instructions. C. Mount panelboards with top circuit breaker not more than 6'-6" above finished floor. D. Only one conductor installed under terminal of individual circuit breakers. Form and train conductors in panel enclosure neatly parallel and at right angles to sides of box. Uninsulated conductor shall not extend beyond one -eighth inch from terminal lug. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262416 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 PANELBOARDS E. Do not splice conductors in panels. Where required, install junction box adjacent to panel and splice or tap conductors in box. F. Mounting and Support 1. Mounting a. Enclosure shall be secured to structure by a minimum of four (4) fastening devices. Panelboards 600 amp and larger shall be secured by a minimum of eight (8) devices. A 1.5 inch minimum diameter round washer shall be used between head of screw or bolt and enclosure. b. Enclosures shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Support from the structure with fastening device specified. C. Attach enclosure directly to masonry, concrete, or wood surfaces. d. Mounted enclosure on metal channel (strut), which is connected to structure with fastening device specified, for installation on steel structure or sheet rock walls. G. Maintain conductor phase color code requirements described in the conductors and cables section of the specifications. H. Provide in each panelboard a typewritten circuit directory mounted under clear plastic in metal directory frame on interior or panel door. Directory shall reflect any field changes or additions. I. Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters." J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. K. Mounting of all panelboards and all hardware used for mounting shall be in accordance with the seismic criteria per the applicable building code. END OF SECTION 262416 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262416 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 PANELBOARDS SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 2.6 00 00 - Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install wiring devices, complete, as indieuted on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. The following manufacturers are allowed: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Cooper 4. Levrton 5. Thomas & Betts/Steel City 6. Walker/Wiremold When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. C. This section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, dimmers, timeclocks and coverplates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wiring devices shall comply with applicable sections of NEMA Standard WD-1, NFPA 70, Article 100. B. All special purpose receptacles shall be NEMA standard configuration. C. Comparative devices by acceptable manufacturers are equal. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262726 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 WIRING DEVICES PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICE DESCRIPTION AND MANUFACTURER A. Single & Duplex Receptacles (20 Amp) 1. Single or duplex type receptacle as indicated. 125V/20/A/2P/3W/G rating - NEMA - 5-20R type with urea or nylon body. 2. Face color shall be white (red where on emergency circuit.) Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 3. Manufacturer a. Hubbell CR5362 B. GFCI Duplex Receptacles 1. Duplex, feed-thru type ground fault current interrupter receptacle with test/reset buttons, urea or nylon body. 125V/20A/2P/3W/G rating - NEMA 5-20R type conforming to UL #498, UL #943 Class A and NEMA #WD1-4.02. Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell GF5352 C. Isolated Ground Single & Duplex Receptacles 1. Single or duplex type receptacles as indicated. 125V/20A/2P/3W/IG rating - NEMA 5-20R type with urea or nylon body and ground internally isolated from receptacle frame and ground pigtail or terminal screw. Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell CR5352IG D. Clock Hanger Receptacles 1. Single type receptacle with a recessed outlet clock hanger type mounting coverplate. 125V/15A/2P/3W/G - NEMA 5-15R type. Brown colored receptacle face with brass mounting coverplate. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell 5236 Series E. Maintained Contact Switches 1. Provide toggle operated switches SPST, DPST, 3-way or 4-way operation as indicated. 277V/20A rating, quiet type, maintained contact, urea or nylon body add a green hexagonal ground screw or ground pigtail, and side COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262726 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 WIRING DEVICES wired. Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell CS 1221 Series (Color to match receptacles). F. Momentary Contact Switches 1. Provide toggle or key operated switches as indicated with single circuit, 3- position center -off operation. 277V/20A rating, quiet type, momentary contact, spring loaded switch, urea or nylon body and green hexagonal ground screw or ground pigtail, back and side wired. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell HBL 155* (Color to match receptacle). G. Maintained Contact Slider Type Switch (For Multi -Ganging with Dimmers) 1. Slide-uperated switch (to match dimmer), single pole, 3-way or 4-way operation as indicated, 120/277V, 20A rating. Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 2. Manufacturer a. Leviton Monet Series b. Lutron Nova T Sr: ries H. Slider Type Incandescent Dimmers 1. Slide operated AC incandescent solid state type dimmer with positive ON/OFF switching, integral surge protection, voltage stabilized output, RFI filtered and maximum lighting level adjustment. 120V/60Hz, unless noted otherwise, with lettering and/or nameplate as indicated. Dimmers shall have lowest profile available (wattage permitting). Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 2. Manufacturer a. Leviton Monet Series b. Lutron Nova T Series I. Illuminated ' Tuggle Switches 1. Single pole, 3-way or 4-way, as indicated, conforming to UL #20, NEMA #WDI-3.02 and F.S. #W-S-896E. 277V/20A rating, quiet type, maintained contact, urea or nylon body and a green hexagonal ground screw or ground pigtail, back and side wired. Red colored toggle to glow when switch is on. Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell HBL 1221 PL J. 'Tamper Resistant Receptacles COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262726 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 WIRING DEVICES 1. All 125-volt, 15- and 20-amp receptacles in a dwelling unit shall be listed tamper -resistant receptacles. Final approval of color by the Architect during the submittal phase. 2.02 COVERPLATE DESCRIPTION AND MANUFACTURER - COVERPLATES A. Flush Mounted Interior Receptacle/Switch Coverplates 1. Single or multi -gang to match device type. Medium size (4-7/8" min.), standard depth, smooth finish with nylon material. 2. Color to match device color. 3. Coverplates in mechanical/electrical equipment rooms and high abuse areas shall be stainless steel, non-magnetic. 4. Manufacturer a. Hubbell PJ Series (nylon) b. Hubbell 302 Series (stainless steel) B. Weatherproof Device Coverplates Provide weatherproof "in use" cast aluminum lockable covers. a. Hubbell WP Series b. Thomas & Betts Russell Stoll Series C. Multi -Outlet Raceway 1. Product Description a. Two-piece rectangular surface raceway of length as prescribed. Stainless steel type 304 housing complete with all bends, fittings, couplings, caps and mounting hardware. b. Single 15A/125V grounding outlets UL labeled and full length ground wire. C. Outlets 18" on centers starting no less than 9" from end. d. Maximum of six outlets per circuit. Where two or more circuits are utilized the outlets shall be on alternate circuits. 2. Manufacturers a. Wiremold Products b. Walker/Wiremold 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Time Switches 1. Electronic Astronomical Schedule Type a. 365 day scheduling, solid state, skip -a -day feature, daylight saving COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262726 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 WIRING DEVICES changeover, leap year adjusted with capacitor backup, DPDT- 120V/7.0A rated contacts, light sensor input. b. Acceptable Manufacturer 1) Turk DZS Series (channels as required) B. Photoelectric Control Switches 1. Product Description a. Raintight photoelectric self-contained control for switching. b. Die cast houz;4ig with adjustable sensor. 2. Manufacturers a. AMF/Paragon b. Tork 2100 Series C. Lighting Contactor I. Product Description a, Multi -pole contactor for switching branch circuit tungsten and ballast lighting and resistant heatitnb loads. b. Number of poles as indicated (paralleling multiple contactors is acceptable), poles rated for 20 amperes @ 600V continuous duty. C. Mechanically held contactor with coil clearing contacts, operating coil voltage to match circuit characteristics. d. Housed in panelboard (if indicated). D. Poke-thru Floor Devices (unless noted otherwise on drawings) 1. Product Description a. Device shall be one-piece, flush, fire -rated with all -brass fitting and flange. Device shall consist of one (1) duplex receptacle and two (2) Category 5 tele/data jacks. b. Device shall require 3" or 4" cored hole per manufacturer spec. C. Device shall meet UL 514A requirements for scrubwater test standards. 2_ Manufacturer a. Hubbell b. Walker/Wlrenlold C. Thomas & Betts/Steel City E. Single/Multiple Station Smoke Detectors with Integral Sounder: Detectors shall be 120V (with battery back-up) with built-in evacuation horn and power -on indicator. Where more than one is installed in a living unit, activation of one detector shall trigger all horns in that unit. Detector shall have integral alarm silencing feature. F. Single/Multiple Station Carbon Monoxide Detectors with Integral Sounder: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262726 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 WMNG DEVICES Detectors shall be 120V (with battery back-up) with built-in evacuation horn and power -on indicator. Where more than one is installed in a living unit, activation of one detector shall trigger all horns in that unit. Detector shall have integral alarm silencing feature. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All dimmer circuits shall have dedicated neutrals. B. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets when indicated. C. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. D. Coordinate the exact location of wiring devices with other trades and architectural features. Do not locate devices on two different architectural finishes such as half on wall tile and half on painted surface, unless noted otherwise. E. Provide plaster rings in areas requiring them due to construction. F. Where more than one device is indicated, arrange in gangs covered with one coverplate per manufacturer's instructions. G. Where dimmer(s) and switch(es) are shown adjacent to one another, switch(es) shall be a maintained contact switch matching dimmer style, so that a common, multi -gang faceplate can be used. H. Provide 6" long ground wire from grounding lug to all switches and receptacles to a screw type bonding device on the conduit or outlet box. END OF SECTION 262726 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262726 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262816 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General. 1.02 ''WORK INCLUDED A. The wurk under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install disconnect switches, up to 800 amps, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. C. This section includes fuses. D. This section includes individually mounted enclosed switches used for the following: 1. Service discoruiccting means. 2. Feeder and branch -circuit protection. 3. Motor and equipment disconnecting means. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switch and fuse accessory, and component indicated, include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA .70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use- B. Comply with NEMA AB 1, Nf.-W A K S ], and UL 98. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 262816 -1 MARCH 15, 2011 DISCONNECT SWITCHES C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Comply with NEMA FU 1. E. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer of fusible and non -fusible switches shall be Cutler -Hammer, General Electric, Siemens or Square D Company. B. Manufacturer of fuses shall be Bussman, Gould Shawmutt or Littelfuse. 2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. All disconnect switches shall be heavy duty type with lockable handles. B. Enclosed, non -fusible switch: NEMA KS 1. C. Enclosed, fusible switch, 800 A and smaller: NEMA KS 1 with clips to accommodate specified fuses and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Furnish and install all safety type disconnecting switches indicated on the drawings, specified or required by the National and/or State Electrical Code. Switches shall be externally operable. If the size is not shown on the drawings, the subcontractor shall size the disconnect switch in accordance with name plate data of the equipment they serve. E. Coordinate with other trades that may provide unit mounted disconnect switches prior to submission of bids. F. Safety type disconnecting switches shall be heavy duty, 600 volt industrial type with quick -make, quick -break mechanism and interlocking cover which normally cannot be opened when the switch is in the "ON" position. Switches shall be COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262816 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 DISCONNECT SWITCHES single throw. Fusible switches shall be equipped with fuse clips to receive Bussman fuses. Switches shall have provision for padlocking in the open and closed positions. The operating handle shall be visible in either the on or off position. C. All fused disconnect switches mounted above 6'-6" shall be hook stick operable. 2.03 INTERIOR A. Switch blades shall be operated by rotating shaft directly connected to the operating handle mechanism. Switch blades shall be clearly visible in the open position. All switches shall have clear shields over the incoming line lugs. Line shields shall be attached in such a way that switch blade covers or arc shields need not be removed for line installation. Line and load lugs shall be front removable and suitable for copper or aluminum, 60/75 degree wire through 200A sizes, 75 degrees C wire for 400-800A sizes. B. Current limiting type RKl dual element time delay fuses shall be furnished and installed. as necessary; rating shall be shown on drawing. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. All switches shall have NEMA type 1 general purpose enclosures unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. NEMA 3R covers shall be side hinged rather than top hinged. NEMA 1 and 3R switches through 200A sizes shall tangential knockouts for conduit line up against walls. NEMA 12 enclosures through 200A sizes shall be UL listed for conversion to NEMA 3R usage by opening a factory provided drain hole. All types of enclosures shall have metal nameplates affixed to the cover to show the switch type and rating and clearly indicate "ON" and "OFF" direction of handle movement. Provide hubs on all NEMA 4, 4X, or 3R type disconnects. B. Provide manufacturer's standard factory applied finish unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide phenolic engraved nameplate for disconnect switches. 2.05 CONTROL POLE A. Where required a direct action interlock or control pole shall be affixed to the switch base in such a manner as to operate positively and only with the opening and closing of the switch power pules. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 262816 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 2.06 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. B. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate disconnect switches to provide working clearance and full accessibility as required by the National Electrical Code. B. Mounting and Support 1. Mounting a. Enclosure shall be secured to structure by a minimum of four (4) fastening devices. A 1.5-inch minimum diameter round washer shall be used between head of screw or bolt and enclosure. b. Enclosure shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Support from the structure with fastening device specified. Mount with operating handle at 60" AFF, unless other height is indicated. C. Attach enclosure directly to masonry, concrete, or wood surfaces. d. Mounted enclosure on metal channel (strut), which is connected to structure with fastening device. e. Where enclosure is not indicated on a wall or structure, construct a metal channel (strut) free standing frame secured to floor, pad, or other appropriate building structure. C. Do not splice conductors in enclosure. Where required install junction box or wireway adjacent to enclosure and splice or tap conductors in box. Refer to number of conductors in a conduit limitation defined in the conductors and cables section of the Specifications and do not exceed. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262816 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. B. Touch up paint all scratched or marred surfaces with factory furnished touch up paint of the same color as the factory applied paint. END OF SECTION 262816 COLLEGE STATION FTRF STATION NO.6 262816 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 262818 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1- GENER.AI. 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical Gencral. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The wurk required ender this section of the Specifications consists of installation of enclosed circuit breakers up to 800 amps for use on systems 600 volts and below as indicated on the drawings. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers used for the following: 1. Service disconnecting means. 2. Feeder and branch -circuit protection. 3. Motor and equipment di.Reonnecting means. B. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish aiid install enclosed circuit breakers, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of circuit breaker accessory and component indicated, include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Electrical Cotiiponents, Dcvicc5, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, NEMA Standards Publication ABl-1975 and Federal Specifications W-C-375B classifications. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 262818 -1 MARCH 15, 2011 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of circuit breakers and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer of enclosed circuit breakers shall be Cutler -Hammer, General Electric, Siemens or Square D Company. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA 1 enclosures shall be fabricated from sheet steel with ANSI 49 gray baked enamel finish. Knockouts shall be provided in enclosures for circuit breakers through 225A frame sizes. Enclosures shall be provided with a means to padlock the circuit breaker in the OFF position. B. NEMA 3R enclosures shall be fabricated from galvanically treated steel with ANSI 49 gray baked enamel finish. Enclosures for circuit breaker through 225A frame sizes shall have provisions for interchangeable conduit hubs. Enclosures shall be provided with a means to padlock the plate -type cover closed. C. Provide manufacturer's factory applied finish unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide phenolic engraved nameplate for circuit breakers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262818 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate enclosed circuit breakers to provide working clearance and full accessibility as required by the National Electrical Code. B. Mounting and Support Mounting a. Enclosure shall be secured to structure by a minimum of four (4) fastening devices. A 1.5" minimum diameter round washer shall be used between head of screw or bolt and enclosure. b. Enclosures shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Support from the structure with fastening device specified. Mount with operating handle at 60" AFF, unless other height is indicated. C. Attach enclosure directly to masonry, concrete, or wood surfaces. d. Mounted enclosure on metal channel (strut), which is connected to structure with fastening device. e. Where enclosure is not indicated on a wall or structure, construct a metal channel (strut) free standing frame secured to floor, pad, or other appropriate building structure. C. Do not splice conductors in enclosure. Where required install junction box or wireway adjacent to enclosure and splice or tap conductors in box. Refer to number of conductors in a conduit limitation defined in the conductors and cables section of the Specifications and do not exceed. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment g►uunding connections for circuit breakers with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. B. Touch up paint all scratched or marred surfaces with factory furnished touch up paint of the same color as the factory applied paint. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262818 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS END OF SECTION 262818 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 262818 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 263213 - EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide complete factory assembled generator set equipment with digital electronic controls. B. Provide factory test, startup by a supplier authorized by the manufacturer, and on -site testing of the system. C. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant all equipment provided under this section, whether or not is manufactured by the generator set manufacturer, so that there is one source for warranty and product service. Technicians specifically trained and certified by the manufacturer to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the generator sets. D. Provide a standby power system rated (kW as indicated on drawings) for supply of power in the event of failure of normal supply, consisting of a liquid cooled engine, an AC alternator and system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system, including but not limited to the items as specified hereinafter. System shall comply with NFPA 110, 2002 Level 1 requirements, and the latest requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). E. Provide automatic operation from automatic transfer switch(es) described within this specification so that the system comes on line fully automatically, and after restoration of utility automatically retransfers load to normal power, shuts down the generator and returns to readiness for another operating cycle. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The generator set installation and on -site testing shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards, as applicable. The generator set shall include necessary features to meet the requirements of these standards. 1. CSA 282, 1989 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings 2. IEEE446 — Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications 3. NFPA70 — National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702. 4. NFPA110 — Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. Level 1prototype tests required by this standard shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit, component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM B. The generator set and supplied accessories shall meet the requirements of the following standards: 1. NEMA MG1-1998 part 32. Alternator shall comply with the requirements of this standard. Documents describing the alternator and performance that are submitted shall comply with this standard. 2. UL1236 —Battery Chargers 3. UL2200. The generator set shall be listed to UL2200 or submit to an independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed. C. The control system for the generator set shall comply with the following requirements. 1. CSA C22.2, No. 14 — M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 2. EN50082-2, Electromagnetic Compatibility — Generic Immunity Requirements, Part 2: Industrial. 3. EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. 4. FCC Part 15, Subpart B. 5. IEC8528 part 4. Control Systems for Generator Sets 6. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, and 801.5 for susceptibility, conducted, and radiated electromagnetic emissions. 7. UL508. The entire control system of the generator set shall be UL508 listed and labeled. UL1236 —Battery Chargers. D. The generator set manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Equipment specifications for this project are based on microprocessor -based generator sets manufactured by Cummins. Proposals must include a line by line compliance statement based on this specification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERATOR SET A. Ratings 1. The generator set shall operate at 1800 rpm and at a voltage of: 120/208 Volts AC, Three phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz. 2. The generator set shall be rated at 350kW, 437 kVA at 0.8 PF, standby rating, based on site conditions of: Altitude 1000ft. (305 meters), ambient temperatures up to 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) 3. The generator set rating shall be based on emergency/standby service. B. Performance COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM 1. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 1.0 percent for any constant load between no load and rated load for both parallel and non -parallel applications. Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 1.0 percent. 2. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5%. 3. The engine -generator set shall be capable of single step load pick up of 100% nameplate kW and power factor, less applicable derating factors, with the engine -generator set at operating temperature. 4. Motor starting capability shall be a minimum of 1749 kVA. The generator set shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of 90% of rated no load voltage with the specified kVA load at near zero power factor applied to the generator set. Maximum voltage dip on application of this load, considering both alternator performance and engine speed changes shall not exceed 250r6. 5. The alternator shall produce a clean AC voltage waveform, with not more than 5% total harmonic distortion at full linear load, when measured from line to neutral, and with not more than 3% in any single harmonic. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 50. C. Construction 1. The Cnginc-generator set shall be mounted on a heavy-duty steel base to maintain alignment between components. The base shall incorporate a battery tray with hold- down clamps within the rails 2. All switches, lamps, and meters in the control system shall be oil -tight and dust -tight, and the enclosure door shall be gasketed. There shall be no exposed points in the control (with the door open) that operate in excess of 50 volts. 1). Connections 1. The generator set load connections shall be composed of silver or tin plated copper bus bars, drilled to accept mechanical or compression terminations of the number and type as shown on the drawings. Sufficient lug space shall be provided for use with cables of the number and size as shown on the drawings. 2. Power connections to auxiliary devices shall be made at the devices, with required protection located at a wall -mounted common distribution panel. 3. Generator set control interfaces to other system components shall be made on a common, permanently labeled terminal block assembly. 2.02 ENGINE AND ENGINE EQUIPMENT A. The engine shall be natural gas fueled, radiator and fan cooled. Minimum displacement shall be 1150 cubic inches, with 6 cylinders. The horsepower rating of the engine at it's minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all connected accessories. Engine accessories and features shall include: COLLEGE STA ION FIRE STATION NO.6 263213 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM B. Complete engine fuel system, including all pressure regulators, strainers, and control valves. The fuel system shall be plumbed to the generator set skid for ease of site connections to the generator set. C. An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. The governing system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying engine operating temperature conditions. The control system shall actively control the fuel rate and excitation as appropriate to the state of the generator set. Fuel rate shall be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, and accelerating to rated speed. D. Skid -mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in 104 degrees F (40 degrees C) ambient as measured at the generator air inlet, based on 0.5 in H2O external static head. Radiator shall be sized based on a core temperature that is 20F higher than the rated operation temperature, or prototype tested to verify cooling performance of the engine/radiator/fan operation in a controlled environment. Radiator shall be provided with a duct adapter flange. The equipment manufacturer shall fill the cooling system with a 50/50- ethylene glycol/water mixture. Rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental contact. E. Electric starter(s) capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating. F. Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump. G. Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin -on canister elements and dipstick oil level indicator. H. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator. I. Flexible fuel lines. Engine mounted battery charging alternator, 40-ampere minimum, and solid-state voltage regulator. K. Coolant heater 1. Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, coolant heater(s) for each engine. Heater voltage shall be as shown on the project drawings. The coolant heater shall be UL499 listed and labeled. 2. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with silicone hose connections. Steel tubing shall be used for connections into the engine coolant system wherever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. The coolant heater installation shall be specifically designed to provide proper venting of the system. The coolant heaters shall be installed using quick disconnect couplers to isolate the heater for replacement of the heater element. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow the heater element to be replaced without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM 3. The coolant heater shall be provided with a 24VDC thermostat, installed at the engine thermostat housing. An AC power connection box shall be provided for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater system. 4. The coolant heater(s) shall be sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 10OF (40C) in a OF ambient, in compliance with NFPA110 requirements, or the temperature required for starting and load pickup requirements of this specification. L. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type or as recommended by the manufacturer, quantity as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. Isolators shall include seismic restraints if required by site location. M. Starting and Control Batteries shall be calcium/lead antimony type, 24 volt DC, sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer, complete with battery cables and connectors. N. Provide exhaust silencer(s) for each engine of size and type as recommended by the generator set manufacturer and approved by the engine manufacturer. Exhaust system shall be installed according to the engine manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards. O. Provide a fully regulated, constant voltage, current limited, multi -rate battery charger for each generator set. The chargers shall be designed for heavy-duty industrial service, primarily to quickly recharge and maintain batteries that start internal combustion engines. Charger shall be rated a minimum of 12 amps. 1. Charger shall provide 4 distinct charge states: "dead battery", "bulk charge", "absorption", and "float". Charge rate shall be temperature compensated to provide proper charging in ambient conditions from —20 to +55C. 2. Provider LED indication of general charger condition, including charging, fault, and equalize. Provide a 2 line LCD display to indicate charge rate, battery voltage, faults, and provide for charger set up. Charger shall provide relay contacts -for fault conditions ac required by NFPA110: + ' 3. The charger shall operate properly during fault conditions, including battery disconnection while charging, reversed battery polarity connections, and shorted battery. 4. The charger shall be compliant to the same RFI/EMI and voltage surge conditions as are specified for the generator set controller. 2.03 AC GENERATOR A. The AC generator shall be; synchronous, four pole, 2/3 pitch, revolving field, drip -proof construction, single prelubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG1 temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 105 degrees Centigrade. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM B. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated frequency and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated voltage. C. A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not more than 10 seconds. D. The subtransient reactance of the alternator shall not exceed 12 percent, based on the standby rating of the generator set. E. Provide an anti -condensation heater for the alternator for generator sets installed outdoors or in unheated environments. 2.04 GENERATOR SET CONTROL The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor -based control system that is designed to provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control system shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator set, and remote monitoring and control as described in this specification. The control shall be mounted on the generator set, or may be mounted in a free-standing panel next to the generator set if adequate space and accessibility is available. The control shall be vibration isolated and prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the system under the vibration conditions encountered. The generator set mounted control shall include the following features and functions: A. Control Switches 1. Mode Select Switch. The mode select switch shall initiate the following control modes. When in the RUN or MANUAL position the generator set shall start, and accelerate to rated speed and voltage as directed by the operator. A separate push-button to initiate starting is acceptable. In the OFF position the generator set shall immediately stop, bypassing all time delays. In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. 2. EMERGENCY STOP switch. Switch shall be Red "mushroom -head" push-button. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down, and be locked out from automatic restarting. 3. RESET switch. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition. 4. PANEL LAMP switch. Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched off 10 minutes after the switch is depressed, or after the switch is depressed a second time. B. Generator Set AC Output Metering. The generator set shall be provided with a metering set including the following features and functions: 1. Digital metering set, 1% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and current, frequency, output current, output KW, KW -hours, and power factor. Generator output COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM voltage shall be available in line -to -line and line. -to -neutral voltages, and shall display all three-phase voltages (line to neutral or line to line) simultaneously. 2. Analog voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, power factor meter, and kilowatt (KW) meter. Voltmeter and ammeter shall display all three phases. Meter scales shall be color coded in the following fashion: green shall indicate normal operating condition, amber shall indicate operation. in .ranges that .indicate potential failure, and. red shall indicate failure impending. Metering accuracy shall, be within 1 % at rated output. Roth analog and digital metering are required. 3. The control system shall monitor. the total load on the generator set, and. maintain data, logs of total operating hours at specific load levels ranging from 0 to 110% of rated load, in 10% increments. The control shall display hours of operation at less than 30% load and total hours of operation at more than 90% of rated load. 4. The control system shall log total number of operating hours, total kVvH, and total control on hours, as well as total values since reset. C. Generator Set. Alarm and Statics Display The generator set control shall i.nel ide LED alarm and status indication lamps. The lamps shall be high -intensity LFD type. The lamp condition shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. Functions indicated by the lamps shall include: • The control shall include five. configurable alarm -indicating lamps. The lamps shall be field adjustable for any status, warning, or shutdown function nionituied by the genset. They shall also be configurable for color, and control action (status, warning, or shutdown). • The control shall include green lamps to indicate that the generator set is running at rated frequency and voltage, and that a remote start signal has been received at the generator set. The running signal shall be based on actual sensed voltage and frequency on the output terminals of the generator set. • The control shall include a flashing red lamp to indicate that the control is not in automatic state, and red common shutdown lamp. • The control shall include an amber common warning indication lamp. 2. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the warning and shutdown conditions on the control panel. All conditions indicated below for warning shall be field - configurable for shutdown. Conditions required to be annunciated shall include: • low oil pressure (warning) • low oil pressure (shutdown) • oil pressure sender failure (warning) • low coolant temperature (warning) • high coolant temperature (warning) • high coolant temperature (shutdown) • high oil tcmpefuture (warning) • engine temperature sender failure (warning) • low coolant level (warning) • fail to crank (shutdown) • fail to start/overcrank (shutdown) • overspeed (shutdown) COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 7 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM • low DC voltage (warning) • high DC voltage (warning) • weak battery (warning) • low fuel-daytank (warning) • high AC voltage (shutdown) • low AC voltage (shutdown) • under frequency (shutdown) • over current (warning) • over current (shutdown) • short circuit (shutdown) • over load (warning) • emergency stop (shutdown) • (4) configurable conditions Provisions shall be made for indication of four customer -specified alarm or shutdown conditions. Labeling of the customer -specified alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type and quality as the above -specified conditions. The non -automatic indicating lamp shall be red, and shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a command to start from a remote location. D. Engine Status Monitoring. 1. The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the generator set control : • engine oil pressure (psi or kPA) • engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C) • engine oil temperature (degrees F or C) • engine speed (rpm) • number of hours of operation (hours) • number of start attempts • battery voltage (DC volts) 2. The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision to allow logging of the last 10 warning or shutdown indications on the generator set, as well as total time of operation at various loads, as a percent of the standby rating of the generator set. E. Engine Control Functions. 1. The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system, which allows for user selected crank time, rest time, and # of cycles. Initial settings shall be for 3 cranking periods of 15 seconds each, with 15-second rest period between cranking periods. 2. The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the engine to run in idle mode in the RUN position only. In this mode, the alternator excitation system shall be disabled. 3. The control system shall include an engine governor control, which functions to provide steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification. The governor COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 8 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM control shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and a ramping function to control engine speed and limit exhaust smoke while the unit is starting. 4. The control system shall include time delay start (adjustable 0-300 seconds) and time delay stop (adjustable 0-600 seconds) functions. 5. The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing, oil pressure, and engine temperature which is capable of discriminating between failed sender or wiring components, and an actual failure conditions. F. Alternator Control Functions: 1. The generator set shall include a 3-phase sensing full wave rectified automatic microprocessor -based voltage regulation system that is matched and prototype tested by the engine manufacturer with the governing system provided. It shall be immune from misoperation due to load -induced voltage waveform distortion and provide a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. The voltage regulation system shall be equipped with three-phase line to neutral RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include torque -matching characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below an adjustable frequency threshold. Torque matching characteristic shall be adjustable for roll -off frequency and rate, and be capable of being curve -matched to the engine torque curve with adjustments in the field. The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll -off. Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise -lower switches, with an alphanumeric LED readout to indicate setting level. Rotary potentiometers for system adjustments are not acceptable. 2. Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm (over current warning) when load current exceeds 110% of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more than 60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator (over current shutdown). The protective functions provided shall be in compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 article 445. 3. Controls shall be provided to individually monitor all three phases of the output current for short circuit conditions. The control/protection system shall monitor the current level and voltage. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator (short circuit shutdown). The protective functions provided shall be in compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 article 445. 4. Controls shall be provided to monitor the KW load on the generator set, and initiate an alarm condition (over load) when total load on the generator set exceeds the generator set rating for in excess of 5 seconds. Controls shall include a load shed control, to operate a set of dry contacts (for use in shedding customer load devices) when the generator set is overloaded. 5. An AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS voltage conditions shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the generator set when alternator output voltage exceeds 110% of the operator -set voltage level for more than 10 seconds, or with no intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall occur when the output voltage of the alternator is less than 85% for more than 10 seconds. 6. The generator set control shall include a 120VAC-control heater. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 1 263213 - 9 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM G. Other Control Functions 1. The generator set shall be provided with a network communication module to allow communication with the generator set control by remote devices. The control shall communicate all engine and alternator data, and allow starting and stopping of the generator set via the network in both test and emergency modes. 2. A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25VDC or more than 32 VDC. During engine cranking (starter engaged), the low voltage limit shall be disabled, and DC voltage shall be monitored as load is applied to the battery, to detect impending battery failure or deteriorated battery condition. H. Control Interfaces for Remote Monitoring: I. The control system shall provide four programmable output relays. These relay outputs shall be configurable for any alarm, shutdown, or status condition monitored by the control. The relays shall be configured to indicate: (1) generator set operating at rated voltage and frequency, (2) common warning, (3) common shutdown, (4) load shed command. 2. A fused 10 amp switched 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power shall be available from this circuit whenever the generator set is running. 3. A fused 10 amp 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power shall be available from this circuit at all times from the engine starting/control batteries. 4. The control shall be provided with a direct serial communication link for the LonWorks communication network interface as described elsewhere in this specification and shown on the drawings. 2.05 OTHER EQUIPMENT TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE GENERATOR SET A. Provide and install a 20-light LED type remote alarm annunciator with horn, located as shown on the drawings or in a location that can be conveniently monitored by facility personnel. The remote annunciator shall provide all the audible and visual alarms called for by NFPA Standard 110 for level 1 systems for the local generator control panel. Spare lamps shall be provided to allow future addition of other alarm and status functions to the annunciator. Provisions for labeling of the annunciator in a fashion consistent with the specified functions shall be provided. Alarm silence and lamp test switch(es) shall be provided. LED lamps shall be replaceable, and indicating lamp color shall be capable of changes needed for specific application requirements. Alarm horn shall be switchable for all annunciation points. Alarm horn (when switched on) shall sound for first fault, and all subsequent faults, regardless of whether first fault has been cleared, in compliance with NFPAI 10 3-5.6.2. The interconnecting wiring between the annunciator and other system components shall be monitored and failure of the interconnection between components shall be displayed on the annunciator panel. B. The annunciator shall include the following alarm labels, audible annunciation features, and lamp colors: Condition Lamp Color Audible Alarm COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 10 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM Normal Power (to Loads) Genset Supplying Load Genset Running Not in Auto High Battery Voltage Low Battery Voltage Charger AC Failure Fail to Slmrl Low Engine Temperature Pre -High Engine Temperature High Engine Temperature Pre -Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Pressure Overspeed Low Coolant Level Low Fuel Level Network OK (4) Spares Green No Amber No Green No Red Yes (Flashing) Red Yes Red Yes R r'd Yes Red Yes Amher Yes Amber Yes Red Yes Amber Yes Red Yes Red Yes Amber Yes Amber Yes Green Yes Configurable Configurable Low battery voltage lamp shall also be lighted for low cranking voltage or weak battery alarm. C. The generator set shall be provided with a mounted main line circuit breaker, sized to carry the rated output current of the generator set. The circuit breaker shall incorporate an electronic trip unit that operates to protect the alternator under all overcurrent conditions, or a thermal -magnetic trip with other overcurrent protection devices that positively protect the alternator under overcurrent conditions. The supplier shall submit time overcurrent characteristic curves and thermal damage curve for the alternator, demonstrating the effectiveness of the protection provided. D. Outdoor Weather -Protective Enclosure 1. The generator set shall be provided with an outdoor enclosure, with the entire package listed under UL2200. The package shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code for all wiring materials and component spacing. The total assembly of generator set, enclosure, and sub -base fuel tank (when used) shall be designed to be lifted into place using spreader bars. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 100F. The housing shall have hinged access doors as required to maintain easy access for all operating and service functions. All doors shall be lockable, and include retainers to hold the door open during service. Enclosure roof shall be cambered to prevent rainwater accumulation. Openings shall be screened to limit access of rodents into the enclosure. All electrical power and control interconnections shall be made within the perimeter of the enclosure. 2. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and fmish painted with the manufacturers standard color using a two step electrocoating paint process, or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process shall result in a coating that meets the following requirements: • Primer thickness, 0.5-2.0 mils. Top coat thickness, 0.8-1.2 mils. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 263213 - 11 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM • Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80% plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed 50%. • Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 4B-5B. • Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch -pounds. • Salt Spray, per ASTM B 117-90, 1000+ hours. • Humidity, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. • Water Soak, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. 3. Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. 4. Enclosure shall be aluminum. All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. 5. Exhaust silencer shall be installed inside the enclosure. The exhaust shall exit the enclosure through a rain collar and terminate with a rain cap. Exhaust connections to the generator set shall be through seamless flexible connections. 6. The enclosure shall include the following maintenance provisions: • Flexible coolant and lubricating oil drain lines, that extend to the exterior of the enclosure, with internal drain valves • External radiator fill provision. 7. Provide a mounted and wired electrical distribution panel to serve the generator set and enclosure. The provisions required include: • Four (4) Fluorescent light fixtures • Two (2) Three way Switches • Two (2) 20 amp GFI duplex receptacles • One (1) 100 amp MB, 120/240 AC, single phase, 60 Hz control panel housed in a NEMA-3r box with breakers. All conduit will be rigid with EMT connections 8. Paint All exterior surfaces will receive two coats American Coatings Polyurethane. Color to be Precision Tan • Inside surfaces will not be painted. 9. The generator set shall be provided with a sound -attenuated housing which allows the generator set to operate at full rated load in an ambient temperature of up to 100F. The enclosure shall reduce the sound level of the generator set while operating at full rated load to a maximum of 78 dBA at any location 7 meters from the generator set in a free field environment. 10. Wind Rating • 150 mph, 3sec 11. The enclosure shall be insulated with non-hydroscopic materials. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 12 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM E. Platform, Manufactured by Engine & Compressor (E & CA) to match enclosure. Reference drawing #HO106114D, dated 01/06/11. PART 3 - OPERATION 3.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Generator set shall start on receipt of a start signal from remote equipment. The start signal shall be via hardwired connection to the generator set control and a redundant signal over the required network connection. B. The generator set shall complete a time delay start period as programmed into the control. C. The generator set contrul sliall initiate the starting sequence for the generator set. The starting sequence shall include. the following functions: 1. The control system shall verify that the engine is rotating when the starter is signaled to operate. If the engine does not rotate after two attempts, the control system shall shut down and lock out the generator set, and indicate "fail to crank" shutdown. 2. The engine shall fire and accelerate as quickly as practical to start disconnect speed. If the engine does not start, it shall complete a cycle cranking process as described elsewhere in this specification. If the engine has not started by the completion of the cycle cranking sequence, it shall be shut down and locked out, and the control system shall indicate "fail to start". 3. The engine shall accelerate to rated speed and the alternator to rated voltage. Excitation shall be disabled until the engine has exceeded programmed idle speed, and regulated to prevent over voltage conditions and oscillation as the engine accelerates and the alternator builds to rated voltage. D. On reaching rated speed and voltage, the generator set shall operate as dictated by the control system in isochronous, synchronize, load share, load demand, or load govern state. E. When all start signals have been removed from the generator set, it shall complete a time delay stop sequence. The duration of the time delay stop period shall be adjustable by the operator. F. On completion of the time delay stop period, the generator set control shall switch off the excitation system and shall shut down. 1. Any start signal received after the time stop sequence has begun shall immediately terminate the stopping sequence and return the generator set to isochronous operation. PART 4 — OTHER REQUIREMENTS 4.01 SUBMITT.AI N A. Within 10 days alter award of contract, provide six sets of the following information for review: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 13 MARCII 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM • Manufacturer's product literature and performance data, sufficient to verify compliance to specification requirements. • A paragraph by paragraph specification compliance statement, describing the differences between the specified and the proposed equipment. • Manufacturer's certification of prototype testing. • Manufacturer's published warranty documents. • Shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with certified overall dimensions, as well as wiring interconnection details. • Interconnection wiring diagrams showing all external connections required; with field wiring terminals marked in a consistent point-to-point manner. • Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4.02 FACTORY TESTING A. The generator set supplier shall perform a complete operational test on the generator set prior to shipping from the factory. A certified test report shall be provided. Equipment supplied shall be fully tested at the factory for function and performance. B. Generator set factory tests on the equipment shall be performed at rated load and rated power factor. Generator sets that have not been factory tested at rated power factor will not be acceptable. Tests shall include: run at full load, maximum power, voltage regulation, transient and steady-state governing, single step load pickup, and function of safety shutdowns. 4.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed by the contractor in accordance with final submittals and contract documents. Installation shall comply with applicable state and local codes as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instructions included in the listing or labeling of UL listed products. B. Installation of equipment shall include furnishing and installing all interconnecting wiring between all major equipment provided for the on -site power system. The contractor shall also perform interconnecting wiring between equipment sections (when required), under the supervision of the equipment supplier. C. Equipment shall be installed on concrete housekeeping pads. Equipment shall be permanently fastened to the pad in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and seismic requirements of the site. D. Equipment shall be initially started and operated by representatives of the manufacturer. E. All equipment shall be physically inspected for damage. Scratches and other installation damage shall be repaired prior to final system testing. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt and construction debris prior to final testing of the system. 4.04 ON -SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 14 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM A. The complete installation shall be tested fbr compliance with the specification following completion of all site work. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer, with required fuel supplied by Contractor. The Engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests. B. Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on -site shall include a "cold start" test, a two hour full load test, and a one step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connections for full load test, if necessary. 4.05 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be limited to 5 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. 4.06 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the local service organization, and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years. 4.07 WARRANTY A. 5 Year Basic: The generator set and associated equipment shall be warranted for a period of not less than 5 years from the date of commissioning against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 5 — GENERAL 5.01 SCOPE A. Provide complete factory assembled power transfer equipment with field programmable digital electronic controls designed for fully automatic operation and including: surge voltage isolation, voltage sensors on all phases of both sources, positive mechanical and electrical interlocking, and mechanically held contacts for both sources. B. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant transfer switches to provide a single source of responsibility for all the products provided. Technicians specifically trained to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the transfer switches. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 263213 - 15 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM 5.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The automatic transfer switch installation and application shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. CSA 282, Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings 2. NFPA70 — National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702. 3. NFPA99 — Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities 4. NFPA110 — Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The transfer switch shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. 5. IEEE446 — Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 6. NEMA ICS 10-1993 — AC Automatic Transfer Switches. 7. IBC2006 — The transfer switch(es) shall be prototype -tested and 3`d party certified to comply with the requirements of the IBC group III or IV, category D/F. The equipment shall be shipped with installation instructions necessary to attain installation compliance. B. The transfer switch assembly shall comply with the following standards: 1. CSA C22.2, No. 14 — M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 2. EN55011, Class B Radiated Emissions 3. EN55011, Class B Conducted Emissions 4. IEC 1000-4-5 (EN 61000-4-5); AC Surge Immunity. 5. IEC 1000-4-4 (EN 61000-4-4) Fast Transients Immunity 6. IEC 1000-4-2 (EN 61000-4-2) Electrostatic Discharge Immunity 7. IEC 1000-4-3 (EN 61000-4-3) Radiated Field Immunity 8. IEC 1000-4-6 Conducted Field Immunity 9. IEC 1000-4-11 Voltage Dip Immunity. 10. IEEE 62.41, AC Voltage Surge Immunity. 11. IEEE 62.45, AC Voltage Surge. 12. UL1008 — Transfer Switches. Transfer switches and enclosures shall be UL1008 listed. C. The transfer switch manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001. 5.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Only approved bidders shall supply equipment provided under this contract. Equipment specifications for this project are based on microprocessor -based transfer switches manufactured by Cummins Power Generation. Equipment by other suppliers that meets the requirement of this specification are acceptable if approved not less than 2 weeks before scheduled bid date. Proposals must include a line by line compliance statement based on this specification. PART 6 — PRODUCTS 6.01 POWER TRANSFER SWITCH COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 16 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM A. Ratings 1. Refer to the project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer switch equipment, withstand and closing ratings, number of poles, voltage and ampere ratings, enclosure type, and accessories. 2. Main contacts shall be rated for 600 Volts AC minimum. 3. Transfer switches shall be rated to carry 100 percent of rated current continuously in the enclosure supplied, in ambient temperatures of -40 to +60 degrees C, relative humidity up to 95% (non -condensing), and altitudes up to 10,000 feet (3000M). 4. Transfer switch equipment shall have withstand and closing ratings (WCR) in RMS symmetrical amperes greater than the available fault currents shown on the drawings and at the specified voltage. The transfer switch and its upstream protection shall be coordinated. The transfer switch shall be third party listed and labeled for use with the specific protective device(s) installed in the applicatimi. B. Construction 1. Transfer switches shall be double -throw, electrically and mechanically interlocked, and mechanically held in the source 1 and source 2 positions. The transfer switch shall be specifically designed to transfer to the best available source if it inadvertently stops in a neutral position. 2. Main switch contacts shall be high-pressure silver alloy. Contact assemblies shall have arc chutes for positive arc extinguishing. Arc chutes shall have insulating covers to prevrut oiler -phase flashover. 3. Transfer switch internal wiring shall be composed of pre -manufactured harnesses that are permanently marked for source and destination. Harnesses shall be connected to the control system by means of locking disconnect plug(s), to allow the control system to be easily disconnected and serviced without disconnecting power from the transfer switch mechanism. 4. Power transfer switch shall be provided with flame retardant transparent covers to allow viewing of switch contact operation but prevent direct contact with components that could be operating at line voltage levels. 5. Transfer switches designated on the drawings as 4-pole shall be provided with a switched neutral pole. The neutral pole shall be of the same construction and have the same ratings as the phase poles. All poles shall be switched simultaneously using a common crossbar. Substitute equipment using overlapping neutral contacts is not acceptable. 6. Transfer switches that are designated on the drawings as 3-pole shall be provided with a neutral bus and lugs. The neutral bus shall be sized to carry 100% of the current designated on the switch rating. C. ( otrine tions 1. Field control connections shall be made on a common terminal block that is clearly and permanently labeled. 2. Transfer switch shall be provided with AL/CU mechanical lugs sized to accept the full output rating of the switch. Lugs shall be suitable for the number and size of conductors shown on the drawings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 263213 - 17 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM 6.02 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL A. Operator Panel. Each transfer switch shall be provided with a control panel to allow the operator to view the status and control operation of the transfer switch. The operator panel shall be a sealed membrane panel that is permanently labeled for switch and control functions. The operator panel shall be provided with the following features and capabilities. High intensity LED lamps to indicate the source that the load is connected to (source 1 or source 2); and which source(s) are available. Source available LED indicators shall operate from the control microprocessor to indicate the true condition of the sources as sensed by the control. 2. High intensity LED lamps to indicate that the transfer switch is "not in auto" (due to control being disabled or due to bypass switch (when used) enabled or in operation) and "Test/Exercise Active" to indicate that the control system is testing or exercising the generator set. 3. "OVERRIDE" pushbutton to cause the transfer switch to bypass any active time delays for start, transfer, and retransfer and immediately proceed with its next logical operation. 4. "TEST" pushbutton to initiate a preprogrammed test sequence for the generator set and transfer switch. The transfer switch shall be programmable for test with load or test without load. 5. "RESET/LAMP TEST" pushbutton that will clear any faults present in the control, or simultaneously test all lamps on the panel by lighting them. 6. The control system shall continuously log information on the number of hours each source has been connected to the load, the number of times transferred, and the total number of times each source has failed. This information shall be available via a PC - based service tool and an operator display panel. 7. Analog AC meter display panel, to display 3-phase AC Amps, 3-phase AC Volts, Hz, KW load level, and load power factor. The display shall be color -coded, with green scale indicating normal or acceptable operating level, yellow indicating conditions nearing a fault, and red indicating operation in excess of rated conditions for the transfer switch. 8. Vacuum fluorescent alphanumeric display panel with push-button navigation switches. The display shall be clearly visible in both bright (sunlight) and no light conditions. It shall be visible over an angle of at least 120 degrees. The Alphanumeric display panel shall be capable of providing the following functions and capabilities: a) Display source condition information, including AC voltage for each phase of normal and emergency source, frequency of each source. Voltage for all three phases shall be displayed on a single screen for easy viewing of voltage balance. Line to neutral voltages shall be displayed for 4-wire systems. b) Display source status, to indicate source is connected or not connected. c) Display load data, including 3-phase AC voltage, 3-phase AC current, frequency, KW, KVA, and power factor. Voltage and current data for all phases shall be displayed on a single screen. d) The display panel shall allow the operator to view and make the following adjustments in the control system, after entering an access code: i. Set nominal voltage and frequency for the transfer switch. ii. Adjust voltage and frequency sensor operation set points. iii. Set up time clock functions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 18 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM iv. Setup load sequence functions. v. Enablc or disable conif ul functions in the transfer switch, including program transition. vi. Set up exercise and load test operation conditions, as well as normal system time delays for transfer time, time delay start, stop, transfer, and retransfer. e) Display Real time Clock data, including date, and time in hours, minutes, and seconds. The real time clock shall incorporate provisions for automatic daylight savings time and leap year adjustments. The control shall also log total operating hours for the control system. f) Display service history for the transfer switch. Display source connected hours, to indicate the total number of hours connected to each source. Display number of times transferred, and total number of times each source has failed. g) Display fault history on the transfer switch, including condition, and date and time of fault. Faults to include controller checksum error, low controller DC voltage, ATS fail to close on transfer, ATS fail to close on retransfer, battery charger malfunction, network battery voltage low, network communications error. B. internal Controls 1. The transfer switch control system shall be configurable in the field for any operating voltage level up to 600VAC. Provide RMS voltage sensing and metering that is accurate to within plus or minus 1 % of nominal voltage level. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to within plus or minus 0.2%. Voltage sensing shall be monitored based on the normal voltage at the site. Systems that utilize voltage monitoring based on standard voltage conditions that are not field configurable are not acceptable. 2. Transfer switch voltage sensors shall be close differential type, providing source availability information to the control system based on the following functions: a) Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) for under voltage conditions (adjustable for pickup in a range of 85 to 98% of the normal voltage level and dropout in a range of 75 to 98% of normal voltage level). b) Monitoring all phases of the emergency service (source 2) for under voltage conditions (adjustable for pickup in a range of 85 to 98% of the normal voltage level and dropout in a range of 75 to 98% of pickup voltage level). c) Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency service (source 2) for loss of a single phase. d) Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency service (source 2) for over voltage conditions (adjustable for dropout over a range of 105 to 135% of normal voltage, and pickup at 95-99% of dropout voltage level). e) Monitoring all phases of the normal service (source 1) and emergency service (source 2) for over or under frequency conditions. 3. All transfer switch sensing shall be configurable from a Windows 2000 or later PC -based service tool, to allow setting of levels, and enabling or disabling of features and functions. Selected functions including voltage sensing levels and time delays shall be configurable using the operator panel. Designs utilizing DIP switches or other electromechanical devices are not acceptable. The transfer control shall incorporate a series of diagnostic LED lamps. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 263213 - 19 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM 4. The transfer switch shall be configurable to control the operation time from source to source (program transition operation). The control system shall be capable of enabling or disabling this feature via software that is password protected, and adjusting the time period to a specific value. A phase band monitor or similar device is not an acceptable alternate for this feature. Default operating time shall be 0.5 seconds. 5. The transfer switch shall incorporate adjustable time delays for generator set start (adjustable in a range from 0-15 seconds); transfer (adjustable in a range from 0-120 seconds); retransfer (adjustable in a range from 0-30 minutes); and generator stop (cooldown) (adjustable in a range of 0-30 minutes). 6. The transfer switch shall be configurable to accept a relay contact signal and a network signal from an external device for load shedding purposes. On receipt of this signal, the transfer switch shall switch to a neutral position when connected to source 2. If source 1 is available when the load -shed signal is received, the transfer switch shall connect to source 1. 7. The transfer switch shall be configurable to accept a relay contact signal and a network signal from an external device to prevent transfer to the generator service. 8. The transfer switch shall provide a relay contact signal prior to transfer or retransfer. The time period before and after transfer shall be adjustable in a range of 0 to 50 seconds. 9. The control system shall be designed and prototype tested for operation in ambient temperatures from -40C to +70C. It shall be designed and tested to comply with the requirements of the noted voltage and RFI/EMI standards. 10. The control shall have optically isolated logic inputs, high isolation transformers for AC inputs, and relays on all outputs, to provide optimum protection from line voltage surges, RFI and EMI. 11. The transfer switch network monitoring equipment, when supplied, shall be provided with a battery based auxiliary power supply to allow monitoring of the transfer switch when both AC power sources are non -operational. The battery power supply shall be monitored for proper condition, and the transfer switch shall include an alarm condition to indicate low battery condition. C. Control Interface 1. The transfer switch will provide an isolated relay contact for starting of a generator set. The relay shall be normally held open, and close to start the generator set. Output contacts shall be form C, for compatibility with any generator set. 2. Provide one set Form C auxiliary contacts on both sides, operated by transfer switch position, rated 10 amps 250 VAC. 3. The transfer switch shall provide relay contacts to indicate the following conditions: source 1 available, load connected to source 1, source 2 available, source 2 connected to load. 4. The transfer switch shall be provided with a network communication card, and configured to allow LonMark compliant communication with the transfer switch and other network system components. The network shall provide a redundant start signal to the generator set(s) in the system. 6.03 ENCLOSURE COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 20 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM A. Enclosures shall be UL listed. The enclosure shall provide wire bend space in compliance to the latest version of NFPA70. The cabinet door shall include permanently mounted key type latches. B. Transfer switch equipment shall be provided in an NEMA 1 enclosure. C. Enclosures shall be the NEMA type specified. The cabinet shall provide code -required wire bend space at point of entry as shown on the drawings. Manual operating handles and all control switches (other than key -operated switches) shall be accessible to authorized personnel only by opening the key -locking cabinet door. Transfer switches with manual operating handles and/or non key -operated control switches located on outside of cabinet do not meet this specification and arc not acceptable. PART 7 — OPERATION 7.01 OPEN TRANSITION SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Transfer switch normally connects an energized utility power source (source 1) to loads and a generator set (source 2) to the loads when normal source fails. The normal position of the transfer switch is source 1 (connected to the utility), and no start signal is supplied to the genset. B. Generator Set Exercise (Test) With Load Mode. The control system shall be configurable to test the generator set under load. In this mode, the transfer switch shall control the generator set in the following sequence: 1. Transfer switch shall initiate the exercise sequence at a time indicated in the exercise timer program, or when manually initiated by the operator. 2. When the control systems senses the generator set at rated voltage and frequency, it shall operate to connect the loads to the generator set by opening the normal source contacts, and closing the alternate source contacts a predetermined time period later. The timing sequence for the contact operation shall be programmable in the controller. 3. The generator set shall operate connected to the load for the duration of the exercise period. If the generator set fails during this period, the transfer switch shall automatically reconnect the generator set to the normal service. 4. On completion of the exercise period, the transfer switch shall operate to connect the loads to the normal source by opening the alternate source contacts, and closing the normal source contacts a predetermined time period later. The timing sequence for the contact operation shall be programmable in the controller. 5. The transfer switch shall operate the generator set unloaded for a cooldown period, and then remove the start signal from the generator set. If the normal power fails at any time when the generator set is running, the transfer switch shall immediately connect the system loads to the generator set. C. Generator Set Exercise (Test) Without Load Mode. The control system shall be configurable to test the generator set without transfer switch load connected. In this mode, the transfer switch shall control the generator set in the following sequence: 1. Transfer switch shall initiate the exercise sequence at a time indicated in the exercise timer program, or when manually initiated by the operator. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 21 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM 2. When the control systems senses the generator set at rated voltage and frequency, it shall operate the generator set unloaded for the duration of the exercise period. 3. At the completion of the exercise period, the transfer switch shall remove the start signal from the generator set. If the normal power fails at any time when the generator set is running, the transfer switch shall immediately connect the system loads to the generator set. PART 8 — OTHER REQUIREMENTS 8.01 FACTORY TESTING. A. The transfer switch manufacturer shall perform a complete operational test on the transfer switch prior to shipping from the factory. A certified test report shall be available on request. Test process shall include calibration of voltage sensors. 8.02 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The manufacturer of the transfer switch shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. B. The transfer switch shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in both generator set and transfer switch service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the local service organization, and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each transfer switch provided for at least 20 years. D. The manufacturer shall supply to the facility owner a complete set of service and maintenance software for use in properly supporting the product. The software shall be provided at a training class attended by the user, to qualify the user in proper use of the software. The software shall have the following features and capabilities: 1. The software shall be 32 bit and shall be Windows 2000 or XP compatible. 2. The software shall use the Windows "Explorer" format, for ease of use and commonality with other software in use at the facility. 3. The software shall allow adjustment of all functions described herein via the tool; adjustment of operating levels of all protective functions; and programming of all optional functions in the controller. Adjustments shall be possible over modem from a facility that is remote from the generator set. 4. The software shall include the ability to store and display data for any function monitored by the generator set control. This data shall be available in common file formats, and on graphical "strip chart" displays. 5. The software shall automatically record all control operations and adjustments performed by any operator or software user, for tracking of changes to the control. 6. The software shall display all warning, shutdown, and status changes programmed into transfer switch controller. For each event, the control shall provide information on the nature of the event, when it last occurred, and how many times it has occurred. 7. The software shall include detailed operation and service information on the specific COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 22 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM generator set supplied, so that no other documentation (other than schematic and wiring diagram drawings) is necessary for service of the product. 8. The software shall have been developed under strict quality control guidelines, and comply with the requirements of IS09001 and Mil Standard 498 for software development. E. After generator set installation, the generator set supplier shall conduct a complete operation, basic maintenance, and emergency service seminar for up to 10 persons employed by the facility owner. The seminar shall include instruction on operation of the transfer equipment, normal testing and exercise, adjustments to the control system, use of the PC based service and maintenance tools provided under this contract, and emergency operation procedures. The class duration shall be at least 8 hours in length, and include practical operation with the installed equipment. END OF SECTION 263213 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 263213 - 23 MARCH 15, 2011 EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM SECTION 26 41 13- LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of the design, labor, materials and items of service required for the completion of a functional and unobtrusive lightning protection system as approved by the Engineer, and in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and any applicable Contract Drawings. B. If any departure from the Contract Drawings or Submittal Drawings covered below are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable to the Engineer for approval. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Fngineer. C. The following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of this specification: 1) Lightning Protection Institute Installation Code LPI'175; 2) UL Standard 96A; 3) ANSI C2-81; 4) NFPA 780. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements of the Lightning Protection Institute and NFPA Standards for Lightning Protection Systems. The LPI System Certification shall be furnished and submitted. B. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be UL listed by an approved and fully certified manufacturer in good standing of the Lightning Protection Institute. All material specified for this work is manufactured by Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc., East Coast Lightning, Erico or equal. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Complete shop drawings shall include details and drawings showing the type, size and locations of all air terminals, bonding plates, down conductors, conductor fasteners, masonry anchors and ground rods shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to start of work. B. Samples and pertinent catalog data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval upon request. C. Drawings must bear the stamp of the certified master installer designer. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 264113 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 LIGHTNING D. Copy of certifications of designer must be submitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD A. All equipment used in this installation shall be UL inspected, approved and properly labeled. B. All equipment shall be new, the product of a single manufacturer as outlined above, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and Code requirements. C. All materials shall conform to UL-96A Class I requirements. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. All materials shall be the minimum size and weight in accordance with LPI and NFPA requirements. B. All vertical conductors shall be copper, and below roof -mounted horizontal conductors shall be copper or aluminum (conductors must be galvanically compatible with adjoining surfaces). C. Air terminals shall be copper or aluminum (selection to be galvanically compatible with adjoining surfaces), and shall project 10" minimum above the object to be protected. Locate and space according to LPI and NFPA requirements. Length and diameter of terminals shall be dependent upon material used and installation class. D. Air terminal bases shall have bolt pressure cable connections and shall be securely mounted with stainless steel screws or bolts. Bases on built-up tar and gravel roofs shall be secured properly and shall have a minimum surface contact area of 18.5 sq. inches. Crimp type connectors at bases are not acceptable. E. Ground rods shall be a minimum of 3/4" in diameter and 10'-0" long. Exothermic connections shall be used for below grade installations of rods and cables. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 264113 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 LIGHTNING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer who is a Certified Master Installer of the LPI manufacturer as listed above or his authorized LPI Certified Master Installer representative. B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner in the most inconspicuous manner possible. C. Ground rods shall be installed 31-u" from building foundation. Resistance to ground at each ground rod shall not exceed 5 ohms. D. The number of down conductors, size, type and location of grounds and building connections shall be as required by the standards of this specification. A complete cable system with related air terminals, splices, and bonds, etc., shall be used. Cables shall be concealed in the attic space. Down conductors shall be installed in 1-114" PVC conduit concealed in or behind building walls or columns. Down conductors shall be connected to ground rods not less than 18" below the bottom of the floor slab. E. Copper equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces except by means of an LPI approved bimetal transition fitting. Lead coating is not to be accepted as a bimetal transition. 1. Metals acceptable for use with copper: a. Nickel, brass, tin, lead, stainless steel, and monel. 2. Metals acceptable for use with aluminum: a. Magnesium, zinc, galvanized steel, stainless steel, lead, and wrought iron. F. Bending radius of lightning protection conductors shall not be less than 8", nor shall any bend form an angle less than 90 degrees. G. Mctal equipment, piping or other objects within 6' of a lightning conductor shall be connected to the lightning protection system. H. Underground and intermediate ground loop conductors shall be copper. 3.02 COORDINATION A. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be bonded to lightning protection grid. B. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to interconnect COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 264113 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 LIGHTNING with other building ground systems, including electrical, water and telephone systems and also to ensure that proper arresters have been installed on the power service. C. Lightning protection installer shall obtain approval from the Architect and the roofing contractor regarding method of fastening conductors and air terminals to the roof, parapet and appurtenances prior to installation. 3.03 COMPLETION A. The lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver the LPI System Certification to the project manager for delivery to the Owner upon completion of the installation, in addition to the UL master label certification. B. The Contractor shall also submit copies of as -built shop drawings along with the completed LPI Certified System Application. END OF SECTION 265100 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 264113 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 LIGHTNING SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) PART1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a hybrid high-energy power conditioning filter incorporating surge protective devices and high -frequency electrical line noise filtering. The specified unit shall provide effective high-energy surge protection, surge current diversion, high - frequency attenuation, and line control in ASNI/IEEE C62.41-1991 environments connected on the load side of the facility's meter or main overcurrent device. The unit shall be connected in parallel with the facility's wiring system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The requirements of the following standards shall become a part of this Specification by reference: 1. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and C62.45-1995) 2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 3. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70 (NEC), 75 and 78) 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL 1449 3rd Edition and 1293) The unit shall be UL 1449 Listed and CSA Approved as a Surge Protective Device, B. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Current Technology C. Testing: The unit shall be thoroughly factory -tested before shipment. Testing of each unit shall include but shall not be limited to quality assurance checks, MCOV and clamping voltage verification tests. D. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a full 5-year warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 264313 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES E. Submittal Documentation: Documentation of unit's UL 1449 3rd Edition rating shall be included as required product data submittal information. Manufacturer shall make available upon request certified documentation of applicable Location Category Testing in full compliance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1995 Guidelines. The manufacturer shall furnish an equipment manual with installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for the specified unit. Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer which show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL MATERIALS REQUIREMENT A. The unit shall provide all modes of protection: line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. B. High Frequency Tracking Filter: The unit shall include a UL1283 high -frequency extended range tracking filter. The filter shall reduce fast rise -time, high - frequency, error producing transients and electrical line noise to harmless levels, thus eliminating disturbances which may lead to system upset. C. Unit Status Indicators: The unit shall include solid-state, long -life, externally mounted LED visual status indicators that indicate the status of MOV fusing. D. Transient Surge Current Rating: The following table will indicate appropriate model numbers for the specified surge current rating (see Drawings for rating information): SURGE CURRENT RATING PER MODE MANUFACTURER/ MODEL NO. 200 KA Current Technology - TG200 80 KA Current Technology - TG80 60 KA Current Technology - TG60 E. Electronic Grade Panel: If indicated on the Drawings, provide a panelboard with integral surge protection (80 KA surge current per mode) and high -frequency filtering per requirements listed in this specification. Provide number of breakers, MLO or MCB, voltage/phases as indicated on the Drawings. Current Technology EGP/EGPE2 Series COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 264313 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES F. G Minimum SPD fault current ratings shall be as listed in the table below. See Drawings for further information (where applicable). PANELBOARD RATING (Amps) SPD AIC RATING Minimum Amps) 100A OR LESS 5,000 125A - 400A 10,000 600A - 25,000 Transient Countei . Front cover mounted transient counter (LCD) shall totalize surges for all modes. Nominal discharge current rating shall be 20 KA. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring connection , to distribution system as indicated on the Drawings. Wiring length should be kept to an absolute minimum (3' or less) and be as straight as possible. B. Wire sizes to SPD unit should be as indicated on the Drawings, or a minimum of 4#6, 1 #6 G - I" conduit. C. SPD should be mounted on a 3/4" plywood backboard painted to match wall (where adjacent to panelboard). Where shown protecting main switchboard, device shall be mounted to C.T. compartment of switchboard. END OF SECTION 264313 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 264313 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies the lighting system requirements. B. All fixtures shall be current source, provided with lamps ready to use. 1.112 REI -ATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Refer to another division for the ceiling systems. B. Lighting system shall he coordinated with the ceilings. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS/VALUE ENGINEERING A. Substitution/value engineering requests shall be accompanied by complete manufacturers data with model numbers, cut sheets with options indicated, and a full photometric report. For exterior lighting, a computer generated point by point calculation shall be provided. B. All substitution requests shall be submitted in completion to Engineer at least 10 days prior to bid date. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BALLASTS A. All fluorescent land; ballasts shall be low -loss, high power factor Class "P," with "A" sound rating and shall bear UL and CBM certifications. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. B. Electromagnetic ballasts shall be General Electric "Maxi -Miser 1." Advance "Mark III," Magna-Tek or Universal "SLH" unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Electronic, solid state ballasts shall be by Universal, Magna-Tek or Valmont. C. All Hill lighting fixtures shall have a high power factor, regulated output ballast provided by the fixture manufacturer, pre -wired with a glass tube fuse holder and fiise on each primary hot lead. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 265100 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 LIGHTING 2.02 LAMPS A. Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type, 3,500 degrees K, CRI 75, of size and wattage as scheduled on the Drawings, unless noted otherwise on Light Fixture Schedule. They shall be General Electric or equal as manufactured by Sylvania or Philips unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Lamps shall have a rated life of 20,000 hours minimum at three (3) hours per start. B. Incandescent lamps shall be of type, size and voltage as scheduled on the Drawings. Lamps shall be of the extended service type with a rated life of 2,500 hours. Reflector lamps (R and PAR) shall have a rated life of 2,000 hours for the standard type and 4,000 hours for the "Quartz" or "Krypton" types. Quartz lamps shall be clear with a rated life of 2,000 hours. 2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Letter designations beside outlet symbols on Drawings correspond to letter designations in Lighting Fixture Schedule. B. Recessed incandescent fixtures, where used in an insulated ceiling, shall be equipped with thermal protection and shall bear the UL label indicating the suitability for such use. C. Lens material for recessed fluorescent fixtures shall be 100% virgin acrylic, 0.125" thick in a square prism pattern similar to KSH-K-12 or as scheduled in Lighting Fixture Schedule. D. Site lighting poles shall meet or exceed the local wind loading requirements of authority having jurisdiction. E. Concrete pole bases shall be required for site lighting poles. F. Recessed lighting fixtures installed in the building thermal envelope (e.g. attic) shall be IC rated and labeled with enclosures that are sealed and gasketed to limit air leakage between conditioned and non -conditioned spaces. G. All linear fluorescent lighting fixtures (with double -ended lamps) shall have a factory -installed, concealed disconnecting means for each ballast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide lighting fixtures at all locations indicated by distinctive symbols or notes on the Drawings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 265100 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 LIGHTING B. Lighting fixtures shall be secured to ceiling grid with clips or screws and two #12 steel wires mounted to opposite corners of light fixture secured to structure. C. Locations of lighting fixtures on the electrical drawings are approximate. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plan for actual locations of fixtures and mounting heights. D. Lighting fixtures installed in plaster and stucco ceiling shall have plaster frame and shall be of the flanged type. E. Fixtures recessed in concealed -spline tile and in gypsum board ceilings shall be flanged. F. Surface or recessed fixtures in or on plastered ceilings shall be supported from pieces of support channel spanning across the main supporting channels and shall not depend utt the inetal lath for support. G. Each recessed lighting fixture shall have a trim to match the type of ceiling (exposed grid, metal panel, etc.) iri which it is being installed, except where noted utherwise on the plans. H. Each lightatg fixture recessed in a concrete wall shall have a junction box or wiring compartment provided inside the fixture housing. Provide conduit access into the fixture concealed. END ON SECTION 265100 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 2651UU - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 LIGHTING City of College Station Premise Cabling Standards IT Department/Communications Division 8/13/2010 Part I TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM DESIGN RELATED DOCUMENTS The design of Telecommunication Cabling Systems for City of College Station facilities is guided by federal, state, and local codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances, and in particular the following standards: ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2006 -- Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements ANSI/TI4/EIA-568-B.2 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 -- Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B -- Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) -- The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings ANSI-J-STD-607(A) -- Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications In addition to these national standards, this document provides City IT standards, and direction that is to be considered in order to produce the most cost effective and reliable delivery of technology services to the City's citizens and employees. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The telecommunications cabling system consists generally of: • Entrance Facility with Telecommunications Services to serve the facility. Typically includes an underground fiber optic connection to the City's Phone and Computer networks. Typically located in the main Telecommunications Room (TR) on the first floor. May also be equipped with a Telco and/or CATV service connection and other services. August 2010 NOTE: COSTS TO EXTEND FIBER OPTIC SERVICE TO EACH NEW CITY FACILITY FROM THE NEAREST CONNECTION POINT TO EXISTING FIBER INFRASTRUCTURE, MUST BE INCORPORATED INTO THE BUDGET AND DESIGN OF THAT PROJECT. NO OTHER FUND OR MECHANISM IS PROVIDED FOR THIS FUNCTION! • Telecommunications outlets located in Work Areas supporting voice, data, and/or video services. • Horizoiilal cabling consisting of Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) copper, fiber, and/or CATV cabling installed in conduit, wire tray, and/or free space cabling pathways through plenum and/or non -plenum air spaces between the Work Area Telecommunications Outlets and Telecommunications Rooms (TRs) • Termination of these cables onto approved patch panels mounted in free standing racks in the Telecommunications Ro an. • Backbone cabling consisting of UTP copper, fiber, and/or CATV cabling between other TRs within the facility when applicable. • Proper grounding and bonding of all associated cabling and equipment. • Cable support hangers or cable trays. The city's preference is not to use cable trays, except in TRs. i Documentation and labeling of system and components. RESIT 1NSIBIi.TTIES The following general guidelines apply to the division of responsibilities regarding cabling installation in new or renovated facilities. City IT Department • Provide design support during the engineering and plan development phase • Perform cabling contractor oversight • Lay out the configuration of the communications equipment in the Telecommunications Room (working with the contractor at the appropriate time in the construction phase) Install purchased or relocated City telephone, network, or related equipment in equipment racks in the Telecommunications Room (s). [Note: In many instances, specialized equipment such as audio visual or access control related equipment will include vendor installation of equipment in racks. In this August 2010 instance, IT Department personnel will coordinate with the vendor for equipment placement and connection] • Purchase ((with project funds allocated for communications equipment) and install necessary equipment racks and cable tray, prior to the contractor installing the cabling and modular patch panels. • Install cabling from modular patch panels to equipment in equipment racks in the Telecommunications Room. Contractor • Supply and install all internal building cabling, jacks, faceplates, patch panels, cable suspension devices, labeling, testing equipment, fire -stopping, and any and all materials required to produce a turn -key, compliant installation • Remove old cabling as per contract specifications • Coordinate with the City IT Department the purchase of all electronic equipment. • Install connection path (e.g. conduit, cable trays, etc.) between Telecommunications Rooms per specifications contained in this document and as per contract specifications. ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS Telecommunications Rooms (TRs) The main TR shall be designed to incorporate a variety of systems, including voice, data, CATV, security, and other building systems. This room typically houses the cable Entrance Facility that serves the building and is the demarcation point for service providers such as Telco and CATV It typically also houses the Horizontal Cross - connect (HC) in the form of a patch panel which provides modular patching capability between Work Area outlets and electronic equipment via the horizontal cabling. There shall be at least one TR per floor unless specifically authorized by the City IT department. TRs in multiple -floor buildings shall be stacked vertically. A minimum of two 4" sleeves shall be provided between the TRs of each floor. The TR on each floor should be as centrally located as possible, and provide adequate space for immediate equipment needs as well as future expansion. Horizontal cabling lengths are limited to 90 meters including all routing, storage, and termination requirements, therefore the direct distance required between the most remote Work Area outlet and the TR is often significantly less. Cabling lengths greater than 90 meters will necessitate additional TRs or approved solutions for work- around from the IT Department Sizing of the TR is dependent on the amount of installed telecommunications equipment, the number of Work Areas served by the TR, the collocation of non -telecommunications equipment, and other factors. The City IT department must be consulted early in the August 2010 design process with respect to the space requirements. In no case shall a TR be smaller than 10'x10'. Additional TR design ciiteria include. • It should be located far enough from sources of EMI to reduce/eliminate interference. • It should be located in places not subject to water or steam interference, or other sources of humidity. • it ,herald be located away from heat sources. • Doors shall be a minimum of 3' wide and 80" tall, and shall open outward. • Double doors may be required based on equipment to be installed. • A minimum of 3' of clearance from the farthest protruding equipment shall be provided front and back of racks or cabinets to be compliant with NESC / NEC, adopted as the NCEC. • TRs shall be located no mote than 250' aharl. • Minimum ceiling height shall be 8' above finished floor. Consideration shall • be given to a height of 10' above finished floor. • Flooring shall be tileNCT. • Conditioned room environments must be provided if the intention/purpose of the room is to house any electronic equipment. TR Electrical Requirements Separate duplex 120'VAC /20A convenience electrical outlets (for tools, field test instruments, etc.), which are located 16" above finished floor, and placed at 6' intervals around perimeter walls. A minimum of three outlets shall be installed. Consult with City IT department for TR electrical requirements. Minimum of (2) L520R or L530R twist lock ceiling mount receptacles per rack or cabinet with AB circuit configuration. Hardwired UPS systems are required for all but the smallest TRs. Consult with City IT department early in the design process for UPS requirements. UPS units provide temporary power to provide protection for critical equipment during brief power outages and to provide a limited amount of time to properly shut down equipment in the event of an extended power outage. UPS units do not provide emergency power and should August 2010 not be considered as protection against power outages. If emergency power is needed, facility plans should include requirements for an emergency generator. The UPS size is determined by the equipment power load and the amount of time the UPS is required to support this load. The City standard for sizing UPS units is run time of 30 minutes at 80 per cent maximum equipment load (Example: The TR is designed to support a maximum equipment load of 15 KVA, the UPS unit will be sized to support an electrical load of 12 KVA for 30 minutes). Actual UPS size may be adjusted to meet specific TR requirements. In addition to UPS sizing, the City IT department will provide the necessary communications equipment heat loading in BTU for proper HVAC design. TR HVAC Requirements Telecommunications equipment is required to function 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. As such, a stand-alone HVAC unit with independent controls is required for large or high priority TRs. Consult with City IT department early in design process for HVAC requirements. If an emergency power source is available, the HVAC system for the main TR should be connected to it. Environmental control standards for TRs: Temperature shall be between 55 and 65 degrees Fahrenheit. Relative humidity shall be between 30% and 55%. Ceiling mounted HVAC units "will not" be permitted. Only pad or wall mount units are acceptable. TR Fire Suppression Systems Fire suppression requirements for TRs must be considered early in the design phase. Sprinkler systems should not be used in TRs. Rooms shall either be constructed with a fire -wall barrier and proper smoke detection or a system that provides a non -corrosive gas or chemical base to prevent damage to electronic components. Preferred suppression protection equipment would be a FM200 or equivalent fire suppression system. If suppression protection is selected then post event ventilation must be included in the specifications.. Design and installation of gas or chemical based systems requires close coordination with the City Fire Marshall, and Facilities Maintenance, as well as the IT Department. Cabling Requirements The City's Telephone and Data networks share a common cabling system. The City Standard outlet consists of four cables and allows any of the four cables to be used for either Phone or Data communications. August 2010 Non -Standard outlets include outlets with non-standard quantities of Phone/Data cables, outlets configured with four Phone/Data cables like a Standard outlet with the addition of one or more CATV cables, as well as outlets with a single cable for single purpose devices like kitchen phones, emergency phones, radio remote phones, TVs, and other special devices. In order for the blueprints and the project specifications to correspond properly, the following symbology for TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS should be used in the blueprints. [W P STANDARD TELEcnmMUNICATIONS OUTI FT Typical Floor QUAN I I 'I'Y OF PHONE/DATA CABLES PER PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS Mount Symbol une* aO, NON-STANDARD TELECOMUNICATIONS OUTLET (MULTIPURPOSE) #/# ---- FIRST NUMBER INDICATES QUANTITY OF PHONE/DATA CABLES SECOND NUMBER INDICATES QUANTITY OF CATV CABLES NON-STANDARD TELECOMUNICATIONS OUTLETS (SINGLE PURPOSE) e s, BLANK c © c , CAN R ` RADIO w, WALL PHONE AT +48" P, PUBLIC PHONE AT+44" OTHER TECHNOLOGY CONSIDERATIONS Other technologies that may or may not be utilized in the new facility that must be considered In the initial phases of the Te1cconnnunications Cabling design and require consultation with the City IT departinent include: • Wireless Network Access -Facility interior and exterior • Intercom Systems • Distributed Radio Remote Systems • Public Addresc • Voice Recording Systems • Video Surveillance and Security • Radio Towers adjacent. to .far, dity August 2010 Work Area Outlet Location Outlet locations should be established initially by City Engineering, the Architect, and the departments to be housed in the facility based on what is understood to be the functionality of each room. After initial placement in the plans, the outlet locations must be reviewed by the City IT department which may offer suggestions or alternatives based on that review. As a general rule, all office spaces designed for single occupancy up to 100 square feet will have a minimum of two (2) faceplate outlets configured with four (4) RJ 45 jacks. The top (Left & Right) of the data plate being designated for network telephone. Bottom (Left & Right) of data plate designated for data. Office spaces designed for multiple occupants will have one (1) Standard Telecommunications outlet provided for each anticipated occupant. Placement of outlets should be on opposite (preferably) or adjacent walls depending on room configuration. Placement of outlets must always be paired with electrical outlets within 18 inches and must consider multiple furniture placement options to allow for future changes. As the final facility design is developed, it is necessary to continue to review and refine these outlet locations based on the inevitable changes that occur. The City IT department will review outlet locations with future office space re- allocations and functions in mind in addition to meeting the requirements of the immediate occupants and furniture placements. Performing this critical review in the planning phase and oversight in the construction phase will pay short and long term dividends in cost effectiveness, the delivery of high performance and reliable technology services, and significantly better customer service due to both a faster and higher capacity response to move, add, and change (MAC) requests. Ultimate decisions regarding number and placement of outlets will be determined by facility users and project managers, taking into account IT recommendations and budget considerations. (See "TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS" in Part II ) August 2010 Part II TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS Drawings and general provisions of the City of College Station Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. STANDARDS 1.1.Contractor shall install and test telecommunications cabling networks per manufacturer's requirements and in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code@), state codes, local codes, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and particularly the following standards: 1.1.1.ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2006 -- Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 1.1.2.ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements 1.1.3.ANSVrIA/EIA-S68-B.2 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components 1.1.4.ANSVFIA/EIA-568-B.3 -- Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard 1.1.5.ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B -- Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 1.1.6.ANSJ/TIA/:hlA-6t1h(A) -- 1 he Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 1.1.7.ANSI-J-STD-607(A) -- Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 1.2.Federal, state, and local codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances governing the work, are as fully part of the specifications as if herein repeated or hereto attached. The contractor shall install materials and equipment in accordance with applicable standards, codes, requirements, and recommendations of national, state, and local authorities having jurisdiction, and National Electrical Code® (NEC) and with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.3.1t the contractor should note items in the drawings or the specifications, construction of which would be code violations, promptly call them to the attention of the City Project Manager in writing. Where the requirements of other sections of the specifications are more stringent than applicable codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances, the specifications shall apply. 1.4.The contractor shall supply and install all cabling, jacks, faceplates, patch panels, cable suspension devices, labeling, testing equipment, fire -stopping, and any and all materials required to produce a turn=key, compliant installation. August 2010 2. INTERBUILDING CONNECTIVITY 2.1.Where high speed fiber optic connectivity is required between the adjacent or nearby buildings, the contractor shall supply and install OFS singlemode Loose Tube Fortex DT cable (Part Number AT-3BE12Y6-024) from one building TR to the other building TR or as specified. 2.2.Installation of Interbuilding fiber optic cable shall be completed according to manufacturer installation guidelines. 3. PREMISES SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 3.1.The telecommunications cabling system consists of telecommunications outlets located in work areas, cabling pathways through plenum and/or non -plenum spaces to the Telecommunications Room (TR), and the termination therein. 4. PATHWAYS AND SPACES 4.1.Cabling pathways shall provide adequate physical cable support and protection, isolation/protection from sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI), physical isolation/protection from environmental elements (heat, cold, moisture), and compliance with the NFPA-70. Cables shall be supported above ceiling height with cable hangers designed to support telecommunications cables (Erico/Caddy Part Number CAT12/24/36 or equivalent) attached to permanent structures and placed at no greater than 5 foot intervals. All managed cabling shall be secured with "hook-n-loop" style fasteners, zip ties or tie wraps are not permitted on any copper cable as completed managed solution. 4.2.Penetrations through floor and fire -rated walls shall utilize intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) or galvanized rigid conduit (GRC) sleeves and shall be firestopped after installation and testing, utilizing a fire -stopping assembly approved for that application. All firewall and floor penetrations shall be coordinated with the City Project Manager and City Facilities Maintenance department. 4.3.Cable hangers are preferred over cable trays for most ceiling communications cable runs. Cable trays will be installed in TRs using overhead ladder cable trays (Placement to be coordinated with IT Department). Cable tray installation outside TRs, must be coordinated with the IT Department during the design phase. All cable trays shall be installed in accordance with National Electrical Code standards Articles 318, 250, and 800; and NEMA Standards Publication VE-2 4.4.Penetrations through ceilings (both solid and free floating) must be flashed or sleeved and proper fire stop applied. 5. CONDUIT AND OUTLET BOXES August 2010 5.1. Outlet boxes shall be metallic 4"x4", having "Single Gang" faceplate adapters and 3/ inch EMT conduit extended above ceiling height and equipped with fiberglass bushings to protect cables. Appropriate measures shall be taken to protect cables from sharp edges and abrasion. 5.2.The use of surface raceway and surface mounted outlets in work areas are not acceptable unless specifically authorized by the City Project Manager. 5.3.In nonstandard installations, such as when placing outlet boxes in existing walls as part of a change order, metallic drywall mounting plate brackets (Erico/Caddy Part Number MPLS or equivalent) are permitted with specific approval by the City Project Manager. 6. CABLING 6. LInstallation shall adhere to mamifacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing cables. 6.2.Where manufacturer does not provide bending radii information, minimum - bending radius shall be 15 times cable diameter. Atiange and mount equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the City Project Managel. 6.3.Each work area outlet shall be equipped with four (4) Phone/Data Commscope Ultra II Category 5e plenum rated cables (Part Number 5504M), or approved equivalent from the City IT/ Communications division installed from the work area outlet to the Telecommunications Room (TR). 6.4.Cable color for all cabling is blue. 6.5.Provide 3' service loop for all cables above ceiling at work area conduit stub -up. 6.6.Each cable shall be labeled as specified in the Documentation section. The nomenclature for this labeling shall be coordinated with the City Project Manager. 7. WORK AREA CABLE TERMINATION 7.1.Each work arCa outlet shall consist of four (4) terminated Phone/Data Commscope Ultra II Category 5e plenum rated cables (Part Number 5504M). Contractor shall terminate each cable at the outlet with Siemon modular jacks (Part Number MX5-F02) installed into Siemon six position faceplates (Part Number MX-FP-S-06-XX). All unused jack positions in faceplates shall have color -coordinated blanks (Part Number MX-BL-02) installed. Approved Industry equivalent for products may be substituted with the approval of the City's IT/Communication Division. The color for all jacks and blanks is white. 7.2.The color/finish for faceplates shall be coordinated with the City Project Manager. 7.3.Each jack position shall be labeled as specified in the Documentation section. The nomenclature for this labeling shall be coordinated with the City Project Manager. All cabling, faceplates, jacks, labeling, and associated materials shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. August 2010 7.4.CATV cabling shall be Quad Shield RG6 (CommScope Plenummax Part Number 2229V) or equivalent. Each RG6 cable shall be terminated with an F connector (Thomas and Betts Part Number SNS6QS) or equivalent and connected to a Siemon modular jack (Part Number MX-F-FA-02) installed into Siemon six position faceplates (Part Number MX-FP-S-06-XX) or equivalent (substitutions must be approved by the City IT Department prior to ordering and installation). All unused jack positions in faceplates shall have color -coordinated blanks (Part Number MX-BL-02) or equivalent installed. In the TR, all cables shall be neatly bundled and terminated with F connectors (Thomas and Betts Part Number SNS6QS) or equivalent (substitutions must be approved by the City IT Department prior to ordering and installation) for installation on wall -mounted splitter/terminator. All coordination for new service installs of CATV for both Demarc and room servicing shall be the responsibility of the City's project manager. IT/Communications will not be responsible for any installation and provisioning of materials. 8. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM CABLE TERMINATION 8.1.Contractor shall terminate each Phone/Data cable in the TR on 48 port Siemon Category 5e approved patch panels (Part Number HD5-48) or equivalent (substitutions must be approved by the City IT Department prior to ordering and installation) supplied by the contractor. The patch panels shall provide capacity sufficient to accommodate all installed cables plus twenty-five percent future growth. Patch panels shall be mounted in City -supplied and installed equipment racks. 8.2.Cable length and routing in the TR shall allow for a minimum of 10 feet of cable storage in the City -supplied and installed overhead cable tray system. Contractor shall coordinate routing and securing of cables in the TR with the City Project Manager. Neat, linear, and logical placement and bundling of cables is mandatory. 9. GROUNDING (EARTHING) AND BONDING 9. LGrounding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA 607(A) - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, NationalElectrical Code®, ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 and manufacturer's grounding requirements as minimum. 9.2.Contractor shall supply one dedicated #4/0 AWG insulated copper grounding conductor from the main electrical service entrance ground to the location of Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TGMB) in the TR. Contractor shall establish the TGMB location with the City Project Manager and will supply and install the TGMB. If an additional bus bar is required #4/0 AWG will be utilized to chassis multiple bus bars. 10. TESTING August 2010 10.1.Each installed cable shall be tested for compliance with the cabling performance test procedures defined in ANSI/TTA/F.TA-568-B.1. 10.1.1.The field testing device shall be Level 2e. 10.1.2.The field testing device shall be in good working order and calibrated according to manufacturer's recommendations. 10.2.A printout of the field test results for each cable shall be provided to the City Project Manager. Electronic versions of the results may be submitted if these records are in a format acceptable to the City Project Manager. 11. DOCUMENTATION 11.1.Labeling shall conform to ANSUTIA/FIA-606(A) standards. In addition, provide the following: 11.2.Label each outlet with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum 3/16 in. high characters. 11.3.Lahel each cable with permanent self-adlesive label with minimum, 1/8 in. high characters, in the following locations: 11.3.1.Inside outlet box at the work area. 11.3.2.Behind the TR patch panel. 11.4.1 Tse labels on face of data patch panels. Coordinate nomenclature with City_ Project Manager. 11.5.Labels shall be machine -printed. Hand -lettered labels shall not be acceptable. 12. PR.EMISES SYSTEM DF,SC'RTPTION 12.1.The telecommunications cabling system consists of telecommunications outlets located in work areas, cabling pathways through plenum and/or non -plenum spaces to the Telecommunications Room (TR), and the termination therein. 13. INSTALLATION 13.1.The contractor shall Install materials and equipment in accordance with applicable standards, codes, requirements, and recommendations of national, state, and local authorities having jurisdiction,, and National Electrical Code@ (NEC) and with manufacturer's printed instructions. 13.2.Installation shall adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when installing cables. 13.3.Where manufacturer does not provide bending radii information, minimum - bending radius shall be 15 times cable diameter. Arrange and mount equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the City project manager. August 2010 13 A.Penetrations through floor and fire -rated walls shall utilize intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) or galvanized rigid conduit (GRC) sleeves and shall be firestopped after installation and testing, utilizing a firestopping assembly approved for that application. 13.5.Outlet boxes shall be metallic 4"x4", having "Single Gang" faceplate adapters and 3/4 inch EMT conduit extended above ceiling height and equipped with fiberglass bushings to protect cables. The use of surface raceway and surface mounted outlets is not acceptable unless specifically authorized by the City project manager. All materials shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. 13.6.Each STANDARD TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET shall consist of four Phone/Data (4) Commscope Ultra II Category 5e plenum rated cables (Part Number 5504M), installed from the work area outlet to the Telecommunications Room (TR). Cable color for all cabling is blue. Contractor shall terminate each Phone/Data cable at the outlet with Siemon modular jacks (Part Number MX5- F02) installed into Siemon six position faceplates (Part Number MX-FP-S-06- 02). All unused jack positions in faceplates shall have color -coordinated blanks (Part Number MX-BL-02) installed. The color for jacks, plates, and blanks is white. Each jack position shall be labeled as specified in the Documentation section (Section 5). The nomenclature for this labeling shall be coordinated with the City project manager. All cabling, faceplates, jacks, labeling, and associated materials shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. 13.7.NON STANDARD OUTLETS contain non-standard number or types of cables, denoted by the Electrical Symbol Legend in the Construction Drawings. 13.8.CATV cabling shall be RG6, double shielded, plenum rated as required. Each RG6 cable shall be terminated and connected to a Siemon modular jack (Part Number MX-F-FA-02) or equivalent installed into Siemon six position faceplates (Part Number MX-FP-S-06-02) or equivalent. All unused jack positions in faceplates shall have color -coordinated blanks (Part Number MX-BL-02) or equivalent installed. In the TR, all cables shall be neatly bundled and terminated for installation on wall -mounted splitter/terminator. 13.9.Cabling pathways, including conduits shall provide adequate physical cable support and protection, isolation/protection from sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI), physical isolation/protection from environmental elements (heat, cold, moisture), and compliance with the NFPA-70. Fill rates shall be no greater than 50%. Cables shall be supported above ceiling height with cable hangers designed to support telecommunications cables (Erico/Caddy Part Number CAT12/24/36 or equivalent) attached to permanent structures and placed at no greater than five (5) foot intervals. August 2010 13.10.Contractor shall terminate each Phone/Data cable in the TR on 48 port Siemon Category 5e approved patch panels (Part Number HD5-48) (substitutions must be approved by the City IT Department prior to ordering and installation) supplied by the contractor. The patch panels shall provide capacity sufficient to accommodate all installed cables plus twenty-five (25) percent future growth. Rack, cable tray, and cable management will be supplied and installed by the City. Cable length and routing in the TR shall allow for a minimum of ten (10) feet of cable storage in the existing overhead cable tray system. Contractor shall coordinate routing and securing of cables in the TR with the City project manager. Neat, linear, and logical placement and bundling of cables is mandatory. 14. DOCUMENTATION 14.1.Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) standards. In addition, provide the following: 14.1.1.Label each outlet with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum 3/16 in. high characters. 14.1.2.Label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1/8 in. high characters, in the following,, lncations; 14.1.2.1. Inside outlet box at the work wea.. 14.1.2.2. Behind the TR patch panel. 14.1.3.Use labels on face of data patch panels. Coordinate nomenclature with City project manager. 14.1.4.Labcls shall be machine -printed. Hand -lettered labels shall not be acceptable. August 2010 CITY OF COLLEGE STATION - TOWER SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications Unless otherwise modified herein, materials, design, and construction procedures shall be in accordance with the standards, regulations, and codes listed below as well as all Federal, City, and local building codes applicable to the site. Installation of all electrical equipment, power distribution, lighting and outlet assemblies, alarm and grounding systems, including associated wire ways, and wiring, shall comply with the most recent edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), and Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards and requirements. All electrical equipment and devices shall be listed, approved, or certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). All equipment shall comply with the latest editions/revison of the following rules, regulations, and specifications: Standards, Regulations, and Codes a) American Nationak Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards b) TIA/EIA-222-G — Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting Structures e) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code d) NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems Self Supporting Tower The Contractor shall supply and install a new 30' self supporting free standing tower, Rohn Tower Model number 45G or equal at the site. The towel system shall contain the tower structure, tower foundation, anchor bolts, anchor bolt templates, lightning protection rod, 7 hole waveguide ladder, step bolt climbing facility, 3/8" fall protection safety cable with trolley. Tower must support, as a minimum, (2) 700 MHz omni-directional antennas (mobilemark OD4-700 or similar), (1) VHF omni-directional antenna (ZDA Communications or similar). Contractor provide and install a sufficient quantity of insulated copper grounding bars to connect each antenna's transmission line into the tower grounding system. Contractor provides approximately 400 Ft of recommended 1/2" Heliax Coax, standard cable, standard jacket for each antenna. The tower structure shall be designed for 70 MPH basic wind speed and 0.5 inch radial ice as per ANSI / TIA 222-G. Tower foundation design will be determined by soil testing and analysis, tower manufacture's specifications and the specifications of this section. All tower components to be galvanized. Any and all assembly bolts must be galvanized and have galvanized lock washers. Tower Ground System All connections of dissimilar metals shall be coated with anti -oxidant joint compound Ideal part number 30-026. Provide and install a 2/0 bare tinned stranded copper conductor that shall be run the length of the tower, down one leg, secured every 3 ft. with insulated copper tie wire. Securely connect the grounding wire to the topmost section of the tower using an exothermic welding (CADWELD type bonding). Connect the grounding conductor to the tower leg at the 15 ft level and at the base using exothermic welding (CADWELD type bonding). Ground each tower leg directly to a minimum 8 ft. x 5/8 in. copper clad grounding rod using bare tinned stranded copper 2/0 conductor. Provide ground rods in accordance with the requirements of NASI/UIL 467- 1984, CSA and ANSVNEMA GRA. Provide ground rods manufactured from high strength 1035 cold drawn steel. All connections to the ground rods and tower are to be cad welded utilizing Harger's part numbers G31582, G21582 and VA2SV1.5X48. Provide ground rods with copper plating thickness in accordance with ANSI/ UL 467-1984 (ANSI C33.8-1972). Ground connections to the tower footing plates are not acceptable. Protect the 2/0 grounding conductor with 1-in. plastic electrical grade conduit. Place the plastic electrical grade conduit from near the ground rod connection and extended 4 in. above the ground surface. Form the plastic electrical grade conduit so as not to have any sharp bends between the ground rod and the tower leg ground connection. Bury the top of the ground rods below ground surface at a minimum of 24-in. Connect the grounding conductor to the grounding rod using exothermic welding (CADWELD type bonding). Interconnect tower grounding connections using exothermic welding (CADWELD type bonding). Use of split bolt connectors for grounding connections is not acceptable. Perform ground system testing, after installation of the grounding system, using one of the three methods: • Three-Point/Fall-of-Potential Testing • Clamp -on Ohmmeter • Combined Soil Resistivity Testing with Clamp -on Ohmmeter Testing Provide written test results detailing ground system resistance after completion of the installation of the grounding system. Provide the written test results to the City's Project Manager. Note the method of ground system testing on the test results. Ground system resistances of less than 10—ohms must be achieved, with 5—ohms or less being the goal. If it is determined that additional grounding enhancements are needed to achieve specified results, 10-ohms or less, Provide a written description of the additional grounding enhancements and why the additional grounding enhancements are needed, for example before and after grounding test results. The Contractor and City will review additional requirements and determine the appropriate course of action. Lightning and Surge Protection The tower shall be provided with a lightning protection rod and all hardware required for mounting and connection to the tower grounding. Provide and install a top mounted lightning protection Class I copper air terminal system (Harger or equivalent) on a tower leg opposite any top mounted antenna. Adjust the air terminal system to allow the tip of the air terminal to be 10 to 12 in. above the top of the top mounted antenna(s). Air Terminal to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and grounded to the antenna structure adjacent to the topmost antenna grounding wire connection. SECTION 283111- FIRE ALARM — ADDRESSABLE PART1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the complete installation of a new automatic fire alarm system, as well as necessary materials, labor, calibration, testing and training. B. The complete installation shall be in compliance with NFPA 70, 72, 101 (Life Safety Code) and NEC Article 760. The installation shall also comply with state and local ordinances, as well as the Americans with Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). C. All equipment supplied shall be listed for the purpose and area in which it is used and installed in accordance with any instructions included in its listing. D. All equipment m»st be new and bear the UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) Label. 1.02 SIIOP DRAWINGS A. Fire alarm shop drawings shall contain the following: 1. Specification sheet/sheets of technical data on each hardware component 2. Specification sheet(s) on wiring to be utilized 3. One -line schematic riser diagram made specifically for this job 4. Calculation for sizing batteries and power supplies 5. Sequence of operation for the entire system 6. Copy of vendor's NICET fire alarm certificate (level III or higher) 7. Verification of central supervising station (UL Certified) 8. Equipment and service warranty 9. Scaled Door plans showing fine alarm device locations and wire routing 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers which comply with these specifications are acceptable: I. Notific, 2. Siemens 3. Edwards 4. Simplex 5. Silent Knight COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 283111 - 1 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRE ALARM - ADDRESSABLE 1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Smoke detectors shall be covered with plastic wrapping if installed prior to the completion of painting, sanding and other work producing dust, etc. B. The fire alarm control panel(s) shall not be installed until its designated room has been completely painted and cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL PANEL/SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire alarm system shall be an electrically supervised, power limited, low voltage (24 VDC), non -coded, multiplexed, fully analog, addressable system. The fire alarm control panel shall be of modular design for ease of future system addition or modification (up to 20% addition capacity). B. The control panel shall provide system status via an 80 character liquid crystal display and shall also have the following features: 1. Power "ON" Light Emitting Diode (LED) 2. System Reset Switch 3. System Alarm LED 4. System Trouble LED 5. Alarm Silence Display 6. Trouble Silence Display 7. Control panel shall be lockable. 8. Normally open and normally closed sets of contacts for control of remote equipment/devices. C. Batteries shall be mounted in space provided in the fire alarm control panel. Control panel shall include automatic charging circuit to maintain battery/batteries in charged condition. Batteries may be lead acid or nicad; charging circuit shall match battery type. D. The battery/batteries shall have sufficient ampere -hour capacity to operate the system under normal supervisory conditions with A.C. power disconnected for 4 hours, and at the end of that period to operate all alarm notification appliances for 5 minutes. For calculation purposes, all audible devices shall be tapped at a minimum of one (1) watt. E. The system shall operate from one (1) 20-ampere, single-phase, 3-wire 120 V.A.C. circuit. The circuit breaker shall be labeled "Fire Alarm Circuit Control." F. The fire alarm system shall respond to a fire emergency through the operation of COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 283111 - 2 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRE ALARM - ADDRESSABLE the following systems: 1. Smoke damper control and automatic shut down of HVAC air systems shall occur upon activation of respective duct smoke detector. 2. Automatic audible/visual notification (via horns/strobes) shall be provided upon activation of a flow switch, manual station, or area smoke detector. Signal output to the UL Listed central station (for fire system reporting) via a D.A.C.T. communication device (or similar UL Listed "fire" device). Provide and install 3/4" conduit from the panel to the main telephone backboard. 3. Smoke door release (where applicable) shall occur generally throughout the entire facility. 4. Tamper switch operation shall cause a trouble signal to indicate audibly and visually at the.. control panel, 5. Notification at contiul panel upon activation of kitchen hood fire suppression system. G. Supervision 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) shall be Class A, Style D. Verify with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) prior to bid submittal and prior to shop drawing submittal 2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) shall be Class A, Style 6. Verify with AHJ prior to bid submittal and shop drawing submittal 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be Class B, Style Y. Verify with AHJ prior to bid submittal and drawing submittal. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. 4. Power failures, opens, or grounds shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator (where applicable). A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. H. Provide remote annunciator panel with 80 character liquid crystal display, audible signal and alarm/tronhlo lights. 2.02 FIELD DEVICES A. Manual Stations: Semi -flush, addressable, double action type. Station shall be constructed of high impact red polycarbonate. B. Area Smoke Detectors: Smoke detectors shall be of the analog, addressable, photoelectric type. A pulsed diode pilot lamp, visible from the floor, shall be provided to indicate alarm condition or component failure. Diode pilot lamp may be pulsed diode type for normal and steady for alarm trouble indication. Detectors shall be self supervising for component failure as well as line failure. Detector failure or removal of detector shall initiate (zone) trouble signal. Detector shall be COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 283111 - 3 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRE ALARM - ADDRESSABLE capable of monitoring 900 square feet of unobstructed area with spacing not to exceed 30 feet on center. Smoke detectors shall be ceiling mounted and shall be interconnected into alarm system to function in same manner as the manual station. Detectors shall report analog level of smoke/dirt to panel. C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Detectors shall be of the analog, addressable, photoelectric type. The unit shall consist of a detector and an air sampling assembly housed in a casting designed for duct mounting. The sampling tubes shall extend completely across the duct. Detectors shall report analog level of smoke/dirt to panel. Detectors shall have remote test switches/LED alarm indicators in an observable location for periodic detector testing and alarm identification. Each switch shall be labeled to identify location of duct smoke detector. D. Audible/Visual Devices: Audible/visual devices shall be horns with flashing visual appliances with the word "FIRE" written on the lens. The horns shall produce at least 15 dBa above ambient noise level. Audible and visual devices (including the combination device) shall utilize a 4" electrical backbox. Visual devices shall produce a minimum of 75 candela, with a constant flash rate of one (1) flash per second. The device color shall be white. E. Addressable relays shall be provided as required to accomplish all mechanical systems and other related control functions. F. Addressable input monitoring devices shall be provided as required to monitor existing water flow, tamper switch, and other devices. G. Heat detectors shall be addressable, fixed temperature type rated at 135 degrees F, unless noted otherwise on drawings. H. Single/Multiple Station Smoke Detectors with Integral Sounder: Detectors shall be addressable, system -connected with built-in evacuation horn and power -on indicator. Where more than one is installed in a living unit, activation of one detector shall trigger all horns in that unit. I. Monitoring of remote fire protection valves on site (if applicable) shall be accomplished via fire alarm system connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall obtain approval from Owner as to the final and exact location of each control panel and remote annunciator prior to installation. B. All wiring and cable installed exposed in a space, concealed inside a wall, concealed above a non -accessible ceiling or underground outside the building shall be installed in conduit. All line voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit. All low COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 283111 - 4 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRE ALARM - ADDRESSABLE voltage wiring installed above accessible ceilings may be installed without conduit by using cable with a jacket which is UL Listed for installation in a return air plenum. Plenum rated cable shall be tied to the building structure at approximately 6-0" on center using cable ties. Plenum cable shall pass through fire rated walls by drilling a hole in the wall and installing a conduit with bushings on each end through the wall. Install the cable through the conduit and seal the opening around the conduit and the hole in the conduit with a UL Listed fire rated sealant. C. Provide necessary programming to accomplish the indicated system operation and control functions. D. All conduit, control wiring, power wiring, relays, and other equipment and devices required to form a complete and operational system shall be provided as part of this Contract. E. All wiring requirements for shielding certain conductors from others or routing in separate raceways shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.02 WARRANTY A. Equipment, materials, workmanship and system performance incorporated into the work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the time the Owner receives beneficial use of the fire alarm system and the acceptance tests herein specified have been satisfactorily completed. Any defects due to faulty materials, methods or installation or workmanship within this period shall be promptly repaired or replaced. B. Vendor shall provide pricing for system inspections for a period of four (4) additional years after the initial 12-month warranty as a bid alternate to the Owner. Provide the following inspections per N.F.P.A. 72 and N.F.P.A. 101: 1. Semi-annual inspections on all initiating devices and alarm devices 2. Quarterly inspections on all sprinkler system water -flow, pressure switches, tamper switches and control panel batteries 3. Annual inspections on all control panels and other system components C. Spare Parts: Provide the following spare equipment items to the Owner upon projcrt c rinipletiun; 1. Addressable modules. 2 2. Smoke detectors: 2 3. Manual stations: 2 4. Duct mounted smoke detectors: 1 S. Audible/visual devices: 4 3.03 TESTING AND CER EL 1CATIUN COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 283111 - 5 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRE ALARM - ADDRESSABLE A. Testing and certification of the life safety system per NFPA 72 2-2 shall be as required by the Fire Marshal and Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying the required testing, coordinate scheduling, and conducting the test necessary to achieve occupancy certification, and assurance of complete system operation. The Contractor shall submit proof of complete system operation signed by the Fire Marshal to Engineer and Owner. END OF SECTION 283111 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 283111 - 6 MARCH 15, 2011 FIRE ALARM - ADDRESSABLE Revised— 1/7. 009 B/CS Unr fled Spec jtcations SECTION 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section governs the furnishing of all labor. equipment. tools. and naterials,and the performance of all work for clearing, grubbing, and disposal of material within the work site required for construction of a site in accordance with specification requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Clearing consists of culling off trees and brush vegetative growth to not more than a specified height above ground and disposing of felled trees, previously uprooted trees and stumps, and surface debris. B. Close -cut clearing consists of cutting off standing trees, brush, scrub, roots, stumps and embedded logs, removing at, or close to, existing grade and disposing of fallen timber and surface debris. C. Clearing isolated trees consists of cutting off to not more than specified height above ground of designated trees, and disposing of felled trees and debris. D. Underbrush clearing consists of removal from treed areas of undergrowth, deadwood, and trees smaller than 50 mm trunk diameter and disposing of all fallen timber and surface de ri E. Grubbing consists of excavation and disposal of stumps and roots boulders and roc fragments of specified size to not less than a specified depth below existing ground ur ace. 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. This item will be measured by the acre unless otherwise shown on the bid documents. B. For "acre" measurement, the work performed in accordance with this item and measured as provided under "measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Clearing and Grubbing." This price is full compensation for pruning of designated trees, and shrubs; removal and disposal of structures and obstruction; backfilling of holes: furnishing and placing concrete for plugs; and equipment, labor, tools and incidentals. 1.4 SUMBITTALS A. Burn permits shall be submitted to the owner prior to burning of vegetation. B. Notice of Intent (NOI) and Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) or cause for exemption. C. Proof of legal disposal of all hazardous material shall be required when hazardous material is involved. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Prevent damage to fencing, trees, landscaping, natural features, benchmarks, existing buildings, existing pavement, utility lines, site appurtenances, water courses, root systems of trees which are to remain. B. Repair any damaged items to approval of Engineer/Architect. Replace any trees designated to remain, if damaged, as directed by Engineer /Architect. C. When shown on the plans, treat cuts on trees with an approved tree wound dressing within 20 minutes of making a pruning cut or otherwise causing damage to the tree. 1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL A. Follow all local and state regulations when burning, if burning of brush is approved, pile and burn at approved locations. B. Testing, removal and disposal of hazardous materials will be in accordance with the contract. PART 2 — PRODUCTS N/A PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Inspect site and verify with Engineer/Architect, items designated to remain. B. Locate and protect utility lines. Preserve in operating condition active utilities traversing site: 1. Notify Engineer/Architect immediately of damage to or when unknown existing utility lines are encountered. 2. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within area of operations, notify Engineer/Architect in ample time to minimize interruption of service. C. Notify utility authorities before starting clearing and grubbing. D. Keen roads and walks free of dirt and debris. 3.2 CLEARING A. Clear areas shown on the plans of all obstructions, except those landscape features that are to be preserved. Such obstructions include but are not limited to remains of houses and other structures, foundations, floor slabs, concrete, brick, lumber, plaster, septic tank drain fields, basements, abandoned utility pipes or conduits, equipment, fences, retaining walls, and other items as specified on the plans. Remove vegetation and other landscape features not designated for preservation, curb and gutter, driveways, paved parking areas, miscellaneous stone, sidewalks, drainage structures, manholes, inlets, abandoned railroad tracks, scrap iron, and debris, whether above or below ground. Removal of live utility Rerised --11200 BICS Un fied Specifications facilities is not included in this item. Remove culverts, storm sewers, manholes and inlets in proper sequence to maintain traffic and drainage. B. In areas receiving embankment, remove obstructions not designated for preservations to 2 ft. below natural ground. In areas to be excavated, remove obstruction to 2 ft. below the excavation level. In all other areas, remove obstruction to 1 ft. below natural ground. When allowed by the plans or directed, cut trees and stumps off to ground level. Plug the remaining ends of abandoned underground structures over 3 inches in diameter with concrete to form a tight closure. Backfill, compact, and restore areas where obstructions have been removed, unless otherwise directed. Use approved material for backfilling. Accept ownership, unless otherwise directed, and dispose of removed materials and debris at location off the sight in accordance with local, state and federal requirements. ENI) OF SEC ION SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing subgrades for walks, pavements, turf, and grasses and plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 1. Subbase row -se :for concrete walk., and pavements. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary con- trols, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section. 2. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab -on -grade. 3. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, 28, and 33 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical struc- tures. 4. Division 32 Section "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excava- tion. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot -mix as- phalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying, pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 1 12ann - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot -mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot -mix asphalt walk. J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or back - fill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. K. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as under- ground services within buildings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required: 1. Geotextiles. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below: 1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches. C. Preexcavation Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining con- struction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be miscon- strued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adja- cent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used fa- cilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312000 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimenta- tion -control measures, specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant -protection measures speci- fied in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place. D. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 5 Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to ui wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated E. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones F. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protec- tion zones. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: 1. Liquid Limit: In accordance with ASTM D423. 2. Plasticity Index: In accordance with ASTM D424. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 'i 12000 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gra- vel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gra- vel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of [washed ]crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate. 2.02 GEOTEXTILES A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle -punched geotextile, manufac- tured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf ;ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 561bf; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufac- tured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312000 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving opera- tions. C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Re- move temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. 3.02 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock exca- vation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may he authorized for rock excavation. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be re- moved; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Iniermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classi- fied as rock excavation is earth excavation 12. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent con- struction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 6 inclies outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. C. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. d. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs -on -grade. e. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches wide. 3.03 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construc- tion, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excava- tion. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforce- ment. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations in- tended as bearing surfaces. B. Excavations at Edges of 'free- and Plant Protection Zones: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 312000 - 5 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING I . Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow -tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Tem- porary Tree and Plant Protection." 3.04 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.05 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. For flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 4. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other un- yielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant -Protection Zones: 1. Hand -excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow -tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. 3.06 EXCAVATION FOR ELEVATOR CYLINDER COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312000 - 6 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING A. Drill well hole plumb in elevator pit to accommodate installation of elevator - cylinder assembly. Coordinate with applicable requirements for diameter and toler- ances in Division 14. B. Provide well casing as necessary to retain walls of well hule. 3.07 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for accord- ing to Contract provisions for charges in the Work. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional com- pensation. 3.08 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bot- tom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without alter- ing top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as di- rected by Architect. 3.09 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without in- termixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to pre- vent windblown duct. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 3. Removing concrete formwork. 4. Removing trash and dcbris. 5. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 312000 - 7 APRIL 11., 2011 EARTH MOVING 6. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally sup- ported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of con- crete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing. E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities test- ing. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.12 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 hori- zontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.13 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312000 - 8 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil materi- al that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to com- pact to specified dry unit weight. 3.14 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth .. for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inch- es in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required ele- vations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil ma- terial at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below sub - grade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil ma- terial at 85 percent. 3.15 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to pre- vent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following toler- ances: 1. Turf ui Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plug or rninus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. COT J F-GE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 312000 - 9 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING 3.16 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 3. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 4. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 5. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously com- pleted work comply with requirements. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved de- gree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.18 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312000 - 10 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING C. Whcrc settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished sur- facing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match ad- jacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Transport surplus satisfactory suil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's piuperty. END OF SECTION 312000 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 312000 - 11 APRIL 11, 2011 EARTH MOVING SECTION 312200 — SIVE GRADING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This section covers the requirements for rough and finish grading of sites requiring adjustment of soil elevations. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT There will be no separate measurement and payment for work performed under this section unless otherwise indicated in the hid form. 1.03 REFERENCES The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: ASTM American Society for Vesting of Kiwrials OSHA Occupational Safety and IIealth Administration EPA Environmental Protection Agency of the United States 1.04 SUBMITTALS When required, provide one (1) copy of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and copies of notifications required by the EPA to Owner's Representative and to Owner for record purposes only 1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATORY AGENCIES The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of all pertinent regulatory agencies as applicable to the project. The Contractor shall meet the requirements of the EPA Clean Water Act as it applies to pollution from stormwater runoff. When the construction site is five (5) or more acres, the Contractor will be the Operator of the site as defined by the EPA, and Contractor shall prepare and implement a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan according to EPA requirements including the notifications required by the EPA. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312200 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 SITE GRADING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT Topsoil. Topsoil shall be a material of good quality that will readily support vegetation of the type normally growing in the area. Topsoil shall be obtained from excavation related to the project site to the extent possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Location of Existing Utilities. The omission from or the inclusion of utility locations shown on the plans is not to be considered as the nonexistence of or the definite location of existing underground utilities. The exact location of existing underground utilities is not known. Contractor shall verify the existence and location of all existing underground utilities in the area of the work. B. Protection of Existing Utilities. Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect all existing utilities from damage due to his operations. Any damage to the existing utilities will be repaired at the Contractor's expense by qualified personnel. C. Convenience to Public. All work shall be performed in a manner that will cause as little inconvenience to the public as possible. All excavated material shall be kept trimmed such that minimum inconvenience is caused to the public or adjoining property owners. At locations deemed necessary by the Owner's representative, excavations shall be bridged in a secure manner so as to prevent serious interruption of travel and to provide access to fire hydrants, public property and private property. All bridging shall meet OSHA requirements. D. Damage to Existing Property. The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures, work, materials or equipment because of his operations and shall repair or replace any damage at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall protect all existing structures and all other existing property from damage and shall provide all bracing, shoring or other work necessary for such protection. E. Land for Construction Purposes. The Contractor will be permitted to use available space belonging to the Owner for construction purposes and for the storage of materials and equipment. The location and extent of the areas so used shall be as designated and approved by the Owner. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312200 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 SITE GRADING It shall be clearly undcistuud that the responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of equipment and materials on or near the site will be wholly and entirely that of the Contractor and that no claim whatsoever shall be made against the Owner by reason of acts occurring upon said substances by employees or trespassers. It shall be further understood that should any occasion arise necessitating access to the sites occupied by these stored materials and equipment, as determined by the Owner's representative, the Contractor owning or responsible for the stored materials or equipment shall immediately move same. No materials or equipment may be placed upon the property of the Owner until the Owner has approved the proposed location contemplated by the Contractor to be used for storage. F. Verification of Grades of Existing Adjacent Facilities. When the elevation of the site grading to be performed is dependent on the elevation of existing structures such as building slabs, sidewalks, culverts, etc., the Contractor, prior to beginning any work in the area of the existing structure which is dependent on the elevation of the existing structure, shall verify that the elevation of the existing structure differs from that shown on the plans. If the elevation of the existing structure is as shown on the plans, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative immediately. Proposed sidewalks parallel to and adjacent to a building and at a building entrance must be handicapped accessible and cannot slope more than two percent (2%) from the building. The desired slope on such sidewalks is from one percent (101o) to two Percent (2%). G. Work Within Public and Railroad Right -of -Way. When any part of the project falls within County, State or railroad right-of-way, all work within such right-of- way shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of each agency or railroad. H. Maintenance of Traffic. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that traffic whether vehicular or pedestrian will be maintained at all times. If required to maintain traffic, the Contractor shall construct, at his expense, temporary detours or other temporary structures. I. Bench Marks, Monuments and Stakes. Contractor shall not disturb any bench marks or property line monuments in the performance of the work. In the event it becomes necessary to remove any bench mark or property line monument in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative prior to removal so that such points may be referenced in preparation of replacement. All grade stakes shall be carefully maintained during the progress of the work to insure proper grade lines of the finished work. Bench marks, property line monuments and stakes destroyed by Contractor will be replaced by a registered professional land surveyor at Contractor's expense. 3.02 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION A. General. Perform grading and compaction of site to the lines, grades and densities shown on the plans and as described in the specifications. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 312200 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 SITE GRADING B. Clearing. All trees and vegetation, except such trees and vegetation that are to remain in place as shown on plans and as designated by the Owner's representative, shall be removed from the site. Trees and other vegetation to be left standing shall be thoroughly protected from damage by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the circumstances require. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent damage by falling trees to trees left standing, to existing structures and installations and to those under construction and so as to provide for safety of employees and others. C. Grubbing. All roots and stumps shall be grubbed and completely removed from the soil in the project area. Where grubbing operations are performed, the soil shall be recompacted to a density equal to that of the surrounding undisturbed soil. All debris resulting from grubbing operations shall be removed from the site by the Contractor and legally disposed of. D. Excess Excavated Material. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or in other sections of these specifications and unless directed otherwise by the Owner's representative, all materials not suitable for use and excavated material in excess of that needed for embankment shall be removed from the site and disposed by the Contractor. E. Adjustment of Manhole Top Elevations. Existing manholes, sanitary sewer cleanouts and valve boxes shall be protected from damage during construction operations by the Contractor. In the event that they are damaged, they shall be repaired by the Contractor and the entire cost borne by him. Their tops shall be adjusted by the Contractor in elevation where necessary to match the proposed grading plan. F. Disposal of Base Material. Base material removed due to project operations shall be transported to an on -site stockpile area designated by the Owner. Unsuitable material will be disposed of by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. G. Embankment. Non -paved areas which require fill material shall be filled with soil free of rock and organic matter. The embankment shall be placed in eight (8) inch maximum lifts and compacted to a minimum of ninety-two percent (92%) of Modified Proctor as measured by ASTM D1557. The final lift shall consist of not less than four (4) inches of topsoil at finished grade. H. Grading. The entire site shall be graded to the grades shown on the plans, including pavements. Areas not under pavement or structures which have been excavated or which have received fill material shall have a minimum of four (4) inches of topsoil at finished grade. If four (4) inches of topsoil does not remain after excavation in excavated areas, the Contractor shall overexcavate as required to place the required thickness of topsoil. Topsoil shall be compacted sufficiently to prevent future settling. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 312200 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 SITE GRADING I. Erosion Control. The Contractor shall employ measures and construction practices to control soil erosion at or adjacent to the project site. Adequacy of erosion control is subject to the approval of the Owner's representative and may include, but shall not be limited to, filter fabric fences, rock dams, hay bale dams and berms. See Part 1 of this section of the specifications for additional requirements regarding prevention of stormwater pollution. J. Final Cleanup. Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment, the Contractor shall remove rubbish, unused materials and temporary structures from the limits of the project and restore that which has been damaged during the prosecution of the work. 3.03 REPAIR/RESTORATION The Contractor shall repair and correct any areas of erosion during the progress of construction and until final acceptance of the project t 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Allow Owner's laboratory access to each lift of fill for density testing. Notify Owner's representative at least twenty-four (24) hours before completion of each lift to allow scheduling of testing. END OF SECTION 312200 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 312200 - i APRIL 11, 2011 SITE GRADING Rcvised—112009 BI S Unyied Specifications SECTION 3123 00 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes providing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for excavation and embankment construction to the lines, grades and cross sections indicated in, the Drawings or a$ directed by the ENGINEER. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A.. This item will be measured by the cubic yard. Cubic yards will be measured by the difference between the surveyed original grades and the final grades. Measurements will include all authorized excavation below grade, which are not attributed to the Contractor's carelessness, in the opinion of the Engineer. B. The prices bid shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, tools, equipment, pre - and post -grade surveys and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will not be made for borrow material that is not suitable to use in embankments. Payment for unauthorized work will not be made. C. All work required for the disposal of waste, including haul, and for the salvage, utilization in the work and disposal of salvageable materials, will not be paid for directly but shall be considered a part of "Excavation and Embankment" and included in the unit price bid for this item. Payment will not be made for unauthorized work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. All material to be imported to the site shall be sampled at its original location and tested for acceptability. This testing shall be provided by the contractor at no expense to the owner. B. A list of all compaction equipment to be utilized shall be submitted for approval prior to equipment arriving on site. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MA.'1'b'RIALS A. EXCAVATION All excavation shall be unclassified excavation and shall consist of excavation and dismal—oLalLmaterials Qf—whatever-characterencountered�n the WORK_ B. EMBANKMENT Material shall consist of soil native to the work site, with or without stone or conglomerate, of a suitable quality to secure a well bonded course. Imported material shall consist of soil hauled to the work site for use in embankment operations. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications 2. Material for embankment shall be free of vegetation, wood, organic material, trash, bricks, broken concrete, piping, rubble, or other objectionable material. Material sources shall be selected to eliminate the introduction of hazardous materials into the work site. C. SELECT MATERIAL Material shall have a Plasticity Index between 4 and 20 and meet all other requirements of this specification. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. All embankment material placed shall be tested. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, material placed for the benefit of roadway construction shall be compacted as follows: B. Structural areas (roadways, slabs, sidewalks, detention pond berms, and all areas within 5 feet of any of these) shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by the Standard Procter Density Test (ASTM D698) at a moisture content between optimum and +4% wet of optimum moisture content. C. Non-structural areas (as shown on plans) shall be compacted to 90% of the maximum dry density as computed by the Standard Procter Density Test (ASTM D698) at a moisture content between optimum and +4% wet of optimum moisture content. D. Tests shall be taken at a minimum of one test per every 4000 square feet of embankment per every 12" of depth. Additional tests shall be conducted at the engineer's request. All tests meeting these requirements shall be paid for by the owner. The cost of all tests failing these requirements shall be deducted from payment for this item. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. All project excavation shall conform to the requirements of this specification. The completed roadway shall conform to the established alignment, grades and cross sections. B. Clearing and grubbing in excavation areas must be completed prior to beginning excavation operations. C. Topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled for reuse on the proposed surface. Topsoil in excess of what may be used on the finished surface shall be removed from the site by the contractor at no additional charge. Topsoil shall be assumed to be 6" deep, but shall be excavated deep enough to remove all roots and other organic material. Contractor shall first check with City to determine if the City would like to stockpile the topsoil. D. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Engineer. Unsuitable roadway excavation and excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall be known as "Waste" and shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of at a location approved by the Engineer. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications E. Tf "Waste" material is to be placed on property owned by a third party, the City will need a letter from the third party stating acceptance of such fill. Fill will not be allowed in 100- year floodplain without approved permits. F. Waste areas shall be uniformly graded to drain with the outer limits feathered to blend with the existing ground Wa areas shall be seeded canned with suitable material o otherwise protected from long-term erosion G. During construction, the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in a condition to insure proper drainage at all times. Ditches and channels shall be constructed and maintained to avoid damage to the roadway section. H. Gravel or base material on all existing streets shall be salvaged and used to tie-in new construction with existing unpaved streets and gravel and flexible pavement driveways. Driveways will be adjusted to provide smooth connections to new construction and shall be restored to a condition equal to or better than that existing before work began. All salvageable asphalt, gravel or rock base material not used in the work shall remain the property of the city. Such unused materials, as designated by the Engineer, shall be hauled to the city stockpile or to other stockpile locations designated by the Engineer and closer to the project than the site above. 3.2 EMBANKMEN Y A. Prior to placing any embank-munt, all Clearing and Grubbing operations shall have been completed on the excavation sources and areas over which embankment is to be placed. B. Stump holes or other small excavations in the limits of the embankments shall be backfilled with suitable material and thoroughly compacted by approved methods before commencing embankment construction. The surface of the ground, including plowed loosened ground, or surface roughened by erosion or otherwise, shall be restored to approximately its original grade by blading or other methods. Where indicated on Plans or required by the Engineer, the ground surface thus prepared shall be compacted by sprinkling and rolling. C. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans the surface of all unpaved areas, other than rock, which are to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than four (4) inches. The loosened material shall be re -compacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. D. Where indicated on Plans or directed by the Engineer, the surface of hillsides to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than four (4) inches, or cut into steps before embankment materials are placed. The embankment shall then be placed in layers, as hereinafter specified, beginning at the low side in part width layers and increasing the widths as the embankment is raised. The material which has been loosened shall be re -compacted simultaneously with the embankment material placed at the same elevation. E. Layers of embankment may be formed by utilizing equipment which will spread the material as it is dumped, or they may be formed by being spread by blading from piles or windrows dumped from excavating or hauling equipment in such amounts that material is evenly distributed. F. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position. All such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking, or similar methods. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications G. Water required for sprinkling to bring the material to the moisture content necessary for maximum compaction shall be evenly applied. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure uniform moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as may be necessary. When water is required to achieve the required moisture content, the water must be from a source which does not contain any hazardous materials. Water removed from natural sources (ponds, lakes, rivers...) shall not impact any endangered species. Potable water sources shall be metered and paid by the contractor. H. Where embankments are to be placed adjacent to or over existing roadbeds, the roadbed slopes shall be plowed or scarified to a depth of not less than six (6) inches and the embankment built up in successive layers, as hereinafter specified, to the level of the old roadbed before its height is increased. Then, if directed, the top of the old roadbed shall be scarified and re -compacted with the next layers of the new embankment. The total depth of the scarified and added material shall not exceed the permissible depth of layer. I. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. Except as otherwise required by the Plans, all embankment shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade of the roadbed, unless otherwise specified, each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot from the center line of the roadbed to the outside. Super elevated curves will require that each layer shall be constructed to conform to the super elevation required by the governing standard. K. Embankments shall be constructed to the grade established by the Engineer and completed embankments shall correspond to the general shape of the typical sections shown on the Plans. Each section of the embankment shall correspond to the detailed section or slopes established by the Engineer. After completion of the roadway, it shall be continuously maintained to its finished section and grade until the project is accepted. 3.3 EARTH EMBANKMENTS A. Earth embankments shall be defined as those composed principally of material other than rock, and shall be constructed of accepted material from approved sources. B. Except as otherwise specified, earth embankments shall be constructed in successive layers for the full width of the individual roadway cross section and in such lengths as are best suited to the sprinkling and compaction methods utilized. C. Layers of embankment may be formed by utilizing equipment which will spread the material as it is dumped, or they may be formed by being spread by blading from piles or windrows dumped from excavating or hauling equipment in such amounts that material is evenly distributed. D. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position. All such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking, or similar methods. E. Water required for sprinkling to bring the material to the moisture content necessary for maximum compaction shall be evenly applied. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as may be necessary. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications F. All earth cuts, full or part width cuts in side hill which are not required to be excavated below sub -grade elevation for base and backfill, shall be scarified to a uniform depth of at least six (6) inches below grade. The material shall be mixed and reshaped by blading and then sprinkled and rolled in accordance with the requirements outlined above for earth embankments and to the same density as required for the adjacent embankment. 3.4 COMPACTION A. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density by suitable equipment. B. The depth of each layer, prior to compaction, shall not exceed that depth which will produce six (6) inch compacted thickness. Prior to and in connection with, the compaction operation each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary to obtain the required density and shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform compaction of the entire layer. C. For each layer of earth embankment and select material, it is the intent of this Specification to provide the density as required herein, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Embankment soils shall be sprinkled as required and compacted to the extent necessary to provide not less than nincty-five (95) percent of the density as determined in accordance with Texas Highway Department Test Method Tex-113-E. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with approved methods. D When the Contractor suites that each layer of earth embankment or select material is complete and ready for the next layer, tests as necessary will be made by the Engineer. If the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent work to obtain specified density. Such procedure shall be determined by, and subject to, the approval of the Engineer. E. Should the sub -grade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density, or finish before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be re -compacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. Excessive loss of moisture in the sub -grade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer of granular material. Excessive loss of moisture shall be construed to exist when the sub -grade soil moisture content is more than four (4) percent below the optimum for the density specified. F. In addition to the requirements in the Roadway Excavation item of the Specifications covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed, embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers shown on Plans, with such modifications as may be directed by the Engineer. The layer of embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than 0.10 foot from the established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select material layer. 3.5 PROOF ROLLING A. Prior to the placement of any material on native earth, the area shall be proof rolled. The native soil shall be rolled with sufficient intensity to bring out weak spots in the sub -grade which would otherwise fail during the construction process. The proof rolling shall be completed with equipment weighing at least 20 tons with tire pressures at least 50 and no more than 150 psi. A minimum of two coverage's of the proof roller will be required each Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications succeeding trip of the proof roller shall be offset by not greater than one tire width. Rollers shall be operated at speed between 2 and 6 miles per hour. Areas failing this test shall be excavated to a depth not to exceed two feet and horizontally ten feet beyond the failed area in all directions. Earth removed from this area may be replaced, stabilized, or "dried out" at the discretion of the engineer. No additional payment will be made for proof rolling prior to placement of embankment. END OF SECTION Approved—1I2009 BICS Unified Specifications SECTION 3123 23.53 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BACKFILL PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. At the discretion of the Engineer, Cement Stabilized Sand meeting the following specification may be allowed as trench backfill. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Cement -stabilized sand shall be considered a part of the backfill requirement for the unit installed and shall be considered subsidiary to the length of the unit bid. If the cement stabilized sand is indicated to be a separate construction item for bulk backfill then the cement stabilized sand shall be measured per cubic yard as indicated on the plans 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Design PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. CEMENT - Type I Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150. B. SAND - Clean durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C33, and the following requirements: 1. Classified as SW, SP, or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D2487. 2. Deleterious materials: a.) Clay lumps, ASTM C 142; less than 0.5 percent. b.) Lightweight pieces, ASTM C123; less than 5.0 percent. c.) Organic impurities, ASTM C40; color no darker than standard color. d.) Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. 3. Water: Potable water, free of oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter, or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Mixing plant inspections may be performed periodically. Material samples shall be collected and tested for change in material charauciistics. B. Random samples of delivered product will be taken in the field at point of delivery for each day of placement in the work area. Specimens will be prepared in accordance with ASTM D1632 and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D1633. C. The cement content may be tested at the discretion of the City. 1 Approved — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Design sand -cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 50 pounds per square inch in 48 hours and 100 pounds per square inch in 7 days when compacted to 95% in accordance to ASTM D558 and when cured in accordance with ASTM D1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D1633. Mix for general use shall contain a minimum of 1-'/z sacks of cement per cubic yard. Mix for use as sanitary sewer embedment within 9 feet of waterlines shall contain 2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Compact mix with moisture content between 0% to 2% above optimum. The maximum compressive strength in 7 days shall be 400 psi. Backfill that exceeds the maximum compressive strength shall be removed by the contractor. B. MIXING Thoroughly mix sand, cement, and water in proportions specified by the Design Requirements using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions. 2. Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected. C. PLACEMENT Place sand -cement mixture in 8-inch-thick lifts and compact to 95% of ASTM D558 unless other specified by the engineer. The moisture content during compaction shall be between 0% to 2% above optimum. Perform and complete compaction of sand - cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water at plant. Do not place or compact sand -cement mixture in standing or free water END OF SECTION Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 3123 33 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING All excavation will meet the most current OSHA Regulations. See SECTION 3150 50 — TRENCH SAFETY for trench safety requirements. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work to be performed under this Specification shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection with the excavating, trenching, and backfilling for pipelines as shown on the plans and as specified herein. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. All tieucli excavation, backfill and compaction are not considered pay items. Payment for these items shall be included in the unit price laid in the Proposal for each size of pipe at their respective depths. This unit price shall be full remuneration for performing the trench and backfill complete including grading, bell holes, sheeting, dewatering, tamping, and water soaking; and including the furnishing of sewer pipe, all equipment, labor, materials, power, teams, tools, and transportation necessary or incidental thereto; but not including tunneling, or boring, all of which will he raid for extra. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials for pipe embedment will meet TCEQ Regulations for depth of bury and class of pipe and City of Bryan Embedment Details as shown on the Plans. B. Concrete (For encasement or blocking) See SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE. Material shall conform to ASTM C94. The compressive strength of the concrete shall be at least 2,000 psi and shall contain at least four (4) sacks of cement per cubic yard. C. Cement stabilized sand. See SECTION 31 23 23.53 — CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BACKFILL. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Compaction tests for all backfill may be required for every 200 linear feet of trench and for each twelve -inches (12") vertically. Density tests, shall be measured as one unit for each test. The Owner shall pay for Geotechnical tests ordered that meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. Failed tests shall be charged to the Contractor. Refer to City Standard Trench Detail for compaction effort requirements. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. CONTROL OF WATER Provide sufficient pumping Cquipment, in good working order, available at all times to remove any water that accumulates in excavations. When the excavation crosses a drainage Approved — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications pathway, the contractor shall provide for means of alternate drainage. The discharge of dewatering equipment shall not cause damage to private or public property. B. SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING See SECTION 31 50 50 — TRENCH SAFETY. In caving ground, or in wet, saturated, or flowing materials, the contractor shall sheet, shore, or brace the sides of the trench so as to maintain the excavation properly in place. When excavations are made adjacent to existing building or other structures or in paved streets, particular care must be taken to adequately sheet, shore, and brace the sides of the excavation to prevent undermining of, or settlement beneath, the structures or pavement. Underpinning of adjacent structures or pavement shall be done by the Contractor at his own cost and expense, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and when required by the Engineer. The pavement shall be removed, the void satisfactorily refilled and compacted, and the pavement replaced by the Contractor. The entire expense of such removal and subsequent replacement thereof shall be borne by the Contractor. Sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall not be left in place, unless otherwise provided for in the contract or authorized by the Engineer. The removal of sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be done in such a manner as not to endanger or damage either new or existing structure, private or public properties, and so as to avoid cave-ins or sliding of the banks. All holes or voids left by the removal of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing shall be immediately and completely filled and compacted with suitable materials. C. GUARANTEE Guarantee the backfilling of excavation and trenches against settlement for a period of one (1) year after the final completion of the contract under which the work is performed. Make all repairs or replacements made necessary by settlement, including refilling, compacting, and reseeding or resodding the upper portion of the ditch and repairing broken or settled pavements, driveways, and sidewalks within five (5) days after notice from the Engineer. D. PREPARATION Site Preparation Prepare the construction site for construction operations by removing and disposing of all obstructions and objectionable materials in accordance with contract documents. 2. Alignment, Grade and Minimum Cover a. General The water and sewer mains shall be laid and maintained to lines and grades established by the plans and specifications with fittings, valves, hydrants, manholes and clean -outs at the required locations, unless otherwise pre -approved by the Engineer. Valve -operating stems shall be oriented in a manner to allow proper operation. Hydrants shall be installed plumb. b. Cut sheets shall be provided to the City's Inspector. The contractor shall determine the alignment and grade or elevation of the pipeline from offset stakes. The contractor shall also provide a continuous chalk line along the alignment of the trench for use by the operator of the excavating equipment. The contractor Approved—112009 BI S Unified Spee f cations shall provide a laser beam and grade pole to assist in grading the ditch to the proper elevation. c. Should the ditch be graded below the required elevation, bring subgrade to the required elevation with cement stabilized sand or rounded pca gravel. The use of excavating materials for this application will not be allowed. d. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by contract drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the pipe. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary for clearance beneath existing pipes, conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevations. 3. Prior Investigation Prior to excavation, investigation shall be made to the extent necessary to determine the location of existing underground structures and conflicts. Care should be exercised by the Contractor during excavation avoid damage to existing structures. 4. Unforeseen Obstructions Whcn obstructions that arc nut shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of work and interfere so that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer will alter the plans or order a deviation in line and grade or arrange for removal, relocation or reconstruction of the obstructions. 5. Clearance When crossing existing pipelines or other structures, alignment and grade shall be adjusted as necessary, with the approval of the Engineer, to provide clearance as required by federal, state or local regulations or as deemed necessary by the Engineer to prevent future damage or contamination of either structure. E. EXCAVATTON All excavation shall meet the most current OSHA regulations. Classification Excavation of trenches for pipelines is unclassified. Soils will be classified utilizing OSHA Standards and Regulations. The Contractor shall assume that the site contains the worse type of soils and make provisions for shoring the work area. 2. Trench Excavation a. General The trench shall be excavated to the required alignment, depth and width and in conformance with all federal, state and local regulations for the protection of the workmen. b. Trench Preparation i) Trench preparation shall proceed in advance of pipe installation for only as far as pipe will be laid that day. ii) The contractor shall keep the trench dry from both storm water and seepage from the sides of the trench. Discharge from any trench dewatering pumps shall be conducted to natural drainage channels, storm sewers or a pre- Approved—112009 4. 7 B/CS Unified Specifications approved reservoir. Do not discharge into any municipal sewer system without municipal approval. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning any storm drain system, which was used for dewatering discharge. iii) Excavated material shall be placed in a manner that will not obstruct the work nor endanger the workmen, obstruct sidewalks, driveways, or other structures and shall be done in compliance with federal, state, or local regulations. Pavement Removal Removal of pavement and road surfaces shall be a part of the trench excavation, and the amount removed shall depend upon the width of trench required for installation of the pipe and the dimensions of area required for the installation of valves, hydrants, specials, manholes or other structures. The dimensions of pavement removed shall not exceed the dimensions of the opening required for installation of pipe, valves, hydrants, specials, manholes and other structures by more than twelve (12") inches in any direction, unless otherwise required or pre -approved by the Engineer. Width See City Standard Bedding and Trench Detail. Bell Holes Holes for the bells shall be provided at each joint, but shall be no larger than necessary for joint assembly and assurance that the pipe barrel will lie flat on the trench bottom. Other than noted previously, the trench bottom shall be true and even in order to provide support for the full length of the pipe barrel, except that a slight depression may be provided to allow withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting tackle. Subgrade in Earth a. Where a firm and stable foundation for the pipe can be obtained in the natural soil, and where special embedment is not shown on the plans, or specified herein, carefully and accurately trim the bottom of the trench to fit the lower portion of the pipe barrel. The bottom of the trench shall be firm, stable and free of standing water. b. If water is allowed to collect in an originally dry trench after a reasonable time has passed to complete the embedment of the pipe, as determined by the Engineer, the contractor shall place a minimum of four (4") inches of clean rounded pea gravel in the ditch and pump out all accumulated water before placing the pipe. No deleterious materials will be allowed in the gravel. No extra compensation will be allowed for this work. c. Where wet, soft, or spongy material is encountered in the excavation at subgrade level, the contractor shall remove such material at the direction of the Engineer and replace it with crushed stone of sufficient quantity such that when fully compacted, the subgrade is firm and stable. Subgrade in Rock a. When excavation of rock is encountered, all rock shall be removed to provide a clearance of at least six (6") inches below and on each side of all pipe, valves and fittings for pipe sizes twenty-four (24") inches or smaller, and nine (9") inches for pipe sizes thirty (30") inches and larger. When excavation is completed, the proper embedment material shall be placed on the bottom of the trench to the previously mentioned depths, leveled and tamped. 4 Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications b. These clearances and bedding procedures shall also be observed for pieces of concrete or masonry and other debris or subterranean structures, such as masonry walls, piers or foundations that may be encountered during excavation. c. The installation procedures specified in this section shall be followed when gravel formations containing loose boulders greater than eight (8") inches in diameter are encountered. d. In all cases, the specified clearances shall be maintained between the bottom of all pipe and appurtenances and any part, projection or point of rock, boulder or stones of sufficient size and placement, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, could cause a fulcrum point. F. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT The Contractor shall place 2,000 psi concrete encasement under and around pipe as shown on the embedment detail, and provide necessary anchors to prevent the pipe from floating out of place. The contractor shall remove and relay any pipes that are floated out of proper position G. BACKFILLING General a. The Contractor shall not begin backfilling until approval has been obtained from the Inspector. Backfilling includes refilling and consolidation of the fill in trenches and excavations up to the natural ground surface or road grade. b. Backfill shall be accomplished in accordance with the specified laying condition as shown on the plans. 2. Backfill Material a. All backfill material shall meet latest edition of ASTM D2321 unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. b. If excavated material is indicated on the drawings or specified for backfill, and there is a deficiency due to a rejection of part thereof, the contractor shall provide the required amount of sand, gravel or other pre -approved material. Do not leave trenches open overnight without backfilling to the natural ground level. Steel plates (1/2" in thickness) may be used to cover open trenches only with the approval of the Engineer. 4. Compaction Compaction requirements are as specified on the plans. END OF SECTTON Approved—112009 BI S Unified Specifications SECTION 3125 13 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section consists of the installation and maintenance of all erosion siltation control devices, wash down areas, or seeding and sodding applications necessary to effectively prevent storm water pollution of adjoining or downstream areas that may occur as a direct or indirect result of the construction of this project. The contractor is responsible for creating and maintaining the storm water pollution prevention plan by utilizing the base sheets and narrative provided in the bid documents. The contractor is also responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent (NOI) and Notice of Termination (NOT) and conducting inspections as required by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ.) The required forms for these activities are included in the bid documents. The engineer will provide: I . Base Sheets for Erosion, Control Plan (ECP) 2. The Narrative for the Sturin Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) The contractor will generate, submit, and maintain Iher 1. EC;P 2. SWPPP 3. NOI (if required) 4. NOT (if required) 1.2 MEASURE,MENT AND PAYMENT Frosion and Sediment Control is measured as a lump sum item. The work and materials as prescribed by this item will be paid on the following schedule: A. 25% of the bid value shall be paid when the erosion control plan is fully detailed and implemented, the NOI (if required) is submitted to both TCEQ and the City Inspector, and all of the initial erosion control devices have been installed and are in working order. B. 50% of the value will be prorated for the installation and maintenance of erosion control devices during the course of construction as a percent of the total contract value. If the sediment trapping devices on the site appear to be un-maintained, no payment of this portion of the item shall be paid. C. 25% will be paid at the completion of construction when the site is stabilized, the NOT is submitted to both TCEQ and the City Inspector and all erosion control devices are removed from the site. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The contractors shall submit the initial erosion control plan along with the NOI (if required) prior to receiving a notice to proceed. B. If required, the Contractor is responsible for filing a "Notice of Intent" (NOI.) The contractor shall comply with all TCEQ and EPA regulations and pay the filing fees associated with the regulations. Fees associated with these regulations are subsidiary to the bid item Storm Water Prevention. The forms are available at: Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications htW://www.tceg.state.tx.us/assets/publiclpermittin waterqualiiy/fonnsl20022.pdf htty : //www. tcecl. state. tx. us/assets/public/nermittin P-/watero uality/forms/20023 . ndf C. Said NOI must be postmarked two days before construction begins. NOI's and NOT's shall be submitted to the address shown on the forms. It is the Contractor's responsibility to file and provide the owner a copy of the Notice of Termination (NOT) at the completion of the project. PART 2 — PRODUCTS N/A PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to utilize whatever techniques are necessary to address erosion problems as they occur during construction. B. Siltation control and sediment trapping devices shall be installed prior to site clearing, grading or utility construction operations. All devices should be positioned so as to effectively remove silt from storm water before it leaves the site. Of particular concern, are gravel or stone blankets placed at construction traffic exits and entrances. These controls should be closely monitored to see that they trap sediment before it reaches the existing street and drainage system. C. Construction activities should be phased to expose a minimum of graded area at one time. Earth exposed by the construction process shall be re -vegetated every two weeks until vegetation is established. Re -vegetation shall require seeding, hydromulching or sodding. Fresh growth of vegetation shall eliminate the need for additional re -vegetation but does not constitute stabilization. D. Should a construction process remove any portion of the perimeter controls, the controls should be replaced in accordance with the TCEQ guidelines. Prior to the completion of the project, all bare areas shall be re -vegetated with a cellulose fiber hydromulch seeding process or sodded. E. Siltation control devices placed at storm drain inlets and culverts shall be removed by the Contractor once the site has been stabilized. 3.2 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION A. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the erosion control requirements of TCEQ. The site superintendent, or his representative, shall make a visual inspection of all structural and/or natural controls and newly stabilized areas as required by TCEQ, especially after a rainfall to insure that all controls are maintained and properly functioning. Any damaged controls shall be repaired prior to the end of the work day, including re -seeding and mulching or re -sodding if necessary. All inspections shall be documented with a written report. Reports shall include the effectiveness of erosion control measures, construction activities conducted since the last report and their location. Reports shall be maintained by the Contractor along with the Erosion Control Plan per the TCEQ guidelines. B. The contractor is responsible for the ECP. The contractor shall continuously update the plan with all changes. Areas already stabilized shall be noted on the plan. All sediment trapping devices shall be installed as soon as practical after the area has been disturbed (never more than 14 days). All sediment trapping devices shall be cleaned when the sediment level reaches 25% capacity. Sediment shall be disposed of by spreading on site or hauling away if not suitable for fill. Approved—112009 R/r',C Unified Spcciftcatiaiia C. The Contractor shall be iesponsible for any and all materials, improvements, and maintenance activities necessary to keep dust, silt, and mud from leaving the work zone, including being tracked by vehicles traveling throughout the zone. D. Should, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor fail to prevent the escape of dust or contain silt and mud within the project, after due notification by the City Representative, Owner forces will be used to clean up those affected areas, and the cost of same will be deducted from the contract. E. Prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall verify that no dust, silt, or mud exists within the work zone in deposits deeper than two inches (2") as a result of the contractor's containment procedures. Should the Contractor claim final completion without removing such deposits, they will be removed by Owner forces and the cost of which shall be deducted from the contract. END OF SECTION SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisiuns of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil and wood treatment with termiticide. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install a chemical barrier to afford the structure protection from ter- mites and other common ground insects. B. Comply with all applicable regulatory and environmental requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product. 1. Include the EPA -Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Pivducl Certificates: For termito cuntrol products, from manufacturer. D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 31 i 1 16r 1 APRIL 11, 2011 TERMITE CONTROL 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of au- thorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in juris- diction where Project is located, and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devic- es according to the EPA -Registered Label. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water sa- turated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA -Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concret- ing operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs before construction. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Appli- cator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterra- nean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' con- tinuing service including monitoring, inspection, and re -treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State servic- es, obligations, conditions, terms for agreement period, and terms for future renewal options. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA -Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent ter- mite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 313116- 2 APRIL 11, 2011 TERMITE CONTROL rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, ac- cording to product's EPA -Registered Label. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; Prevail. 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, acid conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installa- tion, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Cucnply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having juris- diction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before begin- ning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and foot- ings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if rec- ommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preven- ter, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having juris- diction and with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products. 3.04 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Apply toxicant to soil in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. The quantities described in the paragraph are minimums and shall be adjusted as deemed necessary by the treatment agency to provide the required protection. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 313116- 3 APRIL 11, 2011.TERMITE CONTROL B. Under all building slabs apply treatment at a ratio of one and a half (1-1/2) gallons per 10 sq. ft., prior to placing of vapor barrier. C. Apply to a depth of 1 ft. and to a width of one foot along each side of the founda- tion walls and around piers where applicable around utility openings for pipes, con- duits or other slab penetrations at a rate of 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet. Chemical shall be mixed with soil as it is being placed in the trench. 1. The guarantee shall state that the application was made at the concentration, ratio, and methods which comply with these Specifications. 2. Re -treatment upon evidence of subterranean termite activity, shall be at no charge to the Owner and in accordance with accepted trade practice. D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Pro- vide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal bar- rier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distri- bute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground -supported slab construc- tion, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treat- ment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. F. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. G. Post warning signs in areas of application. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grad- ing, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion, remove debris related to this work from the site. END OF SECTION 313116 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 313116- 4 APRIL 11, 2011 TERMITE CONTROL Approved—112009 SECTION 3150 00 TRENCH SAFETY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION B/CS Unified Specifications A. The work specified under this section requires the Contractor to provide for the safety of the workmen in strict compliance with 29 CFR Part 1926 1993 (Revised as of July 1, 1996 of latest Edition or Revision to) Excavations and Applicable Subparts. The submission of a "TRENCH SAFETY PLAN" which shall fully satisfy the requirements of this specification is w(prired prior to a notice to proceed to start the project. 1.2 MEASUREMENT A. MEASUREMENT Measure "Trench Safety" as shown on the bid proposal. Shoring of trench at manholes and other unusual structures to be included in this coM B. PAYMENT Pay for "Trench Safety" as shown on the bid proposal. Payment to be full compensation for all work described herein. There will be no increase in the Contract price because of the incorporation of CONTRACTOR'S Trench Safety Plan or CONTRACTOR's detailed plans and specifications for the trench safety system into the bid documents and the Construction Contract. There will be no increase in the Contract price because of modifications to CONTRACTOR's plan and/or the CONTRACTOR'S detail plans and specifications for the trench safety system, whether or not the result of unforeseen or differing site or soil conditions. "Trench Safety Plan" shall be included as part of the "Trench Safety" bid item and shall not be paid for as a separate pay item. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. CERTIFICATES Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance," stating that the devices (trench boxes, speed shoring, etc.) to be used for trench safety comply with the requirements of this specification. The certificate should show the design assumptions and limitations of the device and should be sealed by an engineer registered and licensed to practice in the state of Texas. B. TRENCH SAFETY PLAN Submit a detailed TRENCH SAFETY PLAN for all work areas. Calculations shall be provided for any areas beyond the capacity of the trench box or speed shoring and sealed by an engineer registered and licensed to practice in the state of Texas. This plan shall include evacuation routes for personnel. C. COMPETENT PERSON Contractor shall have a "Competent Person" with regard to OSHA standards, on site at all times. Competent person is generally defined as an individual who, by training and experience, is luiuwledgeable of applicable standards, capable of identifying hazards, is Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications designated by the employer, and has the authority to take actions as needed. Contractor shall provide written proof showing the competent person(s) for the work being performed. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. MATERIALS 1. Timber Trench sheeting materials shall be full size, a minimum of 2 inches in thickness, solid and sound, free from weakening defects such as loose knots and splits. 2. Sheet Piling Steel sheet piling shall conform to one or more of ASTM A328/328M, ASTM A572/A572M/ ASTM A690/A690M material requirements. 3. Structural Steel Steel for stringers (wales) and cross braces shall conform to ASTM A588. 4. Trench Boxes Steel trench Boxes to be constructed of steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M. Connecting bolts used to conform to ASTM A307. Welds shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1. 5. Miscellaneous Miscellaneous materials to be utilized shall conform to applicable ASTM standards. B. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A36/A36M 1997 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A307 1997 Revision A -Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile length ASTM A328/A328M 1996 (REV) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Piling ASTM A572/A572M 1997 Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Columbium -Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality ASTM A588/A588M 1997 Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Steel With 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 inch (100 mm) thick ASTM A690/A690M 1994 Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Steel H-Pipes and Sheet Piling for Use in Marine Environments American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS) AWS D1.1 1998 Structural Welding Code -Steel Occupation Safety And Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR Part 1926 1993 (Revised as of July 1, 1996 of latest Edition or Revision to) Excavations and Applicable Subparts 2 Approved 1,12009 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. GENERAL.: RICS Unrtted Spec(flcations The trench safety system shall be constructed, installed and maintained in accordance with the Trench Safety Plan as outlined in 131.03. Bed and backfill pipe to a point at least one (1) foot ab'uvu tup of pipe or other embedded items prior to removal of any portion of trench safety system. Bedding and backfill shall be in accordance to other applicable Specification Sections. Backfllling and removal of trench supports shall be in accordance with Contractor's Trench Safety Plan. Removal of trench safety system to be accomplished in such a manner to cause no damage to pipe or other embedded items. Remove no braces or trench supports until all personnel have evacuated the trench. The trench shall be backfilled to within 5 feet of natural ground prior to removal of entire trench safety system. B. SUPERVISION: Provide competent supervisory personnel at each trench while work is in progress to ensure Contractor's methods, procedures, equipment and materials pertaining to the safety systems in this Section are sufficient to meet requirements of OSHA Standards. C. INSPECTION: The CONTRACTOR shall make daily inspection of trench safety system to ensure that the system meets OSHA requirements. Daily inspection shall be made by competent personnel. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, all work in the trench is to cease until necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel entering trench. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain permanent record of daily inspections. D. TIMBER SHEETING Timber sheeting and size of uprights, stringers (wales,) and cross bracing to be installed in accordance with the TRENCH SAFETY PLAN. Place cross braces in true horizontal position, spaced vertically, and secure to prevent sliding, falling or kick outs. Cross braces to be placed at each end of stringers (wales) in addition to other locations required. Cross braces and stringers (wales) to be placed at splices of uprights, in addition to other locations required. E. STFEL SHEET PILING Steel sheet piling of equal or greater strength may be used in lieu of timber trench shoring shown in the OSHA tables (proposed standards). Drive steel sheet piling to a least minimum depth below trench bottom as recommended by CONTRACTOR's Registered Licensed Professional Engineer providing design. Place cross braces in true horizontal position and spaced vertically. Secure to prevent sliding, falling, or kick outs. Cross braces to be placed at each end of stringers (wales), in addition to other locations required. F. MAINTENANCE OF SAFETY SYSTEM The safety system to be maintained in the condition as shown on the Trench Excavation and Shoring Safety Plan as designed by the CONTRACTOR's Registered Licensed Professional ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precaution to ensure the safety systems are not damaged during their use. If at any time during its use a safety system is damaged, personnel to be immediately removed from the trench excavation area and the safety system repaired. The CONTRACTOR is to take all necessary precautions to ensure no load-, except those provided for in the plan, are imposed upon the trench safety system. END OF SECTION SECTION 316329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: In this section, while not all inclusive but listed as a guide, is as follows: 1. Drilling and cleaning pier holeb 2. Pumping water if required and removing spoil. 3. Casing pier holes. 4. Placing concrete and reinforcing steel. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 2 Division 03 Section "Concrete Reinforcment." 3. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 1.03 BASIS FOR PAYMENT A. Contract price shall be based on the number of piers, and with a base length as shown on the drawings. In addition, the Contractor shall quote unit prices for the following: 1. Unit price per lineal foot for piers longer or shorter than base lengths. 2. Unit prices per lineal foot for casing longer or shorter than base lengths. Measurement for payment shall be from top of pier to top of bearing stratum. 3. Unit prices shall include all labor, materials, equipment, overhead and fee for drilled piers and casing complete including removal of soil. B. Adjustments to the Contract shall be based on total linear feet greater than or less than the sum of the base lengths of each pier size. Additional penetration in the bearing stratum greater than the specified penetration shall not be included in determination of increases or decreases of pier lengths related to adjustments of the Contract. C. The cost of providing temporary casings is to be included in the base bid for drilled piers. COLLEGE S IWIION FIRE STATION NO.6 316329 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 1. If casings are not required, the cost will be deducted from the contract based on the unit price. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pier drilling, reinforcing and concreting shall be performed in accordance with the Specifications of the Association of Drilled Shaft Contractors. B. Work shall be accomplished by companies and personnel experienced in drilled shaft work with a minumum of three projects in similar soil and rock conditions and with similar shaft sizes, depths and quantities. C. Protection of concrete in extreme weather: 1. Cold weather - comply with ACI306. 2. Hot weather - comply with ACI305. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Work: Refer to Division 03: Section - Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Division 03: Section - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1. Support and alignment accessories to facilitate alignment of steel reinforcing in predrilled pier foundations and protect steel from contact with earth as manufactured by Pieresearch, 1602 Industrial Court, Arlington, TX 76011; 1- 800-342-2409. a. Material to be installed per manufacturer's specifications and as shown on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DRILLING A. Drill pier holes of specified diameters to the bearing strata shown on the drawings and as confirmed by the laboratory representative at the site. Penetrate the bearing strata and found footings as specified on the Drawings. B. No payment will be made for extra length when pier shafts are excavated to a greater depth than required or authorized by Engineer, due to over -drilling. C. Locate piers within V maximum lateral variation to the centerlines dimensioned on the drawings. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 316329 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS D. Drill holes vertical. Piei holes out of plumb more than 1" in ten feet or 2" maximum will be rejected. E. Excavate holes for closely spaced piers and. those occurring in fragile stratas only after adjacent shafts are filled with concrete. F. If tolerances given are exceeded, provide corrective construction as acceptable, to Architect. G. Remove excess cuncrete at the top of the piers beyund the linuts of the pier shaft diameter. 3.02 DRAINAGE AND PUMPING A. Furnish necessary pumps, power and attendance required to .keep the holes free from standing water at all times, whether from surface water or from underground at no extra cost to the Owner. B. Do not pour directly into any excavations where water is standing. if the place of deposit cannot be successfully pumped dry, pour through a trenue with its outlet end near the bottom of the place of deposit. C. Place reinforcing steel cages accurately in place and hold in position during placement of concrete. 3.03 STEEL AND CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Fabricate and erect reinforcing as one continuous unit. Place reinforcing steel cages accurately and synurietrically about axis of shaft and hula securely in position during placement of concrete. B. Install bolsters and alignment sleds in nliniiin.irii number specified to support alit] align reinforcing steel cage in shaft. Assure that tie wires are properly installed to prevent displacement during concrete operations. Reposition units not in proper locations. C. Place dowels and/in auchor bolts as detailed accurately in position and provide, holding devices to maintain in exact location with templates. D. Concrete placed in pier holes shall be directed through a tremie, hopper, or equivalent. Placement of concrete shall be vertical through the center of the shaft without hitting the shies of the pie] ur relnforcenient to (educe the pussslluhty of segregation of aggregates. Place concrete in each pier hole as soon as possible on the same day after drilling and immediately following inspection and acceptance. Place concrete continuously without interruption. Vibrate the upper 5'-0" (min.). COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 316329 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS E. Maintain a sufficient head of concrete to prevent reduction of shaft diameter by earth pressure and to prevent extraneous material from mixing with fresh concrete. F. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain a head of concrete at least 5' above casing bottom. G. Stop concrete at cut off elevation shown, screed and leave surface level. If cut off level is above grade elevation, provide formwork and extend shaft to required elevation. H. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes. 1. In cold weather, comply with ACI 306. 2. In hot weather, comply with ACI 305. 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. Soil and rock from pier excavations shall be disposed of off -site by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 316329 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 316329 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS Revised—112009 R/C S Unified Spar-ifirations SECTION 3178 00 PIPE BORING, JACKING, TUNNELING AND ENCASEMENT (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRTPTTON A. The work to be performed under this Specification shall consist of furnishing and installing all materials and equipment and performing all labor required to install pipelines crossing under highways, railroads, and streets by boring, jacking, and tunneling, as specified herein. All sewer bores will be accomplished by dry mechanical bore unless otherwise pre -approved by the Engineer. Water line bores may utilize the wet boring technique. All carrier pipes within the encasement conduit shall be restrained joint pipe of the type specified on the plans, or pre -approved by the Engineer. B. When the work per this item falls within a TxDOT or Railroad right of way, the stricter of the applicable standards apply. This requirement includes all insurance, notification, permitting, signage, etc. required by the right of way owner. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. MEASUREMENT 1. Openings provided by boring, jacking, and tunneling (including carrier pipe) will be measured by the linear foot along the centerline of the opening, as measured from end of pipe to end of pipe placed by boring, jacking and tunneling. There will not be any classification for payment according to depth. 2. Concrete support slab in the pits and all other work necessary to meet the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, railroad company, County, and City will not be measured. 3. Openings provided by boring, jacking and tunneling will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot. The unit price bid for boring jacking and tunneling shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, labor, tools, carrier pipe, carrier pipe restraint, casing spacers, equipment, pits, concrete support slabs and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on encasement pipe. B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance" to this part of the specifications for materials tarnished for the prujeut. C. The Contractor or subcontractor performing the work described under this section shall demonstrate technical skill and experience in previous work of this nature. Work . experience shall be submitted to the Engineer. D. Casing spacer data sheets demonstrating compliance with this specification. Revised — 112009 PART2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS B/CS Unified Specifications Steel Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe, Reinforced Concrete Pipe, and PVC Pipe may be used as encasement material, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The nominal inside diameter of the encasement pipe shall be as indicated below, unless otherwise shown on the plans. A. STEEL PIPE Encasement pipe shall conform to ASTM Specification A134, Mild Carbon Steel, A139, Grade A, or AWWA C200-91 Grade B, butt -welded joints with entire circumference welded by a certified welder shall be in accordance with AWWA C200-86 Section 3. All steel casing shall have a wall thickness as shown in the table below: Carrier Pipe Nominal Diameter Casing Pipe Nominal Diameter Casing Pipe Minimum Thickness 6" 14" 3/8" 8" 16" 3/8" 10" 18" 3 8" 12" 20" 3/8" 16" 24" 3/8" 18" 30" 1/2" 24" 36" 1/2" Casing Pipe Thickness for Railroad crossings shall be a minimum of 1/2-inch thick regardless of diameter. Nominal diameter of casing pipe may be larger as needed for restrained joint pipe. B. DUCTILE -IRON PIPE Encasement pipe shall conform to the current AWWA C150 and C151 standards. Pipe shall be thickness Class 250 or greater, unless otherwise shown on the plans. C. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE Encasement pipe shall conform to the current ANSI C-76 standards. Pipe shall be Class III or IV, unless otherwise shown on the plans. D. PVC PIPE Encasement pipe shall conform to the current ASTM D2241 or AWWA C905 standards. Pipe shall be DR 26 or SDR 26, unless otherwise shown on the plans. PVC pipe shall be used only when specified on the plans. E. GROUT Grout shall be in accordance with SECTION 04 05 12 — MORTAR AND GROUT. F. CASING SPACERS Stainless Steel casing spacers shall be required in all casing pipes and shall be manufactured by Cascade Products, Advance Products & Systems, Inc model no. SSI8 or approved equal. The casing spacers shall be affixed to the carrier pipe at a spacing of 6'8" or per the manufacturers recommendations if less than 6'8". G. END SEALS End seals shall be 1/8" thick synthetic rubber secured with stainless steel banding straps. Other end seals shall be constructed only as pre -approved by the engineering inspector. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES Where grades or elevations are shown on the plans for the pipeline to be installed by boring, jacking, and tunneling operations, maximum deviation of plan elevation shall be 0.2 foot. The maximum deviation of alignment over the length of the bore shall be 0.2 foot. The Engineer shall determine the corrective action to be taken for tolerances above those stated in this specification. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. ENCASEMENT REQUIREMENTS Encasement pipe shall be required for all water mains crossing major collector and arterial street crossings. Encasement pipe for sewer mains shall be placed as required by the City Engineer. The casing pipe shall extend two feet (2') beyond the back of curb. Encasement pipes may be instal led by open cut with the approval of the engineer. B. BORE AND TUNNEL PITS Unless more stringent requirements regarding location of bore and tunnel pits are noted on the plans, or are required by TXDOT, Railroad, County, or City, to conform to the requirements that tbllow: 1. The Conduit to be installed by boring, jacking and tunneling shall extend to distances as shown in the Standard Details. 2. If necessary to prevent cave-ins, sheet, shore, or brace the pit in accordance with OSHA regulations. All pits shall be covered with 1/2" thick steel plates. Steel plates shall be on -site prior to excavating the pit. If bore pits are too big to cover with steel plates, Contractor shall install chain link fence, completely and securely, around exposed pit to a height of 6 feet. 3. General: Unless otherwise noted, extend auger hole 10 feet beyond edge of pavement, railroad tie, or other structure. The hole is to be bored mechanically, using a pilot hole. An approximate 2-inch hole shall be bored the entire length of the crossing and shall be checked for line and grade on the opposite end of the bore from the work pit. This pilot hole shall serve as the centerline of the larger diameter hole to be bored. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted only to the extent to lubricate cuttings, jetting will not be permitted. In unconsolidated soil formations, a gel -forming colloidal drilling fluid consisting of at least 10 percent of high-grade carefully processed bentonite may be used to consolidate cuttings of the bit, seal the walls of the hole, and furnish lubrication for subsequent removal of cuttings and installation of the pipe immediately thereafter. Overcutting in excess of one inch shall be remedied by pressure grouting the entire length of the installation. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR DRY BORING A. All sewer bores will be accomplished by dry mechanical bore unless otherwise pre - approved by the Engineer. B. Only workmen experienced in boring operations shall perform the work. Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications C. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will NOT be permitted except for a minor required amount of bentonite solution for cutting head. D. The casing pipe shall be placed in the bore hole simultaneously while boring is being performed. Installing the encasement conduit immediately by pulling it in place from opposite the boring machine or by jacking the conduit through the bore is not acceptable. Take proper care to secure the joints of the conduit as subsequent sections are installed by welding joints. Provide a steel rail or timber cradle in the pit to support and guide the conduit in its installation. E. If after completion of the installation of the conduit, there is more than one inch (1") clearance between the outside of the barrel of the conduit and the wall of the bore, grouting of these voids will be required. If during construction of the bore, a cave-in occurs within the bore, grouting of the voids between the conduit and the walls of the bore will be required throughout the length of the bore. F. Conform to the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad Company, County, or City having jurisdiction over the right-of-way involved, as to details of construction methods and time of construction. All work necessary to meet the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad Company, County, or City will be considered incidental to the installation of the pipeline in the right-of-way. The Contractor shall abide by the more stringent of these specifications, or the specifications of the regulatory agencies. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR WET BORING A. All sewer bores will be accomplished by dry mechanical bore unless otherwise pre - approved by the Engineer. (see above) B. Only workmen experienced in boring operations shall perform the work. A pilot hole must be successfully completed to the satisfaction of the engineer prior back reaming the bore. C. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted only to lubricate cuttings. Jetting will not be permitted. In consolidated soil formations, a gel -forming colloidal drilling fluid consisting of at least ten (10%) percent of high-grade bentonite may be used to consolidate cuttings of the bit, seal the walls of the hole, and lubricate removal of cuttings and installation of the pipe immediately thereafter. D. While boring is being performed, install the encasement conduit immediately by pulling it in place from opposite the boring machine or by jacking the conduit through the bore. Encasement conduit may be placed after the boring operation is complete, if permission is obtained from TXDOT, the railroad company, the City, or the County. Take proper care to secure the joints of the conduit as subsequent sections are installed, by use of cables or welding joints. Provide a steel rail or timber cradle in the pit to support and guide the conduit in its installation. E. If after completion of the installation of the conduit, there is more than one inch (1") clearance between the outside of the barrel of the conduit and the wall of the bore, grouting of these voids will be required. If during construction of the bore, a cave-in occurs within the bore, grouting of the voids between the conduit and the walls of the bore will be required throughout the length of the bore. F. Grouting material and equipment shall be on the jobsite before beginning installation of the conduit, in order that the grouting around the encasement conduit is to be started immediately after pipe is in place. Re►lised - 11: 0(19 B/CS United Specifications G. i ontorm to the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad Company, County, or City having jurisdiction over the right-of-way involved, as to details of construction methods and time of construction. All work necessary to meet the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation, Railroad Company, County, or City will be considered incidental to the installation of the pipeline in the right-of-way. The Contractor shall abide by the more stringent of these specifications, or the specifications of the regulatory agencies. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR JACIUNG A. Unless otherwise specified, the methods and equipment used in jacking conduit shall be the Contractor's option, provided that the proposed method is pre -approved by the Engineer. Such approval, however, shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for making a satisfactory installation meeting the criteria set forth herein. B. If, after cornplction of the installation of the conduit, there is more than one (1") inch clearance between the outside of the barrel of the conduit and the wall of the tunnel, the Contractor shall completely grout the conduit in place throughout its entire length. If, during the jacking operatiuu, a cave-in occurs, the Contractor shall grout the entire conduit in place throughout its entire, length. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR TUNNELING A. Excavate the tunnel in such a manner and to such dimensions that will permit placing of the proper supports in accordance with OSHA Regulations necessary to protect the excavation. Make adequate provisions for the safety and health of the workmen. Use only air or electric powered equipment in the tunnel. Provide adequate illumination and ventilation. B. Excavate only enough earth to allow installation of the tunnel liner plate. Remove earth from within tunnel and install the next section of tunnel liner plates. C. After completion of the tunnel, or at intervals directed by the Engineer, grout the entire void between the tunnel lining. If after completion of the tunnel there are sags in invert of the liner that exceed 0.2 feet.of a -straight line projected through the tunnel, grout the invert to eliminate the sags. ;yrr,rs ; 3.6 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR BELL & SPIGOT ENCASEMENT PIPE A. Where pipe using bell and spigot joints is installed as encasement pipe, completely grout the voids between the outside of the encasement pipe and the inner wall of the bore or tunnel throughout the length of the pipe. If directed by the City Engineer, the joints shall be welded to prevent the joints from slipping with respect to each other. 3.7 SUPPORT OF PIPES ACROSS BORE OR TUNNEL PITS A. After completion of the bore or tunnel and installation of the carrier pipe with the bore or tunnel, remove all loose earth and debris from the pit down to undisturbed earth. Pour a continuous 2,000 psi concrete or cement stabilized sand support under the carrier pipe from the edge of the bore or tunnel to the first joint in the trench past the end of the pit. The concrete support shall be brought up to the horizontal centerline of the pipe. Revised—112009 3.8 CARRIER PIPE B/CS Unified Specifications A. Carrier pipe may be pushed or pulled through the completed encasement pipe. Casing spacers by Cascade Waterworks or pre -approved equivalent should be placed on the carrier pipe to insure approximate centering within the encasement pipe and to prevent damage during installation. Care must be exercised in order to avoid metal -to -metal contact. The ends of the encasement pipe will be sealed with rubber seals and stainless steel bands. In order to avoid the transfer of earth and live loads to the carrier pipe, the space between the carrier pipe and encasement pipes shall not be filled completely. B. All carrier pipe installed within a casing shall be restrained. The restrained section shall extend at least five feet (5') beyond both ends of the casing pipe. Lock joint pipe, retainer glands, or restrainer gaskets may be used for this application. C. When ductile iron pipe is used for the carrier pipe, all ductile iron pipe shall be poly - wrapped per the specifications. 3.9 SPOILS A. Spoil locations shall be pre -approved by the engineering inspector. When no suitable location for spoil can be found on site, the contractor shall be required to haul and dispose of this material at no extra cost. Where spoils are to be placed on parking areas (asphalt or concrete), sidewalks, or other paved surfaces, the spoils shall be placed on a barrier to prevent the soil from embedding into the paved surface. END OF SECTION SECTION 320127 - CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentaiy Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cementitious stampable overlays for concrete pavement 2. Cementitious stampable overlays for stained decorative concrete pavement B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for cast -in -place concrete pavement with Cementitious stampable overlays. 2. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for interior concrete with Ce- mentitious stampable overlays. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit acwiding to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sec- tions. B. Product Data: For each product indicated. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts. D. Sample Panels: 2 by 2 feet (610 by 610 mm) to demonstrate finish, color, and tex- ture of Cementitious stampable overlay. E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer specified in Quality Assurance Article, including names and addresses of completed projects, architects, and own- ers. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Two year's experience with projects of similar scope and quality. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Three year's experience manufacturing products re- quired. C. Source Limitations: Obtain products from same source throughout Project. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION N0. 6 320127 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY D. Field Samples: Locate at site and obtain approval before start of final work. Field samples shall be minimum 4 by 4 feet (1.2 by 1.2 m) E. Demonstrate range of finishes and workmanship, including sealing procedures. F. Approved field samples set quality standards for comparison with remaining work. G. Remove field samples when directed H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packaging with labels intact. B. Store in clean, dry and protected location, according to manufacturer's require- ments. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with cementitious stampable overlay manu- facturer's instructions. B. Do not apply overlay cementitious topping if air temperature and concrete substrate temperature are not between 45 to 85 deg F before and during installation. C. In hot weather, install cementitious stampable overlay in early morning or when surfaces are shaded. D. Keep bagged products out of sunlight. Use cool water; do not use water from hot watering hoses. E. Protect cementitious stampable overlay from rain for 24 hours. F. In windy weather, protect adjacent construction from over -spray during application of sealers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTHORIZED APPLICATOR: A. Tom Jackson Exquisite Concrete Designs 979-218-0174 2.02 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY MATERIALS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 320127 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY A. Cetuciititious Stampahle Overlay: Polyiner-modified cementitious overlay designed for texturing stable, non-moving concrete pavements. B. Product: Butterfield Color® T1000TM Stampablc Overlay. C. Primer: Butterfield ColorC) 'T 1000TM Primer. D. Water: Potable. 2.03 INTEGRALLY -COLORED OVERLAY MATERIALS A. Integral Concrete Coloratit: ASTM C 979, factory -measured powdered mix, con- sisting of nonfading finely ground synthetic mineral -oxide coloring pigments and water reducing wetting agent. 1. Product: Butterfield Color® T1000TM Color Pack. 2. Colors: As selected by Architect. 2.04 STAIN MATERIALS A. Penetrating Reactive Stain: .As specified in Division 3 Section "Chemically Stained Concrete." 2.05 IMPRINTING TOOLS A. Stamp Mats: Semi -rigid polyurethane math with projected texture and ridged under- side capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns to plastic cementitious stampa- ble overlay. Include texture skins matching stamp mat textures for texturing areas that cannot be reached with stamping mats. 1. Manufacturer: Butterfield Color@. 2. Pattern: As selected by Architect. 3. Pattern: BST Herringbone, brick. D. Accessory Stamp Tools: Aluminum detailing tools capable of imprinting joints and dressing stamped joints of plastic cementitious stampable overlay. 1. Product: Butterfield Color® Stamp Tools. C. pigmented -Powder Antiquing Release Agent: Factory -packaged, non -fading finely - ground, streak free, colored powder that facilitates release of stamps and texture skins from cementitious stampable overlay and imparts a secondary accent color. 1. Product: Butterfield Color® Perma-Cast® Antiquing Release. 2. Colors: As selected by Architect 2.06 SEALING MATERIALS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 320127 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY A. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Sealing Compound: ASTM C 309, non - yellowing, VOC-compliant, high -gloss, clear liquid. 1. Product: Butterfield Color® Clear-GuardTM Cure & Seal. B. Flatten Paste: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sealer gloss finish to matte finish. 1. Product: Butterfield Color® Flatten Paste. C. Slip -Resistive Additive: Finely graded aggregate or polymer additive designed to add to sealer for slip -resistant surface. 2.07 MIXING A. Mixing Cementitious Stampable Overlay: Mix materials in accurate proportions and according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Bulk Mixing: For machine mixing of cementitious stampable overlay, use a paddle mortar mixer. B. Add Butterfield Color® T1000TM Color Pack to water and then mix with cementi- tious stampable overlay according to manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate for compliance with requirements. B. Do not proceed with cementitious stampable overlay installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Map out locations of existing control joints before installation of cementitious stampable overlay. B. Thoroughly clean substrate using high-pressure water or trisodium phosphate (TSP) and water with a scrub brush, then rinse thoroughly. Remove potential bond break- ers, such as grease, oil, silicone, paint, sealant, curing and sealing compounds, dry- wall taping compound, etc. C. For painted, sealed, or overly slick hard -troweled concrete substrates, mechanically abrade surfaces by sanding, scarifying, or shot blasting to allow for proper bonding. D. Remove weak, delaminated, or unsound concrete substrates. E. Patching: Fill chips, pits, and cracks prior to application of cementitious stampable overlay with a slurry of Butterfield Color® T1000TM Stampable Overlay and water COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 320127 - 4 APRIL 11, 2011 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY in lifts up to 1/2 inch. Fill depths not exceeding one inch with a slurry of Butterfield Color® T1000TM Fine Overlay, water, and clean, dry pea gravel or small aggregate. F. Allow surfaces to dry thoroughly prior to application of primer. 3.03 PRIMING SUBSTRATES A. Apply an even coat of concrete primer from two directions, free of holidays, to pre- pared substrates using a paint roller or sprayer. Protect adjacent surfaces from over - spray or splash. B. Allow concrete primer to dry tack free prior to application of cementitious stampa- blc ovcrlay..It primed substrates become wet, reapply primer. C. Prevent contamination of primed surfaces by dirt or other deleterious materials or conditions. D. Apply cementitious stampable overlay within 24 hours of concrete primer applica- tion. 3.04 TROWEL -APPLIED CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY APPLICATION A. Trowel Application: Distribute cementitious stampable overlay by trowel or gauge rake to a uniform thickness of 1/4 to 1/2 inch, as required to match depth of stamp mat grout lines. Trowel to a smooth surface. For large areas, use a fresno. Do not over trowel. B. Maintain a wet edge when installing cementitious stampable overlay to avoid cold joints. C. Do not overwork material with trowel or fresno. Do not add water to surface once application has begun. Do not retemper cementitious stampable overlay. O. Clean fools frequently to avoid build up of overlay materials. E. When installation requires multiple pours over a common concrete substrate area, protect adjacent prepared concrete substrates from release agents. 3.05 STAMPING A. Stamp overlay surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. Plan stamp layout prior to application of stamps. B. Liquid Release Agent Application: Apply a liberal coat of liquid release agent to cementitious stampable overlay when set sufficiently to achieve a clean impression. C. Stamping: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 320127 - S APRIL 11, 2011 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY 1. Stamp perimeter of pour using texture skins. 2. Accurately align stamp mats in sequence and tamp into cementitious stampa- ble overlay to produce imprint pattern, texture, and depth of imprint, accord- ing to manufacturer's instructions. Remove stamps from cementitious stampa- ble overlay immediately. 3. Stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted with stamp mat with texture skins. 4. Use stamp tools to imprint grout lines at edges and surfaces unable to be im- printed with stamp mats. 3.06 JOINTS A. Recut existing control joints before cracking occurs, generally within 12 to 24 hours after placement at 70 deg F. 3.07 ANTIQUING A. Allow cementitious stampable overlay to set for minimum of 24 hours prior to ap- plication of antiquing release agent. B. Apply thin coat of sealer over cementitious stampable overlay using a pump spray- er. Allow to dry prior to application of antiquing release agent. C. Mix antiquing release powder with Butterfield Color® Clear Perma-Cast® Liquid Release according to manufacturer's instructions and shake well in a metal pump sprayer. Maintain constant pressure in sprayer and apply liberally over cementitious stampable overlay to create antiquing look. Apply evenly, avoiding puddles in tex- tured areas and grout lines. Continuously shake sprayer to avoid settling. D. Do not walk on sprayed areas nor apply final coat of sealer until antiquing release agent is thoroughly dry. 3.08 SEALING A. Sealer Application: Apply final coat of sealer uniformly in continuous operation by sprayer according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Thoroughly mix flatten paste in sealer according to manufacturer's instruc- tions. Stir occasionally to maintain uniform distribution of paste. 2. Thoroughly mix slip -resistant additive in sealer according to manufacturer's instructions. Stir occasionally to maintain uniform distribution of additive. 3. Verify adequacy of slip resistance before opening up surfaces to traffic. 3.09 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged cementitious stampable overlay according to manufacturer's in- structions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 320127 - 6 APRIL 11, 2011 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect cernentitious stampable overlay from damage or deterioration until date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 320127 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 320127 - 7 APRIL 11, 2011 CEMENTITIOUS STAMPABLE OVERLAY Approwd - 1,12009 SECTION 32 11 16 BI S Untied Specyications SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall consist of scarifying, blading and rolling the sub -grade to obtain a uniform texture and a uniform density throughout the required depth as shown on the Plans. 1.2 M-EA.SIJRFWlENT AND PAYMENT A. When the Contractor thinks the sub -grade is ready for acceptance by the Engineer, he will have field densities performed on the sub -grade at his expense by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. These tests shall be taken at points directed by the Engineer with a maximum of one test per station of construction. These tests shall be performed by the method outlined in A.S.T.M. Designation D-698, or an equivalent method approved by the Engineer (Balloon Density or Harris Cup). A section will be considered satisfactory as to density when no single test indicates less than 98% Standard ASTM D-698. A written report containing the dry density, the moisture content and location of each in place sample taken shall be submitted to the Engineer. B. Payment for compacted sub -grade shall be included in the unit price bid for "Concrete Pavement", "Flexible Base" or "Compacted Sand Sub -base" as the case may be. Price will be full compensation for removing excess material, shaping, fine grading and compacting the sub -grade; for furnishing and hauling all materials, blading, shaping, rolling and finishing, and all labor, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work except roadway excavation. Payment will not be made for unauthorized work. PART PRODUCTS N/A P.AR.T 3 — FXF.f ITTTON 3.1 GENERAL A. The roadbed shall be excavated and shaped in conformity with the typical sections shown on the Plans and to the lines and grades established by the Engineer. The entire roadway cross-section including an area two (2) feet back of the proposed curb line shall be bladed clear of vegetation and scarified as directed by the Engineer. All unstable or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed or broken off to a depth of not less than six (6) inches below the surface of the sub -grade. Holes or depressions resulting from the removal of such material shall be backfilled with suitable material compacted in layers not to exceed six (6) inches. All soft and unstable material and other portions of the sub -grade which will not compact readily or serve the intended purpose shall be removed as directed. No direct payment will be made for such removal, except where each separate spot or area requiring removal exceeds ten (10) cubic yards, in which case measurement and payment will be made as provided in the SECTION 31 23 00 — EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT. Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications B. The sub -grade shall be scarified to the depth shown on the Plans and bladed and compacted in the manner directed in the section on "Finishing and Compaction". The surface of the sub -grade shall be finished to line and grade as established, and be in conformity with the typical sections shown on the Plans. Any deviation in excess of one- half (1/2) inch in cross-section and in a length of sixteen (16) feet measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping or compacting by sprinkling and rolling. Material excavated in the preparation of the sub -grade shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer. 3.2 FINISHING AND COMPACTION A. The sub -grade course, including an area two (2) feet back of the proposed curb line, shall be sprinkled as required and rolled as directed until a uniform compaction and required density is obtained. Compaction of the sub -grade may be done using any of the rolling equipment outlined in SECTION 31 11 29.02 - ROLLING. However, required densities must be met. Should the Engineer feel that too much time is being required to obtain those densities he can require that a heavy pneumatic roller be applied. Rolling shall continue until the sub -grade has been compacted to ninety-eight (98) percent of the Standard Density (A.S.T.M. Method D-698). The allowable deviation from optimum moisture content is 0 to +4%. B. Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center of the lane under construction, by lapping uniformly each proceeding track by at least twelve (12) inches. C. After rolling and watering, the sub -grade shall be checked by the use of string line or instrument. All portions that do not conform to the lines and grades as shown on the Plans, shall be scarified for at least six (6) inches and re -compacted to correct elevation. D. Until the base course or pavement is placed, the sub -grade shall be maintained free from ruts and depressions, in a smooth and compacted condition true to lines and grade and to the density requirements contained herein. All of the Contractor's hauling and other equipment used in such a way as to cause rutting and raveling of the sub -grade shall either be removed from the work or suitable runways or other equivalent means shall be provided to prevent rutting. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and protecting the roadbed for the entire length of the project. F. During construction, grading of the sub -grade shall be conducted so that the berm of earth or other material does not prevent immediate drainage of water to the side. Ditches and drains along the sub -grade shall be maintained so as to drain effectively. END OF SECTION Approved—112009 SECTION 32 1129 LIME STABILIZATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION BIOS Unified Specifications A. This item sball consist of admixing enmmercial lime and/or lime slurry with the existing material, and mixing and compacting the mixed material to the required density. All work performed in this item shall be constructed as specified heieiu and in conformity with the typical ciuss-sections, lines and grades as shown on the Plans and as directed by the Engineer. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Lime stabilized material as described in this section will be paid for at the unit price bid in the Proposal for the lime stabilized treatment, which price shall be full compensation for scarifying, preparation below secondary grade, furnishing, distributing, and mixing the lime and for all labor, supplies, water, fuel, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to mix and compact the stabilized soil to the density specified in these Specifications. Payment will not he made for unauthorized work 1.3 SUBMITTALS Lime series Attcrburg Limits Lime series pH test (ASTM C977-83a-Annex Test Method) Lime type % Lime PAKf 2 — PRUL U CTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The lime to be used for stabilization shall meet with requirements of TX DOT DMS-6350: Lime and Lime Slurry" and DMS-6330, "Lime Sources Prequalification of Hydrated Lime and Quicklime". Use hydrated lime, commercial lime slurry, or pebble grade quicklime. B. The amount of lime required for stabilization will be the percent by weight shown on the Plans, stated in the Special Provisions, or that amount which produces a pH not less than 12.4 and provides for a Plasticity Index less than 18. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. After final mixing, a pH test, Atterberg Limit test and sieve analysis shall be performed in accordance with Tex- 101-E, Part III. B. Moisture and Density tests shall be taken at each construction station to ensure a density of at least 98% of maximum dry density at a moisture content between uptiinum and 40X0 wet of optimum in accordance with Standard Proctor (ASTM D698). All tests meeting these requirements shall be paid by the owner. The City will not pay for failing tests. Approved— 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications C. When requested by the Engineers Inspector, the contractor will proof roll areas in question with a 25 ton pneumatic tired roller or approved equal after lime stabilization is complete. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1. GENERAL: A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to produce a completed course of treated material containing a uniform line mixture, free form loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth as shown on the detail sheet or specified in the Special Provisions and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements. B. The Contractor is required to ensure the existing sub -grade or embankment beneath the course to be lime stabilized is of proper density, uniformity and quality. The Contractor may elect to proof roll, replace and/or compact, areas that exhibit instability. If necessary, the Contractor may need to scarify, dry and compact the existing sub -grade prior to addition of lime. All work for the preparation of the existing sub -grade will not be paid directly, but will be considered a part of "Lime Stabilization". 3.2. APPLICATION: A. Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day: B. The lime shall be spread by a pre -approved screw type spreader box, bag distribution, or a pre -approved truck spreader, in the manner and at the rates directed by the Engineer. The lime shall be distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of the lime by wind to a minimum. Lime shall not be applied when wind conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are such that blowing lime becomes objectionable. A motor grader shall not be used to spread the lime. C. When pebble grade quicklime is placed dry, mix the material and lime thoroughly at the time of lime application. 3.3. MIXING: A. The material shall be dried or wetted as directed by the Engineer, until the proper moisture content has been secured. All lime shall be mixed with the material to be treated immediately after application of lime. During the interval of time between application and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of six (6) hours or more or had excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted until totally reprocessed, refinished and retested. This will be done at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. The soil -lime mixture shall be sprinkled during the mixing process as directed by the Engineer, to provide optimum moisture plus four (4) percent in the mixing immediately prior to starting the compaction operation. C. The stabilized soil shall then be lightly sealed to allow for the mixture to mellow for I to 4 days. When pebble grade quicklime is used, allow the mixture to mellow for 2 to 4 days. The mixed material shall be kept moist during this period and traffic shall not be allowed 2 Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications on the treated portion. The moisture content of the mixture should be within, optimum and four percent of optimum for the compactive effort specified. D. After mellowing, resume mixing until a homogeneous friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, such that when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the 3/4" sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements when tested from the roadway in the roadway conditions by standard laboratory sieves: Sieve Percent Passing 1-3/4" 100% 3/4" 95%, #4 60% After final mixing, the stabilized soil shall be bladed and compacted as specified below. 3.4. COMPACTION: A. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the proper moisture. Compaction shall begin at the bottom and shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted. B. The course shall be sprinkled as required and compacted to the extent necessary to provide no less than ninety-eight (98) percent of the density measured by ASTM D698 at a moisture content between optimum and +4% wet of optimum moisture content. Grades shall be "blue -topped" during the compaction effort and the lime soil mixture shall be compacted to within 0.1 ft in cross-section and 0.1 ft in 16 ft measured longitudinally. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the plans shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. Depth tests shall occur every 200 if and shall be performed after compliance with density requirements. C. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements. Throughout this entire operation the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the plans and to the established lines and grades. Should the material due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density and finish it shall be re -compacted, refinished and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. 3.5 EQUIPMENT A. The machine, tools and equipment necessary for the proper prosecution of the work shall be on the project and pre -approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of construction operations. B. All machinery, tools and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and woikuiaulike manner. C. To insure thorough mixing of the lime into the material to be stabilized, equipment shall be a pulverizer uuxer equivalent to a Seaman Mixer, or soil stabilizing machine shall be used. D. Hydrated lime shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until i►ruuediately before distribution on the road. if storage bins are used they shall be completely enclosed. Hydrated lime in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground dampness. Approved— 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications E. If lime is furnished in trucks, each truck shall have the weight of lime certified on public scales or the Contractor shall place a set of standard platform truck scales or hopper scales at a location pre -approved by the Engineer. Scales shall be certified as to accuracy by an independent pre -approved testing laboratory. 3.6 FINISHING AND CURING OF LIME -STABILIZED MATERIAL: A. After the lime treated material has been compacted and brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the typical sections, the completed section shall then be finished by rolling as directed with a pneumatic or other suitable roller sufficiently light to prevent hair cracking. The completed section shall be moist -cured for a minimum of five (5) days before further courses are added or any traffic is permitted, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. If the sub -grade sets up sufficiently to prevent objectionable damage from traffic, the layer may be opened to traffic the day following compaction, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. B. Apply seals or additional courses within fourteen (14) calendar days after final compaction, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 4 Revised—1,12009 BIC5 Unified Sperifications Additional Revisions—1012009 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (Sentenees andlor paragraphs rhor are dauhle underlined indicaie revision.v chat were made from the 2008 specification. Additional revisions are indicated with a dashed underline.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This item shall consist of a pavement of Portland cement concrete as herein specified on the prepared base, cnhhacP or subgmde course in conformity with the thickness, typical' , cross sections, and to the lines and grades shown on the Plans by the Engllleel. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Concrete pavement shall be measured by the square yard of surface area of completed and accepted pavement or as shown on the bid documents. When the Plaits, Specificatiuus aid Proposal regiiired the constnuction of a "Monolithic Curb" the limit~ of rneasuren°ic at for concrete pavement shall be from back to back of curb. B. The work peifunned and the materials furnished under this item and measured as provided under "Measurement" shall be paid for at the unit price bid per square yard for the thickness indicated in the Proposal. The unit price bid for "Concrete Pavcmcnt" shall be full compensation for shaping and fine grading the subgrade, forming, mixing, placing, jointing, finishing and curing all concrete; for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals necessary to complete the work.. 1.3 SUBMITTALS See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE --------------------------- Paving Plan Joint Sealing Compound Expansion Joint Matcrial F�u'n. ID1:7". Cl See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE --------------------------- 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE --------------------------- PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GRADE CONTROL The lines and grades shown on the contract drawings for each pavement category of the contract shall be established and maintained by means of line and grade stakes. The Finished pavement Revised—112009 Additional Revisions—1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications grade lines and elevations shown on the contract drawings shall be established and controlled at the site of the work by the Contractor in accordance with benchmark elevations furnished by the Owner. The pavements shall be constructed to the indicated thicknesses and elevations. The tolerances permitted in thickness, smoothness, and grades are the normal deviations that may occur in pavement construction under good supervision. However, construction of pavement or any part thereof with intent to use maximum tolerances will not be permitted. 3.2 SUBGRADE, SUBBASE, BASE AND FORMS A. EOUIPMENT: Subgrade Planer: Subgrade planer mounted on visible rollers riding on the forms or edges or previously constructed slabs shall be provided for shaping the final surface of the subgrade, subbase, or base course. Any power equipment used to pull the subgrade planer shall not produce ruts or indentations in the subgrade, subbase or base course. The subgrade planer shall be equipped with steel cutting edge capable of being accurately adjusted to the required cross section. When the subgrade planer rides on the edges of the surface of previously constructed slabs, the planer shall be provided with rubber -tired rollers to prevent damage to surfaces and edges of the existing concrete. 2. Templates: The Contractor shall provide and operate a scratch template for checking the contour of the subgrade, subbase, or base course. The template or roller is to be mounted with the wheels supported on the side forms or concrete in adjacent lanes. It shall be of such strength and rigidity that under a test made by changing the support to the center the template will not show a deflection of more than 1/8 inch. The template shall be provided with adjustable rods projecting downward to the subgrade at not more than 1-foot intervals. These rods shall be adjusted to the required cross section of the bottom of the slab when the ends of the template are supported on the side forms or concrete in the adjacent lanes. The template shall be checked frequently during use to assure that the rods are in the correct position. Forms: The forms shall be made of metal unless noted. Wood forms may be used on curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, as well as for fillets. Forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the slab as shown on the drawings. Forms shall be in one piece for the full depth required, except as noted. Where the drawings provide several different slab thicknesses, forms may be built up of metal or wood as provided. Forms may be increased in depth 25 percent by securely bolting or welding to the bottom a tubular metal section of the proper thickness or by securely bolting wood planks to the bottom of the steel form. The tubular metal section or wood planks shall completely cover the under side of the base of the steel form. It shall extend beyond the edge of the base a sufficient distance to provide the necessary stability against movement along the vertical face. The base width of the one-piece form, or built-up form, shall be not less than eight -tenths of the vertical height of the form. a.) Metal Forms: Metal forms shall be of a cross section and shall be furnished in sections not less than 10 feet in length. Curves having a radius of 150 feet or less the length of the sections shall be 5 feet unless the sections are flexible or curved to the proper radius. Each 10-foot length of form shall be provided with at least three form braces and pin sockets. The number and spacing of the form braces and pin sockets shall be such that the form will be rigidly braced uniformly throughout its length and at the joints between form sections. Lock Revised 1,12009 Additional Revisions—1012009 B./CS Untied.Spprifiirnttnnc joints between form sections shall be free from play or movement. Metal forms shall have such a strength that when tested as simple beam with a load equal to the weight of the heaviest machine to be used on the forms, the deflection will not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Forms shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting to prevent springing, weaving, or settling from the impact and vibrations of the machine. Forms shall be free of warps, bends, or kinks. The top surface of a form shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true line. The face of the form shall not vary more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane. Forms with battered top surfaces distorted faces or bases shall not be used. They are to be removed from the project site. b.) Wood Forms: Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be made from well -seasoned, surfaced plank or plywood. The wood shall also be straight, free from warp or bend, and not less than 2 inches in nominal thickness. Wood forms shall be furnished in sections approximately 5 feet in length and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting to withstand springing, weaving, or settling from the impact and vibration of the placing and finishing operations. 4. Subgxade, Subbase or Base Course: The subgrade, subbase or base course shall be tested as to crown, elevation, and density in advance of setting the forms. The subgrade prior to final planing shall be completed to or above the plane of the typical sections shown on the drawings and the lines and grades established by the drawings or as directed. Any discrepancies shall be corrected in accordance with the requirements for subgrade, subbase or base course construction as specified. Form Setting: After the subgrade, subbase or base course has been prepared as described above, the forms shall be set. The subgrade, subbase, or base course under the forms shall be firm and cut true to grade so that each in place form section will be firmly in contact for its entire length and base width. The form shall be staked into position. The top of the form will conform to the requirements specified for the finished surface of the concrete, and the longitudinal axis of the upstanding leg will not vary more than 1/4 inch from the straight -edge when tested by a 12-foot straight- edge. The length and number of pins in any section shall be sufficient to hold the form at the correct line and grade. Form sections shall be tightly locked together. Conformity to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings shall be checked and necessary corrections made by the Contractor immediately prior to placing the concrete. Forms shall be set well in advance of concrete placement. At least 250 feet of forms and prepared subgrade, subbase or base course shall be provided before concrete placement starts. The forms shall be cleaned and oiled each time before concrete is placed. 6. Subgrade Between Forms: The subgrade, subbase, leveling course or base course shall be free of foreign matter, waste concrete, cement and debris at all times; shall be finished to the required section of the bottom of the pavement as shown on the drawings with specified equipment; shall be tested with a template operated and maintained by the Contractor; shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition, in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is in place; shall be wetted down sufficiently in advance to insure a firm, moist, and satisfactory condition when the concrete is placed; shall, if required, be thoroughly wetted down the previous night or not less than 6 hours before placing the concrete; shall not be traversed with equipment or hauling on the prepared surface between forms; in cold weather shall be prepared and protected in a satisfactory condition Revised—112009 Additional Revisions—1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications and entirely free from frost when the concrete is place; and shall not be treated with chemicals to eliminate frost. 7. Form Removal: Forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. Should weather conditions delay the early -strength gain of the concrete, the forms shall remain in place for a longer period. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools are not to be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete damaged in form removal will be repaired promptly by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 3.3 FINISHING Finishing operations shall be started immediately after placement of the concrete. The sequence of operations shall be as follows: transverse finishing, longitudinal floating, straight -edge finishing, carpet drag finishing, and finally the edging of joints. The machine method of finishing shall be employed, except that hand methods may be permitted as approved by the engineer. Finishing equipment and tools shall be maintained clean, free from hardened concrete or grout, and in an approved condition. A. MACHINE FINISHING: Equipment: The transverse and longitudinal finishing machines shall be power driven, be of ample weight and power to produce proper finishing, and be able to withstand the roughest treatment anticipated under job conditions. The transverse -finishing machine shall be designed and operated to strike off, screed, and consolidate the concrete. It shall be equipped with two screeds readily and accurately adjustable for changes in pavement crown and compensation for wear and other causes. The longitudinal - finishing machine shall be provided with a longitudinal float not less than 10 feet in length, readily adjustable to a true plane and properly stiffened to prevent distortion during use. Screed and float adjustments of these machines shall be checked at the start of each day's paving operations and as often as required. Machines that cause frequent delays due to mechanical failure shall be replaced. Finishing machines that ride the edge of a previously constructed slab shall have rubber -tired wheels to prevent damaging the surface and edges of the concrete. 2. Transverse finishing: Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be accurately struck off and screeded to the crown and cross section shown on the drawings. The final surface elevation or grade is to be non -porous when properly consolidated and finished. The finishing machine shall make at least two trips over each area of pavement, and may make one or two additional trips as necessary to properly compact the concrete and produce a surface of uniform texture, as well as true to grade. However, excessive manipulation that brings to the surface an excess of mortar and water will not be permitted. Any equipment that cannot produce the required compaction and surface finish with the indicated number of trips will be considered unsatisfactory. The top of the form or pavement edge upon which the finishing machine travels shall be kept clean by an effective device attached to the machine, and by necessary hand methods. This will insure that the travel of the machine will be maintained true without lift, wobble, or other variation that would affect the precision of the finish. 3. Longitudinal Floating_ After completion of finishing with the transverse -finishing machine, the longitudinal mechanical float shall be operated to smooth and finish the pavement to grade. The float shall be operated parallel to the centerline of the pavement with a short, quick motion, and shall travel slowly along the pavement, 4 Revised— 112009 Additional Revisions 10,12009 BI S ilndted Specifications maintaining contar..t with the surface at all. times. if contact with the surface is not made at all points, additional concrete as required shall be placed and screeded. The float is to be operated over the same area until a satisfactory surface is pruduced. In advancing the float, each new position shall lap the previous position by not less than one-half the float length. 4 Other TMe% of Finishing. Fquipment• Other types of concrete finishing equipment may hr ii-wil on a trial hasis Such finishing eguipmerrl slinll he. approved by the Engineer before being put into service. The use of equipment that fails to piuduce approved results when finishing concrete of the quality and consistency required by these %peeificatinns shall be discontinued. The concrete shall then, be floated and finished with equipment in the manner as specified above. B. HAND FINISHING: This method shall be employed only under the conditions previously %pecifed, exrept a% otherwise permitted and authorized by the Engineer F(rninment An approved strike arrd tamping template and a longitudinal flual shall he provided for hand finishing. The template shall he,, nl leasl 1 foot longer Riau flit, pavement width, be equipped with handles, and have edges at least 4 inches wide. The, lon.gitudinnl float shall be 10 t(.r 16 feet in leiielh, with a (.:loss section of an inverted T made of a 2 X 6 inch or wider plank for the base and a 2 X 8 inch plank for the vertical leg. The float shall be rigid, substantially braced, be able to maintain a plane surface oil the bottom of the base, and shall have suitable handles fur sniuuth and of erlive manipulation from the fool btidg(.%. The hottorn edges of the base of the float shall be tuunded on a radius not exceeding 3/8 inch. Floats made of metal or a combination of wood and metal may be used provided they conform to the requirements fur wocid floals. Finishing., and Floating_ immediately after placement, concrete shall be smack off and swouded to the; crown and cross section shown on the drawing. The consolidated and furnished surface elevation shall be in accordance with the drawings or as specified. The entire surface shall be tamped, and the tamping operation is to be continued until accomplishing the required cumpactiun and reduction of internal and surface voids. Concrete that is inaccessible to the vibrating consolidating equipment shall be consolidated with the aid of hand-manipulatcd vibrators under provisions of the subparagraph 125.06 (C)"Vibration". Immediately following the final tamping of the surface, the pavement shall be floated longitudinally by hand from bridges resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete. If contact with the pavement is not made at all points by the float, additional roncrete (ball he placed as required and screeded, and the float operated until a satisfactory surface has been produced. After a section has been smoothed so that the float maintains contact with the surface of the concrctc at all points, the bridge% may he moved forward half the length of the float. The operation is to be repeated over the new and previously floated surfa(es. Strai lrg t-edge Finishing: Minor irregularities and score walks in the pavement surface shall be eliminated by means of long -handled woud fluats and straight -edges after the longihidinal floating is completed, but while the rnnrrete is still plastic. When necessary, excess water and laitance shall be removed from the surface transversely by means of a finishing straight -edge. The lung-lrandled floats pray be used to sinouth and fill in open -textured areas in the pavement surfaces. The final finish shall be made with ihe. straight -edges. The use of long -handled floats shall b(: held to a mini.miim as necessary to correct local surface unevenness not corrected by the longitudinal float. Long -handled floats shall not be used to float the entire pavement surface. Straight -edges Shall be 12 feet in length and may be operated Revised—112009 Additional Revisions — 1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications from bridges and from the side of the pavement. A straight -edge operated from the side of the pavement shall be equipped with a handle 3 feet longer than one-half the width of the pavement. The surface shall then be tested for trueness with a 12-foot straight -edge held in successive positions parallel and at right angles to the centerline of the pavement in contact with the surface. The whole area is to be covered as to detect variations. The straight -edge shall be advanced along the pavement in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straight -edge. Depressions shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated, and refinished. Projections above the required elevation shall also be struck off and refinished. The straight -edge testing and finishing shall continue until the entire surface of the concrete is free from observable departure from the straight- edge, conforms to the required grade and contour and when hardened, will satisfy the surface requirements specified under subparagraph 125.13(B) "Surface Smoothness". 4. Carpet Drag Finishing: Use an artificial grass -type carpet having a molded polyethylene pile face with a blade length of 5/8 inch to 1 inch, a minimum weight of 70 ounces/square yard, and a strong, durable, rot -resistant backing material bonded to the facing. The surface of the pavement shall be dragged longitudinally in the direction of the concrete placement with the carpet drag when most of the water glaze or sheen has disappeared and before the concrete becomes non -plastic. The carpet drag should be of sufficient transverse length to span the full width of the pavement being placed and adjustable so that a sufficient longitudinal length of carpet is in contact with the concrete being placed to produce the desired texture. The leading transverse edge of the drag shall be securely fastened to a traveling bridge or a moveable support system. The carpet drag shall be cleaned and changed as required. The dragging shall be carefully done to produce a finished surface having a fine granular or sandy texture without leaving disfiguring marks. The surface of the pavement at joint edges shall be dragged as necessary with a small hand -operated drag following edge tooling. No tool marks of any kind shall be present on the finished surface. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints shall be prepared for receiving the next pour by sweeping the surface of the joint clean with a stiff broom or wire brush to remove all laitance. All loose particles and debris shall be removed. The surface is to be dampened just prior to casting of concrete against the joint. Construction joints will be made only at locations shown on the Plans unless written permission is granted by the Engineer to make additional joints. A. LONGITUDINAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Longitudinal construction joints between paving lanes shall be located as indicated on the drawings. Dowels or keys shall be installed in the longitudinal construction joints as required and in accordance with the indicated details. Metal keyway forms shall be used for forming horizontal keyways. The dimensions of the keyway forms shall not vary more than plus or minus 1/16 inch from the indicated dimensions. The keyway form shall be securely fastened to the concrete form so that it will be at the mid -depth of the pavement within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch. All longitudinal construction joints shall be edged and subsequently sawed to provide a groove at the top conforming to the indicated details and dimensions. B. TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Transverse construction joints shall be installed at the end of each day's placing operations and at any other points within a paving lane when concrete placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer. All transverse construction joints in non -reinforced pavements shall be installed in the location of a Revised—112009 .Additional Revisions 1012009 B/CS Unif ed Specifications planned transverse contraction or expansion joint. Transverse construction joints located at planned transverse joints shall be of the doweled type with one end of each dowel painted and greased to permit movement at the joint. These joints shall be edged and subsequently sawed to provide a groove at the top conforming to the indicated details and dimensions. When concrete placing is resumed, the planned joint spacing shall be used beginning with the first regularly scheduled transverse joint. • 3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS Three quarter (3/4) inch expansion joints shall be provided at forty (40) feet on center or of the type, size, and spacing shown on the Plans. The expansion joint materials shall be as shown on the plans or a recycled material. %" thick manufactured by J.D. Russel Co.. or approved equal. The joint sealing compound shall be Sonneborn SL-1 or approved equal. Manufacturers' recommendations must be strictly adhered to. Devices used for installing the joints shall be adequate to hold the parts of the joint in proper position while protecting the filler from damage during concreting operation. The devices shall also be removable without permanent detriment to the pavement. Adjacent sections of filler shall be fitted tightly together and field in line to insure continuity. Concrete shall be prevented from entering the expansion space. Any concrete that has flowed into a gap between an expansion joint strip and edge forms of the pavement shall be cut out immediately after removing the forms. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features that project through, into, or against the pavement. Joint filler must be of the type, thickness, and width as indicated or directed and installed to form a complete, uniform separation between the structtirc and paminent. 3.6 CONTRACTION JOINTS A. Contraction joints shall be provided at twenty (20) feet on center or of the type, size, and spacing shown on the Plans. Contraction joints may be either tooled or sawed but must provide a minimum depth of/< of the thickness of the concrete and sealed as shown on the plans or with Sonneborn SL-1 or approved equal. When sawed joints are used, the sawing should begin as soon as the concrete has obtained adequate strength to resist raveling of the joint edges, generally between 4 and 24 hours. The joints must be flushed or blown clean immediately after sawing to keep the residue from setting up. B. Transverse and longitudinal contraction joints shall be of the weakened -plane or dummy type, and shall be constructed in conformance with the indicated details and dimensions. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power -driven saw. Tie bars in longitudinal contraction joints shall be prepared and placed across joints where indicated in the plans. They shall be correctly aligned and securely held in the proper horizontal and vertical position during the placing and finishing operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1. Sawed Joints: The groove of contraction joints shall be not less than 1/4 inch nor greater than 3/8 inch in width for the entire depth of saw cut shown on the drawings. The upper portion of the groove is to be widened to not less than 3/8 inch nor more than 5/8 inch for a depth of 1/4 of the pavement thickness, plus or minus 1/8 inch, below the pavement surface. The time of sawing shall be varied, depending on existing and anticipated weather conditions. Uncontrolled cracking of the pavement shall be prevented. Sawing of the joints shall commence as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting the concrete without excessive chipping, spalling, or tearing. The sawed faces of joints will be inspected for undercutting or washing of the concrete due to early sawing. If this action is sufficiently deep to cause structural weakness or Revised—112009 Additional Revisions — 1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications excessive cleaning difficulty, as determined by the Engineer, the sawing operation shall be delayed until directed to resume. The sawing operation shall be carried on regardless of weather conditions. The joints shall be sawed at the required spacing consecutively in the sequence of the concrete placement. A chalk line or other suitable guide shall be used to mark the alignment of the joints. The saw cut shall be straight from edge to edge of the pavement and shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the true joint alignment. Before sawing a joint, the concrete shall be examined closely for cracks. The joint shall not be sawed if a crack has occurred near the location chosen for a joint. Sawing shall be discontinued when a crack develops ahead of the saw cut. The surface of pavement cured with membrane -curing compound shall be wetted with water in the region of the intended saw cut prior to sawing to protect the curing membrane from abrasion. Workmen and inspectors shall wear clean, rubber soled footwear, and the number of persons walking on the pavement shall be limited to those actually performing the sawing operation. Immediately after each joint is sawed, the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all waste from sawing is removed from the joint. Any membrane -cured surface damaged during the sawing operations shall be re -sprayed as soon as the free water disappears. The sawing equipment shall be adequate in number of units and power to complete the sawing at the required rate. An ample supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete placement is started. At least one standby sawing unit in good working order shall be available at the job site at all times during the sawing operations. 2. Dowels and Tie Bars: Dowels and tie bars shall be prepared and placed across joints where indicated. They are to be correctly aligned, and securely held in the proper horizontal and vertical position during the placing and finishing operations. Dowels shall be placed by the bonded -in -place method. The portion of the dowel inside the form shall be the bonded end. Dowels may be cut to length at the mill or shop by shearing in lieu of sawing, provided the deformation from true shape caused by shearing does not exceed the diameter of the bar by more than 0.04 inch and provided such deformation does not extend more than 0.04 inch from the end of the dowel. Dowels shall be clean, straight, and cut true to length with ends square and free from burs. In longitudinal and transverse construction joints, threaded split dowels may be used in lieu of one-piece dowels. The assembled split dowels shall have a length and diameter at least equal to that of a one-piece dowel of the required size. The screw -threaded portions of split dowels shall have a pitch diameter at least equal to the diameter of the one-piece dowel of the required size. The sleeve connector shall be of such length that when the split dowel is assembled the entire screw -threaded portions of the dowel are encased by the sleeve with dowel ends butting each other. Dowels in longitudinal and transverse construction joints shall be held securely in place by means of devices fastened to the forms. Dowels and tie bars installed within the paving lane shall be held securely in position by means of rigid metal frames or basket assemblies. The assemblies shall consist of a framework of metal bars or wires arranged to provide rigid support for the dowels and tie bars throughout the paving operation. The assemblies shall also have a minimum of four transverse bars or wires, one of which shall be at or near each end of the dowel or tie bars with one for each end of the dowel bar at or near the subgrade. The dowels shall be welded to the assembly or held firmly by mechanical locking arrangements that will prevent the dowels from rising, sliding out, or I(rvised - • 112009 Additional Revisions—1012009 B/17 Un f ed .Sper frationc becoming distorted under paving operations. The wires shall not be used as locking devices. The dowel -holding devices shall be held securely in the proper location by means of suitable pins or anchors. Dowels in longitudinal and transverse construction joints shall be held securely in place parallel to the surface and within 1/2 dowel diameter of the center of the slab depth. Dowels in expansion joints and tie bars installed within the paving lane shall be held securely in place with the center of the dowel or tie bar within 1/8 inch of the center of the slab depth. The spacing of dowels in longitudinal construction joints shall be as indicated except where the planned spacing cannot be maintained due to form length or interference with form braces. Spacing shall be closer with additional dowels. Dowels in longitudinal joints shall be omitted when the center of the dowel would be located within a horizontal distance from a transverse joint equal to 1/4 of the slab thickness. The method used in holding dowels in position shall be accurate to detect errors in alignment of any dowel from its required position after the finished pavement. There shall not be an angle greater than one whose tangent is 1/96. The Contractor shall furnish a template for cherking the position of the dowels. The portion of each dowel intended to move within the concrete or expansion cap shall be coated with a thin film of grease or other approved de -bonding material. Provide dowel caps on the lubricated end of each dowel bar used in an expansion joint. Provide dowel caps tilled with a soft compressive material with enough range to allow complete closure of the. expansion. joint. 3.7 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS Longitudinal joints may be provided to assist in grade control or of the type, size, and frequency shown on the Plans, The longitudinal joint shall consist of a steel keyway or as shown on the plans. Manufacturer's recommendations must be strictly adhered to. 3.8 PAVEMENT PROTEC11UN: The Contractor shall protect the paving against all damage prior to final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Traffic shall be excluded from the pavement by erecting and maintaining barricades and signs until the concrete is at least 3 days old or for a longer period if so directed. As a construction expedient in paving intermediate lanes between newly paved lanes, operation of the paving mixer and batch -hauling equipment will be permitted on the pavement after the pavement has been cured for seven days and the joints have been sealed or otherwise protected. Also, the subgrade planer, concrete finishing machines, and similar equipment may be permitted to ride upon the edges of the previously constructed slabs provided the concrete is more than 72 hours old and has attained a minimum flexural strength of 450 psi or a compressive strength of 2,800 psi. Additional protection to the slab edge may be required to prevent damage. The pavement carrying traffic or equipment shall be kept clean. All spillage of materials on concrete shall be cleaned up immediately upon occurrence, at no cost to the Owner. 3.9 PLAN GRADE AND SURFACE -SMOOTHNESS REQUIREMENTS: The finished surfaces of all pavements shall conform to the grade line and elevations shown on the contract drawings and the surface -smoothness requirements: A. PLAN GRADE: The finished surfaces of all pavements shall conform, within the tolerances specified and to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the contract drawings. The finished surfaces of the pavements shall not vary more than 0.04 foot above 9 Revised — 112009 Additional Revisions—1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications or below the plan -grade line or elevation established and approved at the site of the work. The finished surfaces of new abutting pavements shall coincide at their juncture. An approved transition pavement strip of the type and width shown on the drawings or as directed shall be installed where a new pavement abuts an existing pavement to provide the required and satisfactory pavement surface at the juncture of the new and existing pavements. Further, the 0.04 foot deviation from the approved grade line and elevation will not be permitted in any area of these pavements where closer conformance with planned grade and elevation is required for the proper functioning of any and all applicable structures. B. SURFACE SMOOTHNESS: The finished surfaces of all pavements shall not deviate from the testing edge of an approved 12-foot straight -edge more than the tolerance shown for the respective pavement category of Table 350-1. In no instance shall the tolerance exceed more than 1/16 of an inch per foot. TABLE 350-1 Pavement Category Direction of Tolerances Testing Pavements having cross slopes of 1% Longitudinal 1/8 inch or less Transverse 3/16 inch Pavements having cross slopes greater Longitudinal 1/8 inch than 1 % Transverse 1 /4 inch C. EOUIPMENT: The Contractor shall furnish and maintain at the site one straight -edge in good condition for each longitudinal finishing machine for use by the Owner in testing the hardened portland-cement-concrete surfaces. These straight -edges shall be constructed of aluminum or other approved lightweight metal. They shall have blades with a box or box -girder cross-section with a flat bottom, adequately reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy. Straight -edges shall be equipped with handles for operation on the pavement. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain at the site devices other than straight -edges, if approved, for surface -smoothness determinations. There shall be one such device for each longitudinal finishing machine for use by the Owner. 3.10 CURING See SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE --------------------------- END OF SECTION 10 SECTION 321416 — BRICK UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Supply and install brick pavers. 2. Supply and place all accessory items as required by the contract. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Pavijag." 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Pavers shall be delivered and unloaded at job site on pallets and bound in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product during handling, hauling and unloading. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The installer/contractor must have related experience in the installation of brick pavers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit sample of paver color and/or type showing full range of color. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 PAVERS A. Brick Pavers: Handicap manufactured by Endicot. standard line. detectable warning pavers (2 1/a" x 7 5/8" x 3 5/8") Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 APRIL 11, 2011 s21416 - I BRICK UNIT PAVING B. Geo-textile: Provide geo-textile as indicated in drawings and as recommended by paver manufacturer. 2.02 VISUAL INSPECTION A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of unit or impair the strength or performance of the construction. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for rejection. 2.03 SAND LAYING COURSE A. The sand laying course shall be well graded clean washed sharp sand with 100% passing a 3/8" sieve size and a maximum of 3% passing a No. 200 sieve size; this is commonly known as manufactured concrete sand, limestone screening or similar. DO NOT USE MASON SAND. B. The sand laying course should be the responsibility of the paving stone installer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SAND LAYING COURSE A. The finished concrete base shall be approved before the placement of the sand laying course. B. The uncompacted sand laying course shall be spread evenly over the area to be paved and then screeded to a level that will produce 1" thickness when the paving stones have been placed and vibrated. Normally, it is a good practice to have final elevation of paving stones slightly higher than adjacent curb, gutters, other paving, to allow for any minor settling that may occur within the base. C. Once screeded and leveled to the desired elevation, this sand laying course shall not be disturbed in any way. 3.02 LAYING OF PAVERS BRICK A. The paving bricks shall be laid in a pattern where noted or as shown on Drawings. B. The paving bricks shall be laid in such a manner that the desired pattern is maintained and the joints between the bricks are as tight as possible. C. String lines should be used to hold all pattern lines true. D. The gaps at the edge of the paver surface shall be filled to provide a tight fit. Cutting shall be accomplished to leave a clean edge to the traffic surface using a COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 321416 - 2 APRIL 1 1, 2011 BRICK UNIT PAVING masonry saw. Whenever possible, no cuts should result with a paver less than 1/3 of original dimension. E. Paving bricks shall be vibrated into the sand laying course using a vibrator capable of 3,000 to 5,000 pounds compaction force with the surface clean and joints open. F. After vibration, clean masonry type sand and containing at least 30% of 1/8" (3mm) particles shall be spread over the paving surface, allowed to dry, and vibrated into joints with addition vibrator passes and brushing so as to completely fill joints. G. Surplus material shall then be swept from the surface or left on surface during construction time to insure complete filling of joints during initial use. This sand may provide surface protection from construction debris. n y ,Y -�':r END OF SECTION 321416 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 321416 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 BRICK UNIT PAVING SECTION 321700 - PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pavement Markings B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" 1.03 GENERAL A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for pavement marking work indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Condition of pavement: Clean, dry and cured minimum amount of time as recommended by striping paint manufacturer. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Division 01: Section - Submittal Procedures B. Submit manufacturer's literature to the Architect for approval. Literature shall show compatibility of product proposed for use with paving surface to which product is to be applied. 1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Contractor and subcontractor for work of this section shall be jointly responsible for the coordination of the work specified herein, including but not limited to: COLLEGE STATION FTRF. STATION NO.6 321700- 1 APRIL 11, 2011 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES 1. Fire Lanes: Coordinate with all governing authorities to determine exact requirements (whether or not shown on the drawings). Fire lane marking, if required, is part of the work of the base contract. 2. Handicapped Parking Spaces: Coordinate with all governing authorities to determine exact requirements (whether or not shown on the drawings). Special marking, if required, is part of the work of the base contract. 3. Colors: Coordinate color requirements with all governing authorities, use only acceptable colors. Colors specified herein shall be used, if acceptable. 4. Notification: Notify the Architect of any required variation from the drawings resulting from coordination. 1.07 PROTECTION A. Protect newly painted surfaces from damage by vehicles during the time required for paint to harden sufficiently to withstand traffic. Any damage to newly painted markings due to the paint subcontractor's failure to provide adequate protection shall be repaired by him at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Any work found to be defective because of either poor workmanship or defective materials which may be evident within a period of 60 days from acceptance for use will be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Indications of defective work for the purpose of this guarantee include poor adhesion to the pavement surfaces, checking, cracking, peeling and discoloration. This shall not be construed to include wear, damage or discoloration caused by traffic, erosion or from normal exposure to the elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Striping & Directional Marking Paint: Acrylic parking lot and/or street marking paint, recommended by manufacturer for type of surface. 1. Paint type: Acrylic, water -borne pavement marking paint conforming to Texas Dept. of Highways Special Specification Traffic paint. 2. Color: a. General Use Striping, Directional Marking, & H.C. Marking: Manufacturer's standard flat white. b. Fire Lane Striping: Manufacturer's standard red or as per city code. Fire lane striping shall have lettering stenciled in white at 15' intervals: "FIRE LANE" a fifteen foot interval "NO PARKING" a fifteen foot interval "TOW AWAY ZONE". COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 321700- 2 APRIL 11, 2011 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. New concrete surfaces will be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 11 days before application of marking materials. Dust, clay, silt and excess sand will be removed (by sweeping) from the pavement to be marked before application of paint. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Equipment: Spray mechanism capable of applying paint at the rate specified at an even and uniform thickness, with clear cut edges. Mechanism shall be operated by means of quick opening and closing valves conveniently located. B. Striping & Marking: 1. Where pavement is trowel or wood float finish concrete, lightly sandblast immediate area. to receive striping prior to application of paint. a. Rough broom finish areas will not require sand -blasting. 2. Apply paint in accordwith manufacturer's written instructions. Apply at a rate of one gallon spread evenly over an area of 105 SF± five square feet and a wet film. thickness of 0.015 inch (15 mils.). 3. Paint 4" wide lines in patterns and spacing as shown on drawings. Width of the lines shall be within a tolerance of one-half inch. The centerline of marking shall not deviate more than one-half inch laterally from a straight line at any point. 4. Parking Striping: a. Painted lines: 4" wide, generally 20' long, and spaced approximately 9' O.C. except where noted or local authorities require otherwise. b. If the overall space divides equally into slightly larger spacing than 9', individual spaces should be increased equally, but should not in any case be less than 9' O.C., unless noted otherwise on drawings. 5. Stained concrete: a. Admix at Exposed Sidewalk: Pigmented water -reducing, set -controlling admixture for integral coloring concrete shall be L. M. Scofield Co.'s b. Chromix Color Admixture in custom color color to be selected by the architect from standard colors. 3.03 CLEANING A. Any spilled paints shall be cleaned from the paved areas to the satisfaction of the Owner. Keep the premises clean at all times. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 321700- 3 APRIL 11, 2011 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES B. Paint, empty containers, and other materials or equipment shall not be stored or allowed to accumulate on, or near the paved areas. C. Upon completion of work of this section remove related debris from premises. END OF SECTION 321700 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 321700- 4 APRIL 11, 2011 PAVEMENT SPECIALTIES SECTION 3217 23.16 PARKING PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This specification describes the procedures and product for the marking (painting) of pavement for parking spaces, crosshatched handicapped aisles, crosshatched crosswalks, loading zones, and other markings shown on the plans. Included is the installation of handicapped signs as shown on the plans. A handicapped sign is to be placed at each handicapped parking space. For van accessible spaces, a van accessible sign is required and is to be mounted on the same pole as a handicapped sign. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The work performed under this specification will be measured and paid on a lump sum basis for related items or as otherwise provided for in the Bid Form. Payment made will be full compensation for all materials, labor, superintendence, and incidentals for a completed and approved construction of the required markings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Five copies of product data Ocas shall be submitted to Engineen PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Pavement marking paint: White - Sherwin Williams Setfast Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint product no. TM 226 or approved equal. Yellow - Sherwin Williams Setfast Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint product no. TM 2155 lead free or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION/TNSTAT_..T,ATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION All markings shall be applied and surfaces prepared as recommended by the product manufacturer. Stripe width for parking spaces and similar type markings shall be a minimum of four (4) inches. Diagonal stripes at 45' shall be painted on handicapped access aisles at handicapped parking spaces, on crosswalks, and on pedestrian loading zones. Perpendicular distance between diagonal stripes shall be 36" C-C (48" along the line to which the diagonal line connects). END OF SECTION Standard — 0700140066 OWALLEY ENUWEERS, L.L.N. 32 17 23.16 - 1 SECTION 323119 — DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Section. 1.02 SUMMARY Contract, including General and Specification Sections, apply to this A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the industrial ornamental aluminum fence system defined herein. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Division 03 Section "Concrete". 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Basis of design: The manufacturer shall supply a total industrial ornamental aluminum fence system of the Ameristar® Echelon P1usTM Majestic, Style M3, 3- rail design. The system shall include all components (i.e., pickets, rails, posts, gates and hardware) required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.06 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 117 - Practice for Operating Salt -Spray (Fog) Apparatus. B. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. C. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. D. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open -Flame Carbon -Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 323119- 1 APRIL 11, 2011 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES E. ASTM D 1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. F. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. G. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to The Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). H. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 1.07 SUBMITTAL A. The manufacturer's literature shall be submitted prior to installation. 1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The fence system shall conform to Montage P1usTM / Montage Plus ATFTM Welded Ornamental Steel ClassicTM design, extended picket bottom rail treatment, rigid weld treatment, 3-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma. 2.02 MATERIAL A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (344 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot -dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2 (276 g/m2), Coating Designation G-6 B. Material for fence pickets shall be 3/4" square x 16 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, rigid -Montage Plus profile, 1.5" x 1.4375" x 14 Ga. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced 4.334" o.c. Posts shall be a minimum of 2-1/2" square x 16 Ga. 12 Ga. posts may be used for heavy applications. C. Steel material for fence framework (i.e., tubular pickets, rails, and posts), when galvanized after forming, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 323119- 2 APRIL 11, 2011 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES A 1011 /1011 M, with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (344 MPa). The exterior shall hot. -dip galvanized with a 0.45 oz/ft2 (138 g/m2) minimum zinc weight. The interior surface shall be coated with a .minimum 81% nominal zinc pigmented coating, 0.3 mils (0.0076mm) minimum thickness. D. Steel material for fence framework (i.e., tubular pickets, rails, and posts), when galvanized prior to forming, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A924/924M, with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (344 MPa). The steel shall be hot -dip galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A653/A653M with a minimum zinc coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2 (276 g/m2), Coating Designation G-90. E. The manufactured galvanized framework shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal stratification coating process (high -temperature, in -line, multi -stage, rnulti- layer) including, as a nunimum, a six -stage pretreatinent/wash (with zinc phospllate), an elet trostatic spray application of an epuxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall he a zinc - rich thermosetting epuxy powder cuating (gray in color) with a iriininium thickness of 2 riuls (0.0508nun). The topcoat shall be a "no-rnar" TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be selected by architect from manufacturer's standard colors. The stratification -coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1. Quality ASTM Test Performance Requirements Characteristics Method ! Adhesiun D3359 — Method Adhesion (Retentiuri of Cuating) over 90% of test area B (Tape and knife test). Corrosion B 117 & D 1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per Resistance D 1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8" coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625" ball). Weathering D822, D2244, Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is Resistance D523 (60' 60% loss of gloss r:,r color variance of incur. Iran 3 delta-F i Method) color units). Table 1— Coating Performance Requirements F. Material for fence pickets shall be 3/4" square x 16ga. tubing. The cross -sectional shape of the rails shall conform to the manufacturer's ForeRunnerTM design with outside cross-section dimensions of 1.50" square and a minimum thickness of 14ga. Picket holes in the ForeRunnerTM rail shall be spaced 4.70" o.c. Picket retaining rods shall be 0.125" diameter galvanized steel. Posts shall be a minimum of 2-1/2" square x 12ga. High quality PVC grommets shall be supplied to seal all picket -to - rail intersections. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 323119- 3 APRIL 11, 2011 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 2.03 FABRICATION A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. ForeRunnerTM rails shall be pre -punched to accept pickets. B. The rail inner slide shall be fully inserted into the rail outer channel to form the raceway for the internal retaining rod. Grommets shall be inserted into the pre - punched holes in the rails, and pickets shall be inserted through the grommets so that pre -drilled picket holes align with the internal raceway of the two-part ForeRunnerTM rails. (Note: This can best be accomplished by using an alignment template). Retaining rods shall be inserted into each ForeRunnerTM rail so that they pass through the pre -drilled holes in each picket, thus completing the panel assembly. C. Completed panels shall be capable of supporting a 300 lb. load (applied at midspan) without permanent deformation. Panels shall be biasable to a 25% change in grade. D. Gates shall be fabricated using ForeRunnerTM rail material and gate ends having the same outside cross-section (1.75" Square) as the rail. Gate ends shall be 0.125" thick; gate pickets shall be 0.080" thick. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined either by welding or by the same retaining rod process used for panel assembly. 1. Gate posts shall be 3" square 12 Ga. Minimum material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Fence posts shall be set at 72" O.C., plus or minus 1/2", depending on the nominal span specified. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the gate openings specified in the construction plans. The "Earthwork" and "Concrete" sections of this specification shall govern post base material requirements. Panels shall be attached to posts using mechanically fastened panel brackets supplied by the manufacturer. B. Fence posts and gate posts shall be embedded 36" into concrete footing. 3.03 CLEANING A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post -hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 323119- 4 APRIL 11, 2011 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES END OF SECTION 323119 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 323119- S APRIL 11, 2011 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES SECTION 323120 — ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Section. 1.02 SUMMARY Contract, including General and Specification Sections, apply to this A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the elc arnnin curl roll gate. system defined here n. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Division 03 Section "Concrete". B. Division 22 Section "Earthwork". 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The manufacturer shall supply a total roll gate system of Ameristar® PassPort® H Ornamental design series and Majestic style. The system shall include all components pickets, rails, gate uprights, wheels motor, motor housing, and access hardware required. 1.05 SUBMITTAL A. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings under the provisions of Section 013300. B. The manufacturer's submittal package consisting of gate elevations, hardware details, and installation details, shall be submitted prior to installation. C. Submit drawings showing connections to adjacent construction, range of travel, and all electrical and mechanical connections to the operator. Drawings shall also show the size and location of the concrete mounting pad. Underground electrical runs shall be shown on shop drawings. D. Test reports: 1. Submit affidavits from the manufacturer demonstrating that the gate operator has been tested to 200,000 cycles without breakdown. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION Nn F 323120- 1 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES 2. Each operator shall bear a label indicating that the gate operator has been tested to a set of quality control procedures, including full power, function and inherent reversing sensor function 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. B. Manufacturer: A company specializing in the manufacture of automatic gate operators of the type specified, with a minimum of ten years experience. C. Installer: A minimum of three years experience installing similar equipment. 1.07 CODES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Operators shall be built to UL325 standards and be listed by a NRTL testing laboratory. Complete all electrical work according to local codes and National Electrical code. All fieldwork shall be performed in a neat and professional manner, completed to journeyman standards. B. Current safety standards require the use of multiple external sensors to be capable of reversing the gate in either direction upon sensing an obstruction. See also 2.02D. C. Automated gates shall be constructed to conform to the ASTM F2200-02 standard for sliding gates. D. Current safety standards require gate operators to be designed and labeled for specific usage classes. HySecurity Model S1ideWinder 38 is compliant in all usage classes, Classes I -IV. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a five-year limited warranty against all defects in materials or workmanship. Defective materials shall be replaced with comparable materials furnished by the manufacturer, at no cost to the owner. Freight, labor and other incidental costs are not covered under the factory warranty, but may be covered by a separate service agreement between installing company and the owner. 1. To ensure validation of warranty, return completed warranty registration form (included in Installation and Reference manual) to manufacturer. 1.09 REFERENCES A. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Glass. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 323120- 2 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES B. ASTM IJ822 — Practive for Conducting 'Pests on Faint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open -Flame Carbon -Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. C. ASTM D 1654 - 'Pest Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments. D. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculations of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. E. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to The Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). F A .TM D33S9 -"I"'r,%1 Mr,.(1iod Ivi Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damages occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The steel roll gate system shall conform to Ameristar® PassPort® II Ornamental design series and Majestic style and frame configuration as 3-rail frame configuration manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc. in Tulsa, Oklahoma. 2.02 MATERTAT. A. Steel material for roll gate components (i.e. pickets, rails, diagonals and uprights), shall be industrial steel with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (344 MNa). B. Ornamental picket material shall be 1" square x 14 Ga. tubing for PassPort® II Ornamental gate pickets. Picket spacing shall be 4-3/4" for PassPort® II Ornamental gate pickets. Material for toprails, uprights and diagonals rails shall be 2" square x 11 Ga. Material for the bottom rail shall be 2" x 4" x 11 Ga. Posts shall be 4" square x 11 G-a. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Pickets, rails, uprights and posts shall be precut to specified lengths. Diagonals shall be precut to specified lengths and angles. Frame materials shall be joined by COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 323120- 3 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES welding. Pickets shall be face welded to roll gate frame, except for Invincible style gates over 18' long. Invincible style gates over 18' long shall have pickets face - welded to 2" x 2" angle iron to form panels equal in length to the gate frame bay width. B. The manufactured roll gates and bolt -on panels (if applicable) shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal stratification coating process (hightemperature, in -line, multi -stage, multi -layer) including, as a minimum, a six -stage pre-treatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic sprayapplication of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The topcoat shall be a "no -mar" TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be (specify Black, Bronze, White, or Desert Sand). The stratification -coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1. C. Completed gates shall be capable of supporting a 200 lb. load applied at midspan without permanent deformation. 2.04 GATE OPERATORS A. HySecurity Gate Operators S1ideWinder 38 with Smart Touch Controller, or other comparable operator, as approved by the architect. Substitute operators that are approved will be published in an addendum, not less than ten days prior to bid opening. 2.05 OPERATION A. Gate operation shall be by means of a cable winch system employing a 5/32" (4 mm) diameter stainless steel cable that is fixedly attached to a 7.6 inch (193 mm) diameter drum. The electric motor shall be a 3 phase inverter duty rated induction motor, mated to a 40 Ampere variable speed controller, which allows smooth acceleration and precise stop and start functionality. The gate operator system shall not employ roller chains or sprockets to transfer power from operator to gate panel. Operator shall contain an integrated UPS power supply that keeps the gate operator fully functional without AC power in case of power failure. The UPS system shall also be capable of keeping the external access control system functional during a power failure. Operator shall detect and automatically adjust to either 115 Volt or 230 Volt 50/60 Hz source power and supply 24 Volt DC control power as well as three-phase to a single universal motor. Operator system shall provide automatic electronic locking to prevent unauthorized entry. Operator shall automatically unlock when the DC power is turned off so that the gate can be manually pushed if necessary. B. Operator ratings: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 323120- 4 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES 1. Motor rating: 1 Horsepower 2. Voltage compatibility: 115/208/230 Volts 50/60Hz Single Phase 3. Current draw: 6 Amps @ 115V / 3 Amps @208/230V 4. Control circuit: 24 Volts DC 5. Gate travel capacity: 38 feet (11.58 m) 6. Gate weight capacity: 2.000 pounds (907 kg) maximum 7. Pull force capacity: 200 pounds (90 kg) 8. Speed: selectable to 9 inches (229 mm)/sec or 1 foot (.30 m)/sec 9. Environmental: -20F to 180F 10. UPS capacity during power failure: 2,000 feet (610 m) of gate travel, depending upon acccssory loads. 30,000 feet (9.14 km) of UPS gate travel available with optional larger batteries. C. Security lock / Emergency operation / Manual operation: 1. Operator shall have automatic electronic locking to prevent unauthorized entry which shall function after the loss of AC power. 2. Operator shall unlock with a switch input so that the gate can be manually pushed. 3. Operator shall have inputs for Emergency open and Fmergency close. 4. Operator shall have outputs to indicate forced entry, full open and full closed gate position. D. Operator shall contain these electrical components as standard equipment: 1. Electric motor: Shall be a NEMA 56 size, totally enclosed, inverter rated variable speed 3 phase continuous duty motor. 2. Limit sensors: Programmable electronic sensing system with gate position resolution exceeding 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm). 3. Transformer: 500VA. Fully enclosed with integral circuit breakers for all primary taps. 4. All components shall have overload protection. 5. Integrated board for 3 phase inverter drive / charger / UPS controller containing: a. 40 Amp rated output 3 phase motor drive. b. 24 Amp rated output battery charger. C. DSP microprocessor with flash memory to control all motor and charger functions. E. Standw'd iuechauical components shall include as a minimum: 1. Electrical enclosure: Oversized, metal, with Plexiglas cover for protection from intrusion of foreign objects, and providing ample space for the addition of accessories. 2. Chassis: 10 gauge (3.4 mm) Galvanized steel with powder coated finish mountcd on an insulating polyethylene base plate. 3. Cover: Molded polyethylene. F. Controls: Stuart Touch Controller Board containing: 1. Built-in power surge/lightening strike protection on all inputs. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 323120- 5 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES 2. Double sided control board with all sensitive electronic components on the protected bottom side, conformal coated for environmental protection. 3. 256k flash memory allows updates to program software without removal of parts. 4. Non-volatile memory to support system configuration and event logs without power. 5. Clock chip to support time date recording of event logging system. 6. Liquid crystal display for reporting of functions and setup menu programming. 7. Membrane switch interface allowing full system control with only five buttons. 8. Automatically self adaptive inherent entrapment sensor. 9. Integrated "warn before operate" system. 10. Integrated timer to close and maximum run timer. 11. Two spare RS-485 ports for external communication and support of expansion controls. 12. RS-232 port for external serial communication, reading of event log and programming. 13. Two spare output relays, 40 Amp rated with at least 19 programmable function options. 14. Spare solid state output with, 4 Amp rated with at least 19 programmable function options. 15. Programmable anti -tailgate mode for faster gate closure and to deter following vehicles. G. Required external sensors: See 1.05B. Specify photo eyes or gate edges or a combination thereof to be installed such that the gate is capable of reversing in either direction upon sensing an obstruction. H. Optional control devices: Radio control and keypads. 2.06 FACTORY TESTING A. Fully assemble and test, at the factory, each gate operator to assure smooth operation, sequencing and electrical connection integrity. Tests shall simulate physical and electrical loads equal to the fully rated capacity of the operator components. B. Assure reliability of control boards by testing 100% of production for 19 hours in an environmental chamber that cycles between OF — 160F while a computer monitors and records board functions. C. Check all mechanical connections for tightness and alignment. D. Check all mechanical parts and electrical wires to assure that chafing cannot occur during shipping or operation. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 323120- 6 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES PART z - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All new gate installations shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. B. All hardware shall be installed in accordance with the Passport installation instructions. Passport roll gates shall be installed so they comply with current A STM F2200 & UL325 standards. C. Gatc stops shall be installed on each track in a way that conforms to current ASTM F2200 standards. 3.02 SITE EXAMINATION A. Locate concrete mounting pad in accordance with approved shop drawings. B. Make sure that gate is operating smoothly under manual conditions before installation of gate uperators. Do not proceed until gate panel is level, aligned and operates without binding. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test gate operator through ten full cycles and adjust for operation without binding, scraping or uneven motion. Test limit settings for proper "at rest" gate position. B. All anchor bolts shall be fully concealed in the finished installation. 3.04 CONTINUED SERVICE AND DOCUMENTATION A. Train owner's personnel in the general maintenance of the gate operator and accessories and provide one copy of "Installation and Reference", manual for the owner's use (a second manual is available upon request.) Manuals will identify parts of the equipment for future procurement. NOTE: HySecurity Gate Operators reserves the right to change these specifications at any time, without notice and without prejudice. Call (800) 321-9947 or check for updated current specifications online at www.hysecurity.com if you are not sure that you have the latest vel dull. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 323120- 7 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Gate posts shall be set in accordance with the spacings shown in the construction plans. The "Earthwork" and "Concrete" sections of this specification shall govern post base material requirements. 6" wheels shall be bolted to the gate between the wheel plates welded near the ends of the gate bottom rail. The gate shall be set upright with the V-grooved wheels positioned over the pre -installed steel V-track that traverses the gate opening. Roller guides shall be affixed to the gate posts at a height even with the gate toprail to hold the gate in a vertical position. Gate stops shall be welded to the end of the gate or track so gate cannot pass rollers in either direction. B. Install gate operator in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, current at the time of installation. Coordinate locations of operators with contract drawings, other trades and shop drawings. C. Installer shall insure that the electric service to the operator is rated for 20 AMPS. Operator draws 700 watts maximum. 3.06 CLEANING The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. Table 1— Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements Adhesion D3359 — Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test). Corrosion Resistance B 117, D714 & D 1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D 1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8" coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters). Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625" ball). Weathering Resistance D822 D2244, D523 (60° Weathering Resistance over Method) 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units). COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 323120- 8 APRIL 11, 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES 3.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. END OF SECTION 323120 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STA rION NO.6 323120- 9 ARIL, 11. 2011 ORNAMENTAL STEEL ROLL GATES SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Manual valves. 4. Pressure -reducing valves. 5. Automatic control valves. 6. Automatic drain valves. 7. Transition fittings. 8. Dielectric fittings. 9. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 10. Sprinklers. 11. Quick couplers. 12. Drip irrigation specialties. 13. Controllers. 14. Boxes for automatic control valves. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit -piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water -distribution -system pressure. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote -control, signaling power -limited circuits. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 1 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make mi- nor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated. C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 260 psi. 2. Circuit Piping: 150 psi. 1.05 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Areas receiving underground sprinkler system is shown on drawings. B. Design shall be completed by licensed Irrigation Designer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide underground sprinkler system as a complete unit produced by a single acceptable manufacturer, including heads, valves, piping circuits, controls, and accessories. 1.07 REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials 1. D2241: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). 2. D2287: Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC). 3. D2464: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Threaded, Schedule 80. JW4. D2466: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Socket Type, Sche- dule 40. 5. D2564: Solvent Cement for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fit- tings. 6. D2855: Making Solvent - Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 1.08 DEFINITIONS A. Irrigation Mains: That portion of piping from water source to remote control valves. This portion of piping is subject to surges, being a closed portion of irriga- tion system. Hydrant lines (QCV) are considered part of main line piping system. B. Lateral Piping: That portion of piping from remote control valve to sprinkler heads. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 2 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION 1.09 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. Coverage indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Layout portions of irri- gation system not indicated on Drawings to meet specified coverage in com- pliance with local codes and regulations. 2. Complete irrigation system including trenching and back filling for all pipes, values and drain pits, providing mains, laterals, risers, fittings, sprinkler heads, values, controllers, electric wiring, and necessary specialties and accessories. 3. Sleeves beneath parking areas, walkways, roads, and driveways where re- quired. 4. Regulate and adjust sprinkler heads, timed sequence control devices, sectional valves and rain ovcrrider. 5. Each zone to be comprised of approximately equal water demand. Pressure not to exceed 6 feet per second. 6. Sprinkler heads in a zone shall have the same precipitation rate. 7. Provide 100 percent coverage by locating heads as recommended by the man- ufacturer. Proper overlap shall prevent "scalloping". No throw is permitted over walks, drives or buildings. 8. Turf and unlike plant materials shall be zoned separately based on water needs. 9. Locate heads discretely using risers only in shrub beds. 10. Heads adjacent to pavement shall be installed on swing joints. 11. Consider all plant heights and grade changes in design and installation of the irrigation systerli. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01: Section - Submittal Procedures B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data with installation and storage instructions for each product specified. 1. Shop Drawings: a. Indicate location of irrigation heads to match specified water coverage. Indicate valves, piping and accessories, show design pressure, valve size, pipe size, GMP requirements, drain valves, and sleeves. b. Show location and size of city/county main, size of tap to be made, wa- ter meter location, and hackflow prevention, size and location. C. Division 1: Section — Closeout Procedures 1. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Provide two copies of instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog. a. Include winterization procedures. b. Indicate length of time each valve is to be open to produce a given amount of water delivery. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 3 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION 2. Record drawings: a. Indicate locations, sizes and kinds of equipment installed. b. Dimension from 2 permanent points of reference (building corners, si- dewalk, or road intersections, etc.) the location of the following items: 1) Connection to water lines. 2) Connection to electrical power. 3) Gate valves. 4) Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension max. 100' along routing). 5) Significant changes in routing of lateral lines form those indicated on Drawings. 6) Sprinkler control valve. 7) Routing of control wiring. 8) Yard hydrants and quick coupling valves. 3. Controller Charts: a. Record Drawings shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before controller charts are prepared. b. Submit 2 controller charts for each controller. C. Show the area controlled by the automatic controller. It shall be the max- imum size which the controller enclosure door will allow. d. The chart shall be a reduced drawing of the actual as -built system If con- troller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, enlarge to size that will be readable when reduced. e. Chart shall be a blackline or blueline ozalid print. Use a different color to indicate the area of coverage for each station. f. When approved, hermetically seal chart between 2 pieces of plastic and securely mount to controller enclosure door. 1.11 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Be responsible for locating and identifying existing utilities. No- tify Architect of any conflicts which affect the approved irrigation layout. B. Obstructions Below Grade: If obstructions such as rock or underground construc- tion work are encountered in any irrigation excavation work, alternate locations will be selected. Where locations cannot be changed, removed obstruction. The obstruc- tion shall be removed to a depth of not less than 3 feet below grade. C. Damage by Leaks: Be responsible for damage to the grounds, plants, walks, roads, building pipings system, electrical systems, and their equipment and contents cause by leaks in piping systems being installed or having been installed. Repair damages so causeD at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Staking: Be responsible for location staking. Irrigation head locations shall be de- termined by calculating dimensions from approved shop drawings. Adjustments may be necessary to avoid interference with underground obstructions. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 4 APRIL 1 l , 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION 1.12 WARRANTY A. Repair any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty pe- riod. B. Restore all damaged plantings, paving, or improvement within the warranty period. C. Materials and equipment shall be warranted in writing against defects in materials and workmanship by the respective manufacturers. All installation work shall be guaranteed for two years after final acceptance. D. No claims under warranty shall be considered for materials damaged or destroyed by vandals or damages caused by unauthorized operations of the system. 1.13 MAINTENANCE TOOLS A. Provide 2 sets of tools for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied. B. Provide three quick coupling keys and three 3/a inch hose swivels as part of this con- tract. C. Provide 2 five foot keys for operation of Lale valves. D. Provide 2 keys fur each automatic controller. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Heads, valves, controllers, backflow preventers, yard hydrants and other compo- ncnts as scheduled on shop drawings. B. Pressure Mainlines and Non -Pressure Lateral Lines: All pipe, in sizes indicated on the shop drawings shall be marked continuously and permanently with the follow- ing information: Manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, class or schedule, and NSF approval, and type of pipe. 2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Irrigation Mains- 1. Pipe: ASTM D 1784, PVC Schedule 40, SDR-21, 260 psi maximum. 2. Joint: ASTM D 2241 bell end type 3. Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM D 2466 solvent cement type. COLLEGE STATION HKl: STATION NO. 6 32840i1- N APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION B. Zone Lateral Lines: 1. Pipe: ASTM D 1784, PVC Class-200, SDR-21. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2241 bell end. 3. Fittings: ASTM D2 466 Socket type. C. Gate Valves: 1. 3" and larger: Iron body, non -rising stem, threaded ends. 2. 2-1/2" and smaller: Type 1, class 150 psi, threaded ends. D. Station Control Valves: 1. Station Control Valves: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufac- turers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following. a. "PEB Series" — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA (818) 963-9311. 2. Valve Type: Remote control valves. Substitutions: Permitted. 3. Primers and Solvents: As recommended by PVC pipe manufacturer. 2.03 SPRINKLERS HEADS A. Small Area Heads (for use in small lawn/shrub areas): 1. Small Aread Heads: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following: a. Cycolac (plastic) "1800 Series" — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA (818) 963-9311. 2. Each head shall have an interchangeable nozzle (available in different patterns and distances of throw). Substitutions: Permitted. 3. Each head shall have a basket screen. 4. Provide pressure compensating screens (P.C.S) as indicated on Drawings. B. Large Area Heads (for use in large lawn areas) 1. Large Area Heads: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following. a. 3500 Series — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA (818) 963-9311. 2. Use adjustable arc (ADJ) unless Drawings show full circle (360) Substitu- tions: Permitted. 3. If water pressure is excessively high, provide pressure reducing feature on zone valves. 2.04 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM A. Automatic Controllers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers of- fering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following. 1. Manufacturer: ESP-20 — MC Plus — Rain Bird Sales, Inc., Glendora, CA (818) 963-9311. a. LPP-K Primary Surge Protector b. LK-712 (Lock) Provide Owner with two keys. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 6 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION B. Division 1: Section — Product Requirements. C. Substitutions: Permitted. D. Stations: Control stations as shown on shop drawings. E. Station Timing: Independent for each station with each infinitely adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. F. Day Programming: Programming dials encompassing 14-day cycle. G. Operation: Capable of automatic or manual function as selected by operator. 1-1. Power Requirements: 1. Input: 115 volt AC 2. Output to Valves: 24 Volts AC. I. Provide reset circuit breaker for overcurreUt protection. J. Provide master manual on -off switch, K. Rain Detector: 1. Rani Detector: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offer- ing specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the follow- ing. a. "Mini-Clik" by Glen-Hiltun Products, Inc., Bethesda, MD, (301) 441- 8673. 2. Divisiion 1: Section — Product Requirements. 3. Substitutions: Permitted. 4. Mount on rear of Landscape Maintenance Building as per Manufacturer's rec- ommendations. 2.05 VALVE BOX A. Valve Boxes: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the following. 1. Ametek, Plymouth Products Division, Sheboygan, WI (414) 457-9435, Super- flexon Valve Box "No.10-170-001" with cover No. "10-173-004", with pen- tagon (1) locking device. B. Division ill: Section—1'rocluct Requirements. Substitutions permitted. C. Paint box covers matte black with paint specified in Section 099000 — Painting. 2.06 SWING JOINTS A. Swing joints are to he made of ,Schedule 40 pipe with insert to male thread combi- nation elbows. The swing joint will allow for precise adjustments of each head to COLLEGE NTATION FIRE STATION No. 6 328400 - 7 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION grade as well as protecting both the head and the pipe from damage if struck by un- usual force. 2.07 CONTROL WIRE A. Control Wire: All wire shall be #14 AWG solid copper, single conductor, rated U.F. with U.L listing, with 600 volt PVC insulation. All splices shall be made with wire nuts and totally encased in DBY direct burial splice kits. 2.08 QUICK COUPLING VALVES A. Quick Coupling Valves: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the work include the follow- ing: 1. Rain Bird "3RC" B. Mount quick coupling valves on 3/4 inch galvanized triple swing joints. All swing joints are to be assembled using two to three wraps of Teflon tape. 2.09 DRIP IRRIGATION A. Summary 1. This Section includes the installation of low volume irrigation components in- cluding Control Zone Kits, Landscape Dripline, Fittings and Emission Devic- es. B. Drip Irrigation Products 1. Control Zone Kits a. General 1) Control zone kit assemblies for drip irrigation zones must include a valve, filtration and pressure regulation to meet the flow require- ments of the zone. Where necessary a check valve shall also be in- stalled. 2) Control zone kits shall be Rain Bird control zone kits as indicated on construction drawings. 3) Components shall be sized according to the hydraulic demands of the system. b. Pressure Regulation Filters 1) Low Flow Control Zone Kit for zones with flows from 0.2 to 5.0 GPM (1 to 191/m) a) Control zone kits shall be Rain Bird Control Zone Kits with a Rain Bird Pressure Regulating (PR) Filter. b) The Pressure Regulating Filter combines filtration and pres- sure regulation in one unit for protection of downstream COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 8 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION components of a drip irrigation system. The pressure regula- tor is integrated into the filter body. The unit contains both a 200 mesh (75 micron) filter and a pressure regulator. The PR Filter shall have a body and cap that are made of glass -filled, UV -resistant polypropylene, with 120 psi (8,3 bars) pressure rating. The pressure regulating device is a normally open de- vice that allows full flow with little pressure loss unless the inlet pressure is greater than the preset level. As the inlet pressure increases above the preset level it compresses a spring and begins to reduce the downstream pressure. The pressure regulator built into the PR Filter body shall have a preset outlet pressure of approximately 30 psi (2,1 bars). The filter screen shall be constructed of durable polyester fabric attached to propylene frame. The standard 200-mesh screen (75 micron) shall be serviceable for cleaning purposes by un- screwing the cap from the body and removing the filter ele- ment. The design shall be of a compact "Y" body and cap configuratiun. The 3/4" filter body shall have a 3/4" male threaded inlet and outlet. The dimension for the PR filter shall not exceed the following: Height: 4 1/2" (11,4 cm), Length: 5 1/2" (14 cm), Width. 2" (5,1 cm). c) The control zone kits shall have an automatic irrigation con- trol valve that is Rain Bird's Low Flow Valve or Low Flow Anti -Siphon Valve. d) The Rain Bird Low Flow Valve shall have a diaphragm with a double -knife seal and constructed of durable Buna-N rub- ber with a clog -resistant metering orifice. The valve shall have one 90-mesh (200 micron) filter attached to the solenoid base. The valve shall have a 1/2" diameter seat. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact, weath- er -resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV re- sistant materials. e) Control zone kits with the Low Flow Anti -Siphon Valve shall have all the specifications of the Rain Bird control zone kits except that it shall include as one unit an electric irrigation control valve and atmospheric backflow preventer with an TAPMO approvcd listing. f) Models: (1) Low Flow Kit with Low Flow Valve and Pressure Regu- lating Filter with 200 mesh (75 micron) screen (a) XCZ-075-PRF (3/a" Low Flow Valve and 3/a" PR Filter) (b) XCZ-LF-100-PRF (1" Low Flow Valve and 3/a" PR Filter) (2) Low Flow Kit with Low Flow Anti -Siphon Valve and Pressure Regulating Filter with 200 mesh (75 micron) screen (a) XACZ-075-PRF COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 9 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION 2) Medium Flow Control Zone Kit for zones with flows from 3 to 15 GPM (11-58 1/s) a) Control zone kits shall be Rain Bird Control Zone Kits with a Rain Bird Pressure Regulating (PR) Filter. b) The Pressure Regulating Filter combines filtration and pres- sure regulation in one unit for protection of downstream components of a drip irrigation system. The pressure regula- tor is integrated into the filter body. The unit contains both a 200 mesh (75 micron) filter and a pressure regulator. The PR Filter shall have a body and cap that are made of glass -filled, UV -resistant polypropylene, with 120 psi (8,3 bars) pressure rating. The pressure regulating device is a normally open de- vice that allows full flow with little pressure loss unless the inlet pressure is greater than the preset level. As the inlet pressure increases above the preset level it compresses a spring and begins to reduce the downstream pressure. The pressure regulator built into the PR Filter body shall have a preset outlet pressure of approximately 40 psi (2,8 bars). The filter screen shall be constructed of durable polyester fabric attached to propylene frame. The standard 200-mesh screen (75 micron) shall be serviceable for cleaning purposes by un- screwing the cap from the body and removing the filter ele- ment. The design shall be of a compact "Y" body and cap configuration. The 1" filter body shall have a 1" male threaded inlet and outlet. The dimension for the PR filter shall not exceed the following: Height: 4 1/2" (11,4 cm), Length: 5 1/2" (14 cm), Width: 2" (5,1 cm). c) The control zone kits shall have an automatic irrigation con- trol valve that is Rain Bird's DV Valve or anti -siphon ASV Valve. d) The Rain Bird DV Valve or ASV valve shall have a diaph- ragm that is constructed of durable Buna-N rubber with a clog -resistant metering orifice. The valve shall have one 90- mesh (200 micron) filter attached to the solenoid base. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact, weather -resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemi- cal/UV resistant materials. e) Control zone kits with the Anti -Siphon ASV Valve shall have all the specifications of the Rain Bird control zone kit except that it shall include as one unit an electric irrigation control valve and atmospheric backflow preventer with an 1APM0 approved listing. f) Models (1) Medium Flow Kit with DV Valve and Pressure Regulat- ing Filter with 200 mesh (75 micron) screen (a) XCZ-100-PRF (2) Medium Flow Kit with Anti -Siphon Valve and Pressure Regulating Filter with 200 mesh (75 micron) screen (a) XACZ-100-PRF COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 10 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION C. Pressure Regulating Back Flush Filters 1) Low Flow Control Zane Kits for zones with flows from 0.2 to 5 GPM (1-191/m). a) Control zone kits shall be Rain Bird Control Zone Kits with a Rain Bird Pressure Regulating (PR) Back Flush Filter. b) The PR Back Flush Filter combines filtration with automatic cleaning and pressure regulation in one unit for protection of downstream components of a drip irrigation system. The pressure regulator is integrated into the filter body. The PR Back Flush Filter body shall be constructed of heavy-duty, glass -filled, UV resistant plastic material providing a pres- sure rating of not less than 120 psi (8,3 bars). The filter ele- ment shall be constructed of durable polyester fabric attached to a propylene frame. Automatic cleaning shall take place through a moving piston scouring the filter element each time the irrigation system is pressurized and de -pressurized. The 200-mesh screen (75 micron) shall be serviceable for manual cleaning purposes by unscrewing the cap from the body and removing the filter element. The PR Back Flush Filter shall come with a rubber Duck Bill Boot that is attached over the cap to prevent bugs and debris from entering the cleaning ports of the cap. The design shall be of a compact "Y" body and cap configuration. The 3/4 filter body shall have a 3/4" male tlncaded inlet and outlet. The dimension for the filter shall not exceed the following: Ileight: 4 1/2" (11,4 cm), Length- 5 1/2" (14 cm), Width: 2" (5,1 cm). c) The Pressure Regulating Back Flush Filter shall have an inte- grated pressure regulator that has an inlet pressures rating of not less than 120 psi (8,3 bars). The pressure regulating de- vice is a normally open device that allows full flow with little pressure loss unless the inlet pressure is greater than the pre- set level. As the inlet pressure increases above the preset level it compresses a spring and begins to reduce the down- stream pressure. The inline pressure regulator shall have a preset outlet pressure of approximately 30 psi (2,0 bar). d) When the control zone kit is not installed at the highest point of the irrigation zone it serves, a check valve shall be in- stalled downstream of the PR Back Flush Filter to prevent water from draining back into the valve box. e) Valves for these kits shall be either Rain Bird's Low Flow Valve or Low Flow Anti -Siphon Valve where backflow pre- vrntion is needed. f) The Rain Bird Low Flow Valve shall have a diaphragm with a double -knife seal and constructed of durable Buna-N rub- ber with a clog -resistant metering orifice. The valve shall have one 90-mesh (200 micron) filter attached to the solenoid base. The valve shall have a 1/2" diameter seat. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact, wrath - COLLEGE STKI'ION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 11 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION er-resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV re- sistant materials. g) Control zone kits with the Low Flow ASV Valve shall have all the specifications of the Rain Bird control zone kits with the Pressure Regulating Back Flush Filter except that it shall include as one unit an electric irrigation control valve and atmospheric backflow preventer with an IAPMO approved listing. h) Models: (1) Low Flow Kits with 3/4" Low Flow Valve, Pressure Regu- lating Back Flush Filter with 200-mesh (75 micron) screen. (a) XCZ-075-PRF-BF (2) Low Flow Kits with 3/4" Low Flow Anti -Siphon Valve, Pressure Regulating Back Flush Filter with 200-mesh (75 micron) screen. (a) XACZ-075-PRF-BF (3) Optional Check Valve: CV-075 2) Medium Flow Control zone kit for zones with flows from 3 - 15 GPM(11-581/m). a) Control zone kits shall be Rain Bird Control Zone Kits with a Rain Bird Pressure Regulating (PR) Back Flush Filter. b) The PR Back Flush Filter combines filtration with automatic cleaning and pressure regulation in one unit for protection of downstream components of a drip irrigation system. The pressure regulator is integrated into the filter body. The Pres- sure Regulating Back Flush Filter body shall be constructed of heavy-duty, glass -filled, UV resistant plastic material pro- viding a pressure rating of not less than 120 psi (8,3 bars). The filter element shall be constructed of durable polyester fabric attached to a propylene frame. Automatic cleaning shall take place through a moving piston scouring the filter element each time the irrigation system is pressurized and de- pressurized. The 200-mesh screen (75 micron) shall be ser- viceable for manual cleaning purposes by unscrewing the cap from the body and removing the filter element. The Pressure Regulating Back Flush Filter shall come with a rubber Duck Bill Boot that is attached over the cap to prevent bugs and debris from entering the cleaning ports of the cap. The design shall be of a compact "Y" body and cap configuration. The 1" filter body shall have a 1" male threaded inlet and outlet. The dimensions for the filter shall not exceed the following: Height: 4 1/2" (11,4 cm), Length: 5 1/2" (14 cm), Width: 2" (5,1 cm). c) The Pressure Regulating Back Flush Filter shall have an inte- grated pressure regulator that has an inlet pressure rating of not less than 120 psi (8,3 bars). The pressure regulating de- vice is a normally open device that allows full flow with little pressure loss unless the inlet pressure is greater than the pre - COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 12 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION set level. As the inlet pressure increases above the preset level it compresses a spring and begins to reduce the flow and downstream pressure. The inline pressure regulator shall have a. preset outlet pressure of approximately 40 psi (2,8 bar). d) When the control zone kit is not installed at the highest point of the irrigation zone it serves, a check valve shall be in- stalled downstream of the PR Back Flush Filter to prevent water from draining back into the valve box. e) The control zone kits shall have an automatic irrigation con-... trol valve that is Rain Bird's DV Valve or anti -siphon ASV Valve. f) The Rain Bird DV Valve or ASV valve shall have a diaph- ragm that is constructed of durable Buna-N rubber with a clog -resistant metering orifice. The valve shall have one 90- mesh (200 micron) filter attached to the solenoid base. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact, weather -resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemi- cal/UV resistant materials. g) Control zone kits with the Anti -Siphon Valve shall have all the specifications of the Rain Bird control zone kits except that it shall include as one unit an electric irrigation control valve and atmospheric backflow preventer with an IAPMO approved listing. h) Models (1) Medium Flow Kit with 1" DV Valve, Pressure Regulat- ing self-cleaning Back Flush Filter with 200-mesh (75 micron) screen. (a) XCZ-100-PRF-BF (2) Medium Flow Kit with 1" ASVF Valve, Pressure Regu- lating self-cleaning Back Flush Filter with 200-mesh (75 micron) screen. (a) XACZ-100-PRF-BF (3) Optional Check Valve... OV-100 d. Basket Filter 1) Commercial Control Zone Kits for zones with flows from 3.0 to 40.0 GPM a) Control Zone Kit shall be Rain Bird's Commercial Control Zone Kit with Rain Bird's 1" or 1 1/z" PESB valve, Quick Check Basket Filter with 200-mesh (75 micron) screen and 40 psi Pressure Regulator. b) The 1" control zone kit shall have a 1" isolation ball valve. c) The filter shall be a 1" inline Quick Check Basket Filter body constructed of heavy-duty, glass -filled, UV resistant poly- propylene capable of withstanding pressures of not less than 150 psi (10,3 bars). The design shall be a basket style body with jar -top cap. The cap shall incorporate an indicator that goes from. green to red during operation when the filter ele- ment needs cleaning. The dimensions for the filter shall not COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 13 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION exceed the following: Height: 6 1/2" (16,5 cm), Length: 6 1/2" (16,5 cm), Width: 3 1/2" (8,9 cm). The filter element shall be constructed of a durable stainless steel mesh attached to a propylene frame and shall be a standard 200-mesh (75 mi- cron). The screen shall be serviceable for cleaning purposes by unscrewing the cap from the body and removing the filter element. d) The control zone kit shall have an inline pressure regulator. The pressure regulator shall be constructed of durable, UV resistant non -corrosive material able to accommodate an inlet pressure rating of not less than 150 psi (10,3 bar). The pres- sure regulating device is a normally open device that allows full flow with little pressure loss unless the inlet pressure is greater than the preset level. As the inlet pressure increases above the preset level it compresses a spring and begins to reduce the flow and downstream pressure. The inline pres- sure regulator shall have a preset outlet pressure of approx- imately 40 psi (2,8 bar). e) The control zone kit shall have a 1" or 1 1/2" Rain Bird PESB series automatic irrigation control valve. The valve pressure rating not to be less than 150 psi (10,3 bars). The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high -impact, weather - resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resis- tant materials. The valve shall have a diaphragm constructed of a durable Buna-N rubber material reinforced with nylon. f) Models: (1) Medium Flow Kit for 3.0 to 20.0 GPM (11 to 76 Um). In- cludes a 1" PESB Valve, Basket Filter with 200 mesh (75 micron) screen, 40 psi Pressure Regulator and ball valve. (a) XCZ-100-B-COM (2) High Flow Kit for 15.0 to 40.0 GPM (58 to 151 Um). In- cludes a 1 1/2" PESB Valve, 1 1/2" by 1" PVC TEE, Basket Filters (2) with 200 mesh (75 micron) screen, and 40 psi Pressure Regulators (2). (a) XCZ-150-COM 2. Landscape Tubing a. Black Stripe Tubing 1) Pressure -Compensating Rain Bird Black Stripe tubing a) Rain Bird's Black Stripe tubing shall pressure compensate by lengthening the emitter's turbulent flow path. The emitter shall be cylindrical in shape and provide surface area for fil- tration throughout 360' of its outer circumference. This in- creased filtration surface area shall assure that the water that enters the inline emitter can always come from the upper half, or cleanest part of the flow path in the polyethylene tub- ing regardless of how the inline tubing lays on the ground. b) Rain Bird Black Stripe tubing shall be black in color with vi- brant green, purple, or yellow stripes for easy zone identifica- COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 14 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION tion and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.705 inches (16 mm) and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.615 inches. c) Operating pressure range: 0 to 60 psi (0 to 4,1 bar). d) Models to be Pressure -Compensating Landscape Black Stripe tubing for potable water systems: (1) Rain Bird XBS Series with green, purple, and yellow f striping. b. 1/4" Distribution Tubing 1) Pressure — Compensating Rain Bird 1/4" distribution tubing r a) Rain Bird 1/4" distribution tubing shall be black in color and conform to an outside diameter (O. D.) of .220 inches and an inside diameter (I.T),) of .160 inches. b) Distribution tubing shall fit over barbed outlet post on all xe- rigation devices and 1/" transfer fittings and shall be made from quality polyethylene of vinyl materials. c) Models: (1) Rain Bird Vinyl Tubing DT-025 Series coil of 1/4" Vinyl Distribution Tubing (2) Rain Bird Polyethylene Tubing PT-025 series coil of 1/4" polyethylene tubing. 3. Fittings a. Compression Fittings 1) Easy Fit Compression Fittings: a) The Easy Fit Compression Fitting System shall consist of 3 fittings (tee, coupling and elbow) plus 4 adapters and two removable flush caps. b) The Easy Fit Compression Fittings shall accept all polyethy- lene tubing from .630" to .710" (16mm-18mm) OD and shall provide a leak -free compression fit. They also shall provide connections to threaded components when used with any of the 5 adapters. The fittings shall be molded from UV - resistant ABS material with a Buna-N rubber seal for long- term, leak free connections. c) The adapters shall be made of UV -resistant ABS materials and shall only be used with Easy Fit Compression Fittings. The adapters shall be installed in the Easy Fit Compression Fittings and threaded onto 1/2" or 3/4" Male- or Female - threaded components. Pressure loss for the Easy Fit Adapters is a maximum of .1 PSI for each adapter used. d) The removable black flush cap shall be used to close off a line. The purple flush cap shall be used to close off a line containing non -potable water. e) The operating pressure range for the Easy Fit Compression Fitting System shall be 0 to 60 psi (0 to 4,1 bars). f) Models: (1) Tee: MDCFTEE (2) Coupling: MDCFCOUP (3) Elbow: MDCFEL (4) Below Grade Irrigation Emission Stake: BIGIESTK COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 15 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION (5) Adapters: (a) 1/2" Male pipe thread adapter: MDCF50MPT (b) 3/4" Male pipe thread adapter: MDCF75MPT� (c) '/2" Female pipe thread adapter: MDCF50FPT (d) 3/4" Female pipe thread adapter: MDCF75FPT ti (e) 3/4" Female hose thread adapter: MDCF75FHT (6) Flush Cap end closure for potable system: MDCFCAP 2) Compression Adapters ' a) Rain Bird compression adapters shall be made of ABS. b) The compression adapters shall be used to allow connection i of PVC to polyethylene tubing. " c) The 700 Series Compression adapter shall fit 1/2" polyethy- lene tubing with 0.700" O.D. d) The 600 Series Compression adapter shall fit Rain Bird Landscape Dripline and any 1/2" polyethylene tubing with 0.620"- 0.630" O.D. e) The operating pressure range for the compression adapters shall be 0 to 50 psi (0 to 3,5 bars). f) Models: (1) 700-CF-1: 1/2" Compression Adapter (2) 600-CF-1: 16mm Compression Adapter b. LOC Fittings 1) The LOC fittings shall be used with any polyethylene tubing from 0.620 to .0630" OD (16 mm OD). The fittings shall connect and disconnect polyethylene tubing with a screw -on cap. 2) The LOC fittings shall be made from glass -filled polypropylene. 3) The operating pressure range for LOC fittings shall be 0 to 50 psi (0 to 3,5 bars). 4) Models: a) LOC 16mm 050 MPT Adapter b) LOC 16mm 075 MPT Adapter c) LOC 16mm Tee d) LOC 16mm Elbow e) LOC 16mm Coupling C. '/4" Barb Transfer Fittings 1) Rain Bird'/4" barb transfer fittings shall consist of 3 fittings: con- nector, elbow and tee. 2) Rain Bird '/4" barb transfer fittings shall be used to connect 1/4" distribution tubing (DT-025 or PT-025) with an ID of 0. 16" (4 mm). 3) The transfer fittings shall be barbed on one end to permit easy in- sertion into any I/2" or 3/4" polyethylene tubing. They shall be able to be inserted into '/2" or 3/4" tubing by the use of the Xeriman® tool. 4) The I/4" barb transfer fittings shall be made from UV resistant acetyl. 5) The operating pressure range for the fittings shall be 0 to 50 psi (0 to 3,5 bars). COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 16 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION 6) Models: a) XBFICONN: 1/4" Barb Connector b) XBF2EL: 1/4" Barb x Barb Ell c) XBF3TEE: 1/4" Barb x Barb x Barb Tee 4. Emission Devices a. Point Source Single -Outlet Emission Devices 1) Rain Bird Xeri-BugTM Emitters: a) Rain Bird Xeri-Bug emitters shall be pressure -compensating over the pressure range of 15 to 50 psi (1,0 to 3,5 bars) and have a consistent flow rate of 0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 gallons per hour over this pressure range. b) The emitters shall be self -flushing to minimize clogging. c) The emitters shall be made of UV resistant acetyl externally. d) The emitters shall be color -coded on the inlet side to identify flow rate. A blue inlet shall indicate an emitter with a flow rate of 0.5 gallons per hour (1,891/h), a black inlet shall indi- cate a flow rate of 1.0 gallons per hour (3,791/h) and a red in- let shall indicate a flow rate of 2.0 gallons per hour (7,571/h). e) The emitters shall be available with two inlet options: self - piercing barb inlet and 10-32 threaded inlet. The emitters with self -piercing barb inlet shall permit one-step insertion into '/z" or 3/a" drip tubing when installed with Rain Bird's Xeriman tool. f) Models: (1) With self -piercing inlet barb: (a) XB-05PC (Blue) Barb inlet; 0.5 GPH (1,891/h) (b) XB-10PC (Black) Barb inlet; 1.0 GPH (3,791/h) (c) XB-20PC (Red) Barb inlet; 2.0 GPH (7,571/h) (2) With 10-32 threaded inlet: (a) XB-05PC-1032 (Blue) 10-32 Threaded inlet; 0.5 GPH (1,891/h) (b) XB-10PC-1032 (Black) 10-32 Threaded inlet; 1.0 GPII (3,79 l/h) (c) XB-20PC-1032 (Red) 10-32 Threaded inlet; 2.0 GPH (7,571/h) 2) Rain Bird Pressure -Compensating Modules: a) Rain Bird Pressure -Compensating Modules shall be pressure compensating over the range of 10 to 50 psi (0.7 to 3,5 bar) and have a consistent flow rate of (5] or [7] or [10] or [12] or [18] or [24] gallons per hour over this pressure range. b) The pressure -compensating modules shall be made of UV re- sistant acetyl externally. c) The pressure -compensating modules shall be color -coded on the outlet side to identify flow rate. A tan outlet shall indicate an emitter with a flow rate of 5 gallons per hour (18,931/h), a violet outlet shall indicate a flow rate of 7 gallons per hour (26,501/h), a green outlet shall indicate a flow rate of 10 gal- lons per hour (37,85 1/h), a dark brown outlet shall indicate a flnw rate of 12 gallons per hour (45,42 1/h), a white outlet COLLEGE STATION FIDE STATION NO.6 318400 - 17 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION shall indicate a flow rate of 18 gallons per hour (68,13 1/h) and an orange outlet shall indicate a flow rate of 24 gallons per hour (90,84 A). d) The pressure -compensating modules shall be available with two inlet options: self -piercing barb inlet and 10-32 threaded inlet. The pressure -compensating modules with self -piercing barb inlet shall permit one-step insertion into '/2" or 3/4" drip tubing when installed with Rain Bird's Xeriman tool. e) Models: (1) With self -piercing inlet barb: (a) PC-05: light brown, 5 GPH (18,95 1/h) (b) PC-07: violet, 7 GPH (26,53 1/h) (c) PC-10: green, 10 GPH (37,901/h) (d) PC-12: dark brown, 12 GPH (45,481/h) (e) PC-18: white, 18 GPH (68,22 A) (f) PC-24: orange, 24 GPH (90,961/h) (2) With 10-32 threaded inlet: (a) PC-05 10-32: light brown, 5 GPH (18,95 1/h) (b) PC-07 10-32: violet, 7 GPH (26,53 1/h) (c) PC-10 10-32: green, 10 GPH (37,901/h) (d) PC-12 10-32: dark brown, 12 GPH (45,481/h) (e) PC-18 10-32: white, 18 GPH (68,221/h) (f) PC-24 10-32: orange, 24 GPH (90,961/h) 3) Rain Bird Xeri-BubblerTM a) The Rain Bird Xeri-Bubblers shall be available in 3 different flow options: half -circle with 5 streams, full -circle with 8 streams and full -circle umbrella. The connections shall be [10-32 self -tapping thread], ['/4" barb], or [5" spike]. The flow and radius shall be adjustable by turning the outer cap. b) The SXB series of Xeri-Bubblers shall have a flow range of 0 to 13 GPH (0 to 49,21 A). The UXB series of Xeri-Bubblers shall have a flow range of 0 to 35 GPH (0 to 132,48 1/h) c) The operating pressure range for the Xeri-Bubblers shall be 15 to 30 psi (1,0 to 2,0 bars) d) Models: (1) SXB-180-1032: Half -circle, 5 streams, 10-32 thread (2) SXB-180-025: Half -circle, 5 streams, 1/4" barb (3) SXB-180-SPYK: Half -circle, 5 streams, 5" spike (4) SXB-360-1032: Full -circle, 8 streams, 10-32 thread (5) SXB-360-025: Full -circle, 8 streams, 1/4" barb (6) SXB-360-SPYK: Full -circle, 8 streams, 5" spike (7) UXB-360-1032: Full -circle, umbrella, 10-32 thread (8) UXB-360-025: Full -circle, umbrella, 1/4" barb (9) UXB-360-SPYK: Full -circle, umbrella, 5" spike 4) Rain Bird PC Diffuser Cap a) The Rain Bird PC Diffuser Cap shall be made of UV - resistant polyethylene material. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 18 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION b) The PC Diffuser Cap shall be capable of snapping onto Rain Bird's pressure -compensating modules to create a bubbler ef- fect and prevent wash out. c) The PC Diffuser Cap shall be available in black. d) Models: (1) For potable zones (a) PC Diffuser (Black) 5) Rain Bird Diffuser Bug Cap a) The Rain Bird Diffuser Bug Cap shall have a barb inlet and a flanged shield. The barb inlet shall fit into '/a" distribution tubing with ID of 0.16 inches (4 nini).. h) The flanged shield of the Diffuser Bug Cap shall diffuse wa- ter to minimize soil erosion at emission point. c) The lhttuser Bug Cap shall be made of polyethylene. d) The operating pressure range of the Diffuser Bug Cap shall be 0 to 50 psi (0 to 3,5 bars). e) The Diffuser Bug Cap shall be available in black. f) Models: (1.) For potable zones (2) DBC-025 (Black) (3) Fur noti-potable zones to. Broadcast Siagle-nutlet Emission Dcviecs 1) Rain Bird Xeri-Fop'1M Micro -Spray a) The Rain Bird Xeri-Pop Micro -Spray shall be made of UV - resistant ABS externally. b) The water inlet for the Xeri-Pop shall be a 1/a" inlet located at the bottom of the unit that can be connected to 1/a" distribu- tion tubing. c) The Xeri-Pop shall operate in the pressure range of 20 to 50 psi (1,4 to 3,5 hars) when water is supplied via 1/a" distribu- tion tubing. d) The Xeri-Pop shall be available with a pop-up height of 6 inches. e) The Xeri-Pop shall be capable of handling any low -volume nozzle with female threads, including Rain Bird Multi -Port nozzles, 5 series MPR nozzle, 5 series plastic bubbler and 8 series MFK nozzle. f) Models: (1) XP-60OX: 6-inch pop-up 2) Rain Bird Xcri-SpraysTM a) Rain laird Xeri-Sprays shall be available in 4 different flow patterns: quarter -circle spray, half -circle spray, full -circle spray or mister. h) The flow and radius of each Xeri-Spray shall be adjusted by turning an integral ball valve. c) The Xeri-Sprays shall be available with 10-32 self -tapping threads COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 19 APRII: 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION 3) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION d) The operating pressure range of the Xeri-Sprays shall be 10 to 30 psi (0,75 to 2,1 bars), and the flow within this pressure range shall be 0 to 31 GPH (0 to 117,341/h) e) The radius of the Xeri-Sprays shall be 0 to 13.4 feet (0 to 4,1 m) full -circle; 0 to 10.6 feet (0 to 3,2 m) quarter -and half - circle. f) Models (1) XS-90: Quarter -circle, spray (2) XS-180: Half -circle, spray (3) XS-360: Full -circle, stream spray (4) 360 ADJ Mister Rain Bird Multi -Port Nozzle a) Rain Bird Multi -Port nozzle shall have a flat trajectory per- formance and a square spray pattern. b) The Multi -Port nozzle shall have 4 ports, and these can be configured open or close to create 5 different configurations. The Multi -Port nozzle shall be shipped with a Multi -Port Nozzle Punch Tool for this purpose. c) The Multi -Port nozzle shall have standard female nozzle threads. d) The Multi -Port nozzle shall operate in the pressure range of 15 to 70 psi (1,0 to 4,8 bars). e) The Multi -Port nozzle shall be shipped with a 30 mesh drop - in screen. f) Models: (1) MP5SSQ - Spray nozzle, 5 ft (1,5 m) radius. (2) MP2QS - Stream nozzle, 2 ft (0,6 m) radius. A. Division 1: Section — Execution Requirements B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. C. Report in writing to Contracting Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely af- fect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. By beginning work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 PREPARATION COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 20 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION A. Coordinate work which is embedded in concrete or masonry and route under paved areas. B. Provide timely delivery and installation at job site. C. Protect adjacent structures, surfaces, and finishes. Do not move equipment over structures without written approval from Architect. Provide necessary protection such as board roading, drop Cloths, etc., as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Sequencing: 1. Install sleeves under roads and pavement prior to commencement of paving. 2. Install sprinkler system after completion of site grading. B. Minimum Cover Below Finished Grade: 1. Zonc Latcral Pipe: Not less than 12 inc:hr, 2. Mains: Not less than 24 inches. C. Clearance Horizontally Between Lines: 1. Pipe 2 inches and smaller: 4 inches. 2. Pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger: 12 inches. 3. Other services: 12 inches. D. Maintain a minimum 1 inch vertical clearance between lines crossing at an angle greater than 45 degrees. E. Trench Width: Not less than 6 inches. F. Install underground piping so that it is not in contact with concrete, existing piping or other hard objects. Provide a minimum clearance of 2 inches between piping and hard object. G. Thrust blocks: Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided on the thrust side of mains. H. Backfill: Division 1: Section — Earthwork 1. Material shall not contain brick, rock lumber or organic materials subject to decomposing. 2. Trenches, after backfilling, shall be water filled and settled to prevent afterset- tling. 3. Level with finished grade. 4. After backfilling and water settling, soil around pop-up heads shall be tamped and heads left level with grade and plumb. 1. Piping Installation: 1. Install plastic pipe in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction. 2. Cut plastic pipe with a hand saw. Ensure a square cut. Remove burrs at cut ends prior to installation. 3. Plastic to plastic joints shall be solvent -welded. Solvent compatible with pipe and able to withstand specified pressure requirements. COLLEGE STATION .FIRE STATION NO. G 328400 •• 21 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IIZ'RIGA ION 4. Solvent Welded Joints: a. Thoroughly clean pipe and fitting with all purpose primer/cleaner and clean dry cloth. b. Apply a uniform coat of solvent to the outside of the pipe. C. Apply solvent to the fitting. d. Re -apply a light coat of solvent to the pipe and quickly insert into the fit- ting. e. Re -apply a light coat of solvent to the pipe and quickly insert into the fit- ting. f. Give the pipe or fitting a quarter turn to ensure even distribution of the solvent and make sure the pipe is inserted to the full depth of the fitting socket. g. Hold in position for 15 seconds. h. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the sys- tem J. Valves: 1. Manual Valves: Install manual valves in a valve box extending from grade to valve body, with minimum of 4 inch cover measured from grade to top of valve stem. 2. Automatic Valves: a. Install automatic valves plumb to within 1/16 inch, in a valve box ex- tending from grad to valve body, with minimum of 4 inch cover measure from grad to top of valve stem. b. Automatic valves installed under sprinkler heads may be installed with- out valve box, C. Automatic drains valves: Locate downstream of each control valve at the low point. K. Sprinklers and Quick Coupler: 1. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch. 2. Heads at Walks and Curbs: Set flush to within 1/8 inch. 3. Lower sprinkler heads to finished grade after lawn has become established and has settled. L. Control Wire: 1. Bury wires taped to side of pipe in same trench. 2. Bundle multiple wires and tape together maximum 10 feet on center. 3. Provide a 10 inch loop in wire at each valve where controls are connected. 4. Provide 10 inch loop in wires at not over 100 foot intervals. 5. Make electrical splices waterproof. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other work: 1. Locate and coordinate irrigated system work with underground utilities. 2. Coordinate irrigation system work with landscaping work. 3. Coordinate irrigation system sleeve installation with curbing and pavement work. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 22 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Division 01: Section —Quality Control B. Inspection: 1. Trenching. 2. Pressure supply line installation and testing. 3. Lateral line and electrical valves. 4. Coverage tests. C. Testing and Flushing 1. Flushing - a. After all piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, yard hydrant assemblies, and hose valves, thoroughly flush piping system under a full head of water. h. Maintain flushing for 3 minutes through furthermost valve. C. After flushing, cap all risers. 2. Adjusting: a. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent over -spray onto walks, roadways, and building. b. If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment will pro- vide proper and more adequate coverage, make such adjustments prior to planting. Adjustments may include changes in nozzle size and degrees of are as required. C. Lower raised sprinkler heads within 10 days after notification by Archi- tect. d Sprinkler heads shall he performed at no cost to Owner. 3. Testing: a. Test all pressure lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. Prove water tightness. b. Testing of pressure main lines shall occur prior to installation of electric control valves. C. Sustain pressure in lines for not less than 2 hours. If leaks develop, re- place joints and repeat test until entire system has been accepted. d. Furnish force pump mid accessory test equipment. e. When the irrigation system is completed, perform a coverage test in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative to determine if the wa- ter coverage for planting areas is complete and adequate. Correct inade- quacies of coverage due to deviations from Drawings. Complete test be- fore ground cover is planted. 3.06 SYSTEM OPERATION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Operation: 1. Operate the completed system for the inspection at this time each sprinkler heart shall fie, visually For covemge, adjustrnent, insta.11alion and hri- formance, valves shall he inspected for adjustment, installation amil proper ni.1- tomatic manual control; "record documents" will be checked for accuracy; cleannh of cite will be checked.; and general items such. as manual drain COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 328400 - 23 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION valves, controller and quick couple valves will be inspected for the mainten- ance period. B. Instruction: 1. Instruct Owner in complete operation and maintenance of the irrigation sys- tem including but not limited to the controller operation, maintenance of the system's filters, adjustment of heads and winterization of system. END OF SECTION 328400 COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 328400 - 24 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTING IRRIGATION Revised —11 UU9 B/LS Unified Specifications SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING FOR EROSION CONTROL (BLOCK SODDING) (,Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underl ned indicate rei+isions that ivere made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Sodding tor erosion control shall consist of providing and planting Bermuda grass, San Augustine grass, or other acceptable sod along or across such areas as are designated on the drawings and in accordance with the specif cation requirements herein outlined. Zwr .fir 1 . ce.n 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Work and acceptable material for block sodding will be measured by the square yard, complete and in place. B. Work performed and material furnished under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Block Sodding", which price shall be full compensation for furnishing materials, preparation of ground for planting, planting, raking, fertilizing, watering, sprinkling, maintenance, and for labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to , complete the work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit material data on the source of the sod including the date the sod was cut. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The sod shall consist of live, growing Bermuda brass, San Augustine grass, or other acceptable sod, (ninety-five percent pure), secured from sources where the soil is fertile and has been fumigated. The sod shall have a healthy virile root system of dense, thickly matted roots throughout. The sod shall be cut from the field so that there is a minimum of one-half inch of soil on the roots of the sod, and so that no roots show on the bottom of the soil. Sod shall be dense, with the grass having been mowed to 1 inch height before lifting from field. Sod shall be in a vigorous condition, dark green in color, free of disease and harmful insects. The contractor shall not use sod from areas where the grass is thinned out, nor where the grass roots have been dried out by exposure to the air and sun to such an extent as to damage its ability to grow when transplanted. The sod shall be free from obnoxious weeds or other grasses and shall not contain any matter deleterious to its growth or which might affect its subsistence or hardiness when transplanted. Unless the area has been closely pastured, it shall be closely mowed and raked to remove all weeds and long- standing stems. B. Care shall be taken at all times to retain the native soil on the roots of the sod during the process of excavation, hauling and planting. Sod material shall be kept moist from the time it is dug, until planted. When so directed by the Engineer, the sod existing at the source shall be watered to the extent required, prior to excavating. Do not stack sod for more than 36 hours between the time of cutting and the time of installation. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any cod dcamerl nnarceptable for installation. Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications C. All plantings shall be done between the average date of the last freeze in the spring and six weeks prior to the average date for the first freeze in the fall, according to the U.S. Weather Bureau. D. Fertilizer shall conform to the requirements of the Item, "Fertilizer" and shall be applied at the rate of 480-pounds per acre. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Immediately after the finished grade has been approved, begin sodding operations to reduce excessive weed growth. If the sod bed is dry, immediately prior to sod installation, dampen the surface with a fine mist of water. B. Grass shall be turf sod, cut into 16 inch by 24 inch strips. C. All areas to be sodded shall be raked to true lines, free from all unsightly variations, bumps ridges or depressions. All sticks, stones, roots or other objectionable material which might interfere with the formation of a finely pulverized seed bed, shall be removed from the soil. D. Lay sod so that adjacent strips butt tightly, with no spaces between strips. Lay sod on mounds and slopes, with strips parallel to contours. Stagger joints. Sodded areas shall be flush with adjoining seeded areas. All sod shall, of course, be laid green side up. Tamp and roll the sod thoroughly to make contact with the sod bed, or as directed by the Engineer. E. Peg sod on slopes three to one or steeper with pegs driven through sod into soil, until pegs are flush with the turf. Space pegs 18 inches on center. Pegs to be 1 inch square, 6 inches long or, 6 inch lengths of lath. Commercial fertilizer as outlined in the Item, "Fertilizer" shall be applied to the entire sodded area at the prescribed rates, immediately following laying of the sod. Immediately after fertilizing, water the entire area to a saturated depth of 2-inches. F. Immediately after installation of the sod, remove sod clumps on soil, wash off any plant materials and pavements not to have sod. Edges along curbs and drives, walkways, etc., shall be carefully trimmed and maintained until accepted. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S MAINTENANCE & GUARANTEE PERIOD A. Maintenance of sodded areas shall be for 60 days after completion of the project and shall consist of watering, weeding, repair of all erosion and resodding as necessary to establish a uniform growth of the specified grass. Contractor shall guarantee growth and coverage of the sod planted under this contract to the effect that a minimum of 95% of the area planted will be covered with the specified planting after 60 days. Sod panels that are dead or dying shall be replaced. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for one (1) mowing every two weeks between the months of April to October. The Contractor shall also be responsible for one (1) mowing every three weeks between the months of November to March. In addition, the Contractor shall water the entire sodded and hydro -mulched areas to a saturated depth of one (1) inch at least once a week between the months of April to September and a least once a month between the months of October to March. C. Contractor shall make a second planting to those bare areas not meeting specified planting as determined by the Engineer. Such replanting is to be performed within 90 days of initial application and upon notification by the Engineer to replant. END OF SECTION SECTION 3,29300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Soil Preparation Materials. 3. Miscellaneous Materials. 4. Tree Planting. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Irrigation System" 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Provide complete landscaping shown on Drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide plant materials in compliance with applicable State and Federal laws relating to inspection for diseases and insect infestation at growing site. B. Observation at growing site does not preclude right of rejection at job site. Plants damaged in transit oir. at job site may be rejected. C. Off -site sandy loam testing (paid by Landscape Contractor): 1. Provide source of sandy loam soil to Architect for purpose of soil investigation. 2. Tcst soil samples from both sources of pH, alkalinity, total soluble salts, porosity, sodium content, and organic matter. 1.05 RI+:N'N.RENCED STANDARDS A. American Standard for Nursery Stock, approved October 27, 1980 by American National Standards Institute, Inc. COT JF.GF.STATION FIRE STATION NO.0 329300 1 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS B. Hortus Third, 1976 - Cornell University 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01: Section - Submittal Procedures B. Samples: Submit for approval sufficient representative quantities of sandy loam, sharp sand, bark chips, peat moss, filter fabric and gravel. Samples shall be approved by Architect before use on project. C. Submit three representative samples of each of the specified ornamental trees, shrubs, and ground cover plants for Architect's approval. When approved, tag, install and maintain as representative samples for final installed plant materials. D. File Certificates of Inspection of plant material by State and Federal authorities with Architect, if required by State. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Delivery: 1. Balled and Burlapped (B&B) Plants: Dig and prepare shipment in a manner that will not damage roots, branches, shape, and future development. 2. Container Grown Plants: Container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping. B. Delivery: 1. Packaged materials delivered in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. 2. Do not deliver more plant materials than can be planted in one day unless adequate storage and watering facilities are available on job site. 3. If balled plants cannot be planted within 24 hours after delivery to site, protect root balls by heeling in with saw dust or other approved material. 4. Protect during delivery to prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves. 5. Notify Architect of delivery schedule 48 hours in advance so plant material may be observed upon arrival at job site. 6. Remove rejected plant material immediately from site. 7. Do not lift, move, adjust to plumb, or otherwise manipulate plants by trunk or stems. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice. B. Protections: COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 329300- 2 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS I. Do not move any equipment over existing or newly placed structures without approval of Architect and General Contractor. Provide necessary protections such as board-roading as required. 2. Protect other improvements from damage, with protection boards, ramps and protective sheeting as required. C. Utilities: 1. Determine locations of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, if required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Warranty plants and trees for one year after substantial completion. Following Warranty Period Inspection, replace mead materials and materials not in vigorous, thriving condition as soon as weather permits and on notification by Architect. Replace plants, including trees, which in the opinion of the Architect, have r�rtially died, thereby damaging shape, size or symmetry B. Contractor shall replace plants and trees with same kind and size as originally planted and dispose of dead material at no cost to Owner. Provide one-year guarantee on replacement plants. Trecs should be replaced at start of next planting or digging season. In such cases, remove dead trees immediately. Protect irrigation system and other piping conduit or other work during replacement. Repair any damage immediately. C. Guarantee excludes replacement of plants because of injury by storm, freeze or neglect by Owner. D. Provide explicit mainlenance and cafe. instructions of all plant material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANTS A. General: Plants shall be equal to well -formed No. 1 grade or better nursery stock in accordance with requirements of applicable standards and as noted herein subject to Architect's approval. Listed plant heights are from tops of root balls to nominal tops of plants. B. Ground Covers: Nursery grown, healthy, vigorous, of normal habit of growth for species, free from disease, insect eggs and larvae. C. Ornameulal Trees and Shade Trees: Healthy, vigorous, full -branched, well -shaped, trunk diameter and height requirements as specified. Balls shall be firm, neat, slightly COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 329300- 3 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS tapered and well burlapped. Trees with loose or broken balls at time of planting shall be rejected. Trees will be individually approved by Architect. D. Hydro -mulch 1. Grass: Bermuda Seed: Shall be extra hulled and treated lawn type seed, delivered to the site in its original unopened container, and shall meet Texas State Law requirements. 2. Fiber: Shall be one hundred (100%) percent Wood Cellulose Fiber, delivered to the site in its original unopened container, Conweb or equal. 3. Fiber Tack: Shall be delivered to the site in its original unopened container, and shall be Terra -Tack One, as manufactured by Grass Growers, Inc., or equal. E. Grass Sod : ASPA Nursery growth cultivated Bermuda sod with strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned spots and minimal weeds. 2.02 SOIL PREPARATION MATERIALS A. Sandy Loam: 1. Friable, fertile, dark, loamy soil, free of clay lumps, subsoil, stones, and other extraneous material. Reasonably free of weeds and foreign grasses. Soil containing Dallis grass or Nutgrass shall be rejected. 2. Physical properties as follows: Clay - between 7-27 percent Silt - between 28-50 percent Sand - less than 52 percent B. Sharp Sand: Clean, washed sand, fine to coarse sizes. C. Decomposed Pine Bark Mulch: Obtained from disease -free wood, 100 percent of which is 9 in2 or less in area, and 50 percent is more than 1 in2 in area. The mulch should contain no noxious weed seeds, soil, sawdust or any substance toxic to plant growth and be at least two years old. D. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer with an organic base. It shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free -flowing. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed statements of analysis, and shall meet the following requirements, or equal, for approval. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Steel Edging: 1/8" x 4" DuraEdge". Color Green. B. Wrapping Material: Waterproofed, asphalt based paint with antiseptic properties, manufactured for use on tree wounds. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 329300- 4 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS C. Tree Paint: Waterproofed, asphalt based paint with antiseptic properties, manufactured for use on tree wounds. D. Mulch: cypress decorative bark mulch rated 2 inch to 3 inches. Color to be selected by Architect. E. Pea Gravel: Washed 3/4 inch native pea gravel. F. Guying Materials: 1. Tie Wire: 12 gauge galvanized wire. 2. Black Hose: 2 ply, fiber reinforced hose, minimum 1/2 inch inside diameter. 3. rye. Bolts: Galvanized steel, 3/8 inch eye, 6 inches long. 4. Turnbuckles: Galvanized steel, 3/8 inch eye, 6 inch opening. 5. Steel T Posts: 48 inch length. 6. Colored flag attached to tie wire G. Transite Edging: 3/8 Inch thick by 24 inches deep by 42 inches long corrugated transite edging. H. Weed Stopper: "Processional Landscape Fabric", 3 oz Spunbond by Fabiiscavc, Chicago, IL I. Erosion Control Netting: "Fabrijute", Photo/Bio-degradable netting by Fabdscape, Chicago, IL J. Perforated PVC pipe 4" K. Perforated PVC pipe with cap 3" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrade upon which work is to be performed, verify grade elevations, that bed areas are left four inches low, observe conditions under which work is to be performed, and notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Contractor. Notify Architect before proceeding. 3.02 BED PREPARATION A. Provide addition frnir inches of excavation for shrub beds and backfill eight inches deep; four inches deep for ground cover. 1 part sandy loam 1 part peat moss 1 part sharp sand COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 329300- 5 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS Add four pounds commercial fertilizer, as determined by testing, per 100 SF of bed area and mix thoroughly. 3.03 GRASS AREAS A. Lawn areas as indicated on plan, or existing lawn areas disturbed by construction activity shall be hydro -mulched. Hydro -mulch with Bermuda at the rate of two pounds per 1,000 SF. Fertilizer component of hydro -mulch shall be 20 pounds per 1,000 SF (16-20-0 Fertilizer). Mulch component of hydro -mulch shall be wood cellulose fiber at the rate of 50 pounds for 1,000 square feet. B. Areas to receive sod as indicated on plan shall be laid on prepared moistened surface within 48 hours of harvesting and immediately upon delivery to site. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no stretching or overlapping: stagger end joints by 12" minimum. Lay smooth with top elevation '/2" below adjoining paving. Water immediately after installation. 3.04 SPACING A. Place plants in position on bed areas before containers have been removed. Obtain approval from Architect. Do not remove burlap from BB plants. Plant where located, setting plants with tops of balls even with tops of beds, and compact soil carefully around each plant ball. Water each plant thoroughly with hoses to eliminate air pockets. Carefully prune plants to remove dead or broken branches and hand -rake bed areas to smooth even surfaces. Architect reserves right to interchange or shift locations of plants prior to planting. 3.05 TREE PLANTING A. Ornamental Trees: Plant trees in pits 12 inches larger than tree ball, backfill with prepared soil as defined above. B. Shade Trees: 1. Plant in tree pits 2'-0" greater in diameter than root balls or to edge of tree leave -outs in paved areas. Remove excavated soil from site. 2. Coordinate with electrical contractor in cases where tree uplights are to be installed. 3. For those trees indicated on plans, slope bottom of tree well excavation to drain to sump. Install six inches of pea gravel in bottom of tree well. Provide single layer of filter fabric over gravel. Center tree in well. 4. Backfill pits with five parts sandy loam to one part peat moss and carefully settle by watering to prevent air pockets. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 329300- 6 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS 3.06 TREE GUYING A. Complete guying as detailed immediately after trces are planted. 3.07 MULCHING A. After planting has been completed and approved by Architect, mulch bed areas with bark mulch, two inches deep. 3.08 EDGING A. Install metal edging to separate grass areas from ground cover and bed areas. 3.09 TREE WRAPPING A. Wrap nursery grown trees. Extcnd wrapping from ground to a point immediately below lowest branch of each tree or as dirccted. Securely fasten in place with tacks or staples, so wrapping will remain in place two years. 3.10 PRUNING OF NEW PLANT MATERIAL A. Trees are to be pruned to preserve natural character of plant and in a manner appropriate to its particular requirements in landscape design as determined by Architect. In general, remove at least one-third of wood by thinning branches. Do not cut leaders. Pruning in general shall be heavier on collected than on nursery grown plants. Remove soft wood or sucker growth and broken or badly bruised branches with a clean cut. 3.11 MAINTENANCE BY CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of all trees, shrubs, ground cover and turf, including all necessary watering, cultivating, weeding and spraying until substantial completion of the entire project. Plant materials shall be kept in a healthy and vigorous condition with all bed areas kept neat. B. Water will be available on site at no expense to the Contractor. Hose and other watering equipment required for maintenance by Contractor shall be furnished by Contractor at his expense. Additional water will be available as sprinkler system becomes operational, but this in no way relieves the Contractor of maintenance of plant material until acccptance by the Owner. C. Grass areas shall be mowed at regular intervals to maintain a maximum height of two inches. Do not cut inoie than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. Remove clippings after mowing. COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO.6 329300- 7 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS COLLEGE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 6 329300- 8 APRIL 11, 2011 PLANTS Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 32 11 29.01 SPRINKLING (Centences and/or paragraphs thai are dauhle underlined indicate revisions that were made,from the 2008 specification.) PART1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. 'Phis section shall consist of the authorized application of water on those portions of roadway shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The water furnished and the work performed, as prescribed by this section, will be paid for in the unit price bid for the various items pertaining to the construction of embankment, sub -grade, sub -base and base. Price will include full compensation for all costs in connection with furnishing the water, including the city of Bryan tapping fee, and for all costs in connection with furnishing and operating approved sprinklers and necessary measuring devices. Payment is to include the application of the water as directed, all hauling, equipment, tools, labor, materials and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will not be made for unauthorized work. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS WalCr shall be furnished by the Crytractor and shall be clean and free from industrial wastes and uther obicctionable_ is .r. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS The Contractor shall furnish and operate approved sprinklers equipped with positive and rapidly working out -off valves and approved spray bars which will insure the distribution of water in a unifnrm and controllable rate of application. The Contractor shall apply the water in the required quantity where shown uil the Plans and/or as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION Approved—112009 SECTION 32 1129.02 ROLLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION B/CS Unified Specifications This section shall consist of the compaction of sub -grade, sub -base, base or asphaltic concrete pavements by the operation of approved power rollers, tamping rollers, or pneumatic tired rollers as herein specified and/or directed by the Engineer. 1.2 MEASURE, MENT AND PAYMENT The work prescribed by this subsidiary work pertaining to surface, as the case may be. PART 2 — PRODUCTS N/A PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL section will not be paid for directly, but shall be considered as the construction of embankments sub -grade, sub -base, base and A. This work shall be done only when ordered by the Engineer. The compaction shall be accomplished by the methods outlined in the SECTIONS 32 11 16 - SUB -GRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION, SECTION 32 11 14 - FLEXIBLE BASE CRUSHED LIMESTONE, and SECTION 32 12 16 - HOT -MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT. Tracked or lugged equipment will not be allowed on pavements at any time. In the event indicated rollers are not sufficiently weighted, nor have sufficient tire inflation capacity to produce the required degree of compaction, additional larger sized rollers will he required at no additional expense to the city. B. Sufficient rollers shall be provided to compact the material in a satisfactory manner. 3.2 EQUIPMENT FOR SUBGRADE, SUB -BASE AND BASE A. PNEUMATIC TIRED ROLLERS: Large pneumatic tired rollers shall be of a type having five (5) or more tires, with each tire being inflated to a pressure of 100 pounds per square inch. Total weight of the unit when loaded shall not be less than twenty-five (25) tons. The load shall be equally distributed to all wheels and the tires shall be uniformly inflated. Small pneumatic tired rollers shall consist of not less than nine (9) pneumatic tired wheels running on axles in such a manner that the rear group will not follow in the tracks of the forward group and mounted in a rigid frame and provided with a body suitable for ballast loading. The wheel base of the roller shall be not less than five (5) nor more than ten (10) feet. The front axle shall be attached to the frame in such a manner that the roller may be turned within a minimum circle. The pneumatic tired roller under working conditions shall have an effective rolling width of approximately sixty (60) inches. It shall be so designed that by ballast loading, the Approved-112009 B/CS Unified Specifications load may be varied uniformly from a minimum of one hundred (100) to a maximum of four hundred (400) pounds per inch of width of tire tread. 2. The tire pressure and the compression to be provided by the pneumatic roller shall be as directed by the Engineer. Pneumatic tired rollers shall be drawn by either a suitable crawler -type tractor, a pneumatic -tired tractor or a truck of adequate tractive effort, or may be of the self-propelled type and the roller when drawn or propelled by either type of equipment shall be considered a pneumatic tired roller unit. Unless otherwise directed, pneumatic tired rollers shall be operated within a speed range from two (2) to four (4) miles per hour. B. TAMPING ROLLERS: Tamping rollers shall consist of two (2) metal rollers, drums or shells of forty (40) inches minimum diameter. Each not less than forty-two (42) inches in length and unit mounted in a rigid frame in such a manner that each roller may oscillate independently of the other. Each roller, drum or shell shall be surmounted by metal studs with tamping feet projecting not less than seven (7) inches from the surface and spaced not less than six (6) nor more than ten (10) inches measured diagonally center to center. The cross sectional area of each tamping foot measured perpendicularly to the axis of the stud, shall be not less than five (5) nor more than eight (8) square inches. The roller shall be supplemented with cleaning teeth to provide self cleaning. The roller shall be so designed that by ballast loading, the load on each tamping foot may be varied uniformly from one hundred, twenty-five (125) to one hundred, seventy-five (175) pounds per square inch of cross sectional area. The load per tamping foot will be determined by dividing the total weight of the roller by the number of tamping feet in one (1) row parallel to (or approximately so) the axis of the roller. The compression to be provided shall be as directed by the Engineer. The tamping roller shall be drawn by suitable power equipment of adequate tractive effort. Two (2) tamping rollers, consisting of four (4) cylinders, drawn by approved power equipment shall be considered a roller unit. Unless otherwise directed, tamping rollers shall be operated within a speed range of two (2) to three (3) miles per hour. 3.3 EQUIPMENT FOR HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. POWER FLAT WHEEL ROLLERS: Power flat wheel rollers shall be of the three (3) wheel self-propelled type only, weighing not less than eight (8) tons nor more than twelve (12) tons. Power flat wheel rollers shall be operated with a speed range from two (2) to three (3) miles per hour and/or as directed. B. PNEUMATIC TIRED ROLLERS: Pneumatic tired rollers for hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement shall conform to the Specifications as noted above for pneumatic rollers. END OF SECTION ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Specifications • 1-7 ADS N-1e ST IB PIPE (per AASHTO) SPECIFICATION Scope This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) ADS N-12 ST IB pipe (per AASHTO) for use in gravity -flow drainage applications. Pipe Requirements ADS N-12 ST I pipe (per AASHTO) shall havo a smnnth interior and annular exterior corrugations. • 4- through 1 0-inch (100 to 250 mm) shall meet AASHTO M252, Type S. • 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306. • Manning's "n" value for use in design shall be 0.012. Joint Performance Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306. l he joint shall be soil -tight and gaskets, when applicable, shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by tho pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant supplied by the manufacturer shall be used nn the qasket and bell during assembly. Fittings Fittings shall conform to AASI ITO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections shall utilize a spun -on or welded bell and valley or saUdle gasket meeting the soil -tight joint performance requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306. Material Properties Virgin material for pipe and fitting production shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell classification 424420C for 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250 mm) diameters, or 435400C for 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) diameters, as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350, except that carbon black content should not exceed 4%. The 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) viryin pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligament -stress (NCLS) test as specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306, respectively. Installation Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS's published installation guidelines, with the exception that minimum cover in trafficked areas for 4- through 48-inch (100 to 1200 mm) diameters shall be one foot. (0.3 m) and for 54- and 60-inch (1350 and 1500 mm) diameters, the minimum cover shall be 2 ft. (0.6 m) in single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of Class 1, Class 2 (minimum 90% SPD) or Class 3 (minimum 90%) material. Maximum fill heights depend on embedment material and compaction level; please refer to Technical Note 2.01. Contact your local ADS representative or visit our website at www.ads-pipo.com fnr a copy of the latest installation guidelines. Pipe Dimensions Nominal Diameter In mm Pipel.D. in mm 4 100 6 150 8 200 10 250 12 300 15 375 18 450 24 600 30 750 36 900 42 1050 48 1200 54• 1350 60 1500 Pipe O.D." in mm 4.8 122 6.9 175 9.1 231 11.4 290 14.5 368 18 457 22 559 28 711 36 914 42 1067 48 1219 54 1372 61 1549 67 1702 Perfnrations All diameters available with or without perforations "Cheuk with sales representative for availability by region. **Pipe O.D. values are provided for retererlce purposes only, values stated fur 1?- through Rn-inch are t 1 inch. Contact a sales representative for exact values. U ADS, hit, July 2008 ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Specifications ♦ 1-8 N-120 ST IB (per AASHTO) JOINT SYSTEM (Joint configuration & availability subject to change without notice. Product detail may differ slightly from actual product appearance.) 4' - 10' (100-250 MM) AGING DLES PIT PITCH — 4' - 60' (100-1500 MM) 12' - 60' (300-1500 MM) PIPE ❑.0. D.D. PIPE D.D. © ADS, Inc., July 2008 Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 33 0130.13 TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWAGE GRAVITY SYSTEM (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This is a general spceif cation, which applies to the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to perform all operations in connection with leakage testing for completed manholes and gravity sewer pipe and dellection testing for flexible sewer pipe. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Testing of sewer lines (except for T.V. Inspection), manholes and appurtenances shall not be considered a separate pay item. T.V. Ynspection will be paid for as a separate bid item. The Contractor shall supply all water for the tests, all equipment and labor necessary to convey the water into the sewer, the necessary transportation to transport test plugs and risers from one test site to another and such labor and equipment as may be required in installing test plugs, and other incidental work in conducting the tests and the cost thereof shall be included in the price for constructing the sewer, including furnishing the test plugs. PAW T 2 —PRODUCTS 2.1 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. MANHOLE TESTING After completion of manhole construction, wall sealing, or rehabilitation, test manholes for leakage using Vacuum Testing or, if pre -approved by the City Engineer, Exfiltration Testing Procedures as specified herein. General Plug influent and effluent lines, including service lines, with suitably sized pneumatic or mechanical plugs. Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures i-cquircd in this test; follow Manufacturer's safety and installation recommendations. Place plugs a minimum of 6 inches outside of manhole walls. 2. Vacuum Testing a.) jo perform a vacuum test, all lift holes and exterior joints shall be plugged with a non -shrink gro t and all nines entering a manhole shall be plugged. b.) No grout must be placg;d in horizonta int$ before testing. c.) tub -outs, manhole boots, and pine slues must be secured to prevent movement while a vacuum is drawn. d.) Contractor shall use a minimum 60 inch/lb torque wrench to righten the external clanius that secure a test cover to the too of a manhole. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications e.) A test head must be placed at the inside of the ton of a cone section. and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. f.) There must be a vacuum of 10 inches of mercury inside a manhole to perform a valid test. g.) A test does not begin until after the vacuum pump is off. h.) A manhole passes the test if after 2.0 minutes and with all valves closedthe vacuum is at least 9.0 inches of mercury — Hydrostatic tatic Testing a.) The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing or any alternative test methods is 0.025 gallons per foot diameter per foot of manhole per hour. -depth b.) Seal all wastewater nines coming into a manhole with an internal nine plug, fill the manhole with water up to the manhole cover and maintain the test for at least one hour. c.) A test for concrete manholes may use a 24-hour wetting period before testing to allow saturation of the concrete. B. GRAVITY PIPE LEAKAGE TESTING General Tests shall be made by the low-pressure air test, the infiltration test or the joint test. The infiltration test shall be used when the groundwater level is at least 2 ft above the crown of the pipe measured at the upstream manhole. The joint test shall be used for pipe sections greater than 36-inch inside diameter. The Contractor may use the joint test for pipe with a 27-inch through 36-inch average inside diameter at the approval of the Engineer or his representative. The low-pressure air test, the infiltration test and the exfiltration test shall be conducted from manhole to manhole. Trenches shall be completely backfilled and sewer line should be free of debris prior to testing. Plug all pipe outlets including laterals and secure plugs to prevent leakage blowout due to testing pressure. 2. Infiltration Test a.) Performance: The total infiltration, as determined by a hydrostatic head test, shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch of diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of 2.0 feet above the crown of a pine at an upstream manhole. For construction within the 100-year flood plain, the total infiltration shall not exceed ten gallons per inch of diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications NORMAL CONSTRUCTION SIZE OF PIPE ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE* Gal/Min/100 Ft. 6" 0.0039 8" 0.0053 loft 12" . ... 0.0066 o.on79 15" n.U099 18" 0.0118 21" 0.0138 24" 27" 0.0158 0.017R 00197 30" 36" 0.0237 * Equivalent to 50 gal. per inch diameter per mile per 24 hours CONSTRUCTION WITHIN 100 YR F1.00n PLAIN SIZE OF PIPE ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE* Gal/Min/100 Ft. 6" 0.0008 8" 0.0011 10" 0.0013 12" 0.0016 15" - 0.0020 18" 0.0074 21" 0.0028 24" 0.0032 27" 00036 00039 00047 30" - 36" * Equivalent to 10 gal. per inch diameter per mile per 24 hours The total leakage in cubic inches shall be the total cross -sectional area in square inches of the inside of the two risers and of any stacks in the sewer multiplied by the drop in water level in inches. For diameters not listed in chart, multiply the square of the diameter by the following chart value for 1" diameter. n k Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications DIAMETER OF RISER OR STACK VOLUME PER INCH OF DEPTH Cubic Inch Gallon 1" 0.7854 .0034 2" 3.1416 .0136 2-1/2" 4.9087 .0212 3" 7.0686 .0306 4" 12.5664 .0544 5" 19.6350 .0850 6" 28.2743 .1224 8" 50.2655 .2176 b.) Execution: Stop all dewatering operations and allow the groundwater to return to its normal level and allow to remain so for at least 24 hours. Leakage shall be determined by measuring the flow through the opening in the downstream plug for at least 15 minutes. Five separate measurements shall be made. The average of the measurements shall be used, discarding any one of the five measurements except the last that varies by more than 50% from the average of the other four. If the results of the tests are otherwise satisfactory, but the last of the five measurements show leakage in excess of that permitted, the tests shall be continued to determine if additional leaks may have developed during testing. Air Tect a.) Per%rmance: The pipe shall be pressurized to 5 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) greater than the pressure exerted by groundwater above the pipe. Once the pressure is stabilized, the minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop 1.0 psig shall be 5 minutes per every 100 feet of pipe plus (+) 5 minutes per each service connection. Pipe sizes larger than 27 inches shall be tested as per TCEQ requirements. The test may be stopped if no pressure loss has occurred during the first 25% of the calculated testing time. If any pressure loss or leakage has occurred during the first 25% of the testing period, then the test shall continue for the entire test duration as outlined in this subparagraph or until failure. b.) Execution: Add air until the internal air pressure of the sewer line is raised to approximately 5.5 psig. Allow the air pressure to stabilize. The pressure will normally drop until the temperature of the air in the line stabilizes. 4 Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications When the pressure has stabilized and is at or above the starting test pressure of 5 psig, commence the test by allowing the gage pressure to drop to 5 psig at which point the time recording is initiated. Record the drop in pressure for the test period. 4. Joint Test The joint test may be conducted by an air test or water test. The joint and the pipe segment shall be visually inspected immediately after testing. a.) Per ormance: The pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psig greater than the pressure exerted by groundwater above the pipe. Once the pressure has stabilized, the minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig shall be ten secunds. If the groundwater pressure is equal to or greater than 3.5 psig, and the sewer line or joint is not leaking the sewer line or joint is acceptable and no additional testing is required. If one or more joints are leaking, but the total amount of leakage in the sewer line being tested is equal to, or less than, the allowable leakage specified in 250.03-B-1 "Performance", the line is acceptable and no additional testing is required provided visible leaks are repaired. Moisture or beads of water appearing on the surface of the joint will not be considered as visible leakage. b.) Executing: Review proper operation, safety, and maintenance procedures as provided by the manufacturer of the joint test apparatus. Move the joint test apparatus into the sewer line to the joint to be tested and position it over the joint. Make sure the end element sealing tubes straddle both sides of the joint and the hoses are attached. For the water test, the bleed -off petcock must be located at top dead center. Inflate end element sealing tubes with air in accordance with equipment and manufacturer's instructions. i. Air Test - Pressurize the void volume with air to 3.5 psig greater than the pressure exerted by groundwater above the pipe. The drop in pressure shall be measured over ten seconds. Five separate measurements shall be made. The average of the measurements shall be used, discarding any one of the five measurements except the last that varies by more than 50% from the average of the other four. If the results of the tests are otherwise satisfactory, but the last of the five measurements show leakage in excess of that permitted, the tests shall be continued to determine if additional leaks may have developed during testing. ii. Water Test - Introduce water into void volume until water flows evenly from open petcock. Close the petcock and pressurize with water to 3.5 psig above the pressure exerted by ground water. The drop in pressure shall be measured over ten seconds. Five separate measurements shall be made. The average of the measurements shall be used, discarding any one of the five measurements except the last that varies by more than 50% from the average of the other four. If the results of the tests are otherwise satisfactory, but the last of the five measurements show leakage in excess of that permitted, the tests shall be continued to determine if additional leaks may have developed during testing. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications C. DEFLECTION TESTING Deflection tests shall be performed on all flexible pipes. For pipelines with inside diameters less than 27 inches, a rigid mandrel shall be used to measure deflection. For pipelines with an inside diameter 27 inches and greater, a method pre -approved by the Engineer shall be used to test for vertical deflections. Other methods shall provide a precision of two tenths of one percent (0.2%) deflection. The test shall be conducted after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days. No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5.0%. If a pipe should fail to pass the deflection test, the problem shall be corrected and a second test shall be conducted after the final backfill has been in place an additional 30 days. The tests shall be performed without mechanical pulling devices. Mandrel Sizing The rigid mandrel shall have an outside diameter (O.D.) equal to 95% of the inside diameter (I.D.) of the pipe. The inside diameter of the pipe, for the purpose of determining the outside diameter of the mandrel, shall be the average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and the average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe. All dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. 2. Mandrel Design The rigid mandrel shall be constructed of a metal or rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. The mandrel shall have nine or more "runners" or "legs" as long as the total number of legs is an odd number. The barrel section of the mandrel shall have a length of at least 75% of the inside diameter of the pipe. A proving ring shall be provided and used for each size mandrel in use. 3. Method Options Adjustable or flexible mandrels are prohibited. A television inspection is not a substitute for the deflection test. A deflectometer may be approved for use on a case -by -case basis. Mandrels with removable legs or runners may be accepted on a case -by -case basis. Mechanical devices will not be used to pull the mandrel. D. TV CAMERA INSPECTION T.V. Camera Inspection shall be performed on all sewer pipe installed before acceptance. When the Contractor performs the inspection, the City Engineer or his representative shall be notified one working day prior so that he can view the procedure. The inspection shall be in digital video format, saved to a DVD or CD (enclosed within a protective case) and shall be given to the City Engineer or his representative for review and final records. The lines shall be completely filled with potable water between manholes to fill the service connections and drained prior to T.V. Camera Inspection. Line shall be cleaned prior to T.V. inspection. All dirt/debris, including pipe grease, in the line which could cover a defect shall be removed. Line should be cleaned before being filled with water._ Jetting of the lines in conjunction with the T.V. Inspection is prohibited. If the line to be televised is discovered to contain foreign material, which prohibits an acceptable T.V. inspection, the line shall be jetted and televised again. Select and use closed circuit television equipment that will produce a color digital video. Produce and use closed circuit television equipment using a panorama tilt, radial viewing, pipe inspection camera that pans plus and minus 75 degrees, rotates 360 degrees, and has optical zoom from 6 or less inches to infinity. The camera must have an accurate footage counter accurate to within 1 foot per 500 foot of pipe. Footage shall be continuously Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications displayed on the video at all times. The camera operator shall pause at each tee, tilt camera and view up into the branch for inspection of joints and fittings maintaining a clear in focus picture at all times while zooming to the full extent of the camera. The camera operator shall stop at each fitting and change in pipe type and complete a 360 degree view of the fitting slow enough to identify all defects. Glare shall be avoided and shall not interfere with viewing the pipe segment. Maximum rate of travel for the camera shall be 30 feet per minute. DVDs or CDs shall be continuous from pipe segments between manholes. Provide DVDs or CDs with labels indicating project number, segment number, date televised, date submitted, starting manhole number, ending manhole number, pipe diameter, pipe length and street name. The T.V. inspection shall be used to identify defective construction such as sags, debris, separated joints, etc. The City Engineer hall make all final determinations if the severity of the defect constitutes failure and subsequent removal of the segment in question. E. RETESTS Manholes or sewers which fail to meet the testing requirements shall be repaired and retested by the Contractor. All repairs and retesting shall he performed at the expense of the Contractor. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer or his representative when the manholes and line are ready to be tested. After the City Engineer or his representative concurs that the line is ready to be tested, the Contractor may proceed with testing. The Contractor will supply and set-up the test phigs and risers for the test and will perform the test in the presence of the City Engineer or his representative. E Contractor shall take such precautions as required to prevent damage to lines and appurtenances being tested Damage resulting from tests shall be repaired at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 33 05 01 POLYVINYLCHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions flint were made.from the 2008 specification.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified under this section includes the manufacture, construction and installation of Yolyvinyleliluridc (PVC) pipe and fittings for Water Lines and for Gravity and Pressure Sanitary Sewers. 1.2 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to to the text by basic designation nnly. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM D1794 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds (Latest Edition) ,ASTM F477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ("Latest Editiun) ASTM F 1483 Standard Specification for Oriented Poly (Vinyl Chloride), (PVCO) Pressure Pipe (Latest Edition) ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM D1598 Standard Test Method for Time -to -Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant Internal Pressure ASTM D1599 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short -Time Hydraulic Failure Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings A STM D2122 Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2152 Standard Test Method for Adequacy of Fusion of Extruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Molded Fittings by Acetone Immersion ASTM D2241 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pike (SDR Seiies) ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems ASTM F679 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large -Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2672 Standard Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement I Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3212 Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM D3139 Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-Inch Through 12- Inch for Water Distribution (Latest Edition) AWWA C909 Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe. 4-Inch Through 12-Inch for Water Distribution (Latest Edition) AWWA C104 ANSI Standard for Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C105 ANSI Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C111 ANSI Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C116 Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service AWWA C153 Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. through 24 in. and 54 in. through 64 in. for Water Service AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 14 In.- 48 In. 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment shall be made at the price bid per unit length per the specification SECTION 33 11 13.1 - WATER MAIN CONSTRUCTION or SECTION 33 31 13 - SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEM. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on pipe furnished, indicating compliance with the specifications regarding dimensions, thickness, weights, and materials. B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance," stating that the materials furnished comply with this specification. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. UNLOADING - COLD WEATHER HANDLING As the temperature approaches and drops below freezing extra care should be used in handling during cold weather. Pipe at the bottom of a stack may become out -of -round due to the weight of material above it. Allow the pipe to recover to full initial roundness before installation. Pipe may be unloaded by hand, either by passing over the side or off 2 Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications the truck end. Sliding one length on another is permissible in unloading pipe, but lengths in the bottom layer shall be lifted off of the rough surface of the truck body to avoid abrasion. Compact shipping units (palletized bundles in a wood frame) may be unloaded by conventional fork lifts. B. STOCKPILES Store pipe on a flat surface so as to support the barrel evenly with bell ends overhanging. Store random lengths separately where they will be readily available. Individual lengths of pipe should be stacked in piles no higher than 5 feet. Pipe shall be protected during long exposures (over 3 months) to sunlight. Do not use clear plastic sheets. Provide for air circulation under sheet. C. TS .ORING RUBBER RINGS Store all rubber rings at a central point and distribute them as needed. Keep them clean, away from oil, grease, excessive heat and electric motors which produce ozone. If rubber rings are not to be used immediately, store them in their cartons, as shipped, in a cool dark place out of the direct rays of the sun. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. WATER LINES Pipe a. Blue colored Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, six inch (6") through twelve inch (12") , shall conform to the current AWWA — C900 or C909 standard, be UL listed, be approved by the Texas State Board of Insurance and the National Sanitation Foundation. PVC pipe wall thickness shall be based on a working pressure rating of 125 psi at 100° F (DR-14, Class 200 for C900 or Class 200 for C909.). The outside diameter shall be identical to ductile -iron pipe (CIOD Standard, Table 2, AWWA — C900). All pipe shall be new and have the AWWA designation, pressure class, DR pressure rating and size of pipe stamped on the outside of each joint (follow requirements of C900 2.5.2 Markings). All piping shall be new. Partial pieces from other projects shall not be approved for installation. Metal detector tape shall be installed above all PVC pipe at an elevation of 2 feet below natural ground. b. lR a co ored PVC 4" pipe shall be SDR 21, ASTM D2241. C. PVC Pressure Pipe shall be designed and tested in accordance with ASTM D1598, D1599, and D2152. d. Fittings for PVC water pipe shall be ductile -iron, and shall conform to AWWA C153, unless otherwise specified. Fitting joints shall be mechanical joints. Bolts and nuts for mechanical joints, or flanged ends will be of a high strength corrosion resistant low -alloy steel and shall conform to AWWA C111. Flange bolts and nuts for above ground installation shall conform to Appendix A of AWWA C115. Flange bolts and nuts for below ground installation shall be 316 stainless steel. All fittings shall be epoxy coated and lined unless stainless steel is used. Revised — I12009 B/CS Unified Specifications Where joints are to be restrained, use mega -lug type fitting for pipe six (6") inches in size and larger. Mega -lug type mechanical restraints with less than 6 contact points will not be allowed for six (6") inch pipe sizes and larger. Four (4ainch lines shall be restrained by mid -co restraint or pre -approved equal. Polyethylene wrap or encasement of metal fittings shall conform to AWWA C 105. Joint tape shall be self sticking PVC or 8-mil-thick polyethylene. e. Joints: PVC water pipe shall be furnished with an elastomeric gasket at each joint and an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. Pipe and fittings must be assembled with a non -toxic lubricant. Provisions must be made at each joint for expansion and contraction. Refer to ASTM F477, D3139 and D3212. B. GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER Pipe Flexible pipe and fittings shall be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride gravity sewer pipe shall be green in color, made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-B PVC conforming to ASTM D1784. All pipe shall be new and have the ASTM designation, SDR, pressure rating and size stamped on the outside of each joint. All markings shall follow requirements of ASTM D3034. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) gravity pipe and fittings in sizes six inch (6") through twelve inch (12") shall conform to ASTM D3034 and be UL listed and approved by the National Sanitation Foundation. Pipe and fittings shall be SDR-26. Eighteen inch (18") pipe and fittings shall be SDR-26 and conform to ASTM F-679, be UL listed and approved by the National Sanitation Foundation. C. SEWER FORCE MAIN AND PRESSURE PIPE Pipe a. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, four 4 inch through eight (8) inch, shall be white in color and shall conform to the current ASTM D2241, AWWA — C900, or AWWA C909 standard, be UL listed, be approved by the Texas State Board of Insurance and the National Sanitation Foundation. PVC pipe pressure class shall be equal to or greater than twice the maximum calculated pressure of the force main. b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe shall be SDR-21 Class 200 and conform to the ASTM D2241 standard, be UL listed and approved by the National Sanitation Foundation, and shall be white in color. The outside diameter shall be identical to steel pipe. C. PVC Pressure Pipe shall be designed and tested in accordance with ASTM D1598, D1599, and D2152. d. Fittings for PVC pressure pipe shall be ductile -iron, and shall conform to AWWA C153, unless otherwise specified. Fitting joints shall be mechanical joints. Bolts and nuts for mechanical joints, or flanged ends will be of a high strength corrosion resistant low -alloy steel and shall conform to AWWA C 111. Flange bolts and nuts for above ground installation shall conform to Appendix A of AWWA C115. Flange bolts and nuts for below ground installation shall be 316 stainless steel. All fittings shall be epoxy coated and lined unless stainless steel is used. Polyethylene wrap or encasement of metal 4 Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications fittings shall conform to AWWA C105. Joint tape shall be self sticking PVC or 10-mil-thick polyethylene. Where joints are to he restrained, use mega -lug type fitting. e. Joints: PVC water pipe shall be furnished with an elastomeric gasket at each joint and an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. Pipe and fittings must be assembled with a non -toxic lubricant. Provisions must be made at each joint for expansion and contraction. Refer to ASTM F477, D3139 and D3212. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS See: SECTION 33 0130 - TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWER SYSTEMS SECTION 33 13 10 - HYDROSTATIC_: TESTING (Used for Waterlines & Sanitary Sewer Farce Mains) SECTION 33 13 00 - DISINFECTION OF WATERLINES PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING A. See Standard Details. 3.2 JOINT ASSEMBLY A. Push -on joints shall be assembled as follows: 1. Thoroughly clean the groove and bell and insert the gasket, making sure that it faces the proper direction and that it is correctly scatcd 2. Dirt or foreign material shall be cleaned from the spigot end to a point one inch (1") beyond the reference mark. A joint lubricant shall be used and applicable recommendations of the manufacturer shall be followed. 3. Be sure that the spigot end is beveled, as square or sharp edges may damage or dislodge the gasket and cause a leak. Push the spigot end into the bell of the pipe while keeping the joint straight. Brace the bell while the beveled end is pushed under the ring, so that previously completed joints in the line will not be closed up. Makc deflection after the joint is assembled. 4. Push the spigot end in until the reference mark on the spigot end is flush with the end of the bell. If excessive resistance to insertion of the beveled end is encountered or the reference mark does not reach the flush position, disassemble the joint, and check the position of the ring. If it is twisted or pushed out of its seat, clean the ring, bell and beveled end and repeat assembly. Be sure both lengths are in proper alignment. If the ring was not out of position, measure the distance between the reference mark and beveled end, and check it against correct values from the manufacturer. Relocate the reference mark if it is out of position. 5. Small pipe can be pushed into the bell end with a long bar. Large pipe requires additional power, such as a jack, lever puller, or backhoe. A timber header should be used between the pipe and jack or backhoe bucket to avoid damage to the pipe. 6. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by watertight plug or other means pre -approved by the Engineer. The plug shall remain Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. Care must be taken to prevent pipe flotation should the trench fill with water. B. Mechanical joints shall be assembled as follows: 1. Wipe clean the bell and spigot end. The spigot end, bell, and gasket should be washed with a soap solution to improve gasket seating. 2. Place the gland on the spigot end with the lip extension toward the spigot end, followed by the gasket with the narrow edge of the gasket toward the spigot end of the pipe. 3. Insert the pipe into the bell and press the gasket firmly and evenly into the gasket recess. Keep the joint straight during assembly. Make deflection after joint assembly but before tightening the bolts. 4. Push the gland toward the bell and center it around the pipe with the gland lip against the gasket. 5. Align bolt holes and insert bolts, with bolt heads behind the bell flange, and tighten opposite nuts to keep the gland square with the bell. 6. Tighten the nuts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. When it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that shown in Table 1. Pipes greater than twelve -inches (12") in diameter shall not be deflected. TABLE 1 Maximum Deflection Full Length Pipe Push -on Type Joint Pipe Diameter in. Deflection Angle Deg. Minimum Radius of Curve ft. * 6 2.5 230 8 1.9 300 12 1.3 450 * All curvature results from the bending of pipe lengths. There is no deflection at the joint. D. Cutting and Beveling 1. A square cut is essential to insure proper assembly. Use either a tubing cutter or a miter box and carpenter's fine-toothed hand saw or hacksaw. (Do not use standard pipe cutters. The cutting wheel will crush or damage the pipe.) 2. Use a factory -finished beveled end as a guide to determine the angle and length of taper. The end may be beveled using a Pilot beveling tool which will cut the correct taper automatically or a thin steel, "cheese -grater" type of hand tool, Stanley "Sureform" No. 399. 3. With a pencil or crayon, locate the reference mark at the proper distance from the bevel end as indicated by the manufacturer. 6 Revised • 11.100.0 B/CS Unified Specifications 3.3 POLYETHYLENE TURF PROUCTION A. All cast iron and ductile iron fittings shall be provided with 8 mil polyethylene tube protection. Completely cover all fittings and connections with polyethylene film held securely in place with joint tape or strapping according to the provisions of AWWA C105. 3.4 EMBEDMFNT A. Install embedment as shown on the Plans and in accordance with SECTION 3123 33 - EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING. 3.5 TAPPING WATER LINES A. Where a tap occurs within a deflected section of pipe, utilize a fitting (ie: 8" x 1" tapped tee) in lieu of tapping the pipe. B. The tapping sleeve specified will be the Smith -Blair 662 or the Ford FTSS=Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeve with Epuxy Coatcd Flange for pipe sizes 6"-24". 3.6 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER DEFLECTION TEST A. The sewer line shall be tested for deflection in accordance with SECTION 33 01 30 - TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWAGE GRAVITY SYSTEM. END OF SECTION 7 Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specfcations SECTION 33 12 13 WATER SERVICES (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the manufacture, construction, and installation of water services for ordinary waterworks service. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Services shall be categorized as "long" if over 15-feet in length or "short" it 15-feet or shorter and measured as "EACH" or as provided in the Bid Proposal Form. B. Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for furnishing and installing services. This unit bid price will include all costs for the complete service installation, including all appurtenances, bedding, marking, testing, and disinfection. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on materials furnished, indicating compliance with the specifications regarding dimensions, thickness, weights, and materials. B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance", stating that the materials furnished comply with this spenification. PART 2 — PRODIA TS 2.1 MATERIALS All materials shall be as shown on the details. Service saddles for PVC and Ductile Iron shall be Smith Blair No. 317 stainless steel Ford S70/S90 hinged, or Cambridge 800 series. All standard service lines shall be Type `K' Copper. Tapped tee connection shall be ductile iron C153 MJ fitting. The components for service connections shall be as listed in the following table. Description 1-inch service 1.5-inch service 2-inch service Corporation Stops FB-1000-4* FB-1000-6* FB-1000-7* Ball Straight Stops B11-444-W B11-666-W B11 777-W Angle Ball Curb Stops BA13-444-W* BA11-666-W BAI I-777-W Wye for double service to be Y44-264* Part numbers listed are Ford part numbers. * for City of Bryan is Quick Grip fittings (Q) for City of College Station is Pack Joint fittings Service Saddles Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications Descri ton Bxym COCS Smith Blair 317 SS Approved Cambridge 800 Series Approved Ford S70/S90 Approved PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. INSTALLATION Information supplied by the manufacturers on any and all appurtenances should be reviewed in detail by the Contractor before installation of the service. At the job site, prior to installation, the material should be visually inspected and any foreign material in the interior portion of the service should be removed. A detailed inspection of the service should be performed prior to installation. Service connections shall be tapped tees in curved sections of pipe. B. The services should be bedded in a fashion similar to bedding main lines as shown on the details. END OF SECTION Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 33 12 16 MAIN LINE VALVES (Sentences andlor paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PA.R.T 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCIUPTION A. This section describes the manufacture, construction, and installation of waterline valves for ordinary waterworks service. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. GATE VALVES AND 111 JTTERFLY VALVES (late valves and butterfly valves will be measured by the each. Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for furnishing and installing gate valves, which bid price will include all costs for the complete gate valve installation, including extension stems, valve boxes, concrete blocking, testing, and disinfection. Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for furnishing and installing butterfly valves, which bid price will include all costs for the complete butterfly valve installation shown on the plans, including extension stems, valve boxes, concrete blocking, manhole, brass plug valves, bypass plumbing, cornoration stops, special fittings, testing, disinfection, and all other associated work not otherwise provided for in the Proposal. B. APPURTENANCES Operator extensions, valve boxes, brass plug valves, manholes, and concrete blocking will not be measured items. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on materials furnished, indicating compliance with the specifications regarding dimensions, thickness, weights, and materials. B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance", stating that the materials furnished comply with this specification. 1.4 INSPECTION, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All valves should be unloaded carefully. The valve should be carefully lowered from the truck to the ground, not dropped. In the case of larger valves, fork trucks or slings around the body of the valve or under the skids should be used for unloading. Only hoists and slings with adequate load capacity to handle the weight of the valve or valves should be used. Do not hook hoists into or fasten chains around bypasses, yokes, gearing, motors, cylinders, or handwheels. B. Valves should be inspected at the time of receipt for damage in shipment. The initial inspection should verify compliance with specifications, direction of opening, size and shape of operating nut, number or turns, and type of end connections. A visual inspection of gate rings and body rings should be performed to detect any damage in shipment or scoring of the seating surfaces. Inspection personnel should look for bent stems, broken handwheels, cracked parts, missing parts and accessories, and any other evidence of 1 Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications mishandling during shipment. The valve should be cycled through one complete opening - and -closing cycle. All valves sixteen (16") inches and larger should be operated through one full operating cycle in the position in which they are to be installed. C. Valves should be stored in the fully closed position to prevent entry of foreign material that could cause damage to the seating surfaces. Whenever practical, valves should be stored indoors. If outside storage is required, means should be provided to protect the operating mechanisms, such as gears, motor operators, and cylinders, from the weather and foreign materials. If valves may be subject to freezing temperatures, remove water from the valve interior and close the gates tightly before storage. Valves in outside storage in cold climates should be stored with the discs in a vertical position; if the discs are in a horizontal flat position, rain water can accumulate on top of the top disc, seep into the valve body cavity, freeze, and crack the casting. Any valves damaged by weather will not be installed. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. APPLICABLE STANDARDS 1. AWWA—C110,C111 2. ASTM — A48, C33, C 150 and C478 B. GATE VALVES All gate valves up to and including thirty (30") inch shall conform to the current AWWA C515 standard. All valves shall be ductile iron body, resilient seat nonrising stem, internal wedging type and new. All gate valves shall have a square nut operated valve turning clockwise to close. Brass is not allowed. Valves shall have a working pressure rating of 250 psi. Resilient -Seated Gate Valves per AWWA C515 a.) General All valves up to and including thirty (30") inch shall have a bronze stem, resilient -seated disc, drip tight shutoff. Valves shall be manufactured by American Flow Control Series 2500 or Clow Model No. 2638 and be "Resilient Seated" (Powder Coated), or pre -approved equal. b.) Gates, Rings and Disc All gates shall be cast-iron with internally reinforced, molded rubber disc seat rings. All gate valves shall be manufactured with a modified wedge disc with steel reinforced, natural rubber disc seat ring. Disc shall slide on a vertical, machined guide surface and shall seat on a sloped, machined seating surface. Valves shall be tested for leakage per AWWA C515, Section 6.1.6. c.) Gate valves twelve (12") inches or smaller will be installed seated on a minimum of one (1) 12"x12"x 4" solid concrete blocks. Valves larger than 12" will be seated by a poured -in -place concrete saddle. The size of this saddle is as shown on the plans. 2. Stuffing Boxes All valves up to and including sixteen (16") inches shall be equipped with double 0- rings, provided arrangement is made for replacement under pressure of the upper O- Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications ring when the valve is fully open. All geared valves will be equipped with conventional packing in the main stuffing box. Valves shall be installed in a vertical position. Stuffing box and bonnet bolts and nuts shall be 304 stainless steel. 3. Operating Nuts All valves shall he square nut operated. All valves shall open by turning to the left (counter clockwise). Operator nuts shall be two (2") inch square 4. Miscellaneous Requirements a.) All cxpused bolts, mits, etc., for valves to be buried, shall be stainless steel. Cadmium plated bolts, nuts, etc., will not be accepted. b.) A valve nut extension will be installed to maintain 4' bury to operatine nut when the operating nut is located 5' or more below finished grade after valve installation. C. BUTTERFLY VALVES 1. Butterfly valves shall only be allowed on waterlines 18" and larger as approved by the City Engineer. Butterfly valves shall be Valvmatic, Mueller Lineseal III, Pratt Triton XR, or Dczurik and shall have "bi-directional shutoff'. Butterfly valves shall conform to the current AWWA C504 standard and as modified herein. 2. The valve body is to be constructed of cast-iron or ductile -iron, and shall be short body. Valves shall be Class 150B. Valve shafts shall be stainless steel and not pass through the seat. Valve discs shall be ductile iron with stainless steel disc edge. Seat seals shall be located in the body and be Buna N or natural rubber and replaceable. Shaft seals shall be Chevron type packing of double O-rings. Bearings shall be self- lubricating type made from teflon, nylon or sintered bronze. All bolts, nuts, etc., shall be stainless steel. Cadmium plated bolts, nuts, etc., will not be accepted. Manual butterfly operators shall conform to the current AWWA C504 standard, as modified herein. The valve shall close by turning the input shaft clockwise. All handwheels or nuts shall turn clockwise to close the valve. On valves intended for buried service, all exposed bolting material shall be stainless steel, including all operator flange and gland bolts. Operator housings shall be tightly gasketed and sealed against infiltration of groundwater. Manual operators equipped with a handwheel or crank shall have a mechanical advantage such that a forty (40#) pound pull on the handle or wheel rim will develop the required operating torque. D. VALVE ENDS Valves shall have mechanical 'oi, int ends. Mechanical joint ends shall conform to AWWA C111. Flanged ends shall conform to ASA B16.1, Class 125 lb. (unless otherwise noted). 2. Bolts and nuts for mechanical joints will be of high -strength low -alloy corrosion resistant steel and conform to AWWA C111. All mechanical joint glands will be ductile iron. 3. Bolts and nuts for flanged ends buried in the ground shall be Type 304 stainless steel. E. OPERATOR EXTENSION SHAFTS Operator extension shafts are required on all valves when the operating nut is over five (5') feet below finished grade. Extension shaft is to bring the operating nut to within four Revised — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications (4') to five (5') feet of the top of the valve box. Extension shaft shall have a centering collar placed directly below operating nut and shall be bolted to valve operating nut with stainless steel set screw. F. VALVE BOXES A valve box shall be furnished and installed over each underground valve. The boxes shall be cast iron of the two-piece screw type, with a shaft diameter of not less than five and one-fourth inches (5-1/4") and shall have the word "WATER" stamped on the lid. Provide extension stem for all buried valves terminating in a standard 2-inch square AWWA nut within four (4') to five (5) feet of valve box cover. All parts of the valve box, base and cover shall be coated with hot bituminous varnish. The box shall be furnished complete with cast iron cover and yoke to fit over the valve body. Concrete valve box collars (24"x24"x6") shall be installed with each gate valve. Valve boxes are to be installed plumb and adjusted to their proper grade by the Contractor. G. BRASS PLUG VALVES One-half (1/2") inch through two (2") inch plug valves, when shown on the plans or required, shall be of all brass construction, and warranted for a water working pressure of 200 pounds per square inch. Brass plug valves smaller than two (2") inches shall be Mueller Oriseal, or pre -approved equal. Two (2") inch brass plug valves shall be Ford B 11-777W or Mueller H-10284, or pre -approved equal. H. CONCRETE Cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type 1. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33. Twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength shall equal or exceed 3,000 psi. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Any and all instruction manuals supplied by the manufacturers should be reviewed in detail before installation of the valve. At the job site, prior to installation, the valve should be visually inspected and any foreign material in the interior portion of the valve should be removed. A detailed inspection of the valve should be performed prior to installation. 1. All bolts should be protected to prevent corrosion, either with a suitable paint or by polyethylene wrapping. 2. During installation, there exists the possibility of foreign materials inadvertently entering the valve. Valves should be installed in the closed position. The valve shall be seated on a minimum of one (1) 12"x12"x 4" solid concrete blocks. Valves larger than 12" will be seated by a poured -in -place concrete saddle in the trench to prevent settling and excessive strain on the connection to the pipe. Size of this saddle shall be shown on the plans. 3. A valve box or vault should be provided for each valve used in a buried service application. The valve box should be installed so as not to transmit shock or stress to the valve. The valve box should be centered over the operating nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished area, or such other level as directed by the City. Butterfly valves utilizing smaller bypass valves shall have a watertight manhole constructed as shown on the plans. Valve boxes should be of such a design that a traffic load on the top of the box is not transmitted to the valve. Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications 4. Valves buried in unusually deep trenches shall have extension stems for operating the valve. B. Valves installed above ground or in plant piping systems should be supported in such a way as to minimize bending of the valve end connections as a result of pipe loading. C. After installation and before pressurization of the valve, all pressure -containing bolting (bonnet, seal plate, bypass, and end connections) should be inspected for adequate tightness to prevent leakage. In addition, an inspection should be made for adequate tightness to prevent leakage. In addition, an inspection should be made for adequate tightness of all tapped and plug openings to the valve interior. Proper inspection at this time will minimize the possibility of leaks after pressurization of the piping system. D. In order to prevent time lost searching for leaks, it is recommended that valve excavations not be backfilled until after pressure tests have been made. 1. If valves are used to isolate test section, the test pressures should not exceed twice the rated working pressure of the valve. After the test, steps should be taken to relieve any trapped pressure in the body of the valve. The valve should not be operated in either the opening or closing direction at differential pressures above the rated working pressures. 2. Test butterfly valves against closed valve during hydrostatic testing to insure "driptight" closure in both directions. Correct leaky valves per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Upon completion of the installation, valve location, size, make, type, date of installation, and other information deemed pertinent should be entered on permanent records and given to the Engineer. F. Valves should not be installed in applications or for service other than those recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Valves should not be installed in lines where service pressure will exceed the rated working pressure of the valve. 2. Mainline valves shall not be used for throttling service, unless the design is specifically recommended for that purpose or approved in advance by the manufacturer and Engineer. . 3. Valves should not be used in applications for water distribution that is exposed to subfreezing temperatures unless sufficient flow is maintained through the gate valve to prevent freezing, or some other type of protection is provided to prevent freezing. 4. Valves should not be installed at the dead end of a pipeline without proper and adequate restraint to support the valve and prevent it from blowing off the end of the line. N_o_concxete_shalLbe used on the valve for blockinLy. 5. To prevent damage to the valve, gate valves, up to and including sixteen inches (16") in diameter shall not be operated with input torques greater than 300 ft-lbs. Butterfly valves should not be operated with input torques greater than sixty (60) ft.-lb. END OF SECTION Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Spec(cations SECTION 33 12 19 FIRE HYDRANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section describes the manufacture, construction, and installation of fire hydrants. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. FIRE HYDRANTS Fire hydrants will be measured by the each as shown on the plans. Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for furnishing and installing tire hydrants, which bid price will include all costs for the fire hydrant installation, (excluding TEE), hydrant piping and fittings, hydrant gate valve, extension stems, valve boxes, concrete blocking, testing„ disinfection, and all other work not otherwise provided for in the Proposal. The main line fitting is not included in the cost of the fire hydrant. B. APPURTENANCES Operation extensions, valve boxes, gate valves, mainline fittings, hydrant piping and fittings, anchor couplings, and concrete blocking will not be measured items and shall be considered subsidiary. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on fire hydrants to be furnished indicating compliance with the specifications especially regarding dimensions, materials of construction, and nozzle threads. B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance" stating that the materials furnished comply with the specifications. C. Upon request, flow data, indicating friction loss in PSI at the flow of 1,000 GPM from the pumper nozzle, such friction loss must not exceed 3 PSI. ISO 9001 certification. PART 2 — PRODUCTS " 2.1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. AWWA -C110, C111, CS02, and C600 D. ASTM r33 and C105 2.2 GENERAL A. All fire hydrants furnished shall conform to the requirements and test of AWWA C502-94 Standard for Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant or latest version thereof, as they pertain to the design, component materials, construction and manufacture, except as modified or supplemented hereinafter. Fire hydrants shall have a published warranty against defects in material or workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from date of manufacture. Acceptable fire hydrants are Mueller Super Centurion 250TM, American Flow Control 5-1/4" B-84-B, Clow Medallion, East Jordan Iron Works, or pre -approved equal. Approved — 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications Pressure rating -- working pressure shall be 250 psig tested to 500 psig hydrostatic pressure. 2. Flow -- friction loss shall not exceed 3.0 psig at a flow of 1000 gpm through the pumper nozzle connection when tested as prescribed in AWWA C-502 latest revision. This test must be conducted by an independent laboratory in their facility and attested to by a Professional Engineer. Documentation must accompany all requests for hydrant approval. 3. Drain valve -- must drain the barrel when the hydrant is closed, and seal shut when hydrant is opened. 4. Seat ring and Drain ring (show bushing) — must be bronze (ASTM B-62), shall work in conjunction to form an all bronze drain way, and shall have no less than two (2) openings. If they are in a cast iron shoe, they must be bronze lined and the bronze seat ring must thread into bronze drain ring (or shoe bushing) providing bronze to bronze connection. Seat rings must be "O" rings. The 6" shoe connection must be specified (flanged, A/C, M.J, etc.) having ample blocking for sturdy setting. A minimum of eight (8) bolts and nuts is required to fasten the shoe to the lower barrel. 5. Main valve — compression type closing with the pressure and must be not less than 5- 1/4" in diameter. Composition of the main valve must be molded rubber or neoprene, having a durometer hardness of 95 (+) (-) 5 and must be not less than 1" thick. 6. Outlet — "Three-way" having two (2) 2-1/2" hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2" I.D. pumper nozzle; all National Standard Hose Coupling Thread. All nozzles shall be bronze and thread counter clockwise into the nozzle section with "O" ring pressure seals and held in place with an acceptable locking device 7. Hydrant barrel casting — inside diameter of the hydrant barrel shall not be less than six and one -eighth inches (6-1/8"). 8. Operating nut — Non -rising, pentagonal in shape, measuring 1-1/2" from point to flat at base of nut; bronze. 9. Hold-down nut — Shall incorporate an integral resilient weather seal and open counter clockwise. 10. Lubrication chamber - Must be provided with sealed top and bottom "O" rings, filled with lubricant which shall be either oil or grease, designed with thrust collar and threaded operating parts that are automatically lubricated each time the hydrant is cycled. There must not be less than two (2) "O" rings separating the lubrications reservoir from the waterway and that portion of the stem contracting these "O" rings shall be sleeved with bronze. An anti -friction device must be in place above the trust collar to further minimize operating torque. 11. Hydrant bonnet — must be attached to the upper barrel by not less than four (4) bolts and nuts, with an inserted flat rubber gasket as a pressure sea. 12. Direction to open — counter clockwise. 13. Operating stem — must be two-piece, not less than 1-1/4" diameter or 1" x 1" square (excluding threaded or machined areas) and must be connected by a breakable stem coupling near the ground line flange. Screws, pins, bolts or fasteners used in conjuction with the stem coupling must be stainless steel. 14. Exterior paint — red machinery enamel. Approved—112009 BICS Unified Specifications B. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS Breakable Type Construction Hydrants shall be traffic -model type having upper and lower barrels joined-.," approximately two inches (2") above the ground line by a separated and breakable,�r "swivel" flange providing 360 degree rotation of the upper barrel for proper nozzle h .. facing. This flange must employ not less than eight (8) bolts. '` a Provisions for Extension All hydrants shall be capable of being extended to accommodate future grade changes without excavation. Compression type hydrants that close with the flow shall have breakable type stem coupling installed at the ground line flange. Extension of this type hydrant shall be made by adding at the ground line flange, a new coupling and stem section equal to the length of the extension. Stem extensions made by adding a new section of stem to the threaded section of the stem at the top of the hydrant will not be accepted. Only one extension is allowed. Burt/ Length Furnish hydrants for a four (4') foot bury unless the water line grades shown on the plans indicate a deeper bury is required. 4. OperatingStems tems Operating stem% whose threads are located in the barrel or waterway shall be of manganese bronze, Everdur, or other high quality non -corrodible metal, and all working parts in the waterway shall be bronze to bronze. Operating stems whose threads are not located in the barrel or waterway may be made of high-grade bronze, genuine wrought iron, or steel, and stem nuts shall be bronze. Iron or steel stems shall have a bronze, stainless steel, or other non - corrodible metal, sleeve where passing through "O"-rings. Operating threads must be sealed against contact with the water at all times regardless of open or closed position of the main valve. The operating mechanism, safety stem coupling and main valve assembly shall be capable of withstanding 200 ft-lbs of torque against the fully open or closed positions, with no damage to the components. Downward stem travel shall be limited in the bottom of the hydrant by a one-piece lower valve plate that bottoms out in the hydrant shoe. Travel stops located in the bonnet or upper valve plate is unacceptable. The interior and the exterior of the hydrant shoe shall be fully coated with not less than 8 mils of fusion bonded epoxy. Main Valvc Seats Main valve seats on compression type hydrants closing with the flow shall be of such design that incorrect positioning is impossible and that the threads will be adequately guided into position. Arrangements shall also be made to hold the main valve gasket in place during assembly. The main seat shall be made of bronze and threaded into a heavy hrnnze bushing in the hydrant base. 6. Seat and Drain Ring The bronze seat shall thread directly into a bronze drain ring. This will assure easy removal of the main valve seat through the top of the hydrant shoe and all pressure seals must be "O"-rings. - Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications 7. Hydrant Heads The hydrant shall be constructed so that the nozzles may be faced in any desired direction. 8. Mating Surfaces All mating surfaces, such as bonnet -to -nozzle section, nozzle section -to -lower barrel, lower barrel -to -shoe, must utilize rubber gaskets for sealing and must be held in place by zinc -plated bolts and nuts. Other methods, such as snap rings, etc., will not be accepted. 9. Manufacturer Experience Record No hydrant will be considered which has not been regularly manufactured and in successful continuous use for at least 10 years. C. ACCESSORIES REQUIRED 1. Full face ground line flange gaskets. 2. Nozzle cap gaskets 3. Drain valve and outlet 4. Cap nuts to seal the bottom end of stem threads against contact with water 5. Harnessing lugs (Required only when shown on the plans.) 6. Nozzle cap chains 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS See SECTION 33 13 10 — HYDROSTATIC TESTING and SECTION 33 13 00 — DISINFECTION OF WATERLINES. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Fire hydrant leads 18' or shorter will be restrained the entire length. Fire hydrant leads shall require a separate valve for the fire hydrant assembly. B. Place fire hydrants at all locations shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. C. Set each fire hydrant upon a concrete slab not less than four inches (4") thick and not less than one (1) square foot of surface area. D. Place eight (8) cubic feet of crushed rock, clean gravel or other suitable material to provide reservoir capacity so that the hydrant will completely drain when closed. E. Set the hydrant perpendicular with large steamer nozzle facing nearest curb, and at a depth such that the center of the steamer nozzle is not less than fifteen inches (15"), nor more than eighteen inches (18") above nearest grade. Assure that the hydrant is sat at the bury line. F. Polyethylene encasement of 8 mils thick shall be installed on all piping and appurtenances in contact with soil and shall conform to AWWA C105. Joint tape shall be self sticking PVC or polyethylene, 8 mils thick. END OF SECTION 4 Approved—112009 SECTION 33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATERLINES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION B/CS Unified Specifications A. This specification specifies the procedure for disinfection of water systems, and in general, conforms to AWWA C651, Disinfecting Water Mains including Section 4.3.9. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Disinfection of waterlines will not be measured. Cost for work herein specified, including the furnishing of all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work, shall be included in the unit price bid for waterlines in the Proposal. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. CHLORINE AND WATER Chlorine Calcium hypoehlorite, or equal, which enntains sixty-five (65%) percent chlorine by weight. 2. Water Water for disinfection will be metered and furnished to the Contractor at no cost. Existing water lines are to remain isolated from newly laid water lines by a physical air gap until the original copy of the negative coliform test results have been received by the City Engineer from either the County Health Department or an approved TCEQ lab. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. CHLORINE RESIDUAL -DROP DILUTION METHOD The drop dilution method of approximating total residual chlorine is suitable for concentrations above 10 mg/L, such as are applied in the disinfection of water mains or tanks. 1. Apparatus a.) A graduated cylinder for measuring distilled water. b.) An automatic or safety pipet c.) A dropping pipet that delivers a one -milliliter (1 ml) sample in twenty (20) drops. This pipet is for measuring the water sample and should not be used for any other purpose. d.) A comparator kit containing a suitable range of standards. 2. Procedure a.) Ascertain the volume of the comparator cell and using an automatic or safety pipet, add 0.5 ml of orthotolidine for each 9.5 ml of distilled water to be added. 1 Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications b.) Using a graduated cylinder, add a measured volume of distilled water. c.) With the dropping pipet, add the water sample a drop at a time, allowing mixing, until a yellow color is formed that matches one of the color standards. d.) Record the total number of drops used and the final chlorine value obtained. e.) Calculate the milligrams per liter residual chlorine as follows: i. Multiply by twenty the number of milliliters of distilled water used in Step 2. ii. Multiply product in step a. by the final chlorine value in milligrams per liter recorded in Step 4. iii. Divide the product found in step b. by the total number of drops of water sample recorded in Step 4. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. During the construction operations, workmen shall be required to use utmost care to see that the inside of pipes, fittings, jointing materials, valves, etc., which will come into contact with potable water be maintained in a sanitary condition. B. Every effort must be made to keep the inside of the pipe, fittings, and valves free of all foreign matter, sticks, dirt, rocks, etc. As each joint of pipe is being laid, it must be effectively swabbed so that all foreign matter is removed. Placing dry powdered chlorine in the pipeline will be permitted in conjunction with certain methods of sterilization as specified by the Engineer. All fittings and exposed open ends of pipe must be blocked with a plug or capped until the line is completed. C. Sterilization of the line, or any section thereof, shall not be commenced until the Engineer has approved the method, apparatus, sterilizing agent, and the section of the line. D. When the entire pipeline, or certain section thereof, has been completed, tested, and made ready for use, the line or section of line shall be thoroughly sterilized according to the following procedure: The Contractor shall provide all necessary taps to complete this section of the specifications. The water main shall be flushed prior to disinfection. The flushing velocity shall be greater than 2.5 feet per second. The rate of flow required to produce this velocity in various diameters is shown in Table 1. No site for flushing should be chosen, unless it has been determined by the Engineer or Inspector that drainage is adequate at that site. Flushing is no substitute for preventive measures taken before and during pipe laying. Certain contaminants, especially in caked deposits, resist flushing at any velocity. Aplimvea-112009 B/CS Unified Specifications TABLE 1 REQUIRED OPENINGS TO FLUSH PIPELINES (40 PSI RESIDUAL PRESSURE) Pipe Size Flow (gpm) Required to Produce 2.5 fps Velocity Orifice Size (in.) Number of Hydrant Outlet Nozzles Size (in.) of Hydrant Outlet Nozzles 4 10 15/16 1 2-'/z 6 220 1-3/8 1 2-%z 8 390 1-7/8 1 2-'/2 10 610 2-5/16 1 2-% 12 880 2-13/16 1 2-% 14 1200 3-'/a 2 2-'ii 16 1565 3-5/8 4-3/16 2 2 2-'/2 ?-'/7 18 1980 Note: A 2-5z" hydrant outlet nozzle will discharge approximately 1,000 gpm and a 4-/z" hydrant outlet nozzle will dischargc approximately 2,500 gpm with 40 psi residual pressure. E. METHODS OF CHLORINE APPLICATION Continuous Feed Method Nute: This method is suitable for general applicatiuus. a. Water from the existing distribution system, or other pre -approved sources of supply, shall be made to flow at a constant, measured rate into the newly laid pipeline. The water shall receive a dose of chlorine concentration until the water in the pipe maintains a minimum of fifty milligrams per liter (50 mg/1) available chlorine. To assure that this concentration is maintained, the chlorine residual should be measured at regular intervals in accordance with the procedures described herein. Note: In the absence of a meter, the rate may be determined either by placing a pitot gauge at the discharge, or by measuring the time to fill a container of known volume. Table 2 gives the amount of chlorine residual required for each 100 feet of pipe of various diameters. Solutions of one percent ,(1%) chlorine may be prepared with approximately one pound (1 lb.) of calcium hypbchlorite (65% strength) in 8.5 gallons of water. TABLE 2 Chlorine Required to Produce 50 Mg/l Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe by Diameter Pipe Size (in.) 100% Chlorine (lb/100ft) 1% Chlorine Solution (gaU100ft) 4 0.027 0.33 6 0.061 0.73 8 0.108 1.30 10 0.170 2.04 12 0.240 2.88 16 0.427 5.12 18 0.540 6.48 24 0.960 11.50 Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications Pipe Size (in.) 100% Chlorine (lb/100ft) 1% Chlorine Solution (gal/100ft) 30 1.500 18.00 36 2.160 25.90 42 1 2.940 1 35.30 b. During the application of the chlorine, valves shall be manipulated to prevent the treatment dosage from flowing back into the line supplying the water. Chlorine application shall not cease until the entire main is filled with the chlorine solution. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the main for at least twenty-four (24) hours during which time, all valves and hydrants in the section treated shall be operated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this twenty-four (24) hour period, the treated water shall contain no less than fifty (50) milligrams per liter and no more than one hundred (100) milligrams per liter chlorine throughout the length of the main. A dosage of more than the maximum allowable chlorine will require the Contractor to dilute the flush water with one of the TCEQ approved dilution chemicals. The chemical and description of procedure will be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval. Slug Method This method is suitable for use with mains of large diameter for which, because of the volume of water involved, the continuous feed method is not practical. a.) Water from the existing distribution system shall be made to flow at a constant, measured rate (see C.l.a. Note) into the newly laid pipeline. The water shall receive a dose of chlorine, also fed at a constant, measured rate. The two (2) rates shall be proportioned so that the concentration of the water entering the pipeline is maintained at no less than 300 milligrams per liter. As the chlorinated water passes along the line, it shall expose all interior surfaces to a concentration of at least 300 mg/L for at least three (3) hours. The application shall be checked at a tap near the upstream and downstream end of the line by chlorine residual measurements made according to the procedures described herein. b.) As the chlorinated water flows past tees and crosses, related valves and hydrants shall be operated so as to disinfect appurtenances. Dry Treatment during Installation The dosage and application of sodium hypochlorite will be determined by the following: a.) Calculate weight of sodium hypochlorite required for water to be treated utilizing Table 2. b.) Add required amount of solution at the bell of each pipe as it is installed. E. FINAL FLUSHING After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the main until the chlorine concentration in the water leaving the main is less than three milligrams per liter (3 mg/1). Chlorine residual determination shall be made by the Inspector to ascertain that the heavily chlorinated water has been removed from the pipeline. Approved—112009 F. BACTERIOLOGIC TESTS B/CS Unified Specifications 1. Before the water main is placed in service, a sample or samples shall be collected from points designated by the Inspector and tested for bacteriologic quality. This sample shall be collected 24 hours after final flushing. The test shall show the absence of coliform organisms before the water main may be placed in service. At least one (1) sample per one thousand (1000) feet of new line or portion thereof shall be taken. Sampling shall be supervised by the Inspector. Samples shall be submitted by the city to a TCEQ approved laboratory and/or County Health Department for analysis. 2. Samples of bacteriologic analysis shall be collected in sterile bottles obtained from the Brazos County Health Department. Samples shall be collected at points specified by the City Engineer. 3. A suggested sampling tap consists of a standard corporation cock installed in the main with a copper tube gooseneck assembly. After samples have been collected, the gooseneck assembly may be removed and retained for future use. G. REPETITION OF PROCEDURE if the initial disinfection fails to prndnce samples with no coliform present, the contractor shall re -disinfect the line following the procedures stated in 695.04 of this specification until samples indicating no coliform present have been obtained. When the samples indicate no coliform present and the City Engineer has received original copies of the test report, the main may be placed in service. 3.2 PROCEDURE AFTER CUTTING INTO OR REPAIRING EXISTING MAINS A. The procedure outlined in this section applies primarily when mains are wholly or partially dewatered. Leaks or breaks that are repaired with clamping devices while the mains remain full of water under pressure present little danger of contamination and require no disinfection. Trench "Treatment" When an old line is opened, either by accident or by design, the excavation will likely be wet and badly contaminated. Liberal quantities of hypochlorite applied to open trench areas will lessen the danger from such pollution. Tablets have the advantage in such a situation because they dissolve slowly and continue to release hypochlorite as water is pumped from the excavation. 2. Main. Disinfection a.) Swabbing and F1ushing The following procedure is considered as a mmimuin that may be used. i. Swabbing With Hypochlorite Solution: The interior of all pipe and fittings used to make the repair (particularly couplings and tapping sleeves) shall be swabbed with a 5 percent hypochlorite solution before they are installed. ii. Flushing: Thorough flushing is the most practical means of removing contamination introduced during repairs. If valving and hydrant locations permit, flushing from both directions is recommended. Flushing shall be started as Soon as the repairs are completed and continued until discolored water is eliminated. Approved — I11009 B/CS Unified Specifications Slug Method: In addition to the swabbing and flushing procedures of section B.1., the section of main in which the break is located can be flushed and chlorinated using the slug method where practical, as determined by the Engineer or Inspector. This method requires isolating the section of main, shutting off all service connections, flushing the main, and chlorinating the main as described in the Slug Method in C.2, except that the dose may be increased to as much as 500 mg/1, and the contact time reduced to as little as '/z hour. After chlorination, flushing shall be resumed and continued until discolored water is eliminated. 4. Sampling_ Bacteriologic samples shall be taken after repairs to provide a record by which the effectiveness of the procedures used can be determined by the Inspector. If the direction of flow is unknown, samples shall be taken on each side of the main break. END OF SECTION Appruved-112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 33 13 10 HYDROSTATIC TESTS PART 1- GENERAL !' W *11001VJL1910 This item shall consist of the hydrostatic testing of all waterlines, fire hydrants, and appurtenances. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Testing of waterlines will not he a measured item. Cost for work herein specified, including the furnishing of all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work, shall be included in the emit price bid for waterlines in the Proposal. TABLE A Lo„ in Gallons Per Hour Pei Foot of l'ipe Length 4" .04 6" 8" 10" 12" 18" 20VI 21" 50 .06 .08 .10 .12 .18 .195 .235 100 .08 .12 .16 .195 .235 .355 .395 .475 200 .16 .235 .315 .395 .475 .71 .785 .945 300 .235 .355 .475 .59 .71 1.065 1.185 1.42 400 .315 .475 .63 .785 .945 1.42 1.58 1.89 500 .395 .59 .785 .985 1.185 1.775 1.975 2.365 600 .475 .71 .945 1.185 1.42 2.13 2.365 2.84 700 .555 .83 1.105 1.38 1.655 2.485 2.76 3.31 800 .63 .945 1.265 1.58 1.895 2.84 3.155 3.785 900 .71 1.065 1.42 1.775 2.13 3.195 3.55 4.26 1000 .79 1.185 1.58 1.975 2.365 3.55 3.945 4.735 Calculations Based on a Loss of 25 Gal./Diameter inch of Pipe/Mile of Pipe/Day PART 2 - PIZODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR The contractor shall furnish pump, pipe connections and all necessary apparatus (including gauges and meters) to hydrostatically test the water lines according to this specification. B. WATER FOR TESTTN(T Water for testing will be furnished by the City. All connections of new pipeline must be isolated from existing potable water lines until a negative coliform test report from the County Health Department or TCEQ approved lab has been received. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL 1 Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications A. All water mains including water services shall be hydrostatically tested and sterilized according to SECTION 33 13 00 - DISINFECTION OF WATERLINES, prior to acceptance by the City. B. This section specifies hydrostatic testing of water distribution lines. The contractor shall test waterlines after backfilling, but before replacement of pavement (if applicable.) C. Test waterlines in sections, by pressurizing the new system to 150 psi and holding that pressure for a total test time of 4 hours. 3.2 PRESSURIZATION A. Each valved section of pipe shall be filled with water slowly. The test pressure, based on the elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge, shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the City Engineer. 3.3 AIR REMOVAL A. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves and hydrants. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor shall install corporation cocks at such points so that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water. After all the air has been expelled, the corporation stops shall be closed and the test pressure applied twenty-four (24) hours after filling the line. B. At the conclusion of the pressure test, the corporation stops shall be removed and plugged, or left in place at the discretion of the City Engineer. Any added corporation cocks must be shown on as -built plans if they are to remain in place. 3.4 EXAMINATION A. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints shall be examined carefully during the test. Any damage or defective pipe, fittings, valves or hydrants that are discovered following the test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated until it is satisfactory to the City Engineer. Allowable Pressure Loss a.) For DIP and PVC No pipe installation will be accepted if the water loss is greater than that shown in Table A. No additional leakage will be included for fittings. b.) When hydrants are in the test section, the test shall be made against the closed hydrant and not the valve on the lead. 2. Acceptance of Installation a.) Acceptance shall be determined on the basis of allowable pressure loss. If any test of pipe discloses a pressure loss greater than that specified, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate and repair the defective material until the pressure loss is within the specified allowance. b.) All visible leaks are to be repaired, regardless of the amount of pressure loss. END OF SECTION Approved— 112009 B/CS Unified Spaeifivit iorys SECTION 33 31 13 SANITARY SE$VAGE SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This is a general specification, which applies to the furnishing of all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the construction of sanitary sewers, together with the manholes, cleanout structures and other incidentals, in accordance with the plans and these specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK SECTION 31 78 00 - PIPE BORING, JACYJNG, & TUNNELING SECTION 31 23 33 - LXCAV'AT1NG, 1RENCHING, & BACKFILL SECTION 33 05 01 - PVC PIPE & FITTING SECTION 33 05 02 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE SECTION 33 39 13 - MANHOLES SECTION 33 39 14 - SEWER SERVICES 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payments will be made at the price bid per foot for furnishing and installing pipe, which bid price will include all costs for the complete pipe installation, including line fittings, trenching, and backfill, embedment, compaction or tamping, sterilization, testing, final cleanup, and all other work not otherwise provided for in bid proposal. Pipe will be measured (by horizontal distance) from center of fitting to center of fitting, or end of pipe without deduction for the length of intermediate fittings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. All submittal requirements are listed with the material specifications PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 TESTING REQUIREMENTS See: SECTION 33 UI 30 - TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWER SYSTEMS PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Construction methods for each material are specified in the material specifications. A. MINIMUM DEPTH The desired depth for sanitary sewer pipe shall be six feet (6) as measured from the outside top of pipe vertically to finished ground or pavement surface elevation. The minimum depth shall be two feet (2'). Where the cover is 3.5' or less, ductile iron pipe should be used and cenicut btaL• ilized sand bacl&ill required where erosion may occur. END OF SECTION Revised. 1/ 009 B/CS Unified Specifications Additional Revision—1012009 SECTION 33 39 13 MANHOLES (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification. Additional revision is indicated by a dushed underline.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall govern the, manufacture, construction, and installation of sanitary sewer manholes. All manholes shall conform to TCEQ requirements. Submittal and approval shall he required for all pre -cast design. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The depth of manholes completed shall be determined by measuring the vertical distance from the flow line of the sewer main to the top of the manhole ring and cover. B. Standard manholes shall be measured by the each for various size diameters and depths. C. The contract unit prices shall be the total compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and performing all work, of whatever nature required, that is necessary for the completion of the manholes in accordance with the provisions of the plans and these specifications. Material or methods used to stabilize the foundation shall be subsidiary to the bid item for Manholes. D. Cleannntc fnr services shall be considered subsidiary to the price for each service connection. E. Drop connections will be measured for payment per each, complete in place regardless of depth. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on materials furnished indicating compliance with the specifications regarding diineusiulis, thickness, wcights, and materials. B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance" stating that the materials furnished comply with this specification. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 7.7. MATERIALS A. CONCRETE Refer to SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE ------------ B. MANHOLE RINGS AND COVERS The standard rings and covers (V-1432-3) and the water -tight ring and cover (V-2432-3) shall be manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works (or pre -approved equal.) The manhole shall bear the appropriate model number, the logo of City and the words "Sanitary Sewer". The cover shall have pick lugs cast into the surface. All manhole ring and covers shall have a 32" diameter. 1 Revised—112009 Additional Revision — 1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications C. GRADE RINGS Grade rings shall be precast reinforced concrete. Minimum thickness shall be 2 inches by 8 inches wide by 30 inches inside diameter. D. PRECAST REINFORCED MANHOLE SECTIONS Precast manhole sections conform to the current ASTM C478 standard. Joints shall be 0- ring gasketed. Thickness for manhole risers shall be as listed under wall "B" in the "Class Tables" of ASTM C76, Reinforced Concrete Pipe. E. PRE -CAST MANHOLE BASES Pre -cast manhole bases will conform to all TCEQ requirements and City Specifications for invert depths, reinforcement, base thickness and manhole depth for pipe size. F. DROPS Drops shall be constructed of either ductile iron as specified in SECTION 33 05 02 — DUCTILE IRON PIPE or PVC pipe as specified in Section 33 05 01 - POLYVINLYLCHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS. Drops shall be placed on the inside of a manhole using a cross to allow access to the vertical Wipe. Cement stabilized sand should be used for all backfill. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS See SECTION 33 01 30 - TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWER SYSTEMS. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. MANHOLE BASES 1. Construct manhole bases in the configuration shown on the Plans. Minimum thickness below the flowline of sewer shall be 8 inches or as shown on the details. 2. Insure that bases are constructed or installed on firm ground and that ground water is controlled. Install appropriate material for a minimum of 4" to stabilize bottom if directed to do so by the Engineer. 3. The invert of manholes shall be formed in such a fashion that they are smooth and will not obstruct flow of sewage. Provide flow channels in the manhole base equivalent to the top of the pipe by forming the concrete base and trowelling it to a smooth, even finish with a steel trowel. Slope the manhole bench from the wall line to edge of flow channel and trowel it smooth on a grade of I inch per foot with a liberal radius applied at flow channel intercepts. B. PRECAST MANHOLES Precast Manhole bases shall be placed on a 6" minimum depth layer of cushion sand, gravel or pre -approved material. Cast bottom section of precast manhole riser ring in manhole base as shown on the Plans. Place "Synko-Flex" waterstop (or pre -approved equal) per manufacturer's recommendations prior to setting precast starter ring. Revised—112009 Additional Revision—1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications The base shall have a minimum diameter 12 inches greater than the outside diameter of the manhole, and a minimum thickness including the area under the pipe as follows: 0' to R' manhole (" greater than 8.....................12" 3. All invert channels shall be smooth and accurately shaped to a semi -circular bottom conforming to the outside of the adjacent sewer section. Inverts shall be formed directly in the concrete of the manhole base or may be constructed by laying full section sewer pipe straight through the manhole and cutting out the top half after the base is constructed. Changes in the direction of the sewer and entering branches shall have a true curve of as large a radius as the size of the manhole will permit. Where the largest pipe at a manhole is less than 12", the channel depth shall be one half of the largest pipe diameter. When the largest pipe at the manhole is between 12 and 24 inches (inclusive,) the channel depth shall be three fourths of the largest pipe diameter. When the largest pipe at a manhole is greater than 24", the channel depth shall match the largest pipe. In all cases, the edges of the pipe along the invert and at the walls of the manhole shall be plastered and brush -finished. Plaster shall be non - shrink or hydraulic grout. 4. Where inlet leads, main or lateral pipe sewers enter manholes, pipes shall be cut off flush with inside of manhole any irregularities shall be grouted up with non -shrink grout. Install stub outs, where shown, to line and grade. Use one full joint of pipe, of size indicated, for stub out. Seal stub out with plug. Install plug in such a manner as to prevent seepage of leakage through stub outs. Installation of plug shall be such that it may easily be removed in future without damaging bell or groove end of stub out. If manholes are constructed in streets where immediate subsequent paving or re- paving is involved, readjust the manhole ring and covers, immediately prior to the paving operations. Manholes shall be installed with joints of size and numbers required to obtain correct depth. Contractor is responsible for verifying correct manhole depth before construction. Initially, manhole tops shall be not less than 6- inches nor greater than 18-inches from final grade. If manholes are relocated in the field because of unforeseen conflicts, the Contractor is responsible for convect depth of manhole. Manhole tops shall be sct as follows: a.) Developed Areas: Set manhole tops 1 inch higher than eiusting elevation of natural ground or other final grade when specified by the Engineer. b.) Undeveloped Areas: Set manhole tops flush with paved surfaces and 6-inchs higher than shoulder and/or proposed final grade elevations in easements or other unpaved areas. Where manholes are located in bottom of ditches, either set manhole top by EJIW V-2342, or pre -approved equal, flush with ditch bottom and seal with solid cover, or set twelve inches above ditch top and reshape ditch around manhole. 6. Prior to placing each section of manhole riser or cone, thoroughly clean the bells and spigots to be joined. 7. Backfilling will be performed evenly and carefully around the manhole after the full strength of the concrete is attained. Carefully place the O-ring gasket and check for proper alignment. Plug lift holes, interior joints, and exterior joints with "Water Plug" grout. Revised—112009 Additional Revision — 1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications 10. Each manhole shall be individually vacuum tested according to the SECTION 33 39 13 - MANHOLES. Stub -outs, boots, and pipe plugs shall be secured to prevent movement while the vacuum is being drawn. C. CAST -IN PLACE MANHOLES Cast -In place manholes are not allowed without prior approval from the City Engineer. This approval shall only be in emergency situations. D. FIBERGLASS MANHOLES Fiberglass manholes are permitted with written approval from the City Engineer. E. SERVICE CONNECTIONS Service connections at manholes will meet all other requirements of this specification and shall be tied into the manhole with a manhole boot. At the time of construction, the Engineer will designate the locations of the service outlets and the depth to the top of the lateral pipe, if depth is not indicated on the plans. The minimum depth of cover over the end of the lateral pipe shall be no deeper than what is required to serve the intended lot. F. CLEANOUT STRUCTURES The Contractor shall construct cleanouts where shown on the plans and as specified. All backfill around and above the pipe shall be machine tamped in layers not exceeding 3- inches in depth so that no settlement shall occur after the cleanout is constructed. Cleanouts shall be provided at each service connection and located at the edge of an easement or at the right-of-way. The cleanouts shall be enclosed within a meter box which has a lid that makes the cleanout accessible set flush with the ground. G. DROP MANHOLES Drop manholes shall be constructed for elevation differences of 24 inches or greater as measured from the flow line of the pipe to the flow line entrance of the manhole. END OF SECTION Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 33 39 14 SEWER SERVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the manufacture, construction, and installation of sewer services for ordinary sewer service 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Services shall be categorized as "long" if over 15-feet in length or "short" if 15-feet or shorter and measured as "EACH" or as provided in the bid Proposal Form. B. Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for furnishing and installing services. This unit bid price will include all costs for the complete service installation, including all appurtenances, bedding, marking, ceanouts, and testing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on materials furnished, indicating compliance with the specifications regarding dimensions, thickness, weights, and materials. B. Submit manufacturer's "Certificate of Compliance", stating that the materials furnished comply with this spaciCication. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS All materials shall be as shown on the details. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. INSTALLATION Information supplied by the manufacturers on any and all appurtenances should be reviewed in detail before installation of the service. At the job site, prior to installation, the material should be visually inspected and any foreign material in the interior portion of the service should be removed. A detailed inspection of the service should be performed prior to installation. B. The services should be bedded in a fashion similar to bedding main lines as shown on the details. Cleanouts shall be provided at each service connection and located at the edge of an easement or at the right-of-way. The ceanouts shall be enclosed within a plastic box which has a lid that makes the cleanout accessible set flush with the ground. END OF SECTION Revised—1012009 B/CS Unified Specification SECTION 3140 01 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008 specification.) PART 1. - GENFRAT, 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Specification includes the general description of the Storm Drainage System and the components included in that system. B. This is a guacial specification which applies to the furnishing of all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the construction of storm drainage systems, together with the inlets, storm drain manholes, headwalls, safety end treatments, cleanout structures and other incidentals, in accordance with the plans and these specifications. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the price bid per unit item for furnishing and installing pipe, which bid price will include all costs for the complete pipe installation, including trenching and backfrll, embedment, compaction or tamping, testing, final cleanup, and all other work, not otherwise provided for in the Proposal. A. Pit}r. Payments will be made at the price bid per foot for furnishing and installing pipe, which bid price will include all costs for the complete pipe installation, including line fittings, trenching, and backfrll, embedment, compaction or tamping, and all other work not otherwise provided for in bid proposal. Pipe will be measured (by horizontal distance) from the inside face of the inlet or junction box or end of pipe without adjustment for the slope of the pipe. The length of the inlet or junction box shall not constitute a payable quantity. B. Manholes/Junction Boxes Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for manhole. Manholes will be measured per each. C. Inlets Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for inlet by length and type. Inlets will be measured per each. D. Headwalls Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for headwall by type. Headwalls will be measured per each. F. Rork Ridable Riy Rap Rock Rubble Rip Rap shall be measured by area as provided for in the bid proposal form. F. Channel Grading Channel Grading shall be measured by area as provided for in the bid proposal form. Revised — 1012009 B/CS Unified Specification 1.3 SUBMITTALS All submittal requirements are listed with the material specifications PART2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS See: SECTION 31 78 00 - PIPE BORING, JACKING AND TUNNELING SECTION 31 23 33 - EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING SECTION 03 30 00 - CONCRETE SECTION 33 40 02 - REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE SECTION 33 40 03 - STANDARD STORM SEWER INLETS SECTION 33 40 05 - REINFORCED CONCRETE HEADWALLS SECTION 33 42 16 - PRECAST BOX CULVERTS SECTION 33 40 04 - REINFORCED CONCRETE RIPRAP HDPE Storm Drain Pipe (to be specified by design engineer) 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS All storm pipe and storm drain systems shall be televised at the end of construction. If it is determined that the storm pipe contains foreign material (i.e. construction material, gravel, soil, etc.) the line will be required to be cleared of this foreign material and televised again. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Construction methods for each material are specified in the material specifications. A. Minimum Cover The minimum cover for class III storm drain pipe (12" through 60") (See SECTION 33 40 02 — REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE) shall be two feet (2') in areas subject to vehicular loads and one foot in non -vehicular areas as measured from the outside top of pipe vertically to finished ground or pavement surface elevation. END OF SECTION appn-med 112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 33 40 m. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This item includes the furnishing of labor, materials, equipment, and supervision in the operations required in the laying and jointing of reinforced concrete pipe.' 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement shall be made based upon the length of pipe as laid in the tield. Length of inlets and junction boxes are not included in this measurement. Pipe shall be paid for at the unit price bid in the Proposal for each size and type of pipe, which price shall be full compensation for trenching and backfilling, furnishing and laying the pipe, and furnishing all equipment, labor, materials, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certification from independent testing laboratory at manufacturer expense that the pipe meets the requirements of ASTM C76/C76M and ASTM C497/C497M. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS The Publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C76 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe (I atest Revision) ASTM C443 Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets (Latest Revision) A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe 1. Reinforced concrete pipe to meet the requirements of ASTM C76. The type and wall class shall be III or IV unless otherwise shown on PLANS. 2. Joint reinforced for rubber gasket joints to meet the requirements of paragraph 8 of ASTM C76. 3. Joints shall be rubber gasket per ASTM C443 unless otherwise shown on PLANS. Lubricant materials for installation purposes to be per manufacturers recommendations. Mineral lubricants are not to be used. 4. Pipe coating requirements are shown on PLANS if icyuired. 2.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS Testing methods for the reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM C497 (Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile). 1 Approved—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications REJECTION: The pipe may be rejected for having defects or failure to meet requirements as follows: A. Variations in any dimension exceeding the permissible variations prescribed. B. A piece broken out of the bell or spigot end of such size that the water -tightness of the joint would be impaired. C. Any shattering or flaking of concrete or other conditions indicating an improper concrete mix. D. Lack of uniformity in placement of steel which might preclude all joints being typical of those tested. E. Cracks sufficient to impair the strength, durability or serviceability of the pipe. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Shipment of pipe to be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe to be unloaded and stored in a location where pipe will be protected from damage. 3.2 TRENCH/BACKFILL Pipe trench excavation and backfill to be in accordance with SECTION 31 23 33 — EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING and/or as shown on Plans or as directed by the City Engineer. 3.3 JOINTING OF PIPE A. Lay pipe sections in trench to true alignment and grade. Take exceptional care in placing pipe and making field joints. Avoid bumping of pipe in trench. B. Properly lubricate groove end of pipe and rubber gasket with lubricant. Stretch gasket over the spigot end of the pipe and carefully seat in groove. Do not twist, roll, cut, crimp, or otherwise injure gaskets or force out of position during closure of joints. C. Pull or push "home" pipe for closure of the joint. Correct joint rebound before backfilling of pipe. D. Remove foreign matter or dirt from pipe, and keep clean during and after laying. E. Any damages in pipe installation or prior to final acceptance is to be repaired or replaced in accordance with ASTM C76 at no additional cost to the City. F. Failure to conform with any of the specifications herein set forth or referenced. G. Failure of pipe to go completely "home" due to binding of spigot against bell. END OF SECTION Revised—1012009 B/CS Unified Specifications SEC:110N 33 40 03 STANDARD STORM SEWER INLETS (Sentences and/or paragraphs that are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from tire 2008 specification.) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall include Reinforced Concrete Standard Storm Sewer Inlets, which shall be constructed in true conformity with lines, grades, dimensions and designs as shown on the Plans and Standard Detail Sheet and in accordance with this Specification. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. This item shall be measured and payment will be made at the unit price bid for each in the Proposal for each Standard Storm Sewer Inlet based upon length of opening. Such payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work, including excavation, forming, reinforcing steel, furnishing and placing concrete, covers, appurtenances, etc. Payment shall not be made for unauthorized work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers cut sheet for inlet and covers. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete shall be 4000 psi reinforced concrete. B. Manhole Rings and Covers The standard rings and covers (V-1342A) and storm plate (V-7001PL2) shall be manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works (or approved equal with approval of City Engineer.) 2.2 'TESTING REQUIREMENTS Concrete test results shall be furnished in accordance with SECTION 03 30 00 — CONCRETE. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This construction of reinforced concrete inlets shall be in accordance with standard procedure and shall conform to the location, line, grade, dimension and detail as shown on the Plans and/or directed by the Engineer. All inlets shall be cast in place unless approved by the City Engineer in writing. All excavation, forming and placing of reinforcing steel shall he approved by the Engineer before any concrete is placed. All backfill for inlets shall be in accordance with the Plans. . Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications SECTION 33 11 13.1 WATER MAIN CONSTRUCTION (Sentences andelor parugruphs tltat are double underlined indicate revisions that were made from the 2008specification.) PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 DESCRITTTON A. This item shall govern the construction of water mains including trenching, backfilling, pipe -laying, coupling, testing, the setting of fittings, valves and valve boxes, fire hydrants, appurtenances and wet connections. All work is to be done in accordance with the plans and specifications and paid for in accordance with the schedule of prices submitted in the Proposal. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS See: SECTION 3178 00 - PIPE BORING, JACKING, & TUNNELING SECTION 03 30 01 - CONCRETE BLOCKING � �x ANCHORAGE SECTION 31 2.3 33 - EXCAVA*fJNG, TRENCHING, & $ACKFILL SECTION 33 05 01 - PVC PIPE & FITTINGS SECTION 3105 02 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE SECTION 33 12 16 - VALVES SECTION 33 12 19 - FIRE HYDRANTS SECTION 33 12 13 - WATER SERVICES 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. PIPE: Payments will be made at the price bid per foot for furnishing and installing pipe, which bid price will include all costs for the complete pipe installation including trenching, and backfill, embedment, compaction or tamping, sterilization, testing, final cleanup, and all other work not otherwise provided for in bid proposal. Pipe will be measured (by horizontal distance) from center of fitting to center of fitting, or end of pipe without deduction for the length of intermediate fittings or valves. B. FITTINGS: Payment will be made at the unit price bid per each for furnishing and installing fittings and joint accessories. Fittings will be measured per each. C. THRUST BLOCKING: Thrust blocking shall not be a measured item. 0. SERVICES: Services shall be measured per each. Payment for each service will include the furnishing and installing pipe, which bid price will include all costs for the complete pipe installation, including line fittings, trenching, and backfill, embedment, compaction or tamping, sterilization, testing, final cleanup, and all other work not otherwise provided for in bid proposal. See Detail or SECTION 33 12 13 — WATER SERVICES for supplementary information. 1.3 SUBMITTALS All submittal requirements are listed with the material specifications Revised—112009 B/CS Unified Specifications PART2—PRODUCTS 2.1 TESTING REQUIREMENTS See: SECTION 33 13 10 - HYDROSTATIC TESTING (Used for Waterlines & Sanitary Sewer Force Mains) SECTION 33 13 00 - DISINFECTION OF WATERLINES PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Construction methods for each material are specified in the material specifications. A. MINIMUM COVER: The minimum cover for water pipe less than or equal to twelve inches (12") in diameter shall be four feet (4') as measured from the outside top of the pipe vertically to finished ground or pavement surface elevation. The maximum cover shall be 5 feet 5' . For water pipe greater than twelve inches (12") in diameter, the maximum cover shall be five feet (5') as measured from the outside top of the pipe vertically to finished ground or pavement surface. END OF SECTION Approver!— 10009 BIUS On j:ed Specifications SECTION 33 39 14.01 CONNECTION OF NEW LINES TO EXISTING MANHOLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This item shall govern for the connecting of new sewer lines to existing manholes, where so indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Connecting new sewer lines to existing manholes will be paid for at the unit price bid in the Proposal for each connection made. The price will be full remuneration for making the connection complete, including cutting the hole in the manhole, shaping the bottom of the manhole of necessary, grouting the pipe and including the furnishing of all equipment, labor, materials, power, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except the pipe. PART 2 — PRODUCTS N/A PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Where new scwcr lines are to be connected to existing manholes, holes of the proper size and at the proper location shall be cored into the existing manholes. Where it is necessary to provide a smooth flow through the manhole, the bottom of the manhole shall be shaped to conform to the bottom of the pipe as directed by the Engineer. B. Other methods in lieu of coring may be used and should be discussed with the City Engineer prior to performing. The City Inspector should be notified at the beginning of either of these processes. C. If the manhole can not satisfactorily be cored due to its condition, a hole shall be cut into the existing manhole. The sewer pipe shall be inserted into the hole cut in the manhole so that the end of the pipe will be flush with the inside of the manhole and the pipe shall be made smooth and water -tight with a Type "A" mortar END OF SECTION